Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Operation Manual 950 Pages
Operation Manual 950 Pages
Operation Manual 950 Pages
Jamnagar
India
2008
All rights reserved by the General Electric Company.
No copies permitted without the prior written consent
of the General Electric Company.
Jamnagar, INDIA
General
GE Generator – Overview GER 3688 B
Elect. & Mechanical features - Description GEK 95 159 C
Description of Generator with Brushless Excitation GEK 106 931 D
Operation
Generator Fundamentals B 00 082
Operation of Generator with Brushless Excitation GEK 95 143 B
Lifting Oil System
Skid Schematic 123 E 2212 B
Skid Outline 245 C 2985 A
Skid Electrical Elementary 211 D 6606 B
Drawings
GE Power Systems
Gas Turbine
I. INTRODUCTION
A. General
The MS9001 is a simple-cycle, single-shaft gas turbine with a 14 combustor, reverse-flow combustion
system. The MS9001 gas turbine assembly consists of six major sections or groups:
• Air inlet
• Compressor
• Combustion system
• Turbine
• Exhaust
• Support systems
This portion briefly presents a functional description of how the gas turbine operates and the function
that each major component performs in the operation of the gas turbine as air and combustion gases
flow through the gas path stream from inlet to exhaust.
The gas path is the path by which gases flow through the gas turbine from the air inlet through the com-
pressor, combustion section and turbine, to the turbine exhaust, as illustrated in the flow diagram, Fig-
ure 1. The location and functional relationships of the major sections of the MS9000 gas turbine assem-
bly are shown in Figure 2. The identification and location of individual turbine components,
mentioned in the following description and remaining sections of the book, are shown in relation to
the entire turbine assembly in the longitudinal cutaway view, Figure 3.
B. Detail Orientation
Throughout this manual, reference is made to the forward and aft ends, and to the right and left sides
of the gas turbine and its components. By definition, the air inlet of the gas turbine is the forward end,
while the exhaust stack is the aft end. The forward and aft ends of each component are determined in
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or
should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes the matter should be
referred to the GE Company.
1996 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
Heat
Recovery Feedwater
Steam
Generator
Fuel
Compressed Combustion
Chamber Exhaust Steam
Air
Gases
Boiler
Steam Feed
Compres- Gas Generator
Turbine Pump
sor Turbine
Boiler Feed
Booster
Condenser Pump
Optional
Equipment
Hotwell
FWD AFT
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 10 1112 13 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Gas Turbine Functional Description
34 33 32 31
Item Component Name Weight (Lbs) Item Component Name Weight (Lbs)
1 Speed Ring 19 Support Ring 1,800
2 Thrust Bearing – 20 Turbine Casing & Shrouds 10,410
3 No. 1 Bearing – 21 Second-Stage Nozzle & Diaphragm 2,100
3
18 First-Stage Nozzle 1,500
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
like manner with respect to its orientation within the complete unit. The right and left sides of the turbine
or of a particular component are determined by standing forward and looking aft.
When the turbine starting system is actuated and the clutch is engaged, ambient air is drawn through the
air inlet plenum assembly, filtered and compressed in the 17-stage, axial-flow compressor. For pulsation
protection during startup, the 11th-stage extraction valves are open and the variable inlet guide vanes
are in the closed position. At high-speed, the 11th-stage extraction bleed valve closes automatically and
the variable inlet guide vane actuator energizes to open the inlet guide vanes to the normal turbine operat-
ing position. Compressed air from the compressor flows into the annular space surrounding the 14 com-
bustion chambers. From there, it flows into the combustion liners and enters the combustion zone
through metering holes in each of the combustion liners for proper fuel combustion.
Fuel from an off-base source is provided to 14 equal flow lines, each terminating at a fuel nozzle centered
in the end plate of a separate combusition chamber. Prior to being distributed to the nozzles, the fuel is
accurately controlled to provide an equal flow into the 14 nozzle feed lines at a rate consistent with the
speed and load requirements of the gas turbine. The nozzles introduce the fuel into the combustion cham-
bers where it mixes with the combustion air and is ignited by one or both of the spark plugs. At the instant
when fuel is ignited in one combustion chamber, flame is propagated through connecting crossfire tubes
to all other combustion chambers. After the turbine rotor approximates operating speed, combustion
chamber pressure causes the spark plugs to retract to remove their electrodes from the hot flame zone.
The hot gases from the combustion chambers expand into the 14 separate transition pieces attached to
the aft end of the combustion chamber liners and flow from there to the three-stage turbine section of
the machine. Each stage consists of a row of fixed nozzles followed by a row of rotatable turbine buckets.
In each nozzle row, the kinetic energy of the jet is increased, with an associated pressure drop, and in
each following row of moving buckets, a portion of the kinetic energy of the jet turns the turbine rotor.
Resultant rotation is used to turn the generator rotor and generate electrical power.
After passing through the third-stage buckets, the gases are directed into the exhaust hood and diffuser
which contains a series of turning vanes to turn the gases from an axial direction to a radial direction,
thereby minimizing exhaust hood losses. The gases then pass into the exhaust plenum and are introduced
to atmosphere through the exhaust stack.
A. Accessory Base
Most of the mechanical and electrical auxiliary equipment necessary for starting and operating the gas
turbine is contained within the accessory compartment.
There are many systems involved in the operation of the turbine that are described in detail throughout
this set of manuals. Several of these systems have accessory devices, or mechanisms, located in the ac-
cessory section. These may include the starting, fuel, lubrication, hydraulic, cooling water, and atomiz-
ing air systems. Several major components of the accessory compartment include the starting means,
the torque converter and the accessory drive gear. Besides being the main link between the starting sys-
tem drive components and the gas turbine, the accessory drive gear is the gear reduction unit connected
directly to the turbine for driving several of the accessory devices of the gas turbine support systems.
These systems and their devices are described in detail in subsequent subsections.
4
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
A pressure gauge and switch cabinet located on the side of the accessory compartment contains panel-
mounted gauges and switches used with the system mentioned above.
Fabricated supports and mounting pads are welded to the upper surface of the accessory base for mount-
ing the accessory gear, starting device, pumps, and other accessory components. Lifting trunnions
installed on the base and mounting pads are provided on the bottom surface of the base longitudinal I–
beams to facilitate mounting of the base assembly to the foundation.
B. Turbine Base
The base that supports the gas turbine is a structural steel fabrication of welded steel beams and plate.
It provides a support upon which to mount the gas turbine.
Two lifting trunnions and supports are provided on each side of the base in line with the structural cross
members of the base frame. Machined pads, three on each side on the bottom of the base, facilitate its
mounting to the site foundation. Two machined pads atop the base frame are provided for mounting the
aft turbine supports.
C. Turbine Supports
The gas turbine is mounted to its base by vertical supports at three locations; the forward support at the
lower half vertical flange of the forward compressor casing and the aft two on either side of the turbine
exhaust frame.
The forward support is a flexible plate that is bolted and doweled to the turbine base, at the forward base
cross frame beam, and bolted and doweled to the forward flange of the forward compressor casing.
The aft supports, one on each side of the turbine exhaust frame, are leg-type supports. Both vertical sup-
port legs rest on machine pads on the base and attach snugly to the turbine exhaust-frame-mounted sup-
port pads. The legs provide centerline support and casing alignment.
Fabricated to the outer surface of each aft support leg is a water jacket. Cooling water is circulated
through the jackets to minimize thermal expansion of the support legs and assist in maintaining align-
ment between the turbine and the generator. The support legs maintain the axial and vertical positions
of the turbine, while a gib key coupled with the turbine support legs maintains its lateral position.
A gib key is machined on the lower half of the turbine shell. The key fits into a guide block which is
welded to the aft cross beam of the turbine base. The key is held securely in place in the guide block with
bolts that bear against the key on each side. This key-and-block arrangement prevents lateral or rotation-
al movement of the turbine while permitting axial and radial movement resulting from thermal expan-
sion.
5
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
A. General
The axial-flow compressor section consists of the compressor rotor and the enclosing casing. Within the
compressor casing are the inlet guide vanes, 17 stages of rotor and stator blading, and the exit guide
vanes.
In the compressor, air is confined to the space between the rotor and stator blading where it is compressed
in stages by a series of alternate rotating (rotor) and stationary (stator) airfoil-shaped blades. The rotor
blades supply the force needed to compress the air in each stage and the stator blades guide the air so
that it enters the following rotor stage at the proper angle. The compressed air exits through the compres-
sor discharge casing to the combustion chambers. Air is extracted from the compressor for bearing seal-
ing and pulsation control.
B. Rotor
The compressor rotor is an assembly of 15 individual wheels, two stubshafts (each with an integral
wheel) a speed ring, tie bolts, and the compressor rotor blades (see Figure 4).
Each wheel and the wheel portion of each stubshaft has slots machined around its circumference. The
rotor blades and spacers are inserted into these slots and are held in axial position by staking at each end
of the slot. The wheels and stubshafts are assembled to each other with mating rabbets for concentricity
control and are held together with tie bolts. Selective positioning of the wheels is made during assembly
to reduce balance correction. After assembly, the rotor is dynamically balanced to a fine limit.
The forward stubshaft is machined to provide the forward and aft thrust faces and the journal for the No.
1 bearing, as well as the sealing surfaces for the No. 1 bearing oil seals and the compressor low-pressure
air seals.
C. Stator
1. General
The stator (casing) area of the compressor section is composed of four major sections (Figure 5).
These are the:
• Inlet casing
These sections, in conjunction with the turbine shell, form the primary structure of the gas turbine.
They support the rotor at the bearing points and constitute the outer wall of the gas path annulus.
The casing bore is maintained to close tolerances with respect to the rotor blade tips for maximum
efficiency.
6
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
Compressor Discharge
Inlet Casing
Casing Assembly
Forward Aft Compressor
Compressor Casing
Casing
2. Inlet Casing
The inlet casing (see Figure 5) is located at the forward end of the gas turbine. Its prime function
is to uniformly direct air into the compressor. The inlet casing also supports the No. l bearing hous-
ing, a separate casting that contains the No. 1 bearing. The No. 1 bearing housing is supported in
the inlet casing on machined surfaces on either side of the inner bellmouth of the lower half casing.
To maintain axial and radial alignment with the compressor rotor shaft, the bearing housing is
shimmed, doweled and bolted in place at assembly. The inner bellmouth is positioned to the outer
bellmouth by eight airfoil-shaped radial struts that provide structural integrity for the inlet casing.
The struts are cast into the bellmouth walls.
Variable inlet guide vanes are located at the aft end of the inlet casing as shown on Figure 5. The
position of these vanes affects the quantity of compressor air flow. Movement of these guide vanes
is accomplished by the inlet guide vane control ring that turns individual pinion gears attached to
Variable Inlet
Guide Vanes
Inlet Casing
Lower Half Number One
Bearing
Inlet Guide Vane
Control Ring
7
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
the end of each vane. The control ring is positioned by a hydraulic actuator and linkage arm assem-
bly. The pinion gears and control ring arrangement is shown in Figure 6.
3. Forward Casing
The forward compressor casing contains the first four compressor stator stages. It also transfers the
structural loads from the adjoining casing to the forward support which is bolted and doweled to this
compressor casing’s forward flange. The forward compressor casing is equipped with two large in-
tegrally cast trunnions which are used to lift the gas turbine when it is separated from its base.
4. Aft Casing
The aft compressor casing contains the 5th through 10th compressor stages. Extraction ports in the
casing permit removal of 5th and 11th-stage compressor air. This air is used for cooling and sealing
functions and is also used for starting and shutdown pulsation control.
5. Discharge Casing
The compressor discharge casing is the final portion of the compressor section. It is the longest
single casting. It is situated at the midpoint — between the forward and aft supports and is, in effect,
the keystone of the gas turbine structure. The functions of the compressor discharge casings are to
contain the final seven compressor stages, to form both the inner and outer walls of the compressor
diffuser, and to join the compressor and turbine stators. They also provide support for the No. 2 bear-
ing, the forward end of the combustion wrapper, and the inner support of the first-stage turbine
nozzle.
The compressor discharge casing (Figure 7) consists of two cylinders, one being a continuation of
the compressor casings and the other an inner cylinder that surrounds the compressor rotor. The two
cylinders are concentrically positioned by twelve radial struts. These struts flair out to meet the larg-
er diameter of the turbine shell, and are the primary load bearing members in this portion of the gas
turbine stator.
The supporting structure for the No. 2 bearing is contained within the inner cylinder. A diffuser is
formed by the tapered annulus between the outer cylinder and inner cylinder of the discharge casing.
The diffuser converts some of the compressor exit velocity into added pressure.
6. Blading
The compressor rotor and stator blades are airfoil shaped and designed to compress air efficiently
at high blade tip velocities. The blades are attached to their wheels by dovetail arrangements. The
dovetail is very precise in size and position to maintain each blade in the desired position and loca-
tion on the wheel.
The compressor stator blades are airfoil shaped and are mounted by similar dovetails into ring seg-
ments. The ring segments are inserted into circumferential grooves in the casing and are held in
place with locking keys. The stator blades of the last nine stages and two exit guide vanes have a
square base dovetail that are inserted directly into circumferential grooves in the casing. Locking
keys also hold them in place.
8
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
Ring Gear
Control
Pinion
Ring
Gears
Gear Ring
Cover
9
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
Compressor
Discharte
Case-Upper
Half
Number Two
Bearing
Housing
Compressor
Inner Compressor
Discharge
Discharge Case
Case-Lower
Half
10
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
A. General
The combustion system is a reverse-flow type with 14 combustion chambers arranged around the pe-
riphery of the compressor discharge casing (Figure 8). This system also includes fuel nozzles, spark plug
ignition system, flame detectors, and crossfire tubes. Hot gases, generated from burning fuel in the com-
bustion chambers, are used to drive the turbine.
High-pressure air from the compressor discharge is directed around the transition pieces and into the
combustion chamber liners. This air enters the combustion zone through both metering holes (for proper
fuel combustion) and through slots (to cool the combustion liner). Fuel is supplied to each combustion
chamber through a nozzle designed to disperse and mix the fuel with the proper amount of combustion
air.
Orientation of the combustion chambers around the periphery of the compressor is shown on Figure 9.
Combustion chambers are numbered counterclockwise when viewed looking downstream and starting
from the top of the machine. Spark plugs and flame detector locations are also shown.
B. Combustion Wrapper
The combustion wrapper is a fabricated casing that encloses the combustion area. It provides a support-
ing surface for the combustion chamber assemblies. A plenum is formed by the combustion wrapper in
which the compressor discharge air flow is directed to the combustion chambers. The forward face of
the combustion wrapper is slanted at a 13° angle from the vertical and contains the machined openings
for mounting the 14 covers of the combustion chamber assemblies (see Figure 9 and 10). Support plates
for mounting the spark plugs and flame detectors are recessed in wells in the outer wall of the wrapper.
The wrapper is supported by the compressor discharge casing and the turbine shell.
C. Combustion Chambers
Discharge air from the axial-flow compressor flows into each combustion flow sleeve from the combus-
tion wrapper (Figure 10). The air flows upstream along the outside of the combustion liner toward the
liner cap. This air enters the combustion chamber reaction zone through the fuel nozzle swirl tip, the
metering holes in both the cap and liner and combustion holes in the forward half of the liner.
The hot combustion gases from the reaction zone pass through a thermal soaking zone and then into a
dilution zone where additional air is mixed with the combustion gases. Metering holes in the dilution
zone allow the correct amount of air to enter and cool the gases to the desired temperature. Along the
length of the combustion liner and in the liner cap are openings whose function is to provide a film of
air for cooling the walls of the liner and cap as shown in Figure 11. Transition pieces direct the hot gases
from the liners to the turbine nozzles. All combustion liners, flow sleeves and transition pieces are identi-
cal.
D. Spark Plugs
Combustion is initiated by means of the discharge from two high-voltage retractable-electrode spark
plugs installed in adjacent combustion chambers. These spring-injected, pressure-retracted plugs re-
ceive their energy from ignition transformers. At firing, a spark at one or both of these plugs ignites the
gases in a chamber; the remaining chambers are ignited by crossfire through the tubes that interconnect
11
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
Spark Plug
Combustion
Liner
Fuel Nozzle
Compressor Transition
Discharge Piece
Casing
Combustion
Cover
Atomizing
Air Manifold Flame Detector
Fuel Oil
Line
Combustion
Wrapper
12
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
Spark Plugs
Flame Detectors
13
14
Combustion
GFD91ES
Wrapper
C
L Chamber
Spark Plug
Slot
Flow Flow Cooling Cooled Combustion
Sleeve Sleeve Slots Liner Wrapper
View A
Turbine
Dual Fuel Shell
Nozzle
Combustion
Cover
Crossfire
Tube
Combustion
Compresspr
Discharge Transition
Casing Piece
Gas Turbine Functional Description
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
Crossfire Combustion
Tube Holes
Collar
Figure 11. Slot-Cooled Combustion Liner
the reaction zone of the remaining chambers. As rotor speed increases, chamber pressure causes the
spark plugs to retract and the electrodes are removed from the combustion zone.
During the starting sequence, it is essential that an indication of the presence or absence of flame be trans-
mitted to the control system. For this reason, a flame monitoring system is used consisting of sensors
which are installed on adjacent combustion chambers and an electronic amplifier mounted in the turbine
control panel.
The ultraviolet flame sensor contains a gas-filled detector. The gas within this detector is sensitive to
the presence of ultraviolet radiation emitted by a hydrocarbon flame. A dc voltage, supplied by the am-
plifier, is impressed across the detector terminals. If flame is present, the ionization of the gas in the de-
tector allows conduction in the circuit which gives an output defining “flame.” Conversely, the absence
of flame will generate an opposite output defining “no flame.”
After the establishment of flame, if voltage is reestablished to both sensors defining the loss (or lack)
of flame, a signal is sent to a relay panel in the turbine control circuitry where auxiliary relays in the
turbine firing trip circuit, starting means circuit, etc. shut down the turbine. “FAILURE TO FIRE” or
“LOSS OF FLAME” is also indicated on the annunciator. If a loss of flame is sensed by only one flame
detector sensor, the control circuitry will cause an annunciation of only this condition.
F. Fuel Nozzles
Each combustion chamber is equipped with a fuel nozzle that emits a metered amount of fuel into the
combustion liner. Gaseous fuel is admitted directly into each chamber through metering holes located
in the outer wall of the gas swirl tip. When liquid fuel is used, it is atomized in the nozzle swirl chamber
by means of high pressure air. The atomized fuel/air mixture is then sprayed into the combustion zone.
Action of the tip imparts a swirl to the combustion air with the result of more complete combustion and
essentially smoke-free operation of the unit. See Figure 12 for fuel nozzle details.
15
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
Gasket (3)
Body Retainer (2)
Nozzle Pilot (1)
Body
Transition
Piece Assembly
(Includes 1, 2 & 3)
Figure 12. Fuel Nozzle Assembly (Typical Air Atomized, Dual Fuel)
Detailed inspection and maintenance information on the fuel nozzles and other combustion system com-
ponents is included in the Maintenance section of this manual.
G. Crossfire Tubes
All fourteen combustion chambers are interconnected by means of crossfire tubes. These tubes allow
flame from the fired chambers to propagate to the unfired chambers.
V. TURBINE SECTION
A. General
The three-stage turbine section is the area where energy, in the form of high-temperature pressurized gas
produced by the compressor and combustion sections, is converted to mechanical energy.
MS9000 gas turbine hardware includes the turbine rotor, turbine casing exhaust frame, exhaust diffuser,
nozzles and shrouds.
B. Turbine Rotor
1. Structure
The turbine rotor assembly (Figure 13) consists of two wheel shafts; the first, second, and third-stage
turbine wheels with buckets; and two turbine spacers. Concentricity control is achieved with mating
rabbets on the turbine wheels, wheel shafts, and spacers. The wheels are held together with through
bolts. Selective positioning of rotor members is performed to minimize balance corrections.
16
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
1st-Stage Turbine
Wheel Assembly
17 Stage Compressor
Wheel & Blade
Assembly
Forward Turbine
Wheel Shaft Aft Turbine
Wheel Shaft
17
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
The forward wheel shaft extends from the first-stage turbine wheel to the aft flange of the compres-
sor rotor assembly. The journal for the #2 bearing is a part of the wheel shaft.
The aft wheel shaft connects the third-stage turbine wheel to the load coupling. It includes the #3
bearing journal.
Spacers between the first and second, and between the second and third-stage turbine wheels deter-
mine the axial position of the individual wheels. These spacers carry the diaphragm sealing lands.
The forward faces of the spacer include radial slots for cooling air passages. The first- and second-
stage spacer also has radial slots for cooling air passages on the aft face.
2. Buckets
The turbine buckets (Figure 14) increase in size from the first to the third-stage. Because of the pres-
sure reduction resulting from energy conversion in each stage, an increased annulus area is required
to accommodate the gas flow; thus necessitating increasing the size of the buckets. The first-stage
buckets are the first rotating surfaces encountered by the extremely hot gases leaving the first-stage
nozzle. Each first-stage bucket contains a series of longitudinal air passages for bucket cooling as
shown in Figure 15. Air is introduced into each first-stage bucket through a plenum at the base of
the bucket dovetail. It flows through cooling holes extending the length of the bucket and exits at
the recessed bucket tip. The holes are spaced and sized to obtain optimum cooling of the airfoil with
minimum compressor extraction air.
3rd-Stage Integral
Turbine Bucket Shroud
2nd-Stage
Turbine Bucket
1st-Stage
Turbine Bucket
Bucket
Vane
Shank
Dovetail
18
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
Cross Section
of a Cooling
Hole in Bucket
Cooling
Air Inlet
Holes
Cooling Holes
& Squealer
Section
Suction Side
(Convex)
Bucket Blade
Pressure Side
(Concave)
Platform
Bucket Shank
19
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
Like the first-stage buckets, the second-stage buckets are cooled by span-wise air passages running
the length of the airfoil. Since the lower temperatures surrounding the bucket shanks do not require
shank cooling, the second-stage cooling holes are fed by a plenum cast into the bucket shank. Span-
wise holes provide cooling air to the airfoil at a higher pressure than shank holes. This increases the
cooling effectiveness in the airfoil with minimum penalty to the thermodynamic cycle.
The third-stage buckets are not internally air-cooled; the tips of these buckets, like the second-stage
buckets, are enclosed by a shroud which is a part of the tip seal. These shrouds interlock from bucket
to bucket to provide vibration damping.
Turbine buckets for each stage are attached to their wheels by straight, axial-entry, multiple-tang
dovetails that fit into matching cutouts in the turbine wheel rims. Bucket vanes are connected to their
dovetails by means of shanks (Figure 14). These shanks locate the bucket-to-wheel attachment at
a significant distance from the hot gases, reducing the temperature at the dovetail. The turbine rotor
assembly is arranged so that the buckets can be replaced without unstacking the wheels, spacers,
and wheel shaft assemblies.
3. Cooling
The turbine rotor must be cooled to maintain reasonable operating temperatures and, therefore, as-
sure a longer turbine service life. Cooling is accomplished by a positive flow of cool air radially
outward through a space between the turbine wheel with buckets and the stator, into the main gas
stream. This area is called the wheelspace.
4. First-Stage Wheelspaces
The first-stage forward wheelspace is cooled by compressor discharge air. High-pressure packing
is installed at the aft end of the compressor rotor between the rotor and the inner barrel of the com-
pressor discharge casing. Part of the leakage through this labyrinth furnishes the air flow through
the first-stage forward wheelspace. This cooling air flow discharges into the main gas stream aft of
the first-stage nozzle.
In addition, a small amount of air is supplied by a single hole at the forward end of the inner barrel.
This air provides adequate cooling during all transient operation conditions.
The first-stage aft wheelspace is cooled by compressor discharge air supplied through the second-
stage nozzle. Some of this first-stage aft wheelspace cooling air flows through the second-stage in-
ner seal while the remainder returns to the gas path forward of the second-stage nozzle.
5. Second-Stage Wheelspaces
The second-stage forward wheelspace is cooled by leakage from the first-stage aft wheelspace
through the interstage labyrinth. This air returns to the gas path at the entrance of the second-stage
buckets.
The second-stage aft wheelspace is cooled by air from the internal extraction system. This air enters
the wheelspace through slots in the forward face of the spacer. Some of this second-stage aft cooling
air flows through the third-stage inner seal while the remainder returns to the gas path at the third-
stage nozzle entrance.
20
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
6. Third-Stage Wheelspaces
The third-stage forward wheelspace is cooled by leakage from the second-stage aft wheelspace
through the interstage labyrinth. This air re-enters the gas path at the third-stage bucket entrance.
The third-stage aft wheelspace obtains its cooling air from the exhaust frame cooling system. This
air enters the wheelspace at the rear of the third-stage turbine wheel and then flows into the gas path
at the entrance to the exhaust diffuser.
C. Turbine Stator
1. Structure
The turbine shell and the exhaust frame constitute the major portion of the MS9000 gas turbine sta-
tor structure. The turbine nozzles, shrouds, #3 bearing and turbine exhaust diffuser are internally
supported from these components.
The turbine shell controls the axial and radial positions of the shrouds and nozzles. It determines
turbine clearances and the relative positions of the nozzles to the turbine buckets. This positioning
is critical to gas turbine performance. See Figure 16 for positions of these components.
Hot gases contained by the turbine shell are a source of heat flow into the shell. To control the shell
diameter, it is important that the shell design reduces the heat flow into the shell and limits its temper-
ature. Heat flow limitations incorporate insulation, cooling, and multi-layered structures. The exter-
nal surface of the shell incorporates cooling air passages. Flow through these passages is generated
by an off-base cooling fan.
Structurally, the shell forward flange is bolted to flanges at the aft end of the compressor discharge
casing and combustion wrapper. The shell aft flange is bolted to the forward flange of the exhaust
frame. Trunnions cast onto the sides of the shell are used with similar trunnions on the forward com-
pressor casing to lift the gas turbine when it is separated from its base.
3. Nozzles
In the turbine section, there are three stages of stationary nozzles (Figure 16) which direct the high-
velocity flow of the expanded hot combustion gas against the turbine buckets causing the turbine
rotor to rotate. Because of the high pressure drop across these nozzles, there are seals at both the
inside and the outside diameters to prevent loss of system energy by leakage. Since these nozzles
operate in the hot combustion gas flow, they are subjected to thermal stresses in addition to gas pres-
sure loadings.
4. First-Stage Nozzles
The first-stage nozzle (Figure 17) receives the hot combustion gases from the combustion system
via the transition pieces (Figure 10). The transition pieces are sealed to both the outer and inner side-
walls on the entrance side of the nozzle. This minimizes leakage of compressor discharge air into
the nozzles. The 18 cast nozzle segments, each with two partitions or airfoils, are contained by a
horizontally-split retaining ring which is centerline supported to the turbine shell on lugs at the sides
21
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
First-Stage Second-Stage
Shroud Shroud
Second-Stage Third-Stage
Nozzle Nozzle
Third-Stage
Shroud
First-Stage
#2 Retaining
Ring
First-Stage
Nozzle
Third-Stage
First-Stage Diaphragm
Nozzle Support
Ring
Second-Stage
Diaphragm
Segment
Third-Stage
Turbine Wheel
First-Stage Second-Stage
Turbine Wheel Turbine Wheel
22
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
Outer Wall
Cooling Holes
Cooling Air
Impingement Plate
Partition Core
Cooling Holes
(Air Inlet)
Assembled View
Cooling Holes
(Air Exit)
Hollow Core of
Partition
Trailing Edge
Cooling Holes
(Not Visible)
Pressure Side
Cooling Holes Partition
(Air Exit)
23
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
and guided by pins at the top and bottom vertical centerlines. This permits radial growth of the re-
taining ring, resulting from changes in temperature, while the ring remains centered in the shell.
The aft outer diameter of the retaining ring is loaded against the forward face of the first-stage tur-
bine shroud and acts as the air seal to prevent leakage of compressor discharge air between the nozzle
and shell.
On the inner sidewall, the nozzle is sealed by direct bearing of the nozzle inner load rail against the
first-stage nozzle support ring bolted to the compressor discharge casing.
The nozzle is prevented from moving forward by the lugs welded to the aft outside diameter of the
retaining ring at 45° from vertical and horizontal centerlines. These lugs fit in a groove machined
in the turbine shell just forward of the first-stage shroud T-hook. By moving the horizontal joint sup-
port block and the bottom centerline guide pin, the lower half of the nozzle can be rolled out with
the turbine rotor in place.
5. Second-Stage Nozzle
Combustion air exiting from the first-stage buckets is again expanded and redirected against the se-
cond-stage turbine buckets by the second-stage nozzle. This nozzle is made of 16 cast segments
(Figure 19), each with three partitions or airfoils. The male hooks on the entrance and exit sides of
the outer sidewall fit into female grooves on the aft side of the first-stage shrouds and on the forward
side of the second-stage shroud to maintain the nozzle concentric with the turbine shell and rotor.
This close tongue-and-groove fit between nozzle and shrouds acts as an outside diameter air seal.
The nozzle segments are held in a circumferential position by radial pins from the shell into axial
slots in the nozzle outer sidewall.
6. Third-Stage Nozzles
The third-stage nozzle receives the hot gas as it leaves the second-stage buckets, increases its veloc-
ity by pressure drop, and directs this flow against the third-stage buckets. The nozzle consists of 16
cast segments, each with four partitions or airfoils (Figure 18). It is held at the outer sidewall forward
and aft sides in grooves in the turbine shrouds in a manner identical to that used on the second-stage
nozzle. The third-stage nozzle is circumferentially positioned by radial pins from the shell.
7. Diaphragms
Attached to the inside diameters of both the second and third-stage nozzle segments are the nozzle
diaphragms (Figure 18). These prevent air leakage past the inner sidewall of the nozzles and the tur-
bine rotor. High/low labyrinth seal teeth are machined into the inside diameter of the diaphragm.
They mate with opposing sealing lands on the turbine rotor. Minimal radial clearance between sta-
tionary parts (diaphragm and nozzles) and the moving rotor are essential for maintaining low inter-
stage leakage. This results in higher turbine efficiency.
8. Shrouds
Unlike the compressor blading, the turbine bucket tips do not run directly against an integral ma-
chined surface of the casing but against annular curved segments called turbine shrouds. The
24
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
Nozzle Nozzle
Partitions Segment
Cooling Air
Exit Openings
Diaphragm Nozzle
Segment Segment
Seal Nozzle
Teeth Partition
Figure 18. Second- and Third-Stage Turbine Nozzle and Diaphragm Segments
25
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
shrouds’ primary function is to provide a cylindrical surface for minimizing bucket tip clearance
leakage. This bucket-to-shroud interface can be seen in Figure 19.
The turbine shrouds’ secondary function is to provide a high thermal resistance between the hot
gases and the comparatively cool shell. In doing this, shell cooling load is drastically reduced, the
shell diameter is controlled, the shell roundness is maintained, and important turbine clearances are
assured.
The shroud segments are maintained in the circumferential position by radial pins from the shell.
Joints between shroud segment are sealed by interconnecting tongues and grooves.
The exhaust frame assembly (Figure 20) consists of the exhaust frame and the exhaust diffuser. The
exhaust frame is bolted to the aft flange of the turbine shell. Structurally, the frame consists of an
outer cylinder and inner cylinder interconnected by ten radial struts. On the inner gas path surfaces
of the two cylinders are attached the inner and outer diffusers. The #3 bearing is supported from the
inner cylinder.
The exhaust diffuser (Figure 21), located at the extreme aft end of the gas turbine, bolts to, and is
supported by, the exhaust frame. The exhaust diffuser is a fabricated assembly consisting of an inner
cylinder and an outer divergent cylinder that flairs at the exit end at a right angle to the turbine center-
line. At the exit end of the diffuser, between the two cylinders, are five turning vanes mounted at
the bend. Gases exhausted from the third turbine stage enter the diffuser where velocity is reduced
by diffusion and pressure is recovered. At the exit of the diffuser, turning vanes direct the gases into
the exhaust plenum.
Exhaust frame radial struts cross the exhaust gas stream. These struts position the inner cylinder and
#3 bearing in relation to the outer casing of the gas turbine. The struts must be maintained at a uni-
form temperature to control the center position of the rotor in relation to the stator. This temperature
stabilization is accomplished by protecting the struts from exhaust gases with a metal fairing fabri-
cated into the diffuser and then forcing cooling air into this space around the struts.
Turbine shell cooling air enters the space between the exhaust frame and the diffuser and flows in
two directions — into the turbine shell cooling annulus and also down through the space between
the struts and the airfoil fairings surrounding the struts and, subsequently, into the load shaft tunnel
and turbine third-stage aft wheelspace.
VI. BEARINGS
A. General
The MS9000 gas turbine unit contains three main journal bearings used to support the gas turbine rotor.
The unit also includes thrust bearings to maintain the rotor-to-stator axial position and support the thrust
loads developed on the rotor. These bearings and seals are incorporated in three housings: one at the
inlet casing, one in the discharge casing, and one in the exhaust frame. These bearings are pressure-lubri-
cated by oil supplied from the main lubricating oil system. The oil flows through branch lines to an inlet
in each bearing housing.
26
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
Figure 19. Turbine Area-Top Half Removed Showing Turbine Nozzles and Wheel Assemblies
27
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
Exhaust Diffuser
Enlarged View Of
Strut Cross Section
Assembled View
Exhaust
Frame
Inner
Cylinder
Outer
Cylinder
Exhaust
Frame
Exhaust
Frame Airfoil
Strut
28
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
Insulation Pack
Outer
Difference
29
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
1 Journal Elliptical
2 Journal Elliptical
3 Journal Tilting Pad
1. General
Elliptical bearings are the predominant type of journal bearings used in gas turbines. These are char-
acterized by their non-cylindrical bores, and are designed to improve the stability of the shafts at
high speeds.
In the design of these bearings, convergent clearance regions exist even at a concentric shaft posi-
tion. The convergence increases with an increase in shaft eccentricity. This convergency creates
high-pressure regions which, in effect, puts an additional load on the bearing; a factor which tends
to improve the shaft stability. The extra clearance space, as compared with a cylindrical bearing of
a diameter equal to the inscribed circle in these bearings, increases the oil flow and also often reduces
power losses resulting in lower temperature rises in the bearing.
Figure 22 shows the elliptical journal bearing installed in a typical bearing assembly as used in Gen-
eral Electric gas turbine units.
2. Description
The elliptical bearing is made up of two cylindrical halves brought together so that their centers are
displaced several millimeters from the bearing center. It is manufactured by placing shims at the
horizontal split and then machining a cylindrical bore. The shims are then removed and the two
halves are brought together to form the elliptical bearing as shown in Figure 23.
3. Maintenance
1. General
In those gas turbine applications where a shaft may exhibit susceptibility to whirl or misalignment,
tilting pad bearings are frequently employed. These bearings are distinguished by their movable
segments or pads, which give them very stable dynamic properties.
Tilting pad bearings operate in the hydrodynamic mode just like elliptical types which are more
commonly employed in gas turbines. The pads are assembled creating converging passages between
30
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 22. Typical Bearing Assembly with Elliptical Journal (Bottom Lobe) and
Thrust Bearings (Lower Half) Installed
31
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
each pad and the journal surface. These converging passages generate a high-pressure oil film be-
neath each pad which produces a symmetric loading or “clamping” effect on the journal. This is a
stabilizing influence which is very effective in resisting shaft whirl particularly in bearings that are
lightly loaded and operating at high speed. Because the pads are point pivoted, they are free to move
in two dimensions which makes them capable of tolerating both offset and angular shaft misalign-
ment. Another very desirable characteristic of this bearing is its ability to run cool when supporting
heavy loads, due to the relatively short arc length of the individual pads.
Figure 24 shows a typical tilting pad journal bearing employed in a General Electric gas turbine.
This particular bearing has five pads which is a common design.
2. Description
A tilting pad journal bearing is comprised of pads and a retainer ring. The pads are made from a
cylindrical steel shell which is babbitted, cut into sectors, and then finish bored. In their final as-
sembled configuration, the pads are displaced inward toward the bearing center to produce converg-
ing clearances when assembled around the bearing journal. The inscribed clearance circle formed
by the pads is located high relative to the outside diameter of the retaining ring. This allows the rotor
to run concentric with respect to the stator under full-speed operating conditions. Figure 25 de-
scribes the clearance geometry present in a tilting pad bearing. In most designs, the pad pivots are
offset toward the trailing edges of the pads. This is done deliberately to improve the hydrodynamic
operation of the bearing.
The retainer ring serves to locate and support the pads. It is a horizontally-split member which con-
tains the pad support pins, adjusting shims, oil feed orifices, and oil discharge seals. The outside
diameter of the retainer ring is carefully machined to produce a good fit when inserted into the bear-
ing housing. The oil discharge seals have babbitted surfaces and float on the shaft. The support pins
and shims transmit the loads generated at the pad surfaces and are used to set the bearing clearance.
An anti-rotation pin extends from one edge of the lower half of the retainer ring. This pin locates
the bearing within its housing and prevents the bearing from rotating with the journal. The anti-rota-
tion pin also provides the correct installation of the bearing liner in the bearing housing which is
essential. The offset of individual pads on their supporting pins makes the bearing non-symmetrical
with respect to shaft rotation. Some of the components of a tilting pad bearing are shown in Figures
24 and 27.
Oil is fed from the lower half of the bearing housing into the annulus which surrounds the retainer
ring. Orifice holes are drilled radially through the ring into the gaps that exist between the individual
pads. These orifices serve to control the flow entering the bearing. The oil is then drawn by the shaft
into the gap between shaft and pads. Floating ring seals with babbitted surfaces restrict the outgoing
oil flow thereby maintaining an adequate oil supply within the pad region. Excess oil drains from
the liner through slots in the bottom area of the lower half of the liner.
3. Maintenance
A minimum of maintenance is required for tilting pad journal bearings. During the regularly sched-
uled complete unit disassembly, the bearings should be thoroughly cleaned and inspected. Special
attention should be given to the pad support pins to be sure that they do not exhibit fretting or exces-
sive wear. The pad must also be inspected for scratches, loose particles and any high or low spots
which may exist. These must be removed or repaired in accordance with procedures used in the
maintenance of babbitted surfaces. The bearing clearance must also be checked especially if the pad
pins have shown any signs of wear. This can be done with either a three-point micrometer or a ma-
32
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
4
CL Pad
CL Pivot Rotation
Pin RC
2 Offset d
Trailing
5 Edge of
Pad RP
1 3
6
7
8
Figure 24. Typical Tilting Pad Figure 25. Tilting Pad Journal
Journal Bearing Bearing Schematic Diagram
Upper Half
Lower Half
33
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
1 2 3 4
7 6 5
34
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
chined mandrel. If the clearance is found to be outside of drawing tolerances, it must be reset by
adjusting the shims.
When cleaning the bearing, be sure that the bearing surfaces do not come in contact with hard objects
which may scratch or dent them. The bearing should be cleaned by using kerosene and clean rags.
Do no use cotton waste as it will leave lint on the bearing surfaces.
After the bearing has been cleaned and inspected, the bearing parts should be coated with a good
rust-inhibited turbine oil, to protect against corrosion, and wrapped to protect against mechanical
damage. If it should be necessary to hold the bearing parts in storage, the parts should be coated with
a good rust-inhibited grease and wrapped in a moisture and vapor-proof barrier such as vinylidene
chloride-coated, paper-backed foil.
D. Bearing Lubrication
1. General
The three gas turbine bearing housings are pressure-lubricated with oil supplied from the lubricating
oil reservoir and interconnected tanks and piping. Oil feed piping, where practical, is run within the
lube oil reservoir drain line, or drain channels, as a protective measure. This construction is referred
to as double piping. In the event of a supply line leak, oil will not be sprayed on nearby equipment,
thus eliminating a potential safety hazard.
When the oil enters the housing inlet, it flows into an annulus around the bearing. From the annulus,
the oil flows through machined holes or slots to the bearing-rotor interface.
2. Lubricant Sealing
Oil on the surface of the turbine shaft is prevented from being spun along the shaft by oil seals in
each of the three bearing housings. These labyrinth seals are assembled at the extremities of the bear-
ing assemblies where oil control is required. A smooth surface is machined on the shaft and the seals
are assembled so that only a small clearance exists between the oil seal and the shaft. The oil seals
are designed with tandem rows of teeth and an annular space between them. Pressurized sealing air
is admitted into this space and prevents lubricating oil from spreading along the shaft. Some of this
air returns with the oil to the main lubricating oil reservoir and is vented through a lube oil vent.
The remainder of the air passes into adjoining turbine spaces or is vented into atmosphere.
E. #1 Bearing
The #1 bearing subassembly is located in the center of the inlet casing assembly (Figure 28) and contains
three bearings: (1) active (loaded) thrust bearing, (2) inactive (unloaded) thrust bearing, and (3) journal
bearing. Additionally, it contains a “running-type” ring seal, four labyrinth seals and a two-part housing
in which the components are installed. The components are keyed to the housing to prevent rotation. The
#1 bearing housing is supported from the inner cylinder of the compressor inlet casing. The top of the
housing is removable, being flanged and bolted to the bottom half.
The outer labyrinth seals at each end of the housing are pressurized with air extracted from the compres-
sor fifth-stage. Inboard of the pressurized labyrinth seals, are two additional labyrinth back-up seals for
positive sealing of the bearing oil cavity. The “running-type” ring seal at the forward end of the thrust
bearing cavity contains the oil within the bearing and limit entrance of air into the cavity. The #1 journal
35
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
bearing liner has an integral, non-contacting ring seal which contains the oil in a circumferential drain
groove. The oil drains from this groove through a vertical slot into the bearing drain cavity.
F. #2 Bearing
The #2 bearing subassembly is located in the center of the inner cylinder of the compressor discharge
casing. The casing support consists of ledges at the horizontal plane and an axial key at the bottom center-
line. This arrangement permits relative growth resulting from temperature differences while the bearing
remains centered in the discharge casing. The #2 bearing housing and its mounting arrangement in the
compressor discharge casing is shown in Figure 7.
The assembly includes a bearing liner, labyrinth seals and a bearing housing. This assembly is located
in a pressurized space (the inner barrel) between the turbine and compressor.
The #2 bearing liner is prevented from rotating with the shaft by an anti-rotation pin located in the lower
bearing liner.
G. #3 Bearing
The #3 bearing subassembly is located at the aft end of the turbine shaft in the center of the exhaust frame
assembly (Figure 20). It consists of a tilting pad bearing, three labyrinth seals, two floating ring seals
and a bearing housing. The individual pads are designed and assembled so that a high pressure oil film
is generated between each pad and the bearing surface. This produces a symmetrical loading or “clamp-
ing” effect on the bearing surface that helps maintain shaft stability. Because the pads are free to move
in two dimensions, they are capable of tolerating a certain amount of shaft misalignment.
36
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
1. General
A thrust bearing unit is made up of a shaft member called the “thrust runner” and a stationary mem-
ber, called the “bearing.” Thrust bearings support the thrust loads developed on the rotor surfaces
of a gas turbine unit. The thrust load imposed on such a bearing is the sum of the forces that act on
the rotor assembly in a direction along the rotor axis. For example, the thrust forces of an axial-flow
compressor, such as those used in General Electric gas turbines, are only partially compensated for
by the anti-thrust forces of the turbine that drives it. The resultant thrust load will tend to move the
rotor assembly in a direction opposite to that of the air flow through the compressor. During normal
operation of a gas turbine unit, the thrust load of a rotor assembly is unidirectional; however, during
startup and shutdown of the unit, the direction of the thrust load will generally reverse. Thus, two
thrust bearings are provided on a rotor shaft assembly in order to support the thrust loads imposed
in either direction. The bearing which takes the thrust load during normal operation is called the “ac-
tive” or “loaded” thrust bearing. That which takes the thrust load during startup or shutdown of the
unit is called the “inactive” or “unloaded” thrust bearing.
Tilting pad, equalizing-type thrust bearings are commonly employed as “loaded” thrust bearings in
General Electric gas turbines. This type of bearing will sustain high loads and is tolerant of shaft
and housing misalignment. A typical tilting pad, equalizing-type thrust bearing is shown in Figure
30. A typical outline and section are shown in Figure 31.
Tilting pad, non-equalizing type thrust bearings are used for the “inactive” or “unloaded” applica-
tion. This type of bearing is capable of carrying high thrust loads but is less tolerant of misalignment
than the tilting pad, equalizing-type. A cross section and outline diagram of a typical non-equalizing
thrust bearing is shown in Figure 32.
2. Description
The principal parts of the tilting pad equalizing thrust bearing include the stationary pivoted seg-
ments or “pads;” two rows of hardened steel equalizing levers called “leveling plates;” and the sup-
37
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
1
2
8
7
6 4
5
38
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
1
5
2
4 3
1. Thrust Pad
2. Pad-Babbit Surface
3. Pad Support
4. Base Ring
5. Upper Leveling Link
6. Lower Leveling Link
7. Anti-Rotation Dowel Pin
39
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
4
5 2
4 3
40
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
porting member called the “base ring.” Typical pads, leveling plates, and the base ring are shown
in Figures 33, 34, and 35.
The tilting pad, non-equalizing types of thrust bearing is similar to the equalizing types, except for
the “leveling plates” which are not a part of the design.
The pads and the leveling plates are assembled in the base ring. The complete assembly is supported
in a bearing housing which is secured to the main turbine structure. The thrust bearings are keyed
in place to prevent rotation.
The bearing pad is shaped like the sector of a ring. Its bearing surface is faced with babbitt and each
pad has a hardened steel button, called a “pad support,” set into its back which allows the pad to tilt
slightly in any direction on its leveling plate.
The leveling plates are in effect short levers with center fulcrums. Their function is to align the bear-
ing pads with the thrust runner and equalize the load among the pads despite possible slight mis-
alignment of the shaft axis from the normal, a condition that might result from small deflections in
the turbine structure during operation.
The leveling plates are located in the base ring by dowels or screws such that the plates are free to
tilt on their fulcrums. The arrangement of the leveling plates with respect to the pads and the base
ring is shown in Figure 36. The load transmitted by the thrust runner to any one pad causes that pad
to press against the upper leveling plate immediately behind it. Each leveling plate, in turn, is sup-
ported upon one edge of each of the two adjacent lower leveling plates, the other edges of which
take part in supporting the next upper leveling plates on either side. As a result of this arrangement,
any incipient excess of thrust on one pad is shared through the interaction of the leveling plates by
the adjacent pads. This interaction and load sharing is distributed all around the circle so that all the
pads receive equal loading.
The tilting pad, non-equalizing-type thrust bearing does not contain leveling plates and, as a result,
is thinner in the axial dimension.
The base ring provides support for all the parts of the bearing assembly and keeps the parts in their
proper location. In some bearing applications, the base ring is specially designed to contain the oil
flow around the pads and thrust runner to prevent flooding of adjacent compartments. Such a base
ring incorporates a tooth which surrounds the thrust runner on the shaft to contain the oil flow within
the bearing. In other applications, a base ring such as the one shown in Figure 35 is used. A thrust
bearing with this type of base ring would be installed in a bearing housing which would incorporate
the necessary oil baffles or other devices to allow proper oil flow around the bearing and prevent
excessive leakage along the shaft where such leakage would be objectionable.
Oil control plates (Figure 30) are used on some tilting pad thrust bearings to direct the flow of lubri-
cating oil to the pads and prevent excessive leakage of oil outward away from the pads. The oil con-
trol plates are bronze segments which are placed between the pads and attached at both ends to the
base ring.
The tilting pad thrust bearing is classified as a hydrodynamically lubricated bearing which means
that the bearing surfaces are separated from the thrust runner by a thin film of lubricating oil which
is formed and maintained by the relative motion of the bearing surfaces. This oil film supports the
thrust load and prevents metal-to-metal contact of the bearing surfaces. In addition to acting as a
41
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
1 2
1
2
42
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
4 5
1 2 3 6
Pad
Collar
Leveling Base
Plates Ring
43
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
load-supporting medium, the oil also carries away the heat generated by the shearing action in the
oil film.
The pads of a tilting pad thrust bearing are free to assume the position which will provide for the
optimum wedge-shaped oil film required by different combination of load, speed, oil viscosity and
temperature to which the bearing is subjected.
The tilting pad thrust bearing is lubricated by oil which is admitted under pressure through ports in
the bearing housing to an annulus behind the base ring. The lube oil then flows through ports in the
base ring to the thrust bearing cavity where it is picked up by the rotating thrust runner and carried
around the entire bearing surface. Oil circulation through the tilting pad thrust bearing is assisted
by the natural pumping action of the rotating thrust collar.
Oil leaves the bearing at the outer periphery of the pads and thrust collar where it is gathered in a
large annular cavity and drained. The drain annulus and exit ports are cast or machined into the bear-
ing housing.
3. Maintenance
VII. COUPLINGS
1. Description
The major components of the oil-filled accessory gear coupling consist of sleeves, hubs, and a float-
ing shaft (Figure 37). The coupling sleeves include flanges which interface with the accessory gear
box and the turbine rotor. Internal gear teeth machined within the coupling sleeve mesh with the
external crowned teeth of the hubs. These hubs are splined onto the floating shaft, and the resultant
pivoting action of the sleeves and the hubs compensate for a nominal misalignment of the accessory
gear box and the turbine rotor. The sliding action between the hubs and the sleeves permits axial
movement of the turbine relative to the accessory gear box. The O-ring seals, recessed in the face
of the coupling flanges and located between the sleeves and hubs, are used to contain the lubricant
within the coupling.
2. Operation Check
During the startup and normal rotation of the gas turbine, a visual check of the accessory gear cou-
pling should be made for possible misalignment or malfunction as evidenced by unusual motion or
vibration. A check should also be made for lubricant leakage.
After performing a running check,the turbine should be shut down and the general alignment and
axial clearance, torque values of the coupling fasteners, and lube plugs should be rechecked for leak-
age.
44
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
3. Maintenance
Periodic inspection and maintenance procedures, as described in the Maintenance section of the
MS9000 Instruction Manual, provide suggested routine inspections and maintenance to be per-
formed at recommended specified time intervals. The procedures also include inspections which
are not specified for definite time intervals, but are based on operating experience, turbine condi-
tions, and as-needed determinations. The actual time interval established for any particular gas tur-
bine should be based on the user’s operating experience, and on ambient conditions such as tempera-
ture range, humidity, dust and corrosive atmosphere.
4. Lubrication
The oil-filled couplings are to be cleaned and inspected every three years, and relubricated with the
proper lubricant as specified in the Lubrication Guidance Chart contained in the Maintenance vol-
ume of this manual. The procedure outlined below should be strictly followed during the relubrica-
tion operation to prevent shaft misalignment and possible damage to the accessory gear box or to
the coupling.
1. Matchmark the accessory shaft to the rotor, and the accessory coupling to the accessory
gear box shaft. See Figure 37 for matchmark location.
2. Support the coupling adequately and unbolt it from the accessory gear box and rotor. The
coupling must be unbolted to completely drain the oil from each end of the coupling.
1. Flush and clean out all dirty oil with clean oil.
2. Caution should be exercised to remove all accumulation of sludge and foreign material
from the gear teeth and spline areas.
3. Inspect the splines and gear teeth for cleanliness, damage, and wear. See Inspection para-
graph below.
c. Reassemble
1. Reassemble the coupling to the accessory gear box and the turbine rotor using the follow-
ing torque values:
7/8–14 Bolts –275/285 ft–lb
1–8 Bolts –400/410 ft–lb
d. Relubrication
45
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
Mating Flange
Matchmark Both Ends of
O-Ring Coupling Assembly
Sleeve
O-Ring
Hub Floating Shaft
Lube Plug
46
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
2. Fill each end of the coupling with 335 cc (11.3 fluid ounces) of lubricant conforming to
MIL–L–2105B, Grade 140 and replace the plugs.
CAUTION
5. Inspection
Inspect the gear teeth for abrasive wear indicated by scratch-like lines or marks on the tooth surfaces
that are caused by dirt or foreign particles in the oil. Excessive gear tooth wear clearances and tooth
failure can cause a large vibration response. Vibration levels should be plotted against time over the
running history of the gas turbine so that trends, if any, can be used to detect coupling deterioration.
A record should be maintained of the wearing surfaces so that wear progress can be determined with
time.
b. Check the axial movement of the hub. Adequate clearance should be provided between the end
of the shaft assembly and the connected equipment to accommodate variations in shaft separa-
tion. For further information, refer to the Field Alignment Instructions.
c. Check that radial movement between the hubs and the sleeves is held to an absolute minimum
by the pilot fit of the gear.
d. Confirm that the coupling has been properly lubricated and that the lube date is recorded.
e. Check fasteners for correct bolt torque and lube plugs for tightness.
g. Ascertain that connected equipment is properly secured and ready for operation.
A. General
Gear assemblies are used to increase, or decrease, shaft rpm as required by driven equipment such as
load and accessories.
47
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
B. Accessory Drive
The accessory drive gear, located at the compressor end of the gas turbine, is a gearing assembly coupled
directly through a flexible coupling to the turbine rotor. Its function is to drive each gas turbine accessory
at its proper speed and to connect the turbine to its starting device. In addition, it contains the system
main lube oil pump and the turbine overspeed bolt and trip mechanism.
Contained within the gear casing, there are the gear trains which provide the proper gear reductions to
drive the accessory devices at the required speed with the correct torque values.
Accessories driven by the gear may include the main lube oil pump, the main hydraulic supply pump,
the liquid fuel pump, the water pump, and the main atomizing air compressor. Lubrication of the gear
is from the turbine’s pressurized bearing header supply.
A high–pressure turbine overspeed trip, capable of mechanically dumping the oil in the trip circuits, is
mounted on the exterior casing of the gear. This device can shut the turbine down when the speed exceeds
the design speed. The overspeed bolt which actuates the trip upon overspeed is installed in the main shaft.
1. Description
For ease of maintenance and inspection, the gear casing is split at the horizontal plane into an upper
and lower section. Interconnected shafts are arranged in a parallel axis in the lower casing. Three
of the shafts are located on the same horizontal plane as the casing joint.
The gear consists of four parallel axis, interconnected shafts arranged in a casing which provides
mounting pads for the various driven accessories. With the exception of the lube oil pump and hy-
draulic supply pump shaft, all the shaft centerlines are located on the horizontal joint of the accesso-
ry drive casing. Numbers are assigned to the various shafts and the rpm of each shaft and the load
horsepower are shown in the design data which follows this text.
The gear casing is made of cast iron and split at the horizontal joint to facilitate assembly. The lower–
half casing has a closed bottom with openings for lube oil pump suction and discharge lines and cas-
ing drain line.
All of the shafts are connected together by single helical gears which are shrunk to the shafts after
the teeth are cut. It is possible, in some instances, to remove individual gears which may have been
damaged in service, and to replace them with new gears. This operation, however, should be per-
formed at the factory so that the required precision may be maintained.
All of the shafts located on the horizontal joint are contained in babbitt–lined, steel–backed journal
bearings with integral thrust faces which are split on the horizontal joint of the casing. The thrust
faces of the bearings maintain the shafts in their proper axial location. The necessary thrust clearance
is preset at the factory. The shafts which are not on the horizontal joint are contained in babbitt–lined,
steel–backed, non–split bushings with integral thrust faces. Their thrust clearance is preset at the
factory.
The main lubricating oil pump is located on the inboard wall of the lower–half casing of the accesso-
ry drive gear and is described in the Lubrication System section.
48
Gas Turbine Functional Description GFD91ES
2. Maintenance
Very little routine inspection of the gear is required. However, should excessive temperatures, un-
usual noises, or oil leaks occur, their cause should be determined and corrected. Refer to the
Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions.
49
GFD91ES Gas Turbine Functional Description
50
GE Power Systems
id0002
Figure 1
Figure 1 depicts a General Electric simple–cycle The Diesel Cycle, Figure 3, is similar, except that
single–shaft, heavy–duty gas turbine. It is an inter- combustion takes place at a constant pressure (2–3).
nal combustion engine which produces energy This is accomplished by injecting fuel at a rate suffi-
through a cycle similar to the Otto or Diesel cycles in cient to compensate for the volume change. Expan-
that the three cycles consist of the same four stages: sion and exhaust then take place as it does in the Otto
compression, combustion, expansion, and exhaust. Cycle.
There are, however, differences in the details of the
three cycles which are worth examining. P = PRESSURE
V = VOLUME
2 3
P
The Otto Cycle 4
1
In the Otto Cycle, Figure 2, the compression stroke V
(from 1 to 2) is followed by combustion of constant id0022
3
In both the Otto and Diesel cycles a loss occurs due
P = PRESSURE to the pressure drop involved in the exhaust stroke.
V = VOLUME
This loss is avoided by creating a cycle in which the
P 2 4 exhaust stroke is longer than the compression
stroke, thus allowing the working fluid to be ex-
1
panded to atmospheric pressure. Such a cycle has
V
been devised, and is called a Brayton Cycle (Figure
id0021
4). It is also called a Constant Pressure Cycle since
Figure 2 Otto Cycle
combustion and exhaust both take place at constant
A00203 1 GAS TURBINE FUNDAMENTALS
GE Power Systems
pressure. When the Brayton Cycle is worked out for GENERAL DESCRIPTION
a steady–flow process, we have the simple gas tur-
bine cycle. The Model Series 9001E gas turbine is a 3000–rpm,
single–shaft, simple–cycle power package that basi-
cally requires only fuel and fuel connections, gener-
ator breaker connections, and an AC–power source
2 3 for turbine start–up. The MS9001E is also available
in a combined–cycle configuration for applications
P = PRESSURE
V = VOLUME
utilizing a Heat Recovery Steam Generator or simi-
P lar device.
4
1
GAS TURBINE UNIT
V The gas turbine unit consists of a 17–stage axial–
id0010
FUEL
The major components of the gas turbine are the ro-
tor components, primarily the axial flow compres-
2 3 4
b sor and the turbine wheels; the stationary
components, primarily the compressor casings, tur-
c t
bine shell, and nozzles; and the combustion compo-
GEN
nents.
1 c = COMPRESSOR Casings
b = BURNERS
AIR t = TURBINE
id0017
The casings make up the structural backbone of the
Figure 5 Fundamental Gas Turbine gas turbine. This structure supports the rotating ele-
GAS TURBINE FUNDAMENTALS 2 A00203
GE Power Systems
Combustion System
The function of the axial flow compressor is to fur-
nish high pressure air to the combustion chambers
for the production of the hot gases necessary to oper- The overall function of the combustion system is to
ate the turbine. Since only a portion of its output is supply the heat energy to the gas turbine cycle. This
used for combustion the compressor also serves as a is accomplished by burning fuel mixed with com-
source of cooling air for the turbine nozzles, turbine pressor discharge air. The combustion gases are then
wheels, transition pieces, and other portions of the diluted with excess air to achieve the desired gas
hot–gas path. temperature at the inlet of the first–stage turbine
nozzle.
Air enters the inlet of the multistage compressor The combustion system consists of a number of sim-
where it is compressed from atmospheric pressure to ilar combustion chambers. Compressor discharge
approximately 8.95 to 12.92 bar (130 to 185 psig), air is distributed to these chambers where it is bled
depending on frame size. This gives a Compressor into a cylindrical combustion liner. Fuel is injected
Pressure Ratio of approximately 10:1 to 13.5:1, into the forward end of the liners where it mixes with
the compressor discharge air and combustion takes
Atmos Press ) Compressor Disch Pressure
C.R. + place, thereby creating hot gases with temperatures
(Atmospheric Pressure)
in excess of 1650°C (3000°F) in the flame zone. As
well as being used for combustion, the relatively
again dependent on frame size. The air which con-
cool compressor discharge air acts as a blanket to
tinuously discharges from the compressor will
protect the liners from the heat of combustion. In
occupy a smaller volume at the compressor dis-
addition to cooling the combustion liners, compres-
charge than at the inlet and, due to heating during
sor discharge air mixes with the combustion gases
compression, will have a temperature of 315°C to
downstream of the combustion reaction zone, cool-
360°C (600°F to 680°F).
ing and diluting the gases which now pass through
transition pieces to the turbine first–stage nozzle.
The amount of air necessary to cool the liner wall
Turbine
and dilute the hot gas to the temperature desired at
the first–stage nozzle is about four times that re-
quired for complete combustion; this “excess air” in
The turbine wheels are an area of primary impor-
the turbine exhaust makes it possible to install auxil-
tance because they are the point at which the kinetic
iary burners in a Heat Recovery Steam Generator if
energy of the hot gases is converted into useful rota-
so desired.
tional, mechanical energy by the turbine buckets.
This produces the power necessary to meet the load The schematic operation of the single–shaft simple–
requirements and drive the axial–flow compressor. cycle gas turbine may be seen in Figure 6.
IGNITION
ATMOSPHERIC (FOR STARTUP)
AIR EXHAUST
FUEL
TORQUE
TORQUE COMPRESSOR TURBINE OUTPUT
OUTPUT TO DRIVEN
TO DRIVEN LOAD
ACCESSORIES
TORQUE
INPUT
FROM
STARTING
DEVICE
ROTOR
id0020
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
RADIAL BUCKET
LOCKING
PIN
AXIAL
LOCKING ”D” KEY
PIN
RADIAL
SECTION VIEW LOCKING
LOCKING BUCKET DOVETAIL PIN
LOCKING PIN ASSEMBLY
MS7001EA
1st STAGE
BUCKET
(Example)
BUCKET
SEALS
REFER TO
VIEW A
BKTASM1A
BUCKET ASSEMBLED
IN DOVETAIL
LOCKING
”D” KEY PLACED IN TURBINE WHEEL BUCKET
SLOT AND PUSHED INTO BUCKET DOVETAIL AXIAL
POCKET LOCKING THE BUCKET TO LOCKING BUCKET
THE TURBINE WHEEL PIN ”D” KEY
POCKET
ENLARGED VIEW C
BUCKET & ”D” KEY
ASSEMBLY
”D” KEY ASSEMBLY
BKTASM1C 10/94
TWISTLOCKS
MS7001EA
2nd STAGE
BUCKET
(Example)
TWISTLOCK ROTATED
TO SECURE BUCKET
TWISTLOCK
STAKING
GROOVE
TWISTLOCK ASSEMBLY
BKTASM1B 10/94
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 1 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060- Rev : 001
al
ci
ffi
REVISIONS
Rev Description
A First issue
- Modified wiring diagram for 95BT-1, 2 & 3 : ENCL-T instead of ENCL-??
- Added water injection enclosure (PID 0436) :
B
20JS-30, 33JS-1 & 2, 63JS-30, 88JS-1 & 2, AT-WI-1
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 1/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 2 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
PRESSURE : All pressures are gauge pressure, abs means absolute pressure.
Abbreviations Descriptions
AA Atomizing Air
ACF Control Filter Downstream Pressure
AD Compressor Discharge Air
AE Extraction Air
AMF Lube Oil Filter Downstream Pressure
DEC. Decreasing
DPDT Double pole, double throw
DPG Differential Pressure Gauge
FC Fail safe to close
FO Fail open
GF Gas Fuel
GFV Gas Fuel Vent
GPL Gas Valve Stem Packaging Leakoff
INC. Increasing
LVDT Linear variable differential transformer
Model List Item : four digit code used by General Electric to
MLI identify components, assembly, drawings or specifications,
example : MLI 0414 for Device Summary
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
Means absolute zero energy level, such as no power, no oil, no
Normal
speed, no temperature
OD Oil Drain
OD
Oil drain above oil tank level
OD
Oil drain below oil tank level
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 2/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 3 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 3/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 4 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 4/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 5 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Solenoid valve for VA18-1 control
0425 20AA-1 0983 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : 1 to 3 open ; 2 closed | 0.035 kW | 125 VDC
Solenoid valve for VA22-1 control
0425 20AB-1 0922 ACCY
Characteristics : Normal : 1 to 3 open ; 2 closed | 0.035 kW | 125 VDC
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door, auxiliaries compartment
0436 20BA-30 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door auxiliaries compartment
0436 20BA-31 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door, GT compartment
0436 20BT-30 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door
0436 20BT-40 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Compressor bleed solenoid valve
0417 20CB-1 1071 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : B to C Open, A closed | 0.04 kW | 125 VDC
Fuel pump clutch solenoid
0424 20CF-1 0601 ACCY
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 0.16 kW (max) | 125 VDC
Trip solenoid valve for gas control valve (VGC-1)
0422 20FGC-1 0509 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 0.0156 kW | 125 VDC
Fuel gas stop valve solenoid valve
0422 20FGS-1 0507 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 0.0156 kW | 125 VDC
Liquid fuel stop valve solenoid
0424 20FL-1 1019 ACCY
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 0.02 kW | 125 VDC
Solenoïd valve
0494 20IA-11 E021 VAN
Characteristics : Normal : NC | 12 W | 125 VDC
Electromagnet, air inlet filtring system by pass door, water injection compartment
0436 20JS-30 1659 ENCL-WI
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Purge fuel liquid solenoid valve
0424 20PF-100 0961 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : A to P open. B closed | 40 W | 125 VDC
Solenoid valve for VA13-1 control
Characteristics : Normal : 1 to 3 open ; 2 closed | 0.035 kW | 125 VDC
0477 20PG-1 0991 GAS
Settings : A needle-valve is installed upstream of 20PG-1 in order to adjust VA13-1 time
opening at 30 seconds
Solenoid valve for VA13-2 control
Characteristics : Normal : 1 to 3 open ; 2 closed | 0.035 kW | 125 VDC
0477 20PG-2 0991 GAS
Settings : A needle-valve is installed upstream of 20PG-1 in order to adjust VA13-1 time
opening at 30 seconds
Solenoid valve for VA19-1 control
0477 20PL-1 918T TURB
Characteristics : Normal : 1 to 3 open ; 2 closed | 0.035 kW | 125 VDC
Torque converter fill / drain solenoid valve
0421 20TU-1 0605 ACCY
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Solenoid valve for compressor IGV trip system
0469 20TV-1 1019 ACCY
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 0.1 kW | 125 VDC
Motor valve off-line compressor water wash
0442 20TW-1. 0953 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : FC | 0.092 kW | 50 Hz | 115 VAC
Motor valve on-line compressor water wash
0442 20TW-3. 0953 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : FC | 0.092 kW | 50 Hz | 115 VAC
Fuel gas vent solenoid valve
0422 20VG-1 0991 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 0.009 kW | 125 VDC
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 5/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 6 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Vent solenoid valve of inter-valve cavity VA13-1 and VA13-2
0477 20VG-2 0991 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 0.125 kW | 125 VDC
Electromagnet, load compartment air inlet filtering system by pass door
0436 20VG--30 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Electromagnet, gas compartment air inlet filtering system by pass door
0436 20VL-30 1658 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Water injection stop valve solenoid valve
0462 20WN-1 A035 WI
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 125 VDC
Water injection stop valve solenoid valve (part of VS2-2)
0462 20WN-2 A035 WI
Characteristics : Normal : NO | 125 VDC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88AB-1
0425 23AB-1 1047 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88BA-1
0436 23BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88BA-2
0436 23BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88BT-1
0436 23BT-1 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88BT-2
0436 23BT-2 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88CR-1
0421 23CR-1 0603 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.18 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88CR-1
0421 23CR-2 0603 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.18 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88CR-1
0421 23CR-3 0603 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.18 kW | 240 VAC
Auxiliaries compartment heater
0436 23HA-1 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 3.9 kW | 415 VAC
Gas compartment heater
0436 23HA-11 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 3.9 kW | 415 VAC
Gas compartment air inlet heater
0436 23HA-12 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 15 kW | 415 VAC
Auxiliaries compartment heater
0436 23HA-2 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 3.9 kW | 415 VAC
Auxiliaries compartment heater
0436 23HA-3 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 3.9 kW | 415 VAC
Auxiliaries compartment heater
0436 23HA-4 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 3.9 kW | 415 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88HQ-1
0434 23HQ-1 0628 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Turbine compartment heater
0436 23HT-1 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 3.9 kW | 415 VAC
Turbine compartment heater
0436 23HT-2 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 3.9 kW | 415 VAC
Turbine compartment heater
0436 23HT-3 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 3.9 kW | 415 VAC
Turbine compartment heater
0436 23HT-4 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 3.9 kW | 415 VAC
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 6/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 7 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88QA-1
0416 23QA-1 1006 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Immersion heater lube oil tank
0416 23QT-1 0938 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 10.2 kW | 415 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88QV-1
0416 23QV-1 A098 MIST
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88QV-2
0416 23QV-2 A098 MIST
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88TG-1
0421 23TG-1 0603 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88TK-1
0417 23TK-1 1233 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88TK-2
0417 23TK-2 1233 ACCY
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88VG-1
0436 23VG-1 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88VG-2
0436 23VG-2 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
Anti-condensation heater for motor 88WN-1
0462 23WN-1 A035 WI
Characteristics : 50 Hz | 0.05 kW | 240 VAC
0471 27TF-1 A040 FILT GT air filter general alarm dispatching
0415 28FD-10 1121 TURB Flame detector combustion chamber n°10
0415 28FD-11 1121 TURB Flame detector combustion chamber n°11
0415 28FD-4 1121 TURB Flame detector combustion chamber n°4
0415 28FD-5 1121 TURB Flame detector combustion chamber n°5
Alarm relay
0415 30SG-1 1213 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Auxiliaries compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Auxiliaries compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Normal : NO
GT compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33BT-1 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Flap closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
GT compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33BT-2 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Flap closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
11 stage compressor bleed valve limit switch
0417 33CB-1 1022 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
11 stage compressor bleed valve limit switch
0417 33CB-2 1022 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
11 stage compressor bleed valve limit switch
0417 33CB-3 1022 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
11 stage compressor bleed valve limit switch
0417 33CB-4 1022 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 7/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 8 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Auxiliaries compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-1 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Door closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Gas compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-11 1658 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Door closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Gas compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-12 1658 ENCL-G Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Door closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Gas compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-13 1658 ENCL-G Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Door closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Gas compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-14 1658 ENCL-G Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Door closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Auxiliaries compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-2 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Door closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
GT compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-3 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Door closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
GT compartment door limit switch
0436 33DT-4 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Door closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Liquid fuel stop valve limit switch
0424 33FL-1 0511 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection skid enclosure : ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33JS-1 1659 ENCL-WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Flap closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection skid enclosure : ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33JS-2 1659 ENCL-WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Flap closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Purge fuel liquid valve limit switch VP-1
0424 33PF-1 0961 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Purge fuel liquid valve limit switch VP-2
0424 33PF-2 0961 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
VA13-1 close position limit switch
0477 33PG-1 0991 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
VA13-1 open position limit switch
0477 33PG-2 0991 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
VA13-2 close position limit switch
0477 33PG-3 0991 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
VA13-2 open position limit switch
0477 33PG-4 0991 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 8/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 9 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Torque converter solenoid valve limit switch
0421 33TC-1 0605 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : 20TU-1 de-energized : switch activated, contact closed
Torque converter low torque limit switch
0421 33TM-5 0605 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO, switch closed for IGV closed or max torque
Settings : Setup at 2 round (range 0-31 rack bar revolution)
Torque converter high torque limit switch
0421 33TM-6 0605 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO, switch closed for IGV closed or max torque
Settings : Setup at 28 round (range 0-31 rack bar revolution)
Load compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33VG-1 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Flap closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Solenoid valve 20VG-1 limit switch
0422 33VG-11 0991 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Valve opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
Load compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33VG-2 1605 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Flap closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Gas compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33VL-1 1658 ENCL-G Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Flap closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Gas compartment ventilation damper limit switch
0436 33VL-2 1658 ENCL-G Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Flap closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection control valve limit switch (part of VC4-1)
0462 33WN-1 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve full opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection control valve limit switch (part of VC4-1)
0462 33WN-2 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve full closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection stop valve limit switch (part of VS2-2)
0462 33WN-3 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve full opened : limit switch activated, contact closed
Water injection stop valve limit switch (part of VS2-2)
0462 33WN-4 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Valve full closed : limit switch activated, contact closed
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-1A 1218 TURB
Characteristics : For 25.4 mm/s (1 in/s), 150 ± 4.5 mV peak
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-1B 1218 TURB
Characteristics : For 25.4 mm/s (1 in/s), 150 ± 4.5 mV peak
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-2A 1218 TURB
Characteristics : For 25.4 mm/s (1 in/s), 150 ± 4.5 mV peak
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-3A 1218 TURB
Characteristics : For 25.4 mm/s (1 in/s), 150 ± 4.5 mV peak
Vibration sensor
0415 39V-3B 1218 TURB
Characteristics : For 25.4 mm/s (1 in/s), 150 ± 4.5 mV peak
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-11 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-12 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 9/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 10 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-21 235B TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-22 235B TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-23 235B TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-24 235B TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-31 235C TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Vibration sensor
0415 39VS-32 235C TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Break glass unit auxiliaries compartment access door
0426 43CP-1 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Break glass unit GT compartment access door
0426 43CP-2 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Break glass unit auxiliaries compartment access door
0426 43CP-3 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Break glass unit GT compartment access door
0426 43CP-4 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Break glass unit load compartment access door
0426 43CP-5 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Break glass unit gas compartment access door
0426 43CP-6 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Break glass unit gas compartment access door
0426 43CP-7 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Off-line water wash push button
0442 43TW-1/PB 1105 TURB
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-10A 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-10B 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-11A 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-11B 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-12A 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-12B 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 10/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 11 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-13A 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-13B 1113 ENCL-T Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-1A 1104 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-1B 1104 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-2A 1104 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector auxiliaries compartment
0426 45FA-2B 1104 ACCY Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector gas compartment
0426 45FA-6A A116 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector gas compartment
0426 45FA-6B 1195 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector gas compartment
0426 45FA-7A A116 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector gas compartment
0426 45FA-7B A116 GAS Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 163 ± 14°C (325 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector GT compartment
0426 45FT-1A 1103 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 316 ± 14°C (600 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector GT compartment
0426 45FT-1B 1103 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 316 ± 14°C (600 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector GT compartment
0426 45FT-2A 1154 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 316 ± 14°C (600 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector GT compartment
0426 45FT-2B 1154 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 316 ± 14°C (600 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector GT compartment
0426 45FT-3A 1154 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 316 ± 14°C (600 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector GT compartment
0426 45FT-3B 1154 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 316 ± 14°C (600 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector load compartment
0426 45FT-8A 1160 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 385 ± 14°C (725 ± 25°F)
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 11/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 12 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Thermostatic fire detector load compartment
0426 45FT-8B 1160 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 385 ± 14°C (725 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector load compartment
0426 45FT-9A 1160 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 316 ± 14°C (600 ± 25°F)
Thermostatic fire detector load compartment
0426 45FT-9B 1160 TURB Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Closed : 316 ± 14°C (600 ± 25°F)
Gas detector auxiliary compartment
0474 45HA-1 1153 ACCY
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector
0474 45HA-10 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector
0474 45HA-11 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector
0474 45HA-12 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector auxiliary compartment
0474 45HA-2 1153 ACCY
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector auxiliary compartment
0474 45HA-3 1153 ACCY
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector gas module compartment ventilation duct
0474 45HA-4 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector gas module compartment ventilation duct
0474 45HA-5 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector gas module compartment ventilation duct
0474 45HA-6 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector turbine compartment
0474 45HT-1 1154 TURB
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector turbine compartment
0474 45HT-2 1154 TURB
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector turbine compartment
0474 45HT-3 1154 TURB
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector turbine compartment ventilation duct
0474 45HT-4 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector turbine compartment ventilation duct
0474 45HT-5 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Gas detector turbine compartment ventilation duct
0474 45HT-6 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Range : 0 - 20% LEL
Security thermostat gas compartment heater
0436 49HA-12 1658 ENCL-G
Characteristics : Normal : NO | Closed at 100°C (212°F)
Emergency stop button auxiliaries compartment
0426 5E-1 1104 ACCY
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Emergency stop button auxiliaries compartment
0426 5E-2 1104 ACCY
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Pressure switch
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0494 63AF-11 E021 VAN
Settings :
Increase open at 3 ± 0.25 bar (43.5 ± 4 psi)
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 12/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 13 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Differential pressure switch , air inlet auxiliaries compartment
0436 63BA-30 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
Closed at 1 ± 0.1 mbar (0.015 ± 0.001 psi)
Differential pressure switch air inlet auxiliaries compartment
0436 63BA-31 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
Closed at 1 ± 0.1 mbar (0.015 ± 0.001 psi)
Differential pressure switch air inlet
0436 63BT-30 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
Closed at 1 ± 0.1 mbar (0.015 ± 0.001 psi)
Differential pressure switch air inlet
0436 63BT-40 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
Closed at 1 ± 0.1 mbar (0.015 ± 0.001 psi)
GT compressed air inlet filter low pressure switch
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0471 63CA-1 A040 FILT Settings :
Decrease open at : 5.5 ± 0.5 bar (79.77 ± 7.25 psi) |
Not adjustable : increase close at : 6 ± 0.5 bar (87 ± 7.25 psi)
GT inlet air system differential pressure switch
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0471 63CS-2A A040 FILT
Settings :
Increase open at : 23 ± 0.5 mbar (0.33 ± 0.007 psi)
GT inlet air system differential pressure switch
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0471 63CS-2B A040 FILT
Settings :
Increase open at : 23 ± 0.5 mbar (0.33 ± 0.007 psi)
Gas fuel pressure switch
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0422 63FG-1 0991 GAS Settings :
Not adjustable : increase open at : 2.41 ± 0.05 bar (35.0 ± 0.75 psi) |
Decrease close at : 1.03 ± 0.05 bar (15.0 ± 0.75 psi)
Gas fuel pressure switch
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0422 63FG-2 0991 GAS Settings :
Not adjustable : increase open at : 2.41 ± 0.05 bar (35.0 ± 0.75 psi) |
Decrease close at : 1.03 ± 0.05 bar (15.0 ± 0.75 psi)
Hydraulic filter differential pressure alarm
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0434 63HF-1 0926 ACCY Settings :
Increase open at : 4.13 ± 0.2 bar (60 ± 3 psi) |
Not adjustable : decrease close at : 2.75 ± 1.03 bar (40 ± 15 psi)
Low hydraulic supply pressure auxiliary hydraulic pump start
Characteristics : Normal : NO
0434 63HQ-1 0926 ACCY Settings :
Decrease open at : 93 ± 1.7 bar (1350 ± 25 psi) |
Not adjustable : increase close at : 100 ± 3.1 bar (1450 ± 45 psi)
Differential pressure switch air inlet water injection compartment
0436 63JS-30 1659 ENCL-WI Settings :
Closed at 1 ± 0.1 mbar (0.015 ± 0.001 psi)
Fuel filter differential pressure alarm
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0424 63LF-3 0992 ACCY
Settings :
Increase open at : 1.3 ± 0.07 bar (19 ± 1 psi)
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 13/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 14 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Pressure switch on VA13-1 & VA13-2 intervalves space
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0477 63PG-1 0991 GAS Settings :
Increase open at : 3.45 ± 0.14 bar (50 ± 2 psi) |
Not adjustable : decrease close at : 3.17 ± 0.21 bar (46 ± 3 psi)
Pressure switch on liquid fuel purge air
Characteristics : Normal : NO
0477 63PL-21 918T TURB Settings :
Not adjustable : decrease open at : 4.6 ± 0.3 bar (67 ± 4 psi) |
Increase close at : 6 ± 0.3 bar (87 ± 4 psi)
Low lube oil pressure alarm
Characteristics : Normal : NO
0416 63QA-2 0926 ACCY Settings :
Decrease open at : 2.8 ± 0.07 bar (40.6 ± 1 psi) |
Not adjustable : increase close at : 3.1 ± 0.14 bar (45 ± 2 psi)
Differential pressure switch main lube oil filter
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0416 63QQ-1 0926 ACCY Settings :
Increase open at : 1.03 ± 0.068 bar (15 ± 1 psi) |
Not adjustable : decrease close at : 0.9 ± 0.2 bar (13 ± 3 psi)
Oil mist eliminator filter high pressure drop alarm
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0416 63QQ-10 A098 MIST
Settings :
Increase open at : 80 ± 3 mbar (1.16 ± 0.044 psi)
Torque converter filter differential pressure
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0416 63QQ-8 0916 ACCY
Settings :
Increase open at : 1.5 ± 0.2 bar (21.75 ± 3 psi)
Generator bearing low lube oil pressure
Characteristics : Normal : NO
0416 63QT-2A ALT. GENE Settings :
Decrease open at : 0.55 ± 0.021 bar (8 ± 0.3 psi) |
Not adjustable : increase close at : 0.62 ± 0.035 bar (9 ± 0.5 psi)
Turbine exhaust frame cooling pressure switch
Characteristics : Normal : NO
0417 63TK-1 A053 ACCY
Settings :
Closed above 381 ± 19 mm H2O (15 ± 0.75 in H2O)
Turbine exhaust frame cooling pressure switch
Characteristics : Normal : NO
0417 63TK-2 A053 ACCY
Settings :
Closed above 381 ± 19 mm H2O (15 ± 0.75 in H2O)
Differential pressure switch, air inlet load compartment
0436 63VG-30 1605 ENCL-T Settings :
Closed at 1 ± 0.1 mbar (0.015 ± 0.001 psi)
Differential pressure switch, air inlet gas compartment
0436 63VL-30 1658 ENCL-T Settings :
Closed at 1 ± 0.1 mbar (0.015 ± 0.001 psi)
Water injection differential pressure switch
0462 63WN-1 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Open on decreasing pressure / atm : -0.270 ± 0.01 bar (-3.9 ± 0.14 psi)
Water injection pressure switch
0462 63WN-2 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Open on decreasing pressure : 25 bar (363 psi)
Water injection differential pressure switch
0462 63WN-3 A035 WI Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Open on increasing differential pressure : 1.03 bar ± 0.1 bar (15 ± 1 psi)
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 14/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 15 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
0424 65FP 0533 ACCY Liquid fuel pump (by pass valve) servo valve
0422 65GC-1 0509 GAS Gas control valve servo valve (VGC-1)
Level switch
0494 71FA-11 E021 VAN Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Opening on low level
Level switch
0494 71FA-12 E021 VAN Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : Opening on low level
Level sensor
0442 71FF-4 969L TURB Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening on high level
Level sensor
0442 71FF-5 969L TURB Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening on high-high level
Level sensor
0442 71FF-6 969L TURB Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening on high-high level
Flow divider magnetic pickup-speed
0424 77FD-1 0910 ACCY
Settings : Gap : 0.23 ± 0.025 mm (0.009 ± 0.001 in)
Flow divider magnetic pickup-speed
0424 77FD-2 0910 ACCY
Settings : Gap : 0.23 ± 0.025 mm (0.009 ± 0.001 in)
Flow divider magnetic pickup-speed
0424 77FD-3 0910 ACCY
Settings : Gap : 0.23 ± 0.025 mm (0.009 ± 0.001 in)
Speed sensor
0415 77HT-1 0546 TURB
Settings : Gap : 1.27 ± 0.127 mm (0.05 ± 0.005 in)
Speed sensor
0415 77HT-2 0546 TURB
Settings : Gap : 1.27 ± 0.127 mm (0.05 ± 0.005 in)
Speed sensor
0415 77HT-3 0546 TURB
Settings : Gap : 1.27 ± 0.127 mm (0.05 ± 0.005 in)
Speed sensor
0415 77NH-1 0546 TURB
Settings : Gap : 1.27 ± 0.127 mm (0.05 ± 0.005 in)
Speed sensor
0415 77NH-2 0546 TURB
Settings : Gap : 1.27 ± 0.127 mm (0.05 ± 0.005 in)
Speed sensor
0415 77NH-3 0546 TURB
Settings : Gap : 1.27 ± 0.127 mm (0.05 ± 0.005 in)
Vibration sensor
0415 77RP-11 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Atomizing air booster motor
0425 88AB-1 1047 ACCY
Characteristics : 15 kW | 2925 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor - acoustic enclosure GT compartment
0436 88BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 15 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor - acoustic enclosure GT compartment
0436 88BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 15 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor - acoustic enclosure GT compartment
0436 88BT-1 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 37 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor - acoustic enclosure GT compartment
0436 88BT-2 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 37 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Electrical cranking motor
0421 88CR-1 0603 ACCY
Characteristics : 1000 kW | 2975 rpm | 6.6 kV | 50 Hz
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 15/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 16 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Electrical motor
0494 88FA-10 E021 VAN
Characteristics : 0.46 kW | 1500 rpm | 240 VAC | 50 Hz
Electrical motor
0494 88FA-11 E021 VAN
Characteristics : 0.37 kW | 1500 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Electrical motor
0494 88FA-12 E021 VAN
Characteristics : 0.37 kW | 1500 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Flow divider starting motor
0424 88FM 0613 ACCY
Characteristics : 0.37 kW | 1400 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Auxiliary hydraulic supply pump motor
0434 88HQ-1 0628 ACCY
Characteristics : 15 kW | 1450 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor water injection skid enclosure
0436 88JS-1 1659 ENCL-WI
Characteristics : 0.37 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor water injection skid enclosure
0436 88JS-2 1659 ENCL-WI
Characteristics : 0.37 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Auxiliary lube oil pump motor
0416 88QA-1 1006 ACCY
Characteristics : 90 kW | 3000 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Liquid fuel Warren pump normal lubrication pump motor
0424 88QAOB 0611 OTHER
Characteristics : 0.75 kW | 415 VAC
Emergency lube oil pump motor
0416 88QE-1 1007 ACCY
Characteristics : 7.5 kW | 1750 rpm | 125 VDC
Liquid fuel Warren pump emergency lubrication pump motor
0424 88QEOB 0611 OTHER
Characteristics : 0.75 kW | 125 VDC
Lube oil mist eliminator motor
0416 88QV-1 A098 MIST
Characteristics : 18.5 kW | 3000 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Lube oil mist eliminator motor
0416 88QV-2 A098 MIST
Characteristics : 18.5 kW | 3000 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Turning gear electrical motor
0421 88TG-1 0538 ACCY
Characteristics : 30 kW | 725 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Turbine exhaust frame cooling blower & motor
0417 88TK-1 1233 ACCY
Characteristics : 45 kW | 2900 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Turbine exhaust frame cooling blower & motor
0417 88TK-2 1233 ACCY
Characteristics : 45 kW | 2900 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Torque adjuster drive motor
0421 88TM-1 0605 ACCY
Characteristics : 1.5 kW | 3000 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor acoustic enclosure load compartment
0436 88VG-1 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 11 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor acoustic enclosure load compartment
0436 88VG-2 1605 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 11 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor gas module acoustic enclosure
0436 88VL-1 1658 ENCL-G
Characteristics : 4 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Cooling air fan motor gas module acoustic enclosure
0436 88VL-2 1658 ENCL-G
Characteristics : 4 kW | - rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Water injection pump motor
0462 88WN-1 A035 WI
Characteristics : 55 kW | 3000 rpm | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
0422 90SR-1 0507 GAS Speed ratio/stop valve servovalve
0469 90TV-1 0548 TURB Servovalve, compressor IGV actuator
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 16/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 17 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Electro-pneumatic converter
Settings :
0462 90WN-1 A035 WI
04 ± 0.20 mA for 0 ± 0.01 bar (0 ± 0.14 psi)
20 ± 0.20 mA for 3.1 ± 0.1 bar (45 ± 1.4 psi)
Air flow control (anemometer) for ventilation
0436 95BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Settings : 16 ± 1 mA when the fan is running
Air flow control (anemometer) for ventilation
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-2 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for ventilation
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-3 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for ventilation
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-4 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for ventilation
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-5 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for ventilation
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-6 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for turbine enclosure
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-1 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for turbine enclosure
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-2 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for turbine enclosure
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-3 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for turbine enclosure
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-4 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for turbine enclosure
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-5 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 17/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 18 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Air flow control (anemometer) for turbine enclosure
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-6 1605 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Ignition transformer for 95SP-13
0415 95SG-13 1213 TURB
Characteristics : 0.15 kVA | 115 VAC (230 VAC) | 15 kV | 50 Hz
Ignition transformer for 95SP-14
0415 95SG-14 1213 TURB
Characteristics : 0.15 kVA | 115 VAC (230 VAC) | 15 kV | 50 Hz
0415 95SP-13 1214 TURB Spark plug for combustion chamber n°13
0415 95SP-14 1214 TURB Spark plug for combustion chamber n°14
Air flow control (anemometer) for gas skid enclosure
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95VL-1 1658 ENCL-G Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for gas skid enclosure
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95VL-2 1658 ENCL-G Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Air flow control (anemometer) for gas skid enclosure
Characteristics : 4 - 20 mA for 0.5 - 30 m/s
0436 95VL-3 1658 ENCL-T Settings : fan not running, 0% air flow : 4 -0/+1 mA
fan running and doors closed : adjust the speedtronic constant software at a value
equivalent to { [60% * (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Atomizing air main compressor differential pressure transmitter
Settings :
0425 96AD-1 0926 ACCY
4 ± 0.02 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 6 bar (87 psi)
Pressure transmitter
Settings :
0492 96AP-1A 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0.02 mA for 0.745 bar abs (22 in of Hg)
20 ± 0.10 mA for 1.250 bar abs (36.9 in of Hg)
Pressure transmitter
Settings :
0492 96AP-1B 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0.02 mA for 0.745 bar abs (22 in of Hg)
20 ± 0.10 mA for 1.250 bar abs (36.9 in of Hg)
Pressure transmitter
Settings :
0492 96AP-1C 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0.02 mA for 0.745 bar abs (22 in of Hg)
20 ± 0.10 mA for 1.250 bar abs (36.9 in of Hg)
Pressure transmitter
Settings :
0492 96BD-1 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0.02 mA for 0.000 bar (0.000 in of H2O)
20 ± 0.10 mA for 0.345 bar (138.5 in of H2O)
Compressor discharge pressure transmitter
Settings :
0417 96CD-1A 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.05 mA for 21 bar (304.5 psi)
Compressor discharge pressure transmitter
Settings :
0417 96CD-1B 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.05 mA for 21 bar (304.5 psi)
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 18/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 19 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Compressor discharge pressure transmitter
Settings :
0417 96CD-1C 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.05 mA for 21 bar (304.5 psi)
Pressure transmitter
Settings :
0492 96CS-1 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0.02 mA for 0 mbar
20 ± 0.10 mA for 27.4 mbar (11 in of H2O)
GT air inlet system differential pressure transmitter
Settings :
0471 96CS-3 A040 FILT
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 mbar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.05 mA for 63 mbar (0.91 psi)
Inlet gas fuel module pressure transmitter
Settings :
0422 96FG-1 0991 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Fuel gas inter-valve pressure transmitter
Settings :
0422 96FG-2A 0991 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Fuel gas inter-valve pressure transmitter
Settings :
0422 96FG-2B 0991 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Fuel gas inter-valve pressure transmitter
Settings :
0422 96FG-2C 0991 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Liquid fuel module pressure transmitter inlet
Settings :
0424 96FL-2A 0992 ACCY
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 10 bar (145 psi)
Liquid fuel module pressure transmitter inlet
Settings :
0424 96FL-2B 0992 ACCY
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 10 bar (145 psi)
Liquid fuel control valve (VC3) LVDT
Settings :
0424 96FP-1 0992 ACCY
0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
3.5 ± 0.01 VAC for 20.5 mm (0.81 in)
Liquid fuel control valve (VC3) LVDT
Settings :
0424 96FP-2 0992 ACCY
0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
3.5 ± 0.01 VAC for 20.5 mm (0.81 in)
Gas control valve (VGC-1) LVDT
0422 96GC-1,2 0509 GAS
Settings : 0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
Lube oil system VPR-2 inlet pressure transmitter
Settings :
0416 96QA-2 0926 ACCY
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 7 bar (101.5 psi)
Lube oil tank level transmitter
Settings :
0416 96QL-1 1038 ACCY
4 ± 0.05 mA for 456 mm (17.95 in)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 246 mm (9.68 in)
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 19/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 20 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Low lube oil pressure transmitter generator
Settings :
0416 96QT-2B ALT. GENE
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 1.72 bar (25 psi)
Tank's air vacuum differential pressure transmitter
Settings :
0416 96QV-1 A098 MIST
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 bar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 0.025 bar (0.36 psi)
Dew point and temperature transmitter
Settings :
Outlet 1 :
04 ± 0.05 mA for -50°C (-58 °F)
0471 96RH A040 FILT
20 ± 0.05 mA for +50°C (122 °F)
Outlet 2 :
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0% RH
20 ± 0.05 mA for 100 % RH
Stop ratio fuel gas (VSR-1) LVDT
0422 96SR-1,2 0507 GAS
Settings : 0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
Differential pressure transmitter of total filtration stages
Settings :
0471 96TF-1 A040 FILT
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 mbar (0 psi)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 25 mbar (0.36 psi)
Torque converter IGV position transmitter
Settings :
0421 96TM-1 0605 ACCY
04 ± 0.05 mA for 0 rack bar revolution (range 0-31 rack bar revolution )
20 ± 0.05 mA for 31 rack bar revolution (range 0-31 rack bar revolution )
LVDT (Linear variable displacement transmitter), compressor IGV actuator
0469 96TV-1 0548 TURB
Settings : 0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 34° IGV angle
LVDT (Linear variable displacement transmitter), compressor IGV actuator
0469 96TV-2 0548 TURB
Settings : 0.7 ± 0.01 VAC for 34° IGV angle
Vibration sensor
0415 96VC-11 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Vibration sensor
0415 96VC-12 235A TURB Characteristics : Output proximitor : 7.87 V/mm (0.2 V/mil)
Settings : Gap : 1.4 ± 0.05 mm (0.055 ± 0.002 in)
Mass flow transmitter
Settings : Factory Calibrated :
0422 96VM-1 0639 GAS
4 ± 0.05 mA for 0 kg/s (0 lbm/s)
20 ± 0.1 mA for 10 kg/s (22 lbm/s)
Flow transmitter
Settings :
0462 96WF-1 A035 WI
04 ± 0.2 mA for 0 m3/h (0 gpm)
20 ± 0.2 mA for 30 ± 0.1 m3/h (132 ± 0.44 gpm)
Flow transmitter
Settings :
0462 96WF-2 A035 WI
04 ± 0.2 mA for 0 m3/h (0 gpm)
20 ± 0.2 mA for 30 ± 0.1 m3/h (132 ± 0.44 gpm)
Flow transmitter
Settings :
0462 96WF-3 A035 WI
04 ± 0.2 mA for 0 m3/h (0 gpm)
20 ± 0.2 mA for 30 ± 0.1 m3/h (132 ± 0.44 gpm)
Atomizing air precooler air discharge thermocouple
0425 AAT-1A 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 20/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 21 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Atomizing air precooler air discharge thermocouple
0425 AAT-2A 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Control oil hydraulic accumulator
0434 AH1-1 0908 N/A Characteristics : 17.8 l (4.7 gal) | Nitrogen
Settings : 51.7 ± 1 bar (750 ± 15 psi)
Control oil hydraulic accumulator
0422 AH1-3 0991 N/A Characteristics : 17.8 l (4.70 gal)
Settings : 51.7 ± 1 bar (750 ± 15 psi)
0471 AR-20 A040 FILT Air filter electrical control box
Thermocouple accessory compartment
0436 AT-AC-1 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple gas compartment
0436 AT-AC-11 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Type K
Air temperature load compartment
0436 AT-LC-1 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32°F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214 Ohm/°F)
| -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Air temperature turbine compartment
0436 AT-TC-1 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Thermocouple : turbine compartment enclosure
0436 AT-TC-2 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple : turbine compartment enclosure
0436 AT-TC-3 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : Type K
Water injection compartment temperature water injection compartment
0436 AT-WI-1 1659 ENCL-WI
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature journal bearing n°1
0415 BT-J1-1A,1B 235A TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature journal bearing n°1
0415 BT-J1-2A,2B 235A TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature journal bearing n°2
0415 BT-J2-1A,1B 235B TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature journal bearing n°2
0415 BT-J2-2A,2B 235B TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature journal bearing n°3
0415 BT-J3-1A,1B 235C TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature journal bearing n°3
0415 BT-J3-2A,2B 235C TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature pad n°2 of thrust bearing n°1
0415 BT-TA1-2A,2B 235A TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature pad n°5 of thrust bearing n°1
0415 BT-TA1-5A,5B 235A TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature pad n°8 of thrust bearing n°1
0415 BT-TA1-8A,8B 235A TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature pad n°2 of counter thrust bearing n°1
0415 BT-TI1-2A,2B 235A TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature pad n°5 of counter thrust bearing n°1
0415 BT-TI1-5A,5B 235A TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Dual thermocouple temperature pad n°9 of counter thrust bearing n°1
0415 BT-TI1-9A,9B 235A TURB
Characteristics : Type K
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 21/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 22 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Main atomizing air compressor
0425 CA1 0607 N/A
Characteristics : Centrifugal | 2.7 kg/s | 6600 rpm
Booster atomizing air compressor
0425 CA2 1047 N/A
Characteristics : Volumetric | 510 m3/h (2245.46 gal/min) | 6200 rpm
Thermocouple temperature compressor air outlet
0415 CT-DA-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature compressor air outlet
0415 CT-DA-2 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature compressor air inlet
0415 CT-IF-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature compressor air inlet
0415 CT-IF-2 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Resistance temperature detector
0492 CT-IF-3/R 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Cranking motor stator Ph1 temperature sensor 1
0421 ET-CRS-11/R 0603 ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Cranking motor stator Ph1temperature sensor 2
0421 ET-CRS-12/R 0603 ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Cranking motor stator Ph2 temperature sensor 1
0421 ET-CRS-21/R 0603 ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Cranking motor stator Ph2 temperature sensor 2
0421 ET-CRS-22/R 0603 ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Cranking motor stator Ph3 temperature sensor 1
0421 ET-CRS-31/R 0603 ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Cranking motor stator Ph3 temperature sensor 2
0421 ET-CRS-32/R 0603 ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Liquid fuel purge air filter
0477 FA3-1 918T N/A
Characteristics : 5 µm
Filter on actuation air of atomizing air and purge systems
0425 FA4-1 0983 N/A
Characteristics : 5 µm
Water injection air filter
0462 FA8-2 A035 N/A
Characteristics : 5 µm
Flow divider
0424 FD1-1 0613 N/A Characteristics : type lineare 7 elements with double pumps ; 14 elements 60 tooth wheel
| 1650 Hz | 883 l/min (233 gpm) at 1650 rpm
Filter
0494 FF11-1 E021 N/A
Characteristics : 910 µm
Filter
0494 FF11-2 E021 N/A
Characteristics : 910 µm
HP fuel filter
0424 FF2-1 1014 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 40 = 75
HP fuel filter
0424 FF2-2 1014 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 40=75
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 22/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 23 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Hydraulic oil supply filter
0434 FH2-1 1051 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 3 > 200
Hydraulic oil supply filter
0434 FH2-2 1051 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 3 > 200
Hydraulic filter liquid fuel servo valve (control)
0424 FH3 0992 N/A
Characteristics : 40 µm
Filter, hydraulic oil supply , IGV controller assembly
0469 FH6-1 0548 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 15 = 75
Servo hydraulic supply filter of stop ratio valve (VSR)
0422 FH7-1 0507 N/A
Characteristics : 15 µ abs
Gas fuel control valve (VGC) servo hydraulic oil supply filter
0422 FH8-1 0509 N/A
Characteristics : 15 µ abs
Water injection flowmeter
0462 FM1-1 A035 WI Characteristics : 3.6 m3/h (16 gpm) | 29.5 m3/h (130 gpm) | Nominal K factor : 158.5
pulse / l (600 pulse/US gallon)
High pressure filter
0462 FW1-1 A035 N/A
Characteristics : Beta 13 = 75
Water injection upstream pump unit conical filter
0462 FW1-2 A035 N/A
Characteristics : Filtering media 800µm
Conical filter downstream flowmeter
0462 FW1-3 A035 N/A
Characteristics : Filtering media 150µm
0421 HM-1 0605 N/A Torque converter and reversing gear
Actuator assembly, inlet guide valve system
0469 HM3-1 0548 N/A
Characteristics : Actuator operation limits : 32° to 86°
0425 HX1-1 1003 N/A Atomizing air precooler
Lube oil thermocouple #1 bearing drain
0416 LT-B1D-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Lube oil thermocouple #2 bearing drain
0416 LT-B2D-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Lube oil thermocouple #3 bearing drain
0416 LT-B3D-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Lube oil thermocouple #1 bearing thrusts drain
0416 LT-BT1D-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Lube oil thermocouple generator and load gear #1 bearing drain
0416 LT-G1D-1 ALT. GENE
Characteristics : Type K
Lube oil thermocouple generator and load gear #2 bearing drain
0416 LT-G2D-1 ALT. GENE
Characteristics : Type K
Resistance temperature detector
0416 LT-OT-1A 637A ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Resistance temperature detector
0416 LT-OT-2A 637A ACCY Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Lube oil temperature turbine header thermocouple
0416 LT-TH-1A,1B 637A ACCY
Characteristics : Type K
Lube oil temperature turbine header thermocouple
0416 LT-TH-2A,2B 637A ACCY
Characteristics : Type K
Lube oil temperature turbine header thermocouple
0416 LT-TH-3A,3B 637A ACCY
Characteristics : Type K
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 23/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 24 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
0422 MG1 0512 N/A Gas fuel nozzle
Main fuel Pump
0424 PF1 0611 ACCY Characteristics : Positive displacements screw up | 870.5 l/min (230 gpm) | 68.9 bar
(1000 psi) | 1500 rpm
Lubricator pump
0424 PF1-90 0611 N/A
Characteristics : Refer to P&ID LMA-37361
Unloading pump
0494 PFA-10 E021 N/A
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 25 l/min (6.60 gpm)
Dosing pump
0494 PFA-11 E021 N/A
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 4 l/h (0.88 Gal/h) | 10 bar (145 psi) | 1500 rpm
Dosing pump
0494 PFA-12 E021 N/A
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 4 l/h (0.88 Gal/h) | 10 bar (145 psi) | 1500 rpm
Main hydraulic supply pump
0434 PH1 0627 ACCY
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 65 l/min (17.1 gpm) | 105 bar (1500 psi) | 1422 rpm
Auxiliary hydraulic supply pump
0434 PH2 0628 ACCY
Characteristics : Volumetric pump | 45.4 l/min (12 gpm) | 105 bar (1500 psi) | 1450 rpm
Breather valve of 501BA tank
0494 PSV-11 E021 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Overpressure : 0.15 bar (2.17 psi); Vaccum : 0.01 bar (0.15 psi)
0462 PW1-1 A035 N/A Water injection pump unit
Light warning auxiliaries compartment
0426 SLI-1 1104 ACCY
Characteristics : 240 UPS | 50 Hz
Fire alarm auxiliaries compartment
0426 SLI-1A 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Fire alarm GT compartment
0426 SLI-1B 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Fire alarm GT compartment
0426 SLI-1C 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Fire alarm gas compartment
0426 SLI-1D 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : Visual alarm | 24 VDC
Fire alarm gas compartment
0426 SLI-1E 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Light warning auxiliaries compartment
0426 SLI-2 1104 ACCY
Characteristics : 240 UPS | 50 Hz
Fire alarm GT compartment
0426 SLI-2B 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Fire alarm GT compartment
0426 SLI-2C 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Fire alarm gas compartment
0426 SLI-2E 1195 ENCL-G
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Fire alarm load compartment
0426 SLI-3C 1113 ENCL-T
Characteristics : 24 VDC
Thermocouple temperature exhaust tunnel
0415 TT-IB-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position after first wheel space
0415 TT-WS1AO-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position after first wheel space
0415 TT-WS1AO-2 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 24/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 25 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Thermocouple temperature inner position forward first wheel space
0415 TT-WS1FI-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature inner position forward first wheel space
0415 TT-WS1FI-2 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position after second wheel space
0415 TT-WS2AO-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position after second wheel space
0415 TT-WS2AO-2 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position forward second wheel space
0415 TT-WS2FO-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position forward second wheel space
0415 TT-WS2FO-2 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position after third wheel space
0415 TT-WS3AO-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position after third wheel space
0415 TT-WS3AO-2 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position forward third wheel space
0415 TT-WS3FO-1 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature outer position forward third wheel space
0415 TT-WS3FO-2 637T TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-1 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-10 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-11 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-12 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-13 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-14 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-15 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-16 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-17 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-18 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-19 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-2 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-20 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-21 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 25/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 26 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-22 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-23 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-24 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-3 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-4 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-5 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-6 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-7 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-8 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Thermocouple temperature exhaust gas diffuser
0415 TT-XD-9 0623 TURB
Characteristics : Type K
Fuel gas circuit purge air valve
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0477 VA13-1 918T N/A
Settings : Opening time shall be 35 ± 5 seconds.
Closing time shall be 10 seconds at maximum.
Fuel gas circuit purge air valve
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0477 VA13-2 918T N/A
Settings : Opening time shall be 35 ± 5 seconds.
Closing time shall be 10 seconds at maximum.
False start drain valve-combustion wrapper
0442 VA17-1 1026 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
False start drain valve-exhaust frame
0442 VA17-2 1026 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
False start drain valve-exhaust plenum
0442 VA17-5 1026 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Atomizing air compressor pressure adjustment valve
0425 VA18-1 1070 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Liquid fuel purge air valve
0477 VA19-1 918T N/A
Characteristics : Normal : C to L opened ; U closed
Compressor bleed valve 11th stage
0417 VA2-1 1022 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Compressor bleed valve 11th stage
0417 VA2-2 1022 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
CA2 booster atomizing air compressor inlet air isolation butterfly valve
0425 VA22-1 0922 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Compressor bleed valve 11th stage
0417 VA2-3 1022 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Compressor bleed valve 11th stage
0417 VA2-4 1022 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 26/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 27 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Quick exhaust pneumatic valve
Characteristics :
0477 VA36-1 918T N/A
under pressure: 1 to 2 open and vent 3 closed
out of pressure: 2 open to vent 3
Quick exhaust pneumatic valve
Characteristics :
0477 VA36-2 918T N/A
under pressure: 1 to 2 open and vent 3 closed
out of pressure: 2 open to vent 3
Pneumatic valve
0494 VA99-11 E021 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
Pneumatic valve
0494 VA99-12 E021 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Pneumatic valve
0494 VA99-13 E021 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO
0434 VAB1 0947 N/A Hydraulic system air bleed valve (main)
0434 VAB2 0947 N/A Hydraulic system air bleed valve (auxiliary)
By pass control valve
0424 VC3 0516 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NO | Stroke = 28.57 mm (1.125 in)
Water injection flow control valve
0462 VC4-1 A035 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NC
0462 VCK100 A035 N/A Check valve
0462 VCK110 A035 N/A Check valve
0462 VCK111 A035 N/A Check valve
Liquid fuel nozzle check valve
0424 VCK1-1T14 0961 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Cracking pressure : 8.27 ± 0.34 bar (120 ± 5 psi)
Liquid fuel primary nozzle purge air check valve
0477 VCK2-1T14 918T N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Cracking pressure : Minimum 0.07 bar (1 psi)
Hydraulic pump check valve for main pump
0434 VCK3-1 0947 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Treshold = 1.5 bar (21.75 psi)
Hydraulic pump check valve for auxiliary pump
0434 VCK3-2 0947 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Treshold = 1.5 bar (21.75 psi)
Turbine exhaust frame cooling check valve
0417 VCK7-1 1233 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : opening pressure : 7 mbar (0.1 psi)
Turbine exhaust frame cooling check valve
0417 VCK7-2 1233 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : opening pressure : 7 mbar (0.1 psi)
Gas control valve primary
0422 VGC-1 0509 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NC | Stroke maxi = 38.1 mm (1.5 in)
0469 VH3-1A 0548 N/A Trip relay, hydraulic IGV
0469 VH3-1B 0548 N/A Trip relay, hydraulic IGV
Gas fuel dump valve (VSR-1) - Stop/speed ratio valve
0422 VH5-1 0507 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Gas fuel dump valve (VGC-1) - Gas control valve
0422 VH5-2 0509 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NC
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 27/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 28 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
0422 VM-1 0639 N/A Coriolis mass flow meter
0434 VM4 1052 N/A Hydraulic filter transfer valve
Fuel liquid purge multiport valve
0424 VP-1 0961 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Fuel liquid purge multiport valve
0424 VP-2 0961 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Bearing header pressure regulator valve
0416 VPR2-1 1023 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Set point : 1.72 +0.13/-0 bar (25 +2/-0 psi)
Filter regulator
0494 VPR30-11 E021 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NO
Settings : 4 ± 0.35 bar (58 ± 5 psi)
Hydraulic supply pump (PH1) compensator
0434 VPR3-1 0627 N/A
Settings : 103.4 ± 1.37 bar (1500 ± 20 psi)
Filter pressure regulator on actuation air of gas fuel purge air valve
0477 VPR44-1 918T N/A
Settings : 2.3 +0/-0.2 bar (33 +0/-3 psi)
Filter pressure regulator on actuation air of gas fuel purge air valve
0477 VPR44-2 918T N/A
Settings : 2.3 +0/-0.2 bar (33 +0/-3 psi)
Filter pressure regulator on actuation air of liquid fuel purge air valve
0477 VPR54-1 918T N/A
Settings : 3.27 +1.7/-0 bar (47.5 +2.7/-0 psi)
Water injection control valve pressure regulation (part of VC4-1)
0462 VPR62-1 A035 N/A
Settings : 3.1 ± 0.1 bar (45 ± 1.5 psi)
Water Injection control valve pressure regulation (part of VS2-2)
0462 VPR62-13 A035 N/A
Settings : 3.1 ± 0.1 bar (45 ± 1.5 psi)
Pressure regulator valve booster AA isolation valve
0425 VPR68-1 0922 N/A
Settings : 3.79 ± 0.13 bar (55 ± 2 psi)
Main lube oil pump pressure relief valve
0416 VR1 1016 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening at 6.89 + 0.13/-0 bar (100 + 2/-0 psi)
Main hydraulic supply pump pressure relief valve
0434 VR21 0947 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : 113.7 ± 1.37 bar (1650 ± 20 psi)
Auxiliary hydraulic supply pump pressure relief valve
0434 VR22 0947 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : 113.7 ± 1.37 bar (1650 ± 20 psi)
Fuel oil supply pressure relief valve
0424 VR27 0992 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : 6.2 ± 0.2 bar (87 ± 2.9 psi)
Main fuel pump pressure relief valve
0424 VR4 0992 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : 82.7 ± 1.72 bar (1200 ± 25 psi)
Pump relief pressure valve
0494 VR60-11 E021 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening at 12 ± 1 bar (174 ± 14.5 psi)
PFA-12 pump relief pressure valve
0494 VR60-12 E021 N/A Characteristics : Normal : NC
Settings : Opening at 12 ± 1 bar (174 ± 14,5 psi)
Fuel oil stop valve
0424 VS1 0511 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NC
Water injection stop valve
0462 VS2-2 A035 N/A
Characteristics : Normal : NC
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 28/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 29 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Wiring
Devices MLI Designation
PID Diagram
Fuel gas stop/speed ratio valve
0422 VSR-1 0507 GAS
Characteristics : Normal : NC | Stroke maxi = 88.9 ± 0.127 mm (3.5 ± 0.05 in)
Thermostatic valve regulating lube oil temperature
0420 VTR1-1 1035 N/A Characteristics : Normal : E to B open, C closed
Settings : Starts to open at Oil T° = 54 ± 2°C (130 ± 3.6 °F)
Thermostatic valve regulating atomizing air temperature
0420 VTR2-1 1027 N/A Characteristics : Normal : B to E open, C closed
Settings : T° air = 107 ± 2 °C (225 ± 3.6 °F)
Resistance thermometer detector support legs water temperature
0420 WT-TL-1 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
Resistance thermometer detector support legs water temperature
0420 WT-TL-2 637T TURB Characteristics : Platinum PT100 | 100 Ohm at 0°C (32 °F) | 0.385 Ohm/°C (0.214
Ohm/°F) | -50 to 260 °C (-58 to 500 °F)
SECTION 01E
SCALE SHEET 29/ 29
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 1 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
REVISIONS
Rev Description
A Première édition
- Modifié schéma de cablâge pour 95BT-1, 2 & 3 : ENCL-T au lieu de ENCL-??
B - Ajout du package module injection d'eau (PID 0436) :
20JS-30, 33JS-1 & 2, 63JS-30, 88JS-1 & 2, AT-WI-1
- Modifié niveau de tension :
C remplacé 230 VAC par 240 VAC et 115 VAC par 120 VAC
- Ajout appareils 20BA-31, 63BA-31, 95BA-4, 5 & 6
- Suppression des appareils 63FL-2, 71QL-1 & 71QH-1
- Ajout appareils 23QV-2 / 88QV-2 / 96QL-1 / 96QV-1 / 96FL-2A & 2B / 96FP-1 & 2 / FF2-2 /
D FF11-2
- Modifié PID pour MLI 0425 : 206D7308 au lieu de 209D7177
- Modifié réglage pour 63PL-21
E Ajout PF1-90
F Ajout de 88QAOB et 88QEOB
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 1/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 2 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
PRESSION : Toutes les pressions sont relatives, abs indique pression absolue.
Abréviations Désignations
AA Air d’atomisation
ACF Pression aval filtre huile contrôle
AD Air sortie compresseur
AE Air d’extraction
AMF Pression aval filtre principal huile
DEC. Décroissant
DPDT Double contact, double pôle
DPG Manomètre – Pression différentielle
FC Fermeture par sécurité
FO Ouverture par sécurité
GF Combustible gazeux
GFV Event de gaz
GPL Fuite aux garnitures vanne combinée gaz
INC. Croissant
LVDT Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel
Model List Item : Code composé de 4 caractères utilisé par
General Electric pour identifier les composants, assemblages,
MLI
plans ou spécifications, exemple : MLI 0414 pour la nomenclature
des appareils de contrôle
NC Normalement fermé
NO Normalement ouvert
Niveau d'énergie zéro absolu, aucune puissance, pas d'huile,
Normal
aucune vitesse, aucune température
OD Retour d’huile
OD
Retour d’huile au-dessus du niveau cuve à huile
OD
Retour d’huile au-dessous du niveau cuve à huile
OH Huile de régulation HP
OHT Huile de sécurité HP
OL Huile de graissage
OLV Event d’huile de graissage
OR Huile de graissage modulée
PC Point de connexion
Le sens de la flèche indique l'écoulement gravitationnel du liquide dû à la
Pente
pente
SPDT Simple contact, double pôle
SPST Simple contact, simple pôle
WD Egouttures d’eau
WF Alimentation d’eau
WR Retour d’eau
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 2/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 3 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 3/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 4 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
Schéma de
Description
câblage
ACCY L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage auxiliaires (MLI 401A)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage du module de ventilation &
AIR
refroidissement (MLI A132)
ENCL-G L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package module gaz (MLI 1658)
L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package module fioul / air
ENCL-LF
atomisation / injection d'eau (MLI 1650)
L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package module huile / gaz
ENCL-LO
(MLI 1634)
ENCL-T L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package turbine (MLI 1605)
L'appareil est dans le plan d'interface du package module d'injection
ENCL-WI
d'eau (MLI 1659)
FILT L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage du filtre à air (MLI A040)
GAS L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module gaz (MLI 0991 ou 401G)
GENE L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage de l'alternateur
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage réchauffage entrée d'air (MLI
IBH
A037)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module fioul / air atomisation /
LF AA WI
injection d'eau (MLI A162)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage du module de recirculation fioul
LF-SR
(MLI 969C)
LO FG L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module huile / gaz (MLI A160)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage du réducteur de puissance (MLI
LOAD
A012)
MIST L'appareil est dans le plan d'arrangement du déshuileur (MLI A098)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module huile (MLI 0991 ou
OIL
401H)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module d'injection vapeur (MLI
STEAM
A135)
TURB L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage turbine (MLI 401T)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module d'injection additive de
VAN
vanadium (MLI E021)
L'appareil est dans le schéma de câblage module d'injection d'eau (MLI
WI
A035)
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 4/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 5 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 5/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 6 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Electrovanne air atomisation pour la commande de VA18-1
0425 20AA-1 0983 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : 1 vers 3 ouvert ; 2 fermé | 0,035 kW | 125 VDC
Electrovanne air atomisation suppresseur de démarrage
0425 20AB-1 0922 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Normal : 1 vers 3 ouvert ; 2 fermé | 0,035 kW | 125 VDC
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment auxiliaires
0436 20BA-30 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment auxilaire
0436 20BA-31 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment turbine
0436 20BT-30 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air
0436 20BT-40 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Electrovanne commande vanne anti-pompage compresseur
0417 20CB-1 1071 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : B vers C ouvert, A fermé | 0,04 kW | 125 VDC
Embrayage électromagnetique pompe à fuel
0424 20CF-1 0601 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 0,16 kW (max) | 125 VDC
Electrovanne de déclenchement vanne de controle gaz (VGC-1)
0422 20FGC-1 0509 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 0,0156 kW | 125 VDC
Electrovanne arrêt combustible gaz
0422 20FGS-1 0507 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 0,0156 kW | 125 VDC
Electrovanne arrêt combustible liquide
0424 20FL-1 1019 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 0,02 kW | 125 VDC
Electrovanne
0494 20IA-11 E021 VAN
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC | 12 W | 125 VDC
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment injection d'eau
0436 20JS-30 1659 ENCL-WI
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Electrovanne commande vanne multiport purge fuel liquide VP-1 et VP-2
0424 20PF-100 0961 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : A vers P ouvert. B fermé | 40 W | 125 VDC
Electrovanne de commande de la VA13-1
Caractéristiques : Normal : 1 vers 3 ouvert ; 2 fermé | 0,035 kW | 125 VDC
0477 20PG-1 0991 GAS
Réglages : Installation d'un robinet-pointeau en amont de 20PG-1 pour régler le temps
d'ouverture de VA13-1 à 30 secondes
Electrovanne de commande de la VA13-2
Caractéristiques : Normal : 1 vers 3 ouvert ; 2 fermé | 0,035 kW | 125 VDC
0477 20PG-2 0991 GAS
Réglages : Installation d'un robinet-pointeau en amont de 20PG-1 pour régler le temps
d'ouverture de VA13-1 à 30 secondes
Electrovanne de commande de la VA19-1
0477 20PL-1 918T TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : 1 vers 3 ouvert ; 2 fermé | 0,035 kW | 125 VDC
Electrovanne d'appoint / décharge du convertisseur de couple
0421 20TU-1 0605 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Electrovanne système déclenchement des aubes variables entrée compresseur (IGV)
0469 20TV-1 1019 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 0,1 kW | 125 VDC
Vanne motorisée lavage compresseur off-Line
0442 20TW-1. 0953 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : FC | 0,092 kW | 50 Hz | 115 VAC
Vanne motorisée lavage compresseur on-Line
0442 20TW-3. 0953 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : FC | 0,092 kW | 50 Hz | 115 VAC
Electrovanne évent combustible gaz
0422 20VG-1 0991 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 0,009 kW | 125 VDC
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 6/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 7 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Electrovanne de mise à l'évent de l'espace inter-vannes VA13-1 et VA13-2
0477 20VG-2 0991 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 0,125 kW | 125 VDC
Electro-aimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment puissance
0436 20VG--30 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Electroaimant clapet de filtration entrée d'air compartiment gaz
0436 20VL-30 1658 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Electrovanne arrêt injection d'eau
0462 20WN-1 A035 WI
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 125 VDC
Electrovanne d'arrêt injection d'eau (partie de VS2-2)
0462 20WN-2 A035 WI
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | 125 VDC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88AB-1
0425 23AB-1 1047 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88BA-1
0436 23BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88BA-2
0436 23BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88BT-1
0436 23BT-1 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88BT-2
0436 23BT-2 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88CR-1
0421 23CR-1 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,18 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88CR-1
0421 23CR-2 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,18 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88CR-1
0421 23CR-3 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,18 kW | 240 VAC
Chauffage compartiment auxiliaires
0436 23HA-1 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 3,9 kW | 415 VAC
Chauffage compartiment gaz
0436 23HA-11 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 3,9 kW | 415 VAC
Chauffage entrée d'air du compartiment gaz
0436 23HA-12 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 15 kW | 415 VAC
Chauffage compartiment auxiliaires
0436 23HA-2 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 3,9 kW | 415 VAC
Chauffage compartiment auxiliaires
0436 23HA-3 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 3,9 kW | 415 VAC
Chauffage compartiment auxiliaires
0436 23HA-4 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 3,9 kW | 415 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88HQ-1
0434 23HQ-1 0628 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Chauffage compartiment turbine
0436 23HT-1 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 3,9 kW | 415 VAC
Chauffage compartiment turbine
0436 23HT-2 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 3,9 kW | 415 VAC
Chauffage compartiment turbine
0436 23HT-3 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 3,9 kW | 415 VAC
Chauffage compartiment turbine
0436 23HT-4 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 3,9 kW | 415 VAC
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 7/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 8 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88QA-1
0416 23QA-1 1006 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Thermoplongeur réservoir d'huile
0416 23QT-1 0938 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 10,2 kW | 415 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88QV-1
0416 23QV-1 A098 MIST
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88QV-2
0416 23QV-2 A098 MIST
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88TG-1
0421 23TG-1 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88TK-1
0417 23TK-1 1233 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88TK-2
0417 23TK-2 1233 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88VG-1
0436 23VG-1 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation du moteur 88VG-2
0436 23VG-2 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
Résistance anti-condensation moteur 88WN-1
0462 23WN-1 A035 WI
Caractéristiques : 50 Hz | 0,05 kW | 240 VAC
0471 27TF-1 A040 FILT Report d'alarme général filtre à air
0415 28FD-10 1121 TURB Détecteur de flamme chambre de combustion n°10
0415 28FD-11 1121 TURB Détecteur de flamme chambre de combustion n°11
0415 28FD-4 1121 TURB Détecteur de flamme chambre de combustion n°4
0415 28FD-5 1121 TURB Détecteur de flamme chambre de combustion n°5
Relais alarme
0415 30SG-1 1213 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment auxilaire
0436 33BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment auxiliaire
0436 33BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment TG
0436 33BT-1 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Volet fermé : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment TG
0436 33BT-2 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Volet fermé : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne anti-pompage (11 ème étage)
0417 33CB-1 1022 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne ouverte : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne anti-pompage (11 ème étage)
0417 33CB-2 1022 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne ouverte : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne anti-pompage (11 ème étage)
0417 33CB-3 1022 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne ouverte : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne anti-pompage (11 ème étage)
0417 33CB-4 1022 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne ouverte : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 8/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 9 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Fin de course porte du compartiment auxiliaire
0436 33DT-1 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Porte fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course porte du compartiment gaz
0436 33DT-11 1658 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Porte fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course porte du compartiment gaz
0436 33DT-12 1658 ENCL-G Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Porte fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course porte du compartiment gaz
0436 33DT-13 1658 ENCL-G Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Porte fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course porte du compartiment gaz
0436 33DT-14 1658 ENCL-G Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Porte fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course porte du compartiment auxiliaire
0436 33DT-2 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Porte fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course porte de l'enceinte TG
0436 33DT-3 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Porte fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course porte de l'enceinte TG
0436 33DT-4 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Porte fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne arrêt combustible liquide
0424 33FL-1 0511 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation de l'enceinte du skid injection d'eau
0436 33JS-1 1659 ENCL-WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Volet fermé : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation de l'enceinte du skid injection d'eau
0436 33JS-2 1659 ENCL-WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Volet fermé : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course sur vanne multiport VP-1
0424 33PF-1 0961 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course sur vanne multiport VP-2
0424 33PF-2 0961 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course position fermeture de VA13-1
0477 33PG-1 0991 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course position ouverture de VA13-1
0477 33PG-2 0991 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne ouverte : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course position fermeture de VA13-2
0477 33PG-3 0991 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course position ouverture de VA13-2
0477 33PG-4 0991 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne ouverte : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 9/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 10 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Fin de course position électrovanne convertisseur de couple
0421 33TC-1 0605 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : 20TU-1 au repos : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course couple bas convertisseur de couple
0421 33TM-5 0605 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO, vanne fermée pour IGV fermé ou couple max
Réglages : Réglé à 2 tr de crémaillère (échelle 0-31 tr de crémaillère)
Fin de course couple haut convertisseur de couple
0421 33TM-6 0605 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO, vanne fermée pour IGV fermé ou couple max
Réglages : Réglé à 28 tr de crémaillère (échelle 0-31 tr de crémaillère)
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment puissance
0436 33VG-1 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Volet fermé : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course électrovanne 20VG-1
0422 33VG-11 0991 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Vanne ouverte : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment puissance
0436 33VG-2 1605 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Volet fermé : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment gaz
0436 33VL-1 1658 ENCL-G Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Volet fermé : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course clapet anti-retour de la ventilation du compartiment gaz
0436 33VL-2 1658 ENCL-G Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Volet fermé : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne de contrôle (partie de VC4-1)
0462 33WN-1 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne complètement ouverte : fin de course activé, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne de contrôle (partie de VC4-1)
0462 33WN-2 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne complètement fermée : fin de course actionné, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne stop (partie de VS2-2)
0462 33WN-3 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne complètement ouverte : fin de course activé, contact fermé
Fin de course vanne stop (partie de VS2-2)
0462 33WN-4 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Vanne complètement fermée : fin de course activé, contact fermé
Capteur de vibration
0415 39V-1A 1218 TURB
Caractéristiques : Pour 25,4 mm/s, 150 ± 4,5 mV crête
Capteur de vibration
0415 39V-1B 1218 TURB
Caractéristiques : Pour 25,4 mm/s, 150 ± 4,5 mV crête
Capteur de vibration
0415 39V-2A 1218 TURB
Caractéristiques : Pour 25,4 mm/s, 150 ± 4,5 mV crête
Capteur de vibration
0415 39V-3A 1218 TURB
Caractéristiques : Pour 25,4 mm/s, 150 ± 4,5 mV crête
Capteur de vibration
0415 39V-3B 1218 TURB
Caractéristiques : Pour 25,4 mm/s, 150 ± 4,5 mV crête
Capteur de vibration
0415 39VS-11 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Capteur de vibration
0415 39VS-12 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 10/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 11 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Capteur de vibration
0415 39VS-21 235B TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Capteur de vibration
0415 39VS-22 235B TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Capteur de vibration
0415 39VS-23 235B TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Capteur de vibration
0415 39VS-24 235B TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Capteur de vibration
0415 39VS-31 235C TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Capteur de vibration
0415 39VS-32 235C TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment auxiliaire
0426 43CP-1 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment TG
0426 43CP-2 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment auxiliaire
0426 43CP-3 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment TG
0426 43CP-4 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment puissance
0426 43CP-5 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment gaz
0426 43CP-6 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Bris de glace porte d'accès compartiment gaz
0426 43CP-7 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Bouton-poussoir lavage off-Line
0442 43TW-1/PB 1105 TURB
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaires
0426 45FA-10A 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaires
0426 45FA-10B 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaires
0426 45FA-11A 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaires
0426 45FA-11B 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaires
0426 45FA-12A 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaires
0426 45FA-12B 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 11/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 12 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaires
0426 45FA-13A 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaires
0426 45FA-13B 1113 ENCL-T Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaire
0426 45FA-1A 1104 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaire
0426 45FA-1B 1104 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaire
0426 45FA-2A 1104 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment auxiliaire
0426 45FA-2B 1104 ACCY Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment gaz
0426 45FA-6A A116 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment gaz
0426 45FA-6B 1195 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment gaz
0426 45FA-7A A116 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment gaz
0426 45FA-7B A116 GAS Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 163 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment TG
0426 45FT-1A 1103 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 316 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment TG
0426 45FT-1B 1103 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 316 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment TG
0426 45FT-2A 1154 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 316 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment TG
0426 45FT-2B 1154 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 316 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment TG
0426 45FT-3A 1154 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 316 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment TG
0426 45FT-3B 1154 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 316 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment puissance
0426 45FT-8A 1160 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 385 ± 14°C
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 12/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 13 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment puissance
0426 45FT-8B 1160 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 385 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment puissance
0426 45FT-9A 1160 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 316 ± 14°C
Détecteur thermostatique incendie compartiment puissance
0426 45FT-9B 1160 TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Fermé : 316 ± 14°C
Détecteur gaz compartment auxiliaire
0474 45HA-1 1153 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz
0474 45HA-10 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz
0474 45HA-11 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz
0474 45HA-12 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz compartiment auxiliaire
0474 45HA-2 1153 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz compartiment auxiliaire
0474 45HA-3 1153 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz dans gaine de ventilation compartiment gaz
0474 45HA-4 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz dans gaine de ventilation compartiment gaz
0474 45HA-5 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz dans gaine de ventilation compartiment gaz
0474 45HA-6 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz compartiment turbine
0474 45HT-1 1154 TURB
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz compartiment turbine
0474 45HT-2 1154 TURB
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz compartiment turbine
0474 45HT-3 1154 TURB
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz dans gaine de ventilation compartiment turbine
0474 45HT-4 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz dans gaine de ventilation compartiment turbine
0474 45HT-5 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Détecteur gaz dans gaine de ventilation compartiment turbine
0474 45HT-6 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Gamme de mesure : 0 à 20% LIE
Thermostat de sécurité chauffage compartiment gaz
0436 49HA-12 1658 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | Fermé à 100°C
Bouton d'arrêt d'urgence compartiment auxiliaire
0426 5E-1 1104 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Bouton d'arrêt d'urgence compartiment auxiliaire
0426 5E-2 1104 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Pressostat
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0494 63AF-11 E021 VAN
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 3 ± 0,25 bar
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 13/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 14 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air compartiment auxiliaire
0436 63BA-30 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Fermé à 1 ± 0,1 mbar
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air compartiment auxiliaire
0436 63BA-31 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Fermé à 1 ± 0,1 mbar
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air
0436 63BT-30 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Fermé à 1 ± 0,1 mbar
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air
0436 63BT-40 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Fermé à 1 ± 0,1 mbar
Pressostat pression basse entrée air comprimé filtre à air TG
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0471 63CA-1 A040 FILT Réglages :
Ouvert à la descente à : 5,5 ± 0,5 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la montée à : 6 ± 0,5 bar
Pressostat différentiel admission d'air TG
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0471 63CS-2A A040 FILT
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 23 ± 0,5 mbar
Pressostat différentiel admission d'air TG
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0471 63CS-2B A040 FILT
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 23 ± 0,5 mbar
Manostat
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0422 63FG-1 0991 GAS Réglages :
Non réglable : ouvert à la montée à : 2,41 ± 0,05 bar |
Fermé à la descente à : 1,03 ± 0,05 bar
Manostat
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0422 63FG-2 0991 GAS Réglages :
Non réglable : ouvert à la montée à : 2,41 ± 0,05 bar |
Fermé à la descente à : 1,03 ± 0,05 bar
Manostat différentiel filtre alimentation hydraulique
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0434 63HF-1 0926 ACCY Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 4,13 ± 0,2 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la descente à : 2,75 ± 1,03 bar
Manostat de pression basse alimentation huile HP
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0434 63HQ-1 0926 ACCY Réglages :
Ouvert à la descente à : 93 ± 1,7 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la montée à : 100 ± 3,1 bar
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air compartiment injection d'eau
0436 63JS-30 1659 ENCL-WI Réglages :
Fermé à 1 ± 0,1 mbar
Manostat de pression différentielle filtre fuel principal
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0424 63LF-3 0992 ACCY
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 1,3 ± 0,07 bar
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 14/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 15 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Manostat sur pression dans l'espace inter vannes VA13-1 et VA13-2
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0477 63PG-1 0991 GAS Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 3,45 ± 0,14 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la descente à : 3,17 ± 0,21 bar
Manostat sur air de balayage des injecteurs de combustible liquide
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0477 63PL-21 918T TURB Réglages :
Non réglable : ouvert à la descente à : 4,6 ± 0,3 bar |
Fermé à la montée à : 6 ± 0,3 bar
Manostat pression huile de lubrification
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0416 63QA-2 0926 ACCY Réglages :
Ouvert à la descente à : 2,8 ± 0,07 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la montée à : 3,1 ± 0,14 bar
Manostat pression différentielle filtre huile principal
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0416 63QQ-1 0926 ACCY Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 1,03 ± 0,068 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la descente à : 0,9 ± 0,2 bar
Alarme haute pression différentielle filtre de l'éliminateur de brouillard d'huile
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0416 63QQ-10 A098 MIST
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 80 ± 3 mbar
Manostat pression différentielle filtre convertisseur de couple
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0416 63QQ-8 0916 ACCY
Réglages :
Ouvert à la montée à : 1,5 ± 0,2 bar
Manostat pression huile de lubrification palier #2 alternateur
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0416 63QT-2A ALT. GENE Réglages :
Ouvert à la descente à : 0,55 ± 0,021 bar |
Non réglable : fermé à la montée à : 0,62 ± 0,035 bar
Manostat de contrôle de ventilation du corps turbine
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0417 63TK-1 A053 ACCY
Réglages :
Fermé au dessus de 381 ± 19 mm H2O
Manostat de contrôle de ventilation du corps turbine
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0417 63TK-2 A053 ACCY
Réglages :
Fermé au dessus de 381 ± 19 mm H2O
Pressostat différentiel, entrée d'air compartiment puissance
0436 63VG-30 1605 ENCL-T Réglages :
Fermé à 1 ± 0,1 mbar
Pressostat différentiel entrée d'air compartiment gaz
0436 63VL-30 1658 ENCL-T Réglages :
Fermé à 1 ± 0,1 mbar
Pressostat différentiel entrée pompe injection d'eau
0462 63WN-1 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouvert à la descente à : -0,270 ± 0,01 bar
Pressostat sortie pompe injection d'eau
0462 63WN-2 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Ouvert à la descente à : 25 bar
Pressostat sortie pompe injection d'eau
0462 63WN-3 A035 WI Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouvert à la montée à : 1,03 ± 0,1 bar
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 15/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 16 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
0424 65FP 0533 ACCY Servovalve (bypass) pompe à fuel
0422 65GC-1 0509 GAS Servovalve contrôle gaz (VGC-1)
Controleur de niveau
0494 71FA-11 E021 VAN Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Ouvert à niveau bas
Contrôleur de niveau
0494 71FA-12 E021 VAN Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : Ouvert à niveau bas
Détecteur de niveau
0442 71FF-4 969L TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture au niveau haut
Détecteur de niveau
0442 71FF-5 969L TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture au niveau très haut
Détecteur de niveau
0442 71FF-6 969L TURB Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture au niveau très haut
Capteur de vitesse magnétique diviseur de débit
0424 77FD-1 0910 ACCY
Réglages : Entrefer : 0,23 ± 0,025 mm
Capteur de vitesse magnétique diviseur de débit
0424 77FD-2 0910 ACCY
Réglages : Entrefer : 0,23 ± 0,025 mm
Capteur de vitesse magnétique diviseur de débit
0424 77FD-3 0910 ACCY
Réglages : Entrefer : 0,23 ± 0,025 mm
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77HT-1 0546 TURB
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,27 ± 0,127 mm
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77HT-2 0546 TURB
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,27 ± 0,127 mm
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77HT-3 0546 TURB
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,27 ± 0,127 mm
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77NH-1 0546 TURB
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,27 ± 0,127 mm
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77NH-2 0546 TURB
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,27 ± 0,127 mm
Capteur de vitesse
0415 77NH-3 0546 TURB
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,27 ± 0,127 mm
Capteur de vibration
0415 77RP-11 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Moteur compresseur de démarrage air atomisation
0425 88AB-1 1047 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 15 kW | 2925 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilateur refroidissement compartiment TG
0436 88BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 15 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilateur refroidissement compartiment TG
0436 88BA-2 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 15 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilateur refroidissement compartiment TG
0436 88BT-1 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 37 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilateur refroidissement compartiment TG
0436 88BT-2 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 37 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique de lancement
0421 88CR-1 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 1000 kW | 2975 tr/min | 6,6 kV | 50 Hz
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 16/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 17 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Moteur électrique
0494 88FA-10 E021 VAN
Caractéristiques : 0,46 kW | 1500 tr/min | 240 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique
0494 88FA-11 E021 VAN
Caractéristiques : 0,37 kW | 1500 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique
0494 88FA-12 E021 VAN
Caractéristiques : 0,37 kW | 1500 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique démarrage répartiteur de débit combustible liquide
0424 88FM 0613 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 0,37 kW | 1400 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moto-pompe auxiliaire huile HP
0434 88HQ-1 0628 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 15 kW | 1450 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilation enceinte acoustique skid injection d'eau
0436 88JS-1 1659 ENCL-WI
Caractéristiques : 0,37 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilation enceinte acoustique skid injection d'eau
0436 88JS-2 1659 ENCL-WI
Caractéristiques : 0,37 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique de la pompe à huile auxiliaire
0416 88QA-1 1006 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 90 kW | 3000 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur pompe de lubrification principale de la pompe Warren fuel liquide
0424 88QAOB 0611 OTHER
Caractéristiques : 0,75 kW | 415 VAC
Moteur électrique de la pompe à huile de secours
0416 88QE-1 1007 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 7,5 kW | 1750 tr/min | 125 VDC
Moteur pompe de lubrification d'urgence de la pompe Warren fuel liquide
0424 88QEOB 0611 OTHER
Caractéristiques : 0,75 kW | 125 VDC
Moteur électrique de l'éliminateur de brouillard
0416 88QV-1 A098 MIST
Caractéristiques : 18,5 kW | 3000 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique de l'éliminateur de brouillard
0416 88QV-2 A098 MIST
Caractéristiques : 18,5 kW | 3000 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique de virage
0421 88TG-1 0538 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 30 kW | 725 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Ventilateur centrifuge + moteur électrique groupe moto ventilateur refroidissement corps
0417 88TK-1 1233 ACCY TG
Caractéristiques : 45 kW | 2900 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Ventilateur centrifuge + moteur électrique groupe moto ventilateur refroidissement corps
0417 88TK-2 1233 ACCY TG
Caractéristiques : 45 kW | 2900 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur convertisseur de couple
0421 88TM-1 0605 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 1,5 kW | 3000 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilateur refroidissement compartiment puissance
0436 88VG-1 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 11 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilateur refroidissement compartiment puissance
0436 88VG-2 1605 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 11 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilateur compartiment gaz
0436 88VL-1 1658 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : 4 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur électrique ventilateur compartiment gaz
0436 88VL-2 1658 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : 4 kW | - tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
Moteur de la pompe à injection d'eau
0462 88WN-1 A035 WI
Caractéristiques : 55 kW | 3000 tr/min | 415 VAC | 50 Hz
0422 90SR-1 0507 GAS Servovalve arrêt et régulation gaz
0469 90TV-1 0548 TURB Servovalve actionneur IGV compresseur
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 17/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 18 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Régulateur électro-pneumatique
Réglages :
0462 90WN-1 A035 WI
04 ± 0,20 mA pour 0 ± 0,01 bar
20 ± 0,20 mA pour 3,1 ± 0,1 bar
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation
0436 95BA-1 1605 ENCL-T
Réglages : 16 ± 1 mA lorsque le ventilateur fonctionne
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-2 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-3 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-4 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-5 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BA-6 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation compartiment turbine
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-1 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation compartiment turbine
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-2 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation compartiment turbine
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-3 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation compartiment turbine
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-4 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation compartiment turbine
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-5 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 18/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 19 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation compartiment turbine
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
0436 95BT-6 1605 ENCL-T Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
Transformateur pour bougie d'allumage 95SP-13
0415 95SG-13 1213 TURB
Caractéristiques : 0,15 kVA | 115 VAC (230 VAC) | 15 kV | 50 Hz
Transformateur pour bougie d'allumage 95SP-14
0415 95SG-14 1213 TURB
Caractéristiques : 0,15 kVA | 115 VAC (230 VAC) | 15 kV | 50 Hz
0415 95SP-13 1214 TURB Bougie d'allumage chambre de combustion n°13
0415 95SP-14 1214 TURB Bougie d'allumage chambre de combustion n°14
Contrôleur de débit d'air (anémomètre) de ventilation compartiment gaz
Caractéristiques : 4 - 20 mA pour 0,5 - 30 m/s
Réglages : ventilateur à l'arrêt sans débit d'air : 4 -0/+1 mA
0436 95VL-1 1658 ENCL-G
ventilateur en service et portes fermées : x1 mA, régler la constante du speedtronic à une
valeur équivalente à { [60% x (x1 - 4) ] + 4 mA }
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 19/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 20 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Transmetteur de pression sortie compresseur
Réglages :
0417 96CD-1C 0557 ACCY
04 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,05 mA pour 21 bar
Transmetteur de pression
Réglages :
0492 96CS-1 0559 ACCY
04 ± 0,02 mA pour 0 mbar
20 ± 0,10 mA pour 27,4 mbar
Transmetteur de pression différentielle admission d'air TG
Réglages :
0471 96CS-3 A040 FILT
04 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 mbar
20 ± 0,05 mA pour 63 mbar
Transmetteur de pression entrée module gaz
Réglages :
0422 96FG-1 0991 GAS
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 34,5 bar
Transmetteur de pression gaz inter-vanne
Réglages :
0422 96FG-2A 0991 GAS
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 34,5 bar
Transmetteur de pression gaz inter-vanne
Réglages :
0422 96FG-2B 0991 GAS
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 34,5 bar
Transmetteur de pression gaz inter-vanne
Réglages :
0422 96FG-2C 0991 GAS
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 34,5 bar
Transmetteur de pression entrée module fuel
Réglages :
0424 96FL-2A 0992 ACCY
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 10 bar
Transmetteur de pression entrée module fuel
Réglages :
0424 96FL-2B 0992 ACCY
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 10 bar
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT) vanne contrôle liquid fuel (VC3)
Réglages :
0424 96FP-1 0992 ACCY
0,7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
3,5 ± 0.01 VAC for 20,5 mm
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT) vanne contrôle fuel (VC3)
Réglages :
0424 96FP-2 0992 ACCY
0,7 ± 0.01 VAC for 0 mm
3,5 ± 0.01 VAC for 20,5 mm
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT) vanne contrôle gaz (VGC-1)
0422 96GC-1,2 0509 GAS
Réglages : 0,7 ± 0,01 VAC pour 0 mm
Transmetteur de pression huile de lubrification avant VPR-2
Réglages :
0416 96QA-2 0926 ACCY
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 7 bar
Transmetteur de niveau de la cuve à huile
Réglages :
0416 96QL-1 1038 ACCY
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 456 mm
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 246 mm
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 20/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 21 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Transmetteur pression huile de graissage palier #2 alternateur
Réglages :
0416 96QT-2B ALT. GENE
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 1,72 bar
Transmetteur pression d'air dans la cuve
Réglages :
0416 96QV-1 A098 MIST
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 bar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 0,025 bar
Transmetteur de point de rosée et de température
Réglages :
Sortie 1 :
04 ± 0,05 mA pour -50°C
0471 96RH A040 FILT
20 ± 0,05 mA pour +50°C
Sortie 2 :
04 ± 0,05 mA pour 0% HR
20 ± 0,05 mA pour 100 % HR
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT) vanne stop ratio gaz (VSR-1)
0422 96SR-1,2 0507 GAS
Réglages : 0,7 ± 0,01 VAC pour 0 mm
Transmetteur de pression différentielle de l'étage de filtration
Réglages :
0471 96TF-1 A040 FILT
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 mbar
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 25 mbar
Transmetteur de position aubes variables convertisseur de couple
Réglages :
0421 96TM-1 0605 ACCY
04 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 tr de crémaillère (échelle 0-31 tr de crémaillère)
20 ± 0,05 mA pour 31 tr de crémaillère (échelle 0-31 tr de crémaillère)
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT), actionneur aubes variables entrée
0469 96TV-1 0548 TURB compresseur
Réglages : 0,7 ± 0,01 VAC pour 34° angle IGV
Transmetteur de position linéaire différentiel (LVDT), actionneur aubes variables entrée
0469 96TV-2 0548 TURB compresseur
Réglages : 0,7 ± 0,01 VAC pour 34° angle IGV
Capteur de vibration
0415 96VC-11 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Capteur de vibration
0415 96VC-12 235A TURB Caractéristiques : Sortie proximitor : 7,87 V/mm
Réglages : Entrefer : 1,4 ± 0,05 mm
Transmetteur de débit massique gaz
Réglages : Réglages usine :
0422 96VM-1 0639 GAS
4 ± 0,05 mA pour 0 kg/s
20 ± 0,1 mA pour 10 kg/s
Transmetteur de débit
Réglages :
0462 96WF-1 A035 WI
04 ± 0,2 mA pour 0 m3/h
20 ± 0,2 mA pour 30 ± 0,1 m3/h
Transmetteur de débit
Réglages :
0462 96WF-2 A035 WI
04 ± 0,2 mA pour 0 m3/h
20 ± 0,2 mA pour 30 ± 0,1 m3/h
Transmetteur de débit
Réglages :
0462 96WF-3 A035 WI
04 ± 0,2 mA pour 0 m3/h
20 ± 0,2 mA pour 30 ± 0,1 m3/h
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 21/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 22 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Thermocouple sur air en aval du réfrigérant d'air d'atomisation
0425 AAT-1A 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple sur air en aval du réfrigérant d'air d'atomisation
0425 AAT-2A 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Accumulateur sur huile de contrôle
0434 AH1-1 0908 N/A Caractéristiques : 17,8 l | Azote
Réglages : 51,7 ± 1 bar
Accumulateur sur huile de contrôle
0422 AH1-3 0991 N/A Caractéristiques : 17,8 l
Réglages : 51,7 ± 1 bar
0471 AR-20 A040 FILT Armoire électrique filtre à air
Thermocouple compartiment auxiliaire
0436 AT-AC-1 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple compartiment gaz
0436 AT-AC-11 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Type K
Température compartiment puissance
0436 AT-LC-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Température compartiment turbine
0436 AT-TC-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Thermocouple : compartiment turbine
0436 AT-TC-2 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple : compartiment turbine
0436 AT-TC-3 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : Type K
Température compartiment injection d'eau compartiment injection d'eau
0436 AT-WI-1 1659 ENCL-WI
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température coussinet du palier n°1
0415 BT-J1-1A,1B 235A TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température coussinet du palier n°1
0415 BT-J1-2A,2B 235A TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température coussinet du palier n°2
0415 BT-J2-1A,1B 235B TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température coussinet du palier n°2
0415 BT-J2-2A,2B 235B TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température coussinet du palier n°3
0415 BT-J3-1A,1B 235C TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température coussinet du palier n°3
0415 BT-J3-2A,2B 235C TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température patin n°2 de la butée du palier n°1
0415 BT-TA1-2A,2B 235A TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température patin n°5 de la butée du palier n°1
0415 BT-TA1-5A,5B 235A TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température patin n°8 de la butée du palier n°1
0415 BT-TA1-8A,8B 235A TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température patin n°2 de la contre butée du palier n°1
0415 BT-TI1-2A,2B 235A TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température patin n°5 de la contre butée du palier n°1
0415 BT-TI1-5A,5B 235A TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple dual température patin n°9 de la contre butée du palier n°1
0415 BT-TI1-9A,9B 235A TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 22/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 23 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Compresseur principal d'air d'atomisation
0425 CA1 0607 N/A
Caractéristiques : Centrifuge | 2,7 kg/s |6600 tr/min
Compresseur d'air d'atomisation de démarrage
0425 CA2 1047 N/A
Caractéristiques : Volumétrique | 510 m3/h | 6200 tr/min
Thermocouple température air sortie du compresseur
0415 CT-DA-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température air sortie du compresseur
0415 CT-DA-2 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température air entrée du compresseur
0415 CT-IF-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température air entrée du compresseur
0415 CT-IF-2 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Détecteur de température à résistance
0492 CT-IF-3/R 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Capteur de température 1 stator Ph1 du moteur de lancement
0421 ET-CRS-11/R 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Capteur de température 2 stator Ph1 du moteur de lancement
0421 ET-CRS-12/R 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Capteur de température 1 stator Ph2 du moteur de lancement
0421 ET-CRS-21/R 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Capteur de température 2 stator Ph2 du moteur de lancement
0421 ET-CRS-22/R 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Capteur de température 1 stator Ph3 du moteur de lancement
0421 ET-CRS-31/R 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Capteur de température 2 stator Ph3 du moteur de lancement
0421 ET-CRS-32/R 0603 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Filtre sur air de balayage du combustible liquide
0477 FA3-1 918T N/A
Caractéristiques : 5 µm
Filtre sur air de commande des systèmes d'air d'atomisation et d'air de balayage
0425 FA4-1 0983 N/A
Caractéristiques : 5 µm
Filtre à air injection d'eau
0462 FA8-2 A035 N/A
Caractéristiques : 5 µm
Répartiteur de débit
0424 FD1-1 0613 N/A Caractéristiques : type linéaire : 7 éléments à double pompes | 1650 Hz | 883 l/min à 1650
tr/min
Filtre
0494 FF11-1 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : 910 µm
Filtre
0494 FF11-2 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : 910 µm
Filtre fuel HP
0424 FF2-1 1014 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 40 = 75
Filtre fuel HP
0424 FF2-2 1014 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 40=75
Filtre alimentation huile HP
0434 FH2-1 1051 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 3 > 200
Filtre alimentation huile HP
0434 FH2-2 1051 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 3 > 200
Filtre hydraulique servo vanne fuel liquide (contrôle)
0424 FH3 0992 N/A
Caractéristiques : 40 µm
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 23/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 24 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Filtre alimentation bloc de commande hydraulique IGV
0469 FH6-1 0548 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 15 = 75
Filtre hydraulique du circuit d'alimentation de la servo-valve de la VSR
0422 FH7-1 0507 N/A
Caractéristiques : 15 µ abs
Filtre hydraulique alimentation hydraulique vanne control gaz (VGC)
0422 FH8-1 0509 N/A
Caractéristiques : 15 µ abs
Débimètre injection d'eau
0462 FM1-1 A035 WI
Caractéristiques : 3,6 m3/h | 29,5 m3/h | Facteur nominal K : 158,5 impulsions / l
Filtre haute pression
0462 FW1-1 A035 N/A
Caractéristiques : Béta 13 = 75
Filtre cônique amont pompe d'injection d'eau
0462 FW1-2 A035 N/A
Caractéristiques : Media filtrant 800µm
Filtre cônique aval débimètre
0462 FW1-3 A035 N/A
Caractéristiques : Media filtrant 150µm
0421 HM-1 0605 N/A Convertisseur de couple et inverseur
Ensemble actionneur système aubes variables entrée compresseur
0469 HM3-1 0548 N/A
Caractéristiques : Course vérin de 32° à 86°
0425 HX1-1 1003 N/A Réfrigérant de l'air d'atomisation en amont du compresseur d'air d'atomisation
Thermocouple retour huile palier #1
0416 LT-B1D-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple retour huile palier #2
0416 LT-B2D-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple retour huile palier #3
0416 LT-B3D-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple retour huile butées palier #1
0416 LT-BT1D-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple retour d'huile palier #1 alternateur et réducteur
0416 LT-G1D-1 ALT. GENE
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple retour d'huile palier #2 alternateur et réducteur
0416 LT-G2D-1 ALT. GENE
Caractéristiques : Type K
Détecteur de température à résistance
0416 LT-OT-1A 637A ACCY
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Détecteur de température à résistance
0416 LT-OT-2A 637A ACCY
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
Thermocouple huile de lubrification collecteur turbine
0416 LT-TH-1A,1B 637A ACCY
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple huile de lubrification collecteur turbine
0416 LT-TH-2A,2B 637A ACCY
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple huile de lubrification collecteur turbine
0416 LT-TH-3A,3B 637A ACCY
Caractéristiques : Type K
0422 MG1 0512 N/A Injecteur combustible gaz
Pompe Principale Combustible Liquide
0424 PF1 0611 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Pompe à vis | 870,5 l/min | 68,9 bar | 1550 tr/min
Pompe de lubrification
0424 PF1-90 0611 N/A
Caractéristiques : Voir le P&ID LMA-37361
Pompe de chargement
0494 PFA-10 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : Pompe volumétrique | 25 l/min
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 24/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 25 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Pompe doseuse
0494 PFA-11 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : Pompe volumétrique à piston | 4 l/h | 10 bar | 1500 tr/min
Pompe doseuse
0494 PFA-12 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : Volumétrique à piston | 4 l/h | 10 bar | 1500 tr/min
Pompe hydraulique principale
0434 PH1 0627 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Type volumétrique à débit variable | 65 l/min | 105 bar | 1422 tr/min
Pompe auxiliaire huile HP
0434 PH2 0628 ACCY
Caractéristiques : Volumétrique | 45,4 l/min | 105 bar | 1450 tr/min
Respirateur du bac 501BA
0494 PSV-11 E021 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Surpression : 0.15 bar ; Vide : 0.01 bar
0462 PW1-1 A035 N/A Groupe moto-pompe injection d'eau
Avertisseur lumineux compartiment auxiliaire
0426 SLI-1 1104 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 240 UPS | 50 Hz
Avertisseur incendie compartiment auxiliaire
0426 SLI-1A 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Avertisseur incendie compartiment TG
0426 SLI-1B 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Avertisseur incendie compartiment TG
0426 SLI-1C 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Avertisseur incendie compartiment gaz
0426 SLI-1D 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : Alarme lumineuse | 24 VDC
Avertisseur incendie compartiment gaz
0426 SLI-1E 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Avertisseur lumineux compartiment auxiliaire
0426 SLI-2 1104 ACCY
Caractéristiques : 240 UPS | 50 Hz
Avertisseur incendie compartiment TG
0426 SLI-2B 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Avertisseur incendie compartiment TG
0426 SLI-2C 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Avertisseur incendie compartiment gaz
0426 SLI-2E 1195 ENCL-G
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Avertisseur incendie compartiment puissance
0426 SLI-3C 1113 ENCL-T
Caractéristiques : 24 VDC
Thermocouple température tunnel échappement
0415 TT-IB-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position extérieure après première roue
0415 TT-WS1AO-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position extérieure après première roue
0415 TT-WS1AO-2 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position intérieure avant première roue
0415 TT-WS1FI-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position intérieure avant première roue
0415 TT-WS1FI-2 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position extérieure après deuxième roue
0415 TT-WS2AO-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position extérieure après deuxième roue
0415 TT-WS2AO-2 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 25/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 26 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Thermocouple température position extérieure avant deuxième roue
0415 TT-WS2FO-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position extérieure avant deuxième roue
0415 TT-WS2FO-2 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position extérieure après troisième roue
0415 TT-WS3AO-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position extérieure après troisième roue
0415 TT-WS3AO-2 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position extérieure avant troisième roue
0415 TT-WS3FO-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température position extérieure avant troisième roue
0415 TT-WS3FO-2 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-1 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-10 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-11 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-12 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-13 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-14 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-15 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-16 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-17 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-18 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-19 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-2 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-20 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-21 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-22 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-23 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-24 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-3 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 26/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 27 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-4 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-5 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-6 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-7 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-8 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Thermocouple température gaz d'échappement de la turbine
0415 TT-XD-9 0623 TURB
Caractéristiques : Type K
Vanne d'air de balayage du circuit de combustible gazeux
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0477 VA13-1 918T N/A
Réglages : Temps d'ouverture doit être 35 ± 5 secondes.
Temps de fermeture doit être 10 secondes au maximum.
Vanne d'air de balayage du circuit de combustible gazeux
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0477 VA13-2 918T N/A
Réglages : Temps d'ouverture doit être 35 ± 5 secondes.
Temps de fermeture doit être 10 secondes au maximum.
Vanne purge faux départ
0442 VA17-1 1026 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Vanne purge faux départ
0442 VA17-2 1026 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Vanne purge caisson échappement faux départ
0442 VA17-5 1026 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Vanne d'ajustement de la pression d'air d'atomisation
0425 VA18-1 1070 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Vanne d'air de balayage du circuit de combustible liquide
0477 VA19-1 918T N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : C vers L ouvert ; U fermé
Vanne anti-pompage 11ème étage
0417 VA2-1 1022 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Vanne anti-pompage 11ème étage
0417 VA2-2 1022 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Vanne type papillon pour isolement entrée d'air du compresseur d'air d'atomisation CA2
0425 VA22-1 0922 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Vanne anti-pompage 11ème étage
0417 VA2-3 1022 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Vanne anti-pompage 11ème étage
0417 VA2-4 1022 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Vanne pneumatique de dépressurisation rapide
Caractéristiques :
0477 VA36-1 918T N/A
sous pression: 1 vers 2 ouvert et évent 3 fermé
hors pression: 2 ouvert vers l'évent 3
Vanne pneumatique de dépressurisation rapide
Caractéristiques :
0477 VA36-2 918T N/A
sous pression: 1 vers 2 ouvert et évent 3 fermé
hors pression: 2 ouvert vers l'évent 3
Vanne pneumatique
0494 VA99-11 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 27/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 28 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Vanne pneumatique
0494 VA99-12 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Vanne pneumatique
0494 VA99-13 E021 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
0434 VAB1 0947 N/A Purge air sur circuit hydraulique principal
0434 VAB2 0947 N/A Purge air sur circuit hydraulique auxiliaire
Vanne de dérivation de contrôle débit fuel
0424 VC3 0516 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NO | Course = 28,57 mm
Vanne de régulation d'injection d'eau
0462 VC4-1 A035 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0462 VCK100 A035 N/A Clapet anti-retour
0462 VCK110 A035 N/A Clapet anti-retour
0462 VCK111 A035 N/A Clapet anti-retour
Clapet anti-retour sur injecteur pour combustible fuel
0424 VCK1-1T14 0961 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Tarage : 8,27 ± 0,34 bar
Clapet anti-retour sur air de balayage des injecteurs primaires de combustible liquide
0477 VCK2-1T14 918T N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Pression d'ouverture : Minimum 0,07 bar
Clapet anti-retour pompe principale
0434 VCK3-1 0947 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Seuil = 1,5 bar
Clapet anti-retour pompe auxiliaire
0434 VCK3-2 0947 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Seuil = 1,5 bar
Clapet circuit air refroidissement corps turbine
0417 VCK7-1 1233 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : pression d'ouverture : 7 mbar
Clapet circuit air refroidissement corps turbine
0417 VCK7-2 1233 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : pression d'ouverture : 7 mbar
Vanne de contrôle gaz primaire
0422 VGC-1 0509 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC | Course maxi = 38,1 mm
0469 VH3-1A 0548 N/A Vanne de déclenchement hydraulique IGV
0469 VH3-1B 0548 N/A Vanne de déclenchement hydraulique IGV
Vanne de déclenchement hydraulique (VSR-1) - Vanne Stop Gaz
0422 VH5-1 0507 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Vanne de déclenchement hydraulique (VGC-1) - Vanne contrôle gaz
0422 VH5-2 0509 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
0422 VM-1 0639 N/A Débitmètre massique à effet coriolis
0434 VM4 1052 N/A Vanne transfert pour filtre huile HP
Vanne multiport
0424 VP-1 0961 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Vanne multiport
0424 VP-2 0961 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Vanne de régulation pression alimentation huile de lubrification
0416 VPR2-1 1023 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Point de consigne : 1,72 +0,13/-0 bar
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 28/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 29 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
Filtre régulateur
0494 VPR30-11 E021 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NO
Réglages : 4 ± 0.35 bar
Compensateur de pression pompe hydraulique
0434 VPR3-1 0627 N/A
Réglages : 103,4 ± 1,37 bar
Filtre détendeur d'air de commande de la vanne d'air de balayage du combustible gazeux
0477 VPR44-1 918T N/A
Réglages : 2,3 +0/-0,2 bar
Filtre détendeur d'air de commande de la vanne d'air de balayage du combustible gazeux
0477 VPR44-2 918T N/A
Réglages : 2,3 +0/-0,2 bar
Filtre détendeur d'air de commande de la vanne d'air de balayage du combustible liquide
0477 VPR54-1 918T N/A
Réglages : 3,27 +1,7/-0 bar
Filtre détendeur (partie de VC4-1)
0462 VPR62-1 A035 N/A
Réglages : 3,1 ± 0,1 bar
Filtre détendeur (partie de VS2-2)
0462 VPR62-13 A035 N/A
Réglages : 3,1 ± 0,1 bar
Vanne de régulation de pression pour isolation surpresseur AA
0425 VPR68-1 0922 N/A
Réglages : 3,79 ± 0,13 bar (55 ± 2 psi)
Vanne de décharge pompe principale huile de lubrification
0416 VR1 1016 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture à 6,89 + 0,13/-0 bar
Vanne de décharge pompe principale huile HP
0434 VR21 0947 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : 113,7 ± 1,37 bar
Vanne de décharge pompe auxiliaire huile HP
0434 VR22 0947 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : 113,7 ± 1,37 bar
Soupape de décharge pression alimentation combustible liquide
0424 VR27 0992 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Tarage : 6,2 ± 0,2 bar
Vanne de décharge pompe à fuel
0424 VR4 0992 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Tarage : 82,7 ± 1,72 bar
Soupape de sécurité de la pompe
0494 VR60-11 E021 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture à 12 ± 1 bar
Soupape de sécurité de la pompe PFA-12
0494 VR60-12 E021 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Réglages : Ouverture à 12 ± 1 bar
Vanne arrêt fuel
0424 VS1 0511 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Vanne d'arrêt injection d'eau
0462 VS2-2 A035 N/A
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC
Vanne d'arrêt et réglage gaz
0422 VSR-1 0507 GAS
Caractéristiques : Normal : NC | Course maxi = 88,9 ± 0,127 mm
Vanne thermostatique régulant la température de l'huile de graissage
0420 VTR1-1 1035 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : E vers B ouvert, C fermé
Réglages : Début d'ouverture à T° d'huile = 54 ± 2°C
Vanne thermostatique régulant la température d' air d'atomisation
0420 VTR2-1 1027 N/A Caractéristiques : Normal : B vers E ouvert, C fermé
Réglages : T° air = 107 ± 2 °C
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 29/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
SIZE DWG NO SH REV
A4 137A3171 30 F TBFT-TMP-FR-GTE-0060 Rev : 001
MLI Schéma
Appareils MLI Désignation
PID câblage
RTD température eau pattes turbine
0420 WT-TL-1 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
RTD température eau pattes turbine
0420 WT-TL-2 637T TURB
Caractéristiques : Platine PT100 | 100 Ohm à 0°C | 0,385 Ohm/°C | -50 à 260 °C
SECTION 01F
SCALE SHEET 30/30
Doc. Source : TBFT-ISP-FR-GTE-0020
Ce document, propriété exclusive de GE Energy Products France SNC est strictement confidentiel This document, exclusive property of GE Energy Products France SNC. is strictly confidential.
Il ne peut être communiqué, copié ou reproduit sans notre autorisation écrite préalable. It must not be communicated, copied or reproduced without our previous written consent.
G
E
O
ffi
c ia
l
BASIC CONTROL DEVICE FUNCTION NUMBERS
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY
(Mark IV, Mark V Gas Turbine Control System)
An understanding of the Mark IV and V gas turbine to perform operations which require a fast execu-
control system requires a knowledge of the terminol- tion time.
ogy used in the electrical control system and for the
mechanics of the gas turbine. This glossary is di- Assembler A computer program that converts
vided into part (A) Mark IV and V Electrical Control assembly language programs into a form (machine
language) that the computer can understand. The
Terminology, and part (B) Gas Turbine Terminolo-
assembler translates mnemonic instruction codes
gy.
into binary numbers, replaces names with their
binary equivalents, and assigns locations in
memory to data and instructions.
A. MARK IV AND MARK V
ELECTRICAL CONTROL Assembly Language A programmming lan-
TERMINOLOGY guage in which the programmer can use mnemonic
instruction codes, labels, and names to refer direct-
Address The identification code that distin- ly to their binary equivalents. The assembler is a
guishes one memory location or input/output port low-level language, since each assembly language
from another. instruction translates directly into a specific ma-
chine language instruction.
Address Bus A bus used to transmit the identifi-
Asynchronous Operation of a switching net-
cation code that distinguishes one memory location
work by a free-running signal. Completion of one
or I/O port from another.
instruction triggers the next instruction.
Algorithm Refer to CONTROL ALGORITHM Back-plane The internal wiring of a module be-
tween pins of the cards located in the module. Some
Analog A continuous signal or a representation modules have a “flow-soldered” back-plane, which
of a quantity that can have any value. is a printed circuit card that the other cards plug
into.
Application Application-oriented computer pro-
grams, such as the Sequencer Code and Control Al- Baud A measure of the rate of data flow transfer.
gorithms. The number of signal elements (bits) transmitted
per second. (2400 Baud transfers 2400 Bits = 300
Software which are customized to the needs of Bytes/sec.)
each installation.
Binary A system of numbers using 2 as a base.
Array Systematic arrangement of numbers or (In contrast to the decimal system, which uses 10 as
data in tabulated form. a base).
ASCII Abbreviation for American Standard Bit A single binary digit which can be in either of
Code for Information Interchange. Each character two states (0/ or 1).
is assigned a number between 32 and 127.
Bootstrap Technique for loading first instruc-
ASM-86 A low-level programming language de- tions of a program into memory and then using
signed for the Intel 8086 microprocessor. ASM-86 these instructions to bring in the rest of the pro-
is used in the Mark IV computer operating system gram.
C00023 1 GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY
GE Power Systems
Coding The writing of programs in a language Data Bus A bus used to transfer coded informa-
that is comprehensible to a computer system. tion to and from the CPU memory storage and pe-
ripheral devices.
Cold Junction The junction between the ther-
Differential Input An analog input which has a
mocouple wire and the screw terminals on the ther-
high impedance to ground on input wires.
mocouple modules generates an EMF at point of
termination called the “cold junction”. Downloading The processor’s operation which
copies information from one section of a proces-
Compiler A program that converts a program in sor’s Memory into a different section of the same
a high-level (i.e. procedure-oriented) language into Memory or into another processor’s Memory. If a
an assembly or machine language program. Controller is ‘cycled’ (powered-down, then pow-
ered-up), the <RST> Sequencer Code is down-
Control Algorithm A PLM-86 Application loaded from the Communicator <C> to the
Software program that performs a specific func- Controller.
tion, such as speedcontrol or vibration protection.
“Dumb Terminal” Terminal for data input/out-
Control Bus The bus carries commands from put to/from Host Computer; (by strict definition:
and to the CPU for control of the operating system No internal data storage/manipulation)
(i.e. read, write, etc.).
Editor A program that manipulates text material
Control Constants The subset of “Constants” and allows the user to make corrections, additions,
that are used in the Control Algorithms and the Se- deletions, and other changes.
quencer Code to define gains, time constants, off-
sets, etc. Each Control Constant can be called by its EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only
Signal Name as shown in the Elementary. Memory can be erased by exposure to ultraviolet
light.
CPU Central Processing Unit, the heart of the
computer system, consists of storage elements EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable
(registers), arithmetic unit (computation circuits), Read Only Memory is used to store the field edit-
GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY 2 C00023
GE Power Systems
able Application Software so that it will not be lost Interrupt A computer input that temporarily
during a power outage. suspends the normal sequence of operations and
transfers computer control to an Interrupt Service
Firmware A method of system control program Routine.
design in which all control instructions are con-
tained in ROM or PROM. Interrupt Service Routine A program that per-
forms the actions required to respond to an inter-
Handshaking A method of controlling data rupt.
transfers in which the transmitting device generates
a data ready signal. This signal directs the receiving IVAR A Database array dedicated to storing inte-
device to accept the data. The receiving device then ger data.
generates a data accepted signal to inform the trans-
LDATA A Database array dedicated to storing
mitting device that it may remove the data and pro-
logic data Signal Names, such as “complete se-
ceed.
quence” (L3) or “flame detected” (L28FD).
Hardware Physical equipment forming a com- LVAR A Database array dedicated to storing log-
puter system (as opposed to the Software). ic data.
Hexadecimal A system of numbers using 16 as a Linking Loader A loader that will enter a series
base (In contrast to the decimal system which uses of program and subroutines into memory and pro-
10 as a base.) vide the required interconnections.
Microcomputer A computer whose CPU is a ences have no effect because the devices are
microprocessor plus memory and input/output cir- electrically separated.
cuitry.
Page A subdivision of Memory containing 64K
Microprocessor A central processing unit gen- (i.e. 65,0/0/0/ bytes).
erally consisting of an arithmetic and logic unit,
control block and register array, and a memory stor- Party Line A large number of devices connected
age system. to a single line originating in a CPU.
PLM-86 A high-level language designed for
Modem A device that adds or removes a carrier
systems and application programming of the Intel
frequency to an existing signal which allows data to
8086 microprocessor. Control programs algo-
be transmitted or received on a high frequency
rithms are written in PL/M-86.
channel.
Port The point where the I/O is in contact with
Modular Programming A programming meth- the outside world.
od whereby the entire task is divided into logically
separate sections or modules. Programming The implementation of the con-
trol function of a processing system as a sequence
MOV A Metal Oxide Veristor. A zener-oxide de- of control signals that is organized into words and
vice that suppresses voltage spikes. stored in memory.
Multiplexing A process of transmitting more PROM Programmable Read Only Memory is
than one signal at a time on a single link via time- used to store software which is not field adjustable
sharing (i.e. serial) or frequency-sharing (i.e. paral- and will not be lost during a power outage.
lel).
PROM Programmer A piece of equipment that
MVAR A Database array dedicated to storing stores Software in a PROM.
miscellaneous data.
Processor A microcomputer (a microprocessor
Object Program (Object Code) The program plus Memory and Input/Output circuitry) used in
that is the output of a translator program (such as an the Mark IV panel. The Communicator <C> and
assembler or compiler). Usually a machine lan- the Controllers <RST>.
guage program ready for execution.
Protocol A procedure for data communication.
Off-line A function performed with the turbine
RAM Random Access Memory can be read and
stopped and/or the control disconnected from the
written to during operation and must be backed-up
process.
to retain its contents during a power outage.
Operating System System software that con- Real Time In synchronization with the actual oc-
trols the overall operation of a computer system and currence of events.
performs such tasks as memory allocation, input
and output distribution, interrupt processing, and Real Time Operation A data processing tech-
task scheduling. nique which allows the machine to use information
as it becomes available, as opposed to batch proces-
Optical Isolation A semiconductor device con- sing at a time unrelated to the time the information
sisting of an LED and a photodiode or phototrans- is generated.
istor in close proximity. Current through the LED
causes an internal light emission that forces cur- Refresh The process of restoring the contents of
rent flow in the phototransistor. Voltage differ- a dynamic memory before they are lost.
GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY 4 C00023
GE Power Systems
Register A temporary small scale memory used by Subroutine A sub-program that can be reached
the CPU for logic, arithmetic or transfer operations. from one or more places in a main program.
RS232 An IEEE communication standard used Stack A data structure used for temporary stor-
for communication between <C>, <R>, <S>, <T> age which receives data on the top of the stack and
and the panel mounted printer. It is also available pushes existing data further down in the stack. Data
for remote communication. is removed from the top of the stack creating a last-
in, first-out arrangement.
RS422 An IEEE communication standard used
for remote communication. Stall A cessation of processor operation (due to
malfunction).
Rung A series of Sequencer Code commands
(i.e. pseudo-contacts) which result in a store state- String A sequence of character codes stored se-
ment (i.e. pseudo-coil). quentially in Memory. The Relay Ladder Diagram
Rungs consist of one or more strings.
Sampling Rate The frequency that a given pro-
gram is run. Some control algorithms are run four TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic is the most
times every second. widely used bi-polarity technology for digital inte-
grated circuits.
SEM A Small Electronics Module contains up to
12 circuit cards. Controllers <RST> are SEM’s.
Utility Program A program that provides basic
Sequencer Code The set of instructions that per- functions, such as loading and saving programs,
forms the turbine’s sequencing functions. initiating program execution, observing and chang-
ing the contents of memory locations, or setting
Serial Link An interface between two computer breakpoints and tracing.
systems that permits one of the systems to transmit
data to, and receive data from, the other system. Voting Voting in the Mark IV means that the con-
trol will respond to the majority logic from the three
Single Ended Input An input which has a high Controllers.
impedance to ground on one of the two incoming
wires. Word Sixteen consecutive bits which the com-
puter can manipulate in a single cycle.
Softswitch One of the six pushbuttons, located at
the right of the CRT display, which are assigned a Wire Wrap Wiring within modules is termi-
function by the display which currently appears on nated on the card or relay socket pins by wrapping
the screen. the wire around the pins.
GAS TURBINE TERMINOLOGY Annular Space or Annulus The ring like space
between the combustion liner and the flow shield.
Accessory Compartment A sheet metal house
with access doors which may be located on the Anti-Icing System Preheating of the inlet air to
same base as the turbine or on a separate base. It prevent ice formation in the inlet system.
contains the mechanical accessories needed to sup- Atomizing Air High pressure air which is used
port the prime mover operation. to break up liquid fuel into small droplets to im-
prove the combustion.
Accessory Coupling A fluid or grease filled
flexible coupling which drives the accessory gear Aux. Hydraulic Supply Pump The motor driv-
from (the forward end of) the prime mover. en high pressure pump used to supply servo pres-
sure during start-up or emergency conditions.
Accessory Gear Encompasses a number of gears
which drive most of the gas turbine accessories at Aux. Lube Pump Provides lubricating oil dur-
the proper speeds and which connects the turbine to ing start-up and shutdown, and serve as a standby
its starting device. The gear is driven by the starting to the main pump. An AC motor is usually the
device, and then by the turbine when the unit reach- drive source.
es self-sufficient speed. Common items driven by
this gear are: liquid fuel pump, water pump, main Axial Flow A (gas turbine) compressor which
lube pump, main hydraulic pump, main atomizing moves air axially through a series of rotor and sta-
air compressor. tor compressor blades. The rotating elements
impart momentum to the air mass, and the stator
Accessory Gear Box Refers to the complete ac- elements convert that momentum to pressure in
cessory gear assembly. conjunction with the converging walls of the com-
pressor casing.
Accumulator A hydro-pneumatic device de-
signed to absorb a hydraulic shock and to deliver a Base Load The load at the rated temperature
regulated force (in the form of pressure and flow) control setpoint at which the turbine can be oper-
during transient demands on a system. ated to maintain the recommended parts life expec-
tancy.
Acid Removal Filter The machine part that
neutralizes acid in the lube oil supply. Bearing The stationary machine part which con-
tains the journal bearing liner.
Actuator A self-contained device designed to
Bearing Feed Header The section of the lube oil
deliver a controlled or regulated force in order to
piping, downstream of the oil filters, which carries
activate some other device.
lubrication to the individual turbine bearings.
Aft End The exhaust end of the gas turbine. Bearing Seal A general term identifying a means
of preventing oil leakage from a bearing.
Aftercooler The atomizing air cooler down-
stream of the main atomizing air compressor. Bellmouth The flared bell-shaped cast inlet
which provides an even airflow distribution to the
Air Separator The device which removes large compressor through the inlet guide vanes.
particulate matter from an air supply via an inertial
or centrifugal force. Black Start The means of starting a turbine with-
out incoming AC power.
Ambient Air Air surrounding the gas turbine
housing which enters the turbine to support com- Blade A rotating or stationary airfoil in an axial
bustion. compressor.
GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY 6 C00023
GE Power Systems
Blow Off Valve A valve which bypasses air from Combustion Liner The chamber where chemical
the compressor around the regenerator and the high energy is released and added to the gas flow path.
and low pressure turbines (i.e. two (2) shafts gas
turbine) to reduce available energy and prevent Combustion System A system consisting of fuel
overspeed during a sudden loss of load. It is primar- nozzles, spark plugs, flame detectors, crossfire
ily used on two shaft, generator drives. tubes, combustion liners, transition pieces and a
combustion casing or wrapper.
Brittle The loss of resiliency in the parent metal
due to aging, extreme cold or chemical action. Compression Ratio The ratio of the compressor
discharge pressure to the inlet pressure.
Brake Horsepower The horsepower developed
Compressor The mechanical component which
at the load coupling.
is used to increase the pressure of the working me-
dium within its structure.
Buckets Airfoil elements mounted radially on
the rotor wheel to transfer energy from the working Compressor Discharge Casing Contains the
medium to the turbine rotor. last stages of the compressor stator blades and is
used to:
Burnishing The process of smoothing a metal
surface by means of a mechanical action with no — Join the compressor and turbine stators
loss of material. This normally occurs on plain — Support the forward end of the combustion
bearing surfaces. wrapper
Bypass Valve A device which regulates the flow — Provide an inner support for the first stage
of a fluid in: A) A fuel bypass valve on a liquid fuel turbine nozzles.
system using a positive displacement pump or, B) — May provide support for a bearing
An air control valve used for compressor pulsation
protection. Control Compt. (Control CAB) The compart-
ment which contains the gas turbine electrical con-
Centrifugal Separator A device used to re- trols and protection equipment.
move dust from the gas turbine cooling and seal-
ing air system. Separation is achieved by a Cooling and Sealing Air A system which pro-
centrifugal action. vides air pressure for cooling and sealing various
turbine components.
Chamfer A beveled edge (i.e. by the removal of
some of the gear material at an angle from the top Cooling Water Pump Provides cooling water
land to the bottom land at the ends of the teeth. flow for the system. A gear box or electric motor
drives the pump.
Check Valve A device which allows fluid flow in Cooling Water Radiator The on or off base wa-
only one (1) direction. ter/air or water/water heat exchanger.
CO2 Carbon dioxide, used as a fire extinguishing Coupling A component which connects a driven
medium. component to the drive source. Examples: Acces-
sory Gear Coupling, Load Coupling, Pump Cou-
Combustor or Combustion Chamber The me- pling, Starting Motor Coupling, etc.
chanical component of the combustion system in
which the combustion takes place (increasing the Coupling Comp. A housing for the load cou-
temperature of the working medium). pling.
C00023 7 GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY
GE Power Systems
Cranking The turning of the turbine rotor during Exhaust Frame The machine part which usually
start-up or shutdown. support the aft journal bearing. The air discharged
from the exhaust diffuser is directed to the turning
Crossfire Tubes The piping which interconnects vanes. Air-cooled, internal struts maintain position
the combustion chambers on multiple combustion of the bearing.
chamber turbines. These tubes also allow flame
propagation from the two (2) spark plug ignited Exhaust Hood The component which surrounds
combustors to the other chambers. the aft bearing area and is bolted to the turbine case
aft flange. It assists in guiding air flow in to the turn-
Cycle Thermal The ratio of the net work output ing vanes.
to the total heat input = [ Work of Turbine - Work of
Exhaust Plenum An enclosed cavity which re-
Efficiency Compressor ]/Heat Input.
ceives discharged exhaust gases after the gases exit
from the load turbine wheel.
Diaphragm The stationary element containing a
set of nozzles used to expand the working medium Exhaust Ports Machine bosses on the compressor
and direct it against the rotating blades. casing which extracts air for cooling and sealing.
Diffuser The section designed to increase the Exhaust Pressure Drop Exhaust duct losses.
area of the flowpath to convert flow velocity to stat-
ic fluid pressure. Exhaust Stack The exhaust assembly which can
include silencing sections.
Distance Piece A hollow cylindrical shaft used
to couple the axial-flow compressor to the first Exit Guide Vanes Guide vanes at the exhaust
stage turbine wheel. end of the load turbine which direct the gas flow to
the exhaust.
Eductor A device used for evacuating an en- Expansion Joints Devices that allow thermal
closed space usually by means of air purge. expansion.
Electrostatic A device used for removing oil Extraction Valves Devices used to assist in pre-
particles from an air/oilmixture using the charged venting compressor surge by allowing air to be ex-
particle Precipitator method. tracted during off-design periods from an
intermediate compressor stage.
Emergency Stop An immediate de-activation of
the fuel system due to an emergency electrical or Filters Components normally used to remove
mechanical device or done manually. solid particulate matter in a given size range from
an air/fluid supply and from lube oil.
Emergency Lube Oil Pump The back-up lube
oil pump to the main pump. It uses the 125 Vdc bat- Fin Fan (Cooling Fan) A mechanically or elec-
tery to power the motor. tric motor driven air fan used tocool the water run-
ning through the radiators.
Evaporator Cooling Liquid (usually water) is
Firing Temp The temperature of the air mass at
added to an air supply, and the resultant evaporation
the inlet of the first stage turbine nozzle.
cools the air mass and increases its mass per unit
volume. Flame Detectors Sensors (usually ultraviolet)
used to detect flame.
Exhaust Diffuser The component which slows
the exhaust gas exit from the last turbine stage to re- Flow Divider A device which distributers fuel
cover energy, and reduce losses. flow equally to the fuel nozzles.
GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY 8 C00023
GE Power Systems
Fluid A general term used to describe a liquid or Heat Exchanger/Cooler The heat transfer
gas. equipment used to extract excessive heat from one
working fluid and transmit it to another non-work-
Fuel Forwarding Skid The off-base pumping ing fluid for eventual dissipation to the atmosphere.
unit used to transfer, condition and control the flow
of liquid fuel to the turbine. Heat Rate The ratio of input energy to output en-
ergy (i.e. BTU/BHP-HR).
Fuel, Gas Either natural gas with a high heat con-
tent or manufactured gas. Heat Recovery System The means of recover-
ing heat which would otherwise be lost during the
Fuel, Light Distillate (Also known as No. 2 process.
fuel.) A volatile distillate fuel having good com-
bustion properties, clean burning and readily atom- Heating Value The heat content of a given fuel
ized. Preheating is usually not necessary. (i.e. BTU/lb.).
High Pressure Turbine The first stage turbine
Fuel Nozzle The device that injects fuel into the (that drives the compressor on 2-shaft gas turbines).
combustion chamber.
Hot Gas Path A path of flow of the hot gases
Fuel Oil Stop Valve A spring-closed, hydrauli- consisting of the combustion chambers, transition
cally opened device used as a positive shutoff of pieces, turbine nozzles and buckets, and the ex-
liquid fuel. haust section.
Fuel Pump, Main The shaft driven, high pres- Hydraulic Ratchet A form of turning gear
sure, liquid fuel pump. which turns the rotor slightly at periodic intervals.
Fuel, Residual Low volatility petroleum prod- Inductor Alternator A permanent magnet type
ucts remaining at the end of a refinery distillation of AC generator connected to the compressor shaft.
processes. All residual fuels require heating for
pumping, filtering and proper air atomization at the Inlet Guide Vane The guide vanes at the inlet to
fuel nozzle. the compressor which direct and control the air
flow to the first stage of the axial flow compressor.
Fuel Treatment The process of treating residual
fuel to eliminate or inhibit contaminants. Inlet Plenum An enclosed cavity that directs the
inlet air to the gas turbine.
GAC Abbreviation for the Generator Auxiliary Inlet Pressure Drop The inlet duct pressure drop
Compartment containing high voltage switch gear (in inches of water).
and excitation.
Inlet Temperature The inlet air temperature to
Gib Block A steel block welded to the turbine the gas turbine compressor.
base which has adjusting bolts for axial and trans-
verse locating of the turbine. Provision is made for Journal Bearing The part that supports the
a gib key in the gib block. weight of the rotating shaft during normal operation.
Gib Key The key for the gib block (i.e. described Labyrinth Packing A seal designed with mul-
above). It is machined as an integral part of the low- tiple rows of (aluminum alloy) teeth located at
er half of the exhaust frame. the extremities of the bearing assemblies. Seal-
ing air is circulated between the shaft and the seal
Heat Consumption The heat consumed at rated to prevent oil from passing the seal and spreading
output (i.e. BTU/hr.). along the shaft.
C00023 9 GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY
GE Power Systems
Lagging The thermal and/or acoustic covering Overspeed Bolt A spring loaded sliding rod,
or enclosure. which is located in the accessory gear box monuted
on the shaft connected to the turbine rotor, and me-
Lifting Trunnion Extensions which are inte- chanically senses a rotor overspeed condition and
grally cast as part of the casing and used to hold generates a trip independent of the electrical over-
slings for lifting purposes. speed protection system.
Lighting Transformer A device usually Pad Support pads located on all base mounted
associated with backfeeding the generator output assemblies.
of 13.8KV and reducing it to 480/V 3-phase.
Partition The airfoil shaped stator portion of the
Load Shaft The low pressure turbine shaft. nozzle assembly.
Peak Load The load reached at the peak exhaust
Load Turbine Nozzle The variable angle nozzle
temperature control setpoint (above the base load
between the high pressure and low pressure turbine
setpoint) which produces more power but reduces
wheels on 2-shaft turbines which is to aproportion
the life expectancy of the turbine parts.
energy distribution between the turbines.
Peak Reserve A short term rating (seldom used)
Low Pressure Turbine The load turbine. for getting maximum power, recognizing that this
drastically reduces the life of the hot section turbine
Lube Oil Header The main lube oil piping parts.
which feeds the turbine bearings, gears, cou-
pling, etc. Platform The portion of a turbine bucket be-
tween the airfoil shape and the shank.
LVDT Abbreviation for Linear Variable Differ-
ential Transformer. Plenum An enclosure which contains a volume
of air (i.e. inlet) or exhaust gas (i.e. exhaust).
Mist Eliminator A device which removes small
oil droplets from the oil tank vent system prior to Power Plant A comprehensive term for the com-
the discharge of the vapor in to the atmosphere. ponents which are contained in an integrated power
system.
Model Defines the gas turbine frame size.
Pre-cooler The air cooler upstream of the main
Nozzle/Diaphragm Assembly A combination atomizing air compressor.
of the nozzle and the air control device between the
Pre-selected Load An adjustable, pre-desig-
turbine stages at the inner side wall.
nated load point between spinning reserve and base
load.
Nozzle Segment A small number of nozzle parti-
tions made as an assembly: multiple assemblies Pressure Ratio The ratio of the compressor dis-
will constitute a complete nozzle assembly. charge pressure to the inlet pressure.
Off-Base A part which is not mounted on the ac- Pulsation Protection A mechanical network de-
cessory, turbine or generator base. signed to prevent surge/pulsation during off-speed
conditions of the compressor.
On-Base A part which is mounted on th accesso-
ry, turbine or generator base. Pump, Centrifugal A non-positive displace-
ment pump designed to use a rotor impeller in an
Outer Combustion Casing A cover that pro- enclosure as a means of transferring a fluid from
vides a pressure vessel and an air flow path. one place to another.
GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY 10 C00023
GE Power Systems
Pump, Gear A positive displacement pump that Soleplates Individually grouted-in foundation
consists of a drive gear and driven gear mounted in plates used for mounting and supporting the pads of
a housing. The working medium travels from the the gas turbine bases.
intake port around the outside of the gear to the out-
let port. Spinning Reserve The minimum load control
point based on generator output.
Regenerative Cycle The working cycle which
recovers a portion of the exhaust heat to reduce the Stage The combination of one row of stator
cycle heat input required to read cycle operating blades or nozzles with one row of rotor blades or
temperatures. The working medium passes through buckets.
compressor, regenerator, combustor, turbine and
regenerator. Starting Clutch The (overrunning, hydraulical-
ly positioned jaw) clutch which connects the torque
converter or turning gear output to the accessory
Regenerator A heat exchanger used to transfer
gear box and disengages when the turbine reaches
heat from the exhaust gas to the working fluid be-
self-sustaining speed.
fore it enters the combustor.
Starting Device The machine part used to pro-
Rotor The rotating part of an assembly which is duce adequate torque for the starting system. Some
usually surrounded by a stator or stationary casing. types of starting devices are:
RTD Abbreviation for a Resistance Temperature 1. Diesel Engine
Detector. 2. Electric Motor
SFC Specific fuel consumption (i.e. lbs/BHP- 3. Steam Turbine
HR) defined for a given fuel heating value. 4. Natural Gas Expansion Turbine
Shaft Horsepower The power developed at the 5. Turbine Impingement
input or output shaft. 6. Air motor
Shank The portion of a bucket between the plat- Stator The stationary part of an assembly usually
form and the dovetail. surrounding a rotating component or rotor.
Shroud A segmented part located adjacent to the Stub Shaft A hollow cylindrical section integral
blade tips which is used to limit the working fluid with the first stage compressor wheel.
leakage.
Thermocouple A pair of dissimilar metals
joined in series to form a closed circuit, which will
Silencer A section of the inlet or exhaust of a gas
generate a thermo-electric current when heated.
turbine designed to reduce the sound level of air
passing through it. Thrust Bearing An active or inactive machine
part which absorbs the axial thrust of the rotating
Simple Cycle A cycle where the working fluid shaft.
passes directly through the compressor, combustor
and turbine (without heating/cooling). Tie Bolt A large bolt used to assemble the com-
pressor rotor wheels.
Single Shaft Turbine A gas turbine whose rotat-
ing components, (compressor and turbine) are ar- Torque Converter A hydraulic device coupled
ranged on one shaft. to the turbine starting means which transfers and
C00023 11 GLOSSARY OF TERMINOLOGY
GE Power Systems
amplifies torque causing turbine compressor shaft Valve, Relief A valve that automatically main-
rotation during start up. tains a maximum, predetermined pressure by dis-
charging or bypassing the fluid in a system.
Transition Piece A thin walled duct used to
conduct the combustion gases from the circular Valve, Servo A hydraulically powered valve
combustion chambers to the annular turbine with provisions for direct control (i.e. position-
nozzle passage. ing) in direct relation with a primary control of a
comparatively low level of force. Used for pro-
portional control.
Turbine Stage A set of stationary nozzles and
one row of moving buckets mounted on a wheel. Valve, Solenoid A valve specifically designed to
The working medium expands through the station- control the flow of fluid by means of the magnetic
ary nozzle to a lower pressure causing kinetic ener- action of an electric coil on a movable core or
gy to be transfered to the moving buckets. plunger, which actuates the valve stem or pilot
needle. Used for on-off control.
Turbine Wheels Discs on the gas turbine
shaft which are used to mount buckets on the Valve, Temp. Regulating A self-acting valve
wheel periphery. designed for controlling the flow of fluids via a
thermostatic element located in the fluid.
Turning Gear The machine part which is used to
break the turbine away while starting and rotate the Vane An airfoil used to direct the flow of air or gas.
shaft during cooldown and inspection.
Water Removal Filter A device which removes
suspended water from the lube oil.
Two-shaft Turbine A turbine arrangement
where the high pressure and low pressure turbine Wheelspace Temperature The temperature of
stages are only coupled aerodynamically and run at the air in close proximity to the surface of the tur-
different speeds. bine wheel below the platform surface of the tur-
bine buckets.
Valve, Pressure Regulating A valve designed
for continuous automatic control of pressure.
GE Power Systems
Generator
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or
should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes the matter should be
referred to the GE Company.
1999 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
GEK 95149C International Conversion Tables
GE Power Systems
1 DEFINITION
The lube oil system is designed for insuring the following functions :
The lubricating oil system is a close loop where oil flow is built up from the oil tank located in
the lower part of the accessory base by :
• Oil tank warming up to keep acceptable oil viscosity while the unit is at standstill
• Oil flow cooling down to evacuate heat from the bearings
• Oil flow filtering
• Oil Header Pressure regulating at constant pressure
• Oil mist elimination
Bearings feeding and return lines are concentric lines, feeding line is installed in return line. The
lubricating oil flows back in the tank by gravity.
Part of the gas turbine bearing sealing air provided by the compressor returns with the oil in the
oil tank and is evacuated to the atmosphere through the oil mist eliminator. Oil mist elimination
consist of two redundant assembly.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Oil sampling :
Two valves connected both sides of the filter allows filtered oil and not filtered oil sampling. Oil
characteristics must be checked once every three months.
Oil flowing :
Sight glasses are fitted at filter vent, cooler vent, bearing return lines. They allow the operator to
check oil flowing, especially after manual operation related to those components.
Oil characteristics :
Lubricating oil characteristics must comply to GEK 32568.
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The hydraulic supply system is designed to provide high pressure oil at constant pressure to
control :
• The gas fuel flow and gas fuel pressure regulating valves
• The liquid fuel bypass regulating valve and stop valve
• The compressor inlet guide vanes
The hydraulic supply system is a closed loop where the oil pressure is built up from lubricating
oil header by :
• Automatic purging
• Dual filtering
• Accumulator
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
DT-1C
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The inlet guide vanes system is designed to adjust the compressor airflow according to
compressor and combustion needs.
The compressor inlet guide vanes system is actuated with hydraulic supply. The oil returns to the
lubricating oil tank by gravity.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
None.
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The cooling & sealing air system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• The cooling air for the turbine exhaust frame and for the turbine casing is provided by two
electrically driven blowers. Cooling air is then evacuated through the # 3 bearing tunnel for
the exhaust frame cooling and inside the turbine enclosure for the cooling of turbine casing.
Each blower delivers 50% of the requested cooling flow.
• The gas turbine bearing sealing air from the compressor flows back in the oil tank and is
evacuated through the oil mist eliminator vent.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
VCK7-1 Prohibits the running blower air flow to return in the stand by blower.
VCK7-2 Prohibits the running blower air flow to return in the stand by blower.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
Atomization is the process whereby a volume of liquid is converted into a multiplicity of very
small droplet by air stream. The atomizing air system is designed for insuring the following
functions :
The atomizing air system is an open loop where the air from the axial compressor is cooled
down and then pressurized by the shaft driven main compressor. An electrical motor driven
booster built up the atomizing air pressure during starting sequence.
The atomizing air system includes a piloted bypass valve to adapt atomizing air pressure and
flow according to liquid or gas fuel burning conditions.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
AAT-1A Measures the inlet air temperature of main atomizing air compressor CA1.
AAT-2A Measures the inlet air temperature of main atomizing air compressor CA1.
VA22-1 Cuts off the booster while the unit is at full speed.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Permanent purging :
Permanent atomizing air purging is provided through small orifices and silencers at compressor
upstream.
Air ejector :
An air ejector installed on the top of the accessory gear box receives air flow from the
atomizing air system to create a gear box vacuum pressure.
Compressor washing :
Manual valves are provided to isolate atomizing air lines during compressor Off line washing
sequence.
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
• The liquid fuel lines when the unit is running with gas fuel
• The gas fuel lines when the unit is running with liquid fuel
• Purging air flow for liquid fuel lines is provided by atomizing air system through a three ways
control valve
• Purging air flow for gas line is provided from the axial compressor through two purging
valves installed in serial to guaranty gas tightness
• Control air is provided by atomizing air and axial compressor
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
VA36-1 Allows slow opening time and fast closing time for VA13-1 valve.
VA36-2 Allows slow opening time and fast closing time for VA13-2 valve.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Telltale leak-off :
A telltale leak-off allows the operator the check liquid fuel leaks when the gas turbine is
operating with liquid fuel. Liquid fuel leaks at this level represents a VCK2 defect and must be
investigated and corrected quickly.
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The gas fuel system providing gas fuel for the combustion chambers is designed for insuring the
following functions :
• A speed/stop ratio valve to adjust the gas pressure versus the gas turbine speed and to stop
the unit
• A control valve to adjust the gas flow
• Temporary filters for first commissioning and permanent filters
• Piloted inter-valves venting system
• A gas flow meter
• Hydraulic accumulator
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
VSR-1 Adjusts the gas pressure and cuts off the gas flow for shut down sequence.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Gas :
The gas system as well as the control’s parameters are calculated according to the gas
composition included in the Control Specification. Gas calorific value, gas density and gas
temperature at the gas turbine inlet piping are corresponding to a Wobbe index.
Wobbe index must remain within ± 5% of contractual Wobbe index to guaranty reliable
operation of the gas turbine.
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The liquid fuel system providing liquid fuel for the combustion chambers is designed for insuring
the following functions :
Due to liquid fuel characteristics, the liquid fuel pump is lubricated by a separate system from
the gas turbine lubricating oil, including :
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
33FL-1 Indicates the closed position of the liquid fuel stop valve.
FD1-1 Splits the liquid fuel into equal flow for each combustion chamber.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Nozzle pressure :
A manual selector is provided to measure individual nozzle pressure. The maximum allowed
pressure spread between the nozzles cannot exceed 10 bars. High spread configuration must
be analyzed and rectified urgently.
Purge valve :
The gas turbine cannot be fired with heavy fuel. A set of purge valves is installed to drain the
remaining heavy fuel after a gas turbine trip on load with heavy fuel. The purge sequence is
initiated automatically straight away after a trip and is completed when the fuel line contains
100% of distillate. A sight glass allows visual flow check.
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
Servovalve Overview
Moog CONTROLS COILS
TORQUE MOTOR
TOP POLE PIECE
PERMANENT
MAGNET
ARMATURE
FLAPPER
FILTER NOZZLE
ORIFICE, INLET
FEEDBACK
SPRING
SPOOL
STOP
BUSHING
(SLEEVE)
SPOOL
(SLIDE)
ORIFICE,
RETURN
END CAP
1350 PSI
DRAIN
BODY
(HOUSING)
1 DEFINITION
The vanadium inhibitor injection system is designed to inject additive product in the liquid fuel
system.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
VA99-11 Is used with VA99-13 valve to manually adjust the flow of the pump.
VA99-13 Is used with VA99-11 valve to manually adjust the flow of the pump.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
The additive product flow can be adjusted by acting on the vernier (the vernier allowing the
adjustment of the dosing pump flow must be on the hold% position).
Other product must comply with GEK 28150 and be approved by GE.
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The above equipment are part of the installation’s cooling water closed loop.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
VTR1 Prohibits water circulation in the cooler for low oil temperature.
VTR2-1 Prohibits water circulation in the cooler for low air temperature.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The compressor washing system is designed for insuring the following functions :
A module not included in this chapter provides the clean washing water flow.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Water characteristics :
The washing water must comply to GEI 41042
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
GEK 110220b
Revised March 2004
GE Energy
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for
the purchaser's purposes the matter should be referred to the GE Company.
© 2002 General Electric Company
GEK 110220b Gas Turbine Compressor Water Wash System
I. GENERAL
Gas turbines can experience a loss of performance during operation as result of deposits of contaminants
on internal components. This loss is indicated by a decrease in power output and an increase in heat rate.
The deposits of atmospheric contaminants on compressor parts occurs with the ingestion of air.
The ingested air may contain dirt, dust, insects, and hydrocarbon fumes. A large portion of these can be
removed before they get to the compressor by inlet air filtration. The dry contaminants that pass through the
filters as well as wet contaminants, such as hydrocarbon fumes, have to be removed from the compressor
by washing with a water-detergent solution followed by a water rinse.
The on-base turbine equipment supplied with this compressor wash system consists of piping from
the purchaser's connection on the base, air operated water injection valve(s), and the appropriate spray
manifold(s). Drains from the inlet plenum, combustion area, exhaust frame, and the exhaust plenum
are also provided.
The new false drain system includes a pneumatically operated FSD valves with limit switches for po-
sition detection. These new valves shall use customer supplied instrument air and therefore require
solenoid activation. The system also utilizes an RTD (Resistive Thermal Device) for measuring tem-
peratures inside the FSD piping arrangement. This same piping serves dual functions of removal of
fuel oil during false starts and/or removal of water during off-line water washes.
The schematic for this on-base water wash equipment is located in the Reference Drawing sections of
this manual.
B. Off-Base Equipment
The off-base portion of the water wash system, known as the water wash skid, contains both a water
tank and a detergent tank. The water tank is equipped with temperature sensors and electric heaters
to maintain proper water temperatures. The skid is equipped with a centrifugal water pump motor
(88TW-1) and a venturi used with the water pump to mix detergent solution. Also included on the skid
are the various control panels to initiate wash and to manually start/stop the appropriate devices. All
equipment is made of corrosion resistant material. The schematic for the water wash skid is included
in the Reference Drawings section of this manual.
All devices are set to give proper temperature, pressure, and flow. The settings for these devices can
be found in the device summary for the corresponding system.
C. Functional Description
During the washing operation, water or wash solution is delivered through customer piping to the gas
turbine in the proper mix ratio. The wash water solution is delivered to the turbine unit at the proper
pressure, temperature, and flow rate to wash the gas turbine compressor. Refer to the system schematic
in the Reference Drawing section for proper pressure(s), temperature(s), and flow rate(s) for this gas
turbine.
1. Water used for washing turbine parts should be reasonably clean so that it does not cause fouling
or corrosion in itself. Distilled or deionized water is recommended. Water quality requirements
are listed in Table 1 of GEK-107122 (Latest Revision). Oily or varnished oil deposits on internal
2
Gas Turbine Compressor Water Wash System GEK 110220b
gas turbine parts require that a detergent solution be used during the washing operation. The
detergent shall meet the requirements of GEK-107122 (Latest Revision), Appendix 1.
The frequency of compressor washing depends upon the severity and type of atmospheric con-
tamination that fouls the compressor and reduces performance. The recommended method for
establishing the frequency is to monitor gas turbine performance, comparing the routine perfor-
mance with the baseline performance to observe the performance trends.
If the performance has fallen significantly, and compressor fouling is suspected, it must be verified
by visual inspection. This visual inspection should include the compressor inlet, bellmouth, inlet
guide vanes and the first and, possibly, the second stage of the compressor blades.
NOTE
Inspection should be made for the source of the oily deposits. If possible, correc-
tive action should be taken.
1. General
Off-line water washing should be scheduled during a normal shutdown, if possible. This will
allow enough time for the internal machine temperature to drop to the required levels for the
washing. The time required to cool the machine can be shortened by maintaining the unit at
crank speed. During this cooling of the turbine, the wash water may be heated to the proper
level.
Refer to GEK-107122 (Latest Revision) for gas turbine compressor liquid washing recom-
mendations
The period between off-line water washes can be extended via frequent on-line washing.
When the compressor is suspected of being heavily fouled, an off-line wash should be per-
formed.
The on-line compressor wash system allows an operator to water wash the turbine compres-
sor without having to shut down the turbine. The method of washing is similar in many ways
to the off-line system. Both systems use the same pump, 88TW-1, and piping to supply high
quality wash solution to the compressor. When the supply pipe reaches the vicinity of the
turbine base, it splits into two branches, one for the off-line system and one for the on-line
system. Each branch contains a stop valve, flow control orifice, manifold(s) and spray noz-
zles.
There are significant differences, though, between the two systems. GE recommends against
the use of detergents during on-line washing, while the use of detergents during off-line wash-
ing are encouraged. The on-line wash water requirements differ from that of off-line wash
3
GEK 110220b Gas Turbine Compressor Water Wash System
solution and must meet the requirements of Table 1 of GEK-107122 (Latest Revision) for
on-line washing. Finally, the on-line system proceeds automatically after it is manually initi-
ated; whereas, the off-line system requires operator intervention before and after the wash.
NOTE
When using a detergent solution for on-line washing, it is recommended that the
wash be followed by enough rinse water to remove the detergent residue from the
wash nozzles at the spray manifold. This will prevent the detergent solutions from
drying and clogging the nozzles.
2. Mandatory Precautions
Before water washing of the compressor begins, the turbine blading temperature must be low
enough so that the water does not cause thermal shock.
CAUTION
The differential temperature between the wash water and the interstage wheelspace
temperature must not be greater than 120°F (67°C) to prevent thermal shock to the
hot gas parts. The maximum wheelspace temperature as per TIL 1196–1 must be
no greater than 150°F (65.5°C) as measured by the digital thermocouple readout
system on the turbine control panel.
To reduce this difference, the wash water may be heated and the turbine kept on crank until the
wheelspace temperatures drop to an acceptable level. The wheelspace temperatures are read in
the control room.
CAUTION
If, during operation, there has been an increase in exhaust temperature spread
above the normal 15°F to 30°F (8.3°C to 16.6°C), the thermocouples in the ex-
haust plenum should be examined. If they are coated with ash, the ash should be
removed.
Radiation shields should also be checked. If they are not radially oriented relative to the turbine,
they should be repositioned per the appropriate drawing. If the thermocouples are coated with
ash, or if the radiation shields are not properly oriented, a correct temperature reading will not be
obtained.
If neither of the above conditions exists and there is no other explanation for the temperature
spread, consult the General Electric Service Engineering representative.
4
Gas Turbine Compressor Water Wash System GEK 110220b
***WARNING***
NOTE
Before water washing the compressor, inspect the inlet plenum and gas turbine
bellmouth for large accumulations of atmospheric contaminants that could be
washed into the compressor. The deposits can be removed by washing with a
garden hose.
The false start drain system shall be designed in accordance with the latest version of GEK 110885 and
GEK 110886. After a failure to fire on liquid fuel, the liquid fuel must be completely drained from the
system. TIL 1424-1R2 shall be followed after a failure to fire on liquid fuel. The false start drain valves are
instrument air operated with a open and closed limit switch. The liquid fuel from the combustion cans will
drain from a common header for the lower combustion cans through the false start drain valve (VA17-1A).
The position of this valve is controlled by a solenoid valve (20TFD-1). The limit switches (33TFD-1 and
33TFD-2) are used to verify valve position and take action if required.
5
GEK 110220b Gas Turbine Compressor Water Wash System
GE Energy
General Electric Company
www.gepower.com
6
GEK 28166A
Revised January 1997
GE Power Systems
Gas Turbine
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or
should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes the matter should be
referred to the GE Company.
1997 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
GEK 28166A Field Performance Testing Procedure
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
IV. EVALUATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
V. CONCLUSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FIGURE
Figure 1. Gas Flow Measurement Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2
Field Performance Testing Procedure GEK 28166A
I. GENERAL
This instruction specifies the methods and equipment to be used during field performance tests of heavy-duty
gas turbines using station instrumentation. It applies only to turbine generator power plants.
The primary purpose of the test shall be the measurement of turbine or generator output and fuel heat con-
sumption at one or more load conditions.
Sufficient supporting data shall be recorded to enable the “as tested” performance to be corrected to the stan-
dard conditions so that an accurate comparison may be made between tested and base line machine capability
and heat rate at specified conditions.
The attached data sheets should be used to record the test data. They are designed to provide the information
required to evaluate the aero-thermodynamic performance of the gas turbine only. Any other operating data
should be taken separately to prevent interference with the timing required for the performance test.
These testing procedures are patterned after those specified and described by the American Society of Me-
chanical Engineers Power Test Code PTC-22-1966, “Gas Turbine Power Plants,” with the following addi-
tions and/or exceptions. Figures in parentheses refer to the relevant paragraph in the code. Past experience
has shown that a gas turbine operator and four (4) test assistants are required for testing. One day of setup
time and one day of testing are usually needed per machine.
A test point will consist of four sets of instrument readings taken at 10-minute intervals over a 30-minute
time span after steady-state conditions have been established (3.12).
The machine will be considered to be in a steady-state condition when turbine wheelspace temperatures do
not change more than 5°F (2.77°C) in 15 minutes prior to the test point.
Past experience has shown that test points for gas turbines that cover longer than a half-hour time span are
apt to experience changes in inlet air temperatures, which change the operating characteristics of the power
plant and make the test less accurate.
Speed measurements may not be required when a single-shaft generator drive unit is connected into a large
power system. When the power system is small or frequency variations of more than 0.5% occur, then turbine
speed (or frequency) must be measured by an electronic tachometer or equivalent.
Load is to be calculated by carefully timing, with stopwatch or equivalent, a fixed number of disc revolutions
throughout the test point, averaging those times and calculating the resulting average power output by apply-
ing the appropriate factor (pri. Kh) stamped on the face of the meter.
where;
3
GEK 28166A Field Performance Testing Procedure
Ideally, the total number of disc revolutions should be counted for the entire test point. This is, however, a
tedious task and seldom worthwhile. Instead, a count of 20 revolutions should be made continuously
throughout the point with the only interruption being the recording of the elapsed time for each group of
revolutions.
Gas turbine exhaust temperature will be measured by the unit control thermocouples mounted in the exhaust
plenum (4.56).
It is essential that the temperature-indicating system be adjusted and calibrated in place with a known milli-
volt source prior to the test so that it reports reliable data. If more than 25% of the control thermocouples
are inoperative, the performance test should not be conducted.
When liquid-in-glass manometers are used, bores of smaller than 5/16 inch (0.079 cm) will be permitted
(4.59).
Barometric pressure at the gas turbine site shall be measured with a mercury or aneroid barometer. A mini-
mum reading accuracy of 0.01 inch (0.03 cm) Hg is required (4.65).
As stated in paragraph 5.33 of the code, inlet air relative humidity has negligible effects on power output and
heat consumption. It will therefore be ignored for performance evaluation.
A. Fuel Consumption
For units designed to burn more than one type of fuel, liquid fuel generally yields higher test accuracy
and repeatability and should therefore be preferred. If there is a choice of liquid fuels, lighter fuels yield
more accurate test results.
1. Liquid Fuel
Liquid fuel flow is to be measured by a positive displacement meter which has been calibrated. The
total fuel consumed during the exact 30-minute test as measured with a stopwatch must be recorded.
The fuel temperature at the meter must also be measured.
A sample of the fuel consumed during the test must be taken for laboratory measurement of higher
heating value (HHV) and specific gravity. The lower heating value (LHV) will be determined by
the method specified in paragraph 4.45 of PTC 22-1966.
If the fuel is drawn from a large storage tank, a single sample will suffice for several test points;
however, if variations in fuel characteristics are suspected, a fuel sample should be taken for each
test point. Fuel samples of one pint are sufficient for HHV and specific gravity measurement.
4
Field Performance Testing Procedure GEK 28166A
2. Gas Fuel
Gas fuel is to be measured with a flat-plate orifice installed in accordance with ASME or AGA stan-
dards. See Figure 1. The upstream pressure will be measured with a precision test gauge, the pres-
sure drop with a manometer, the gas temperature with a thermometer or thermocouple.
A gas sample must be taken from the fuel system during the test for laboratory measurement of high-
er heating value and specific gravity. A ratio (HHV/LHV) of 1.11 will be used to calculate the lower
heating value.
Calculation of gas flow will be done in accordance with ASME or AGA standards as described in
ASME PTC 19.5; 4-1959 or AGA Report #3.
Inlet air temperature will be measured with at least two thermometers or thermocouples installed
in the inlet plenum near the gas turbine compressor inlet. The compressor inlet air temperature must
be measured with an accuracy of ±1.0°F (.5°C) (4.55).
5 to 10 D
Gas
D d
Flow
Thermometer well
D. Pipe inside diameter
d. Orifice diameter
5
GEK 28166A Field Performance Testing Procedure
If waste heat recovery equipment is used, turbine exhaust static pressure at or near the gas turbine
flange must be measured using at least four-disc type static pressure probes.
When the tests are performed at “Base” and “Peak” mode, the gas turbine control system must be
adjusted to operate at the correct average gas turbine exhaust temperature for the test conditions,
as defined by the appropriate control curve.
IV. EVALUATION
Test results are based on the averaged data taken during the test. The averaged results are corrected to
the standard conditions using the appropriate correction curves for the installation. Performance as indi-
cated by determining the heat rate based on the test results is defined by:
Heat Consumption
Heat Rate +
Power Output
When decisions are required based on test results, one should recognize the tolerance due to measure-
ment uncertainties associated with each particular test result.
The tolerances around the test results are defined as twice the estimated standard deviation (2 Σ), com-
puted from the tolerances associated with each measured test parameter and the influence of that parame-
ter on the calculation of the corrected test results.
The resulting performance tolerances of a single unit station instrumentation test, when performed as
described in this document are
V. CONCLUSION
This procedure may be used to periodically measure unit performance in order to establish trends and
to determine the effectiveness of compressor cleaning. This data should be retained for historical refer-
ence.
6
Field Performance Testing Procedure GEK 28166A
CUSTOMER___________________________________________________
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Gas Turbine S/N Operating Mode
Generator S/N Data Page
Fired Hours Test Number
Fired Starts
Reading Number 1 2 3 4
Starting Time of Reading ______ ______ ______ ______
Ambient Condition
Compressor Inlet Temp. °F ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______
Barometric Pressure
Inches of Mercury ______ ______ ______ ______
Compressor Discharge
Pressure PSIG
Unit Gauge ______ ______ ______ ______
Precision Gauge ______ ______ ______ ______
Fuel Measurement - Oil*
Fuel Meter Reading - Gal. ______ ______ ______ ______
Elapsed Time - Min. ______ ______ ______ ______
Fuel Temperature °F ______ ______ ______ ______
Fuel Meter Type & S/N______________________________________
Lube Oil
Turbine Header Temp. °F. ______ ______ ______ ______
Lube Oil Tank Temp. °F ______ ______ ______ ______
Recorded By ______________________________________
*For Gas Fuel use data under Fuel Consumption
7
GEK 28166A Field Performance Testing Procedure
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Gas Turbine S/N Operating Mode
Generator S/N Data Page
Test Number
Reading Number 1 2 3 4
Starting Time of Reading ______ ______ ______ ______
Wheelspace Temperatures °F
Comp. Disch. Left ______ ______ ______ ______
Comp. Disch. Right ______ ______ ______ ______
1st Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
1st Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
1st Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
1st Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
2nd Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
2nd Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
2nd Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
2nd Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
3rd Stage Aft ______ ______ ______ ______
3rd Stage Aft When ______ ______ ______ ______
3rd Stage Forward Applicable ______ ______ ______ ______
3rd Stage Forward ______ ______ ______ ______
Exhaust Temperatures - Control T/C °F
1. ______ ______ ______ ______
2. ______ ______ ______ ______
3. ______ ______ ______ ______
4. ______ ______ ______ ______
5. ______ ______ ______ ______
6. ______ ______ ______ ______
7. ______ ______ ______ ______
8. ______ ______ ______ ______
9. ______ ______ ______ ______
10. ______ ______ ______ ______
11. ______ ______ ______ ______
12. ______ ______ ______ ______
Exhaust Average
Electrical ______ ______ ______ ______
Calculated ______ ______ ______ ______
Recorded By ______________________________________
8
Field Performance Testing Procedure GEK 28166A
CUSTOMER___________________________________________________
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Gas Turbine S/N Operating Mode
Generator S/N Data Page
Test Number
Reading Number 1 2 3 4
Starting Time of Reading ______ ______ ______ ______
Recorded By ______________________________________
9
GEK 28166A Field Performance Testing Procedure
CUSTOMER___________________________________________________
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Gas Turbine S/N Operating Mode
Generator S/N Data Page
Test Number
Pri Kh Factor
Comment/Calculations
Recorded By ______________________________________
10
Field Performance Testing Procedure GEK 28166A
CUSTOMER___________________________________________________
STATION______________________________________________________
Unit ID Date
Gas Turbine S/N Operating Mode
Generator S/N Test Number
Data Page
Specific Gravity
Recorded By ______________________________________
11
GE Power Systems
1 DEFINITION
The water injection system is designed to reduce the NOx level when the gas turbine is burning
liquid fuel.
The water injection system is an open loop where water flow is built up by an electrically driven
water pump. The system includes :
Injection water flow is injected in the combustion chambers and evacuated in the atmosphere
through the exhaust duct. The total water injection flow is distributed in the gas turbine through
two manifolds, one for gas turbine low load and one for additional flow for higher load and full
load.
Flow regulating valve and stop valve are piloted using instrument air.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
90WN-1 Converts 4-20mA signal into a pneumatic signal for valve position setting.
VS2-2 Cuts off the injection water flow big flow line.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Water characteristics :
Water characteristics must comply with GEK 101944
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
Turbine and compressor control and protection sensors are grouped as a single system
including :
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
39V-2A Measures vibrations on the flange of oil return piping of bearing n°2.
39VS-11 Measures the movement of the rotor in the plan X,Y of bearing n°1.
39VS-12 Measures the movement of the rotor in the plan X,Y of bearing n°1.
39VS-21 Measures the movement of the rotor in the plan X,Y of bearing n°2.
39VS-22 Measures the movement of the rotor in the plan X,Y of bearing n°2.
39VS-23 Measures the movement of the rotor in the plan X,Y of bearing n°2.
39VS-24 Measures the movement of the rotor in the plan X,Y of bearing n°2.
39VS-31 Measures the movement of the rotor in the plan X,Y of bearing n°3.
39VS-32 Measures the movement of the rotor in the plan X,Y of bearing n°3.
BT-TI1-2A,2B Measures temperature of pad n°2 of cou nter thrust bearing n°1.
BT-TI1-5A,5B Measures temperature of pad n°5 of cou nter thrust bearing n°1.
All right reserved Copyright – Droits de reproduction réservés
OMMD_0415_9E_E0601_EN Revision : A Date : 01/2007
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
BT-TI1-9A,9B Measures temperature of pad n°8 of cou nter thrust bearing n°1.
TT-WS1A0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after first wheel.
TT-WS1A0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after first wheel.
TT-WS1FI-1 Measures wheel space temperature, internal position before first wheel.
TT-WS1FI-2 Measures wheel space temperature, internal position before first wheel.
TT-WS2A0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after second wheel.
TT-WS2A0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after second wheel.
TT-WS2F0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position before second wheel.
TT-WS2F0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position before second wheel.
TT-WS3A0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after third wheel.
TT-WS3A0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position after third wheel.
TT-WS3F0-1 Measures wheel space temperature, external position before third wheel.
TT-WS3F0-2 Measures wheel space temperature, external position before third wheel.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Vibration measurements :
Seismic sensors and proximity probes measure the shaft vibrations. The vibration map after
commissioning load tests represents the original vibration signature.
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The starting means system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• A main electrical cranking motor loaded at 150% of nominal power at maximum torque
• An electrical turning gear motor
• A torque converter including an auxiliary two ways electrical motor to drive the variable inlet
guide vanes to adjust the output torque during starting sequences.
Lube oil from auxiliary lube oil pump feeds the torque converter during cranking sequences
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
33TC-1 Indicates the closed position of the converter supply oil valve.
88TG-1 Rotates the turbine shaft at low speed during its cooling down.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Cranking motor :
The starting sequence should be limited to three per hour to limit the effect of starting current
and the thermal effect of load current.
Clutch :
There is no mechanical clutch between the starting means and the gas turbine. Therefore the
accessory gearbox drives the torque converter output shaft while the gas turbine is running.
The starting means may run at low speed while the gas turbine is running at nominal speed due
to the dragging effect.
Torque converter :
Maintenance frequency must follow the instruction from supplier documentation.
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The fire protection system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• Auxiliaries
• Gas turbine
• Load
• Gas
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Compartments access:
Access inside the compartments at any time must be under strict control using access permit or
work permit to guaranty operator safety regarding potential risk including carbon dioxide
emission.
Fire alarm :
Fire alarm appears before fire trip. Any alarm must be investigated and rectified quickly
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The heating and ventilation system is designed for insuring the following functions :
• Auxiliaries
• Gas turbine
• Load gear
• Gas valves
• Water injection
Enclosure purpose is :
Redundant electrically driven fans provide airflow. Ventilation airflow direction is according to
the need of each enclosure.
Flap at ventilation air intake are use to restrict airflow while the ventilation is not in operation
and to participate to fire fighting effectiveness.
Electrical heaters are provided in enclosures for heating the ambient air.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Compartments access :
Access inside the compartments at any time must be under strict control using access permit or
work permit to guaranty operator safety regarding potential risk including carbon dioxide
emission.
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The flow inlet & exhaust is designed for insuring the following functions :
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
96CS-3 Measures the pressure drop downstream of the air inlet silencer.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
None
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
The gas detection system is designed to detect gas fuel leaks inside
The gas detection system include gas detector installed inside the ventilation air duct.
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
G
GEE EEnneerrggyy PPrroodduuccttss –– EEuurrooppee
1 DEFINITION
2 COMPONENT FUNCTION
96BD-1 Measures the difference between the air inlet of GT and the bell of GT intake.
Measures the differential pressure between the air inlet of GT and the
96CS-1
atmosphere.
CT-IF-3/FR Measures air temperature of the inlet of compressor.
3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
None
ci
al
G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
GER-3567H
GE Power Systems
GE Gas Turbine
Performance
Characteristics
Frank J. Brooks
GE Power Systems
Schenectady, NY
GE Gas Turbine Performance Characteristics
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Thermodynamic Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
The Brayton Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Thermodynamic Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Combined Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Factors Affecting Gas Turbine Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Air Temperature and Site Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Humidity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Inlet and Exhaust Losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Fuels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fuel Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Diluent Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Air Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Performance Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Inlet Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Steam and Water Injection for Power Augmentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Peak Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Performance Degradation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Verifying Gas Turbine Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
List of Figures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
All units larger than the Frame 6 are direct- the model number is given in Figure 1.
drive units. The MS7000 series units that are This paper reviews some of the basic thermo-
used for 60 Hz applications have rotational dynamic principles of gas turbine operation
speeds of 3600 rpm. The MS9000 series units and explains some of the factors that affect its
used for 50 Hz applications have a rotational performance.
speed of 3000 rpm. In generator-drive applica-
MS7000
PG 7 12 1 (EA)
Fuel
Combustor Exhaust
2
Compressor 4
Generator
Turbine
Inlet Air GT08922A
Fuel
Combustor Exhaust
Compressor
HP LP Load
Turbine GT08923C
Inlet Air
Figure 3. Simple-cycle, two-shaft gas turbine
respond to the numbers also used in Figure 2. air at point 1 on a continuous basis in exchange
Path 1 to 2 represents the compression occur- for the hot gases exhausted to the atmosphere
ring in the compressor, path 2 to 3 represents at point 4. The actual cycle is an “open” rather
the constant-pressure addition of heat in the than “closed” cycle, as indicated.
combustion systems, and path 3 to 4 represents Every Brayton cycle can be characterized by two
the expansion occurring in the turbine. significant parameters: pressure ratio and firing
The path from 4 back to 1 on the Brayton cycle temperature. The pressure ratio of the cycle is
diagrams indicates a constant-pressure cooling the pressure at point 2 (compressor discharge
process. In the gas turbine, this cooling is done pressure) divided by the pressure at point 1
by the atmosphere, which provides fresh, cool (compressor inlet pressure). In an ideal cycle,
2 3
P
Fuel
2 4
1 4
3
V
3
1 4
T
2
1
GT23055A
S
this pressure ratio is also equal to the pressure sented as firing temperature by point 3 in Figure
at point 3 divided by the pressure at point 4. 4.
However, in an actual cycle there is some slight Steam-cooled first stage nozzles do not reduce
pressure loss in the combustion system and, the temperature of the gas directly through
hence, the pressure at point 3 is slightly less mixing because the steam is in a closed loop.
than at point 2. As shown in Figure 5, the firing temperature on
The other significant parameter, firing temper- a turbine with steam-cooled nozzles (GE’s cur-
ature, is thought to be the highest temperature rent “H” design) has an increase of 200
reached in the cycle. GE defines firing temper- degrees without increasing the combustion
ature as the mass-flow mean total temperature exit temperature.
at the stage 1 nozzle trailing edge plane. An alternate method of determining firing tem-
Currently all first stage nozzles are cooled to perature is defined in ISO document 2314, “Gas
keep the temperatures within the operating lim- Turbines – Acceptance Tests.” The firing tem-
its of the materials being used. The two types of perature here is a reference turbine inlet tem-
cooling currently employed by GE are air and perature and is not generally a temperature that
steam. exists in a gas turbine cycle; it is calculated from
Air cooling has been used for more than 30 a heat balance on the combustion system, using
years and has been extensively developed in air- parameters obtained in a field test. This ISO
craft engine technology, as well as the latest fam- reference temperature will always be less than
ily of large power generation machines. Air the true firing temperature as defined by GE, in
used for cooling the first stage nozzle enters the many cases by 100 F/38 C or more for machines
hot gas stream after cooling down the nozzle using air extracted from the compressor for
and reduces the total temperature immediately internal cooling, which bypasses the combustor.
downstream. GE uses this temperature since it is Figure 6 shows how these various temperatures
more indicative of the cycle temperature repre- are defined.
Turbine Inlet
Temperature
- Average Gas Temp
in Plane A. (TA)
Firing Temperature
- Average Gas Temp
in Plane B. (TB)
GT17983A
The pressure ratio resulting in maximum out- while simple-cycle efficiency is not maximized,
put and maximum efficiency change with firing combined-cycle efficiency is at its peak.
temperature, and the higher the pressure ratio, Combined cycle is the expected application for
the greater the benefits from increased firing the MS7001FA.
temperature. Increases in firing temperature
provide power increases at a given pressure Combined Cycle
ratio, although there is a sacrifice of efficiency A typical simple-cycle gas turbine will convert
due to the increase in cooling air losses 30% to 40% of the fuel input into shaft output.
required to maintain parts lives. All but 1% to 2% of the remainder is in the
In combined-cycle applications (as shown in the form of exhaust heat. The combined cycle is
bottom graph in Figure 7 ), pressure ratio generally defined as one or more gas turbines
increases have a less pronounced effect on effi- with heat-recovery steam generators in the
ciency. Note also that as pressure ratio increas- exhaust, producing steam for a steam turbine
es, specific power decreases. Increases in firing generator, heat-to-process, or a combination
temperature result in increased thermal effi- thereof.
ciency. The significant differences in the slope Figure 8 shows a combined cycle in its simplest
of the two curves indicate that the optimum form. High utilization of the fuel input to the
cycle parameters are not the same for simple gas turbine can be achieved with some of the
and combined cycles. more complex heat-recovery cycles, involving
Simple-cycle efficiency is achieved with high multiple-pressure boilers, extraction or topping
pressure ratios. Combined-cycle efficiency is steam turbines, and avoidance of steam flow to
obtained with more modest pressure ratios and a condenser to preserve the latent heat content.
greater firing temperatures. For example, the Attaining more than 80% utilization of the fuel
MS7001FA design parameters are 2420 F/1316 C input by a combination of electrical power gen-
firing temperature and 15.7:1 pressure ratio; eration and process heat is not unusual.
Exhaust
HRSG
ST Gen
Turb Gen
Fuel
Comb
Air
Gas Turbine GT05363C
Combined cycles producing only electrical parameters and component efficiencies as well
power are in the 50% to 60% thermal efficien- as air mass flow.
cy range using the more advanced gas turbines. Correction for altitude or barometric pressure
Papers dealing with combined-cycle applica- is more straightforward. The air density reduces
tions in the GE Reference Library include: as the site elevation increases. While the result-
GER-3574F, “GE Combined-Cycle Product Line ing airflow and output decrease proportionate-
and Performance”; GER-3767, “Single-Shaft ly, the heat rate and other cycle parameters are
Combined-Cycle Power Generation Systems”; not affected. A standard altitude correction
and GER-3430F, “Cogeneration Application curve is presented in Figure 10.
Considerations.”
Humidity
Factors Affecting Gas Turbine Similarly, humid air, which is less dense than
Performance dry air, also affects output and heat rate, as
shown in Figure 11. In the past, this effect was
Air Temperature and Site Elevation thought to be too small to be considered.
Since the gas turbine is an air-breathing engine, However, with the increasing size of gas turbines
its performance is changed by anything that and the utilization of humidity to bias water and
affects the density and/or mass flow of the air steam injection for NOx control, this effect has
intake to the compressor. Ambient weather greater significance.
conditions are the most obvious changes from It should be noted that this humidity effect is a
the reference conditions of 59 F/15 C and 14.7 result of the control system approximation of
psia/1.013 bar. Figure 9 shows how ambient tem- firing temperature used on GE heavy-duty gas
perature affects the output, heat rate, heat con- turbines. Single-shaft turbines that use turbine
sumption, and exhaust flow of a single-shaft exhaust temperature biased by the compressor
MS7001. Each turbine model has its own tem- pressure ratio to the approximate firing tem-
perature-effect curve, as it depends on the cycle perature will reduce power as a result of
130
120
110
Heat Rate
Percent
Design 100
90
Exhaust Flow
Heat Cons.
80
Output
70
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Compressor
°F
Inlet
Temperature
-18 -7 4 16 27 38 49
GT22045D
°C
GT18848B
GT22046B
the effects on the MS7001EA, which are typical possible to make some general assumptions. If
for the E technology family of scaled machines the fuel consists only of hydrocarbons with no
(MS6001B, 7001EA, 9001E). inert gases and no oxygen atoms, output
increases as LHV increases. Here the effects of
Fuels
Cp are greater than the effects of mass flow.
Work from a gas turbine can be defined as the
Also, as the amount of inert gases is increased,
product of mass flow, heat energy in the com-
the decrease in LHV will provide an increase in
busted gas (Cp), and temperature differential
output. This is the major impact of IGCC type
across the turbine. The mass flow in this
fuels that have large amounts of inert gas in the
equation is the sum of compressor airflow
fuel. This mass flow addition, which is not com-
and fuel flow. The heat energy is a function
pressed by the gas turbine’s compressor,
of the elements in the fuel and the products
increases the turbine output. Compressor
of combustion.
power is essentially unchanged. Several side
Tables 1 and 2 show that natural gas (methane) effects must be considered when burning this
produces nearly 2% more output than does dis- kind of lower heating value fuels:
tillate oil. This is due to the higher specific heat
■ Increased turbine mass flow drives up
in the combustion products of natural gas,
compressor pressure ratio, which
resulting from the higher water vapor content
eventually encroaches on the
produced by the higher hydrogen/carbon ratio
compressor surge limit
of methane. This effect is noted even though
the mass flow (lb/h) of methane is lower than ■ The higher turbine power may exceed
the mass flow of distillate fuel. Here the effects fault torque limits. In many cases, a
of specific heat were greater than and in oppo- larger generator and other accessory
sition to the effects of mass flow. equipment may be needed
Figure 13 shows the total effect of various fuels ■ High fuel volumes increase fuel piping
on turbine output. This curve uses methane as and valve sizes (and costs). Low- or
the base fuel. medium-Btu coal gases are frequently
Although there is no clear relationship between supplied at high temperatures, which
fuel lower heating value (LHV) and output, it is further increases their volume flow
60
100%
30 H2
50
LHV-Btu/lb (Thousands)
Kcal/kg (Thousands)
40
20
30
100%
20 CH4
10
100%
CH4H10
10
75% N2 - 25% CH4
100% CO 75% CO2 - 25% CH4
0
100 105 110 115 120 125 130
130
With 5%
Steam
120 Injection
110
Output
100
%
90 No Steam
Injection
3%
80 1%
70
40 60 80 100 120
ºF
4 16 27 38 49
ºC
Compressor Inlet Temperature
GT18851A GT22048-1C
Figure 14. Effect of steam injection on output and Figure 15. Effect of air extraction on output and heat
heat rate rate
additional mass flow. Figure 14 shows the effect shows the effect of air extraction on output and
of steam injection on output and heat rate for heat rate. As a “rule of thumb,” every 1% in air
an MS7001EA. These curves assume that steam extraction results in a 2% loss in power.
is free to the gas turbine cycle, therefore heat
Performance Enhancements
rate improves. Since it takes more fuel to raise
water to combustor conditions than steam, Generally, controlling some of the factors that
water injection does not provide an improve- affect gas turbine performance is not possible.
ment in heat rate. The planned site location and the plant config-
uration (such as simple- or combined-cycle)
Air Extraction determine most of these factors. In the event
In some gas turbine applications, it may be additional output is needed, several possibilities
desirable to extract air from the compressor. to enhance performance may be considered.
Inlet Cooling
The ambient effect curve (see Figure 9) clearly
shows that turbine output and heat rate are
improved as compressor inlet temperature
decreases. Lowering the compressor inlet tem-
perature can be accomplished by installing an
evaporative cooler or inlet chiller in the inlet
ducting downstream of the inlet filters. Careful
application of these systems is necessary, as con-
densation or carryover of water can exacerbate
compressor fouling and degrade performance.
These systems generally are followed by mois-
ture separators or coalescing pads to reduce the GT22419-1D
Psychrometric 100% RH
40 .020
Chart 60% RH
(Simplified)
35
.015
30 40% RH
Btu Per Pound Evaporative
of Dry Air Cooling Process
25
Specific
.010
Humidity
20 20% RH
Inlet Chilling
Process
15
.005
10% RH
.000
°F 40 60 80 100 120
Dry Bulb
Temperature °C 4 GT21141D
16 27 38 49
specific humidity, as shown in Figure 17. As satu- Performance defines base load as operation at
ration is approached, water begins to condense 8,000 hours per year with 800 hours per start. It
from the air, and mist eliminators are used. also defines peak load as operation at 1250
Further heat transfer cools the condensate and hours per year with five hours per start.
air, and causes more condensation. Because of In recognition of shorter operating hours, it is
the relatively high heat of vaporization of water, possible to increase firing temperature to gen-
most of the cooling energy in this regime goes erate more output. The penalty for this type of
to condensation and little to temperature operation is shorter inspection intervals.
reduction. Despite this, running an MS5001, MS6001 or
Steam and Water Injection for Power MS7001 at peak may be a cost-effective way to
Augmentation obtain more kilowatts without the need for
additional peripheral equipment.
Injecting steam or water into the head end of
the combustor for NOx abatement increases Generators used with gas turbines likewise have
mass flow and, therefore, output. Generally, the peak ratings that are obtained by operating at
amount of water is limited to the amount higher power factors or temperature rises. Peak
required to meet the NOx requirement in order cycle ratings are ratings that are customized to
to minimize operating cost and impact on the mission of the turbine considering both
inspection intervals. starts and hours of operation. Firing tempera-
tures between base and peak can be selected to
Steam injection for power augmentation has
maximize the power capabilities of the turbine
been an available option on GE gas turbines for
while staying within the starts limit envelope of
over 30 years. When steam is injected for power
the turbine hot section repair interval. For
augmentation, it can be introduced into the
instance, the 7EA can operate for 24,000 hours
compressor discharge casing of the gas turbine
on gas fuel at base load, as defined. The starts
as well as the combustor. The effect on output
limit to hot section repair interval is 800 starts.
and heat rate is the same as that shown in Figure
14. GE gas turbines are designed to allow up to For peaking cycle of five hours per start, the hot
5% of the compressor airflow for steam injec- section repair interval would occur at 4,000
tion to the combustor and compressor dis- hours, which corresponds to operation at peak
charge. Steam must contain 50 F/28 C super- firing temperatures. Turbine missions between
heat and be at pressures comparable to fuel gas five hours per start and 800 hours per start may
pressures. allow firing temperatures to increase above base
but below peak without sacrificing hours to hot
When either steam or water is used for power
section repair. Water injection for power aug-
augmentation, the control system is normally
mentation may be factored into the peak cycle
designed to allow only the amount needed for
rating to further maximize output.
NOx abatement until the machine reaches base
(full) load. At that point, additional steam or
water can be admitted via the governor control.
Performance Degradation
All turbomachinery experiences losses in per-
Peak Rating formance with time. Gas turbine performance
The performance values listed in Table 1 are degradation can be classified as recoverable or
base load ratings. ANSI B133.6 Ratings and non-recoverable loss. Recoverable loss is usually
associated with compressor fouling and can be power plant performance. Power, fuel, heat
partially rectified by water washing or, more consumption and sufficient supporting data
thoroughly, by mechanically cleaning the com- should be recorded to enable as-tested per-
pressor blades and vanes after opening the unit. formance to be corrected to the condition of
Non-recoverable loss is due primarily to the guarantee. Preferably, this test should be
increased turbine and compressor clearances done as soon as practical, with the unit in new
and changes in surface finish and airfoil con- and clean condition. In general, a machine is
tour. Because this loss is caused by reduction in considered to be in new and clean condition if
component efficiencies, it cannot be recovered it has less than 200 fired hours of operation.
by operational procedures, external mainte- Testing procedures and calculation methods are
nance or compressor cleaning, but only patterned after those described in the ASME
through replacement of affected parts at rec- Performance Test Code PTC-22-1997, “Gas
ommended inspection intervals. Turbine Power Plants.” Prior to testing, all sta-
Quantifying performance degradation is diffi- tion instruments used for primary data collec-
cult because consistent, valid field data is hard tion must be inspected and calibrated. The test
to obtain. Correlation between various sites is should consist of sufficient test points to ensure
impacted by variables such as mode of opera- validity of the test set-up. Each test point should
tion, contaminants in the air, humidity, fuel and consist of a minimum of four complete sets of
dilutent injection levels for NOx. Another prob- readings taken over a 30-minute time period
lem is that test instruments and procedures vary when operating at base load. Per ASME PTC-22-
widely, often with large tolerances. 1997, the methodology of correcting test results
Typically, performance degradation during the to guarantee conditions and measurement
first 24,000 hours of operation (the normally uncertainties (approximately 1% on output and
recommended interval for a hot gas path heat rate when testing on gas fuel) shall be
inspection) is 2% to 6% from the performance agreed upon by the parties prior to the test.
test measurements when corrected to guaran-
teed conditions. This assumes degraded parts Summary
are not replaced. If replaced, the expected per- This paper reviewed the thermodynamic princi-
formance degradation is 1% to 1.5%. Recent ples of both one- and two-shaft gas turbines and
field experience indicates that frequent off-line discussed cycle characteristics of the several
water washing is not only effective in reducing models of gas turbines offered by GE. Ratings of
recoverable loss, but also reduces the rate of the product line were presented, and factors
non-recoverable loss. affecting performance were discussed along
One generalization that can be made from the with methods to enhance gas turbine output.
data is that machines located in dry, hot cli- GE heavy-duty gas turbines serving industrial,
mates typically degrade less than those in utility and cogeneration users have a proven
humid climates. history of sustained performance and reliabili-
ty. GE is committed to providing its customers
Verifying Gas Turbine Performance with the latest in equipment designs and
Once the gas turbine is installed, a perform- advancements to meet power needs at high
ance test is usually conducted to determine thermal efficiency.
List of Figures
Figure 1. Heavy-duty gas turbine model designation
Figure 2. Simple-cycle, single-shaft gas turbine
Figure 3. Simple-cycle, two-shaft gas turbine
Figure 4. Brayton cycle
Figure 5. Comparison of air-cooled vs. steam-cooled first stage nozzle
Figure 6. Definition of firing temperature
Figure 7. Gas turbine thermodynamics
Figure 8. Combined cycle
Figure 9. Effect of ambient temperature
Figure 10. Altitude correction curve
Figure 11. Humidity effect curve
Figure 12. Pressure drop effects (MS7001EA)
Figure 13. Effect of fuel heating value on output
Figure 14. Effect of steam injection on output and heat rate
Figure 15. Effect of air extraction on output and heat rate
Figure 16. Effect of evaporative cooling on output and heat rate
Figure 17. Inlet chilling process
List of Tables
Table 1. GE gas turbine performance characteristics - Generator drive gas turbine ratings
Table 2. GE gas turbine performance characteristics - Mechanical drive gas turbine ratings
GE Power Systems
Gas Turbine
A. Operator Responsibility
It is essential that the turbine operators be familiar with the information contained in the following opera-
tion text, the Control Specification drawings (consult the Control System Settings drawing for the index
of Control Specification drawings), the Piping Schematic drawings including the Device Summary
(consult the Control System Settings Drawing for the index by model list and drawing number of appli-
cable schematics), the SPEEDTRONIC control sequence program and the SPEEDTRONIC
Mark V Users’ Manual (GEH 5979). The operator must also be aware of the power plant devices which
are tied into the gas turbine mechanically and electrically and could affect normal operation. No starts
should be attempted whether on a new turbine or a newly overhauled turbine until the following condi-
tions have been met:
It is extremely important that gas turbine operators establish proper operating practices. We emphasize
adherence to the following:
1. Respond to Annunciator Indicators — Investigate and correct the cause of the abnormal condition.
This is particularly true for the protection systems, such as low oil pressure, overtemperature, vibra-
tion, overspeed etc.
2. Check of Control Systems — After any type of control maintenance is completed, whether repair or
replacement of parts, functionally check control systems for proper operation. This should be done
prior to restart of the turbine. It should not be assumed that reassembly, “as taken apart” is adequate
without the functional test.
3. Monitor Exhaust Temperature During All Phases of Startup — The operator is alerted to the following:
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or
should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes the matter should be
referred to the GE Company.
1999 GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
CAUTION
Monitor exhaust temperature for proper control upon first startup and after any turbine maintenance is
performed. Trip the turbine if the exhaust temperature exceeds the normal trip level, or increases at an
unusual rate. A particularly critical period for overtemperature damage to occur is during the startup
phase before the turbine reaches governing speed. At this time air flow is low and the turbine is unable
to accelerate away from excess fuel.
1. Temperature Limits
Refer to the Control Specifications for actual exhaust temperature control settings. It is important to
define a “baseline value” of exhaust temperature spread with which to compare future data. This
baseline data is established during steady state operation after each of the following conditions:
a. Initial startup of unit
b. Before and after a planned shut-down
c. Before and after planned maintenance
An important point regarding the evaluation of exhaust temperature spreads is not necessarily the
magnitude of the spread, but the change in spread over a period of time. The accurate recording and
plotting of exhaust temperatures daily can indicate a developing problem. Consult Control Specifi-
cation-Settings Drawings for maximum allowable temperature spreads and wheelspace tempera-
ture operating limits.
The wheelspace thermocouples, identified together with their nomenclature, are on the Device
Summary. A bad thermocouple will cause a “High Wheelspace Differential Temperature” alarm.
The faulty thermocouple should be replaced at the earliest convenience.
When the average temperature in any wheelspace is higher then the temperature limit set forth in the
table, it is an indication of trouble. High wheelspace temperature may be caused by any of the fol-
lowing faults:
UOGTNODLN–2
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
Check wheelspace temperatures very closely on initial startup. If consistently high, and a check of
the external cooling air circuits reveals nothing, it is permissible to increase the size of the cooling
air orifices slightly. Consult with a GE Company field representative to obtain recommendations
as to the size that an orifice should be increased. After a turbine overhaul, all orifices should be
changed back to their original size, assuming that all turbine clearances are returned to normal and
all leakage paths are corrected.
CAUTION
2. Pressure Limits
Refer to the Device Summary for actual pressure switch settings. Lube oil pressure in the bearing feed
header is a nominal value of 25 psig (172.36 kPa). The turbine will trip at 8 psig (55.16 kPa). Pressure
variations between these values will result from entrapped particulate matter within the lube oil filter-
ing system.
3. Vibration Limits
The maximum overall vibration velocity of the gas turbine should never exceed 1.0 inch (2.54 cm)
per second in either the vertical or horizontal direction. Corrective action should be initiated when
the vibration levels exceed 0.5 inch (1.27 cm) per second as indicated on the SPEEDTRONIC <I>
CRT.
If doubt exists regarding the accuracy of the reading or if more accurate and specific vibration read-
ings are desired a vibration check is recommended using vibration test equipment.
4. Load Limit
The maximum load capability of the gas turbine is given in the control specification. For the upper
limits of generator capability, refer to the Reactive Capability Curve.
It is GE practice to design gas turbines with margins of safety to meet the contract commitments and
to secure long life and trouble-free operation.
So that maximum trouble-free operation can be secured, GE designs these machines with more than
ample margins on turbine bucket thermal and dynamic stresses, compressor and turbine wheel
stresses, generator ventilation, coolers, etc. As a result, these machines are designed somewhat bet-
ter than is strictly necessary, because of the importance of reliability of these turbines to our custom-
ers and to the electrical industry.
It cannot be said, therefore, that these machines cannot be safely operated beyond the load limits.
Such operation, however, always encroaches upon the design margins of the machines with a conse-
UOGTNODLN–3
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
quent reduction in reliability and increased maintenance. Accordingly, any malfunction that occurs
as a result of operation beyond contract limits cannot be the responsibility of the GE Company.
The fact that a generator operates at temperature rises below the 185F° (85C°) for the rotor and
140F° (60C°) for the stator permitted by the AIEE Standards does not mean that it can be properly
run with full safety up to these values by overloading beyond the nameplate rating. These standards
were primarily set up for the protection of insulation from thermal deterioration on small machines.
The imbedded temperature detectors of the stator register a lower temperature than the copper be-
cause of the temperature drop through the insulation from the copper to the outside of the insulation,
where the temperature detectors are located. There are also conditions of conductor expansion, in-
sulation stress, etc., which impose limitations. These factors have been anticipated in the “Vee”
curves and reactive capability curves which indicate recommended values consistent with good op-
erating practice. The “Vee” curves and reactive capability curves form part of the operating instruc-
tions for the generator and it is considered unwise to exceed the values given.
The gas turbine-generator sets may require gearing between the gas turbine and the generator.
Where a reduction (or speed-increasing) gear is required between the gas turbine and generator, the
gear is rated at the maximum capability of the gas turbine, or the maximum kVa capability of the
generator, whichever is less. If the gas turbine-generator set is operated beyond the maximum rating
of the gear, the gear will also be overloaded with corresponding increased maintenance and reduced
length of life.
The gas turbines are mechanically designed so that (within prescribed limits), advantage can be tak-
en of the increased capability over nameplate rating, which is available at lower ambient tempera-
tures (because of increased air density), without exceeding the maximum allowable turbine inlet
temperature.
The load limit of the gas turbine-generator must not be exceeded, even when the ambient tempera-
ture is lower than that at which the load limit of the gas turbine is reached. Under these conditions,
the gas turbine will operate at this load with a lower turbine inlet temperature and the design stresses
on the load coupling and turbine shaft will not be exceeded.
If the turbine is overloaded so that the turbine exhaust temperature schedule is not followed for rea-
sons of malfunctioning or improper setting of the exhaust temperature control system, the maximum
allowable turbine inlet temperature or the maximum allowable exhaust temperature, or both, will be
exceeded and will result in a corresponding increase in maintenance and, in extreme cases, might
result in failure of the turbine parts.
The exhaust temperature control system senses the turbine exhaust temperature and introduces
proper bias to limit the fuel flow so that neither the maximum allowable turbine inlet temperature
nor the maximum allowable turbine exhaust temperature is exceeded.
The fire protection system, when actuated, will cause several functions to occur in addition to actuat-
ing the media discharge system. The turbine will trip, an audible alarm will sound, and the alarm
message will be displayed on the <I> CRT. The ventilation openings in the compartments will be
closed by a pressure-operated latch and the damper in the turbine shell cooling discharge will be
actuated.
UOGTNODLN–4
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
The annunciator audible alarm may be silenced by clicking on the alarm SILENCE target. The alarm
message can be cleared from the ALARM list on the <I> CRT after the ACKNOWLEDGE target
and the ALARM RESET target are actuated, but only after the situation causing the alarm has been
corrected.
The fire protection system must be replenished and reset before it can automatically react to another
fire. Reset must be made after each activation of the fire protection system which includes an initial
discharge followed by an extended discharge period of the fire protection media.
Fire protection system reset is accomplished by resetting the pressure switch located on the fire
protection system.
Ventilation dampers, automatically closed by a signal received from the fire protection system, must
be reopened manually in all compartments before restarting the turbine.
CAUTION
* * * WARNING * * *
UOGTNODLN–5
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
To prevent the above described malfunctions the operator should keep the number of non-operational ex-
haust thermocouples to a maximum of two but no more than one of any three adjacent thermocouples.
CAUTION
Operation of the gas turbine with a single faulty thermocouple should not be
neglected, as even one faulty thermocouple will increase the risk of an invalid
“combustion alarm” and/or “Trip”. The unit should not be shut down just for
replacement of a single faulty thermocouple. However, every effort should be
made to replace the faulty thermocouples when the machine is down for any
reason.
Adherence to the above criteria and early preventive maintenance should reduce distortions of the
control and protection functions and the number of unnecessary turbine trips.
8. Cooldown/Shutdown Precautions
CAUTION
If there is an emergency shutdown and the turbine is not turned with the rotor turning device, the
following factors should be noted:
a. Within 20 minutes, maximum, following turbine shutdown, the gas turbine may be started with-
out cooldown rotation. Use the normal starting procedure.
b. After a shutdown of between 20 minutes and 48 hours, a restart should not be attempted unless
the gas turbine rotor has been turned from one to two hours prior to the startup attempt.
c. If the unit has been shut down and not turned at all, it must be shut down for approximately 48
hours before it can be restarted without danger of shaft bow.
UOGTNODLN–6
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
CAUTION
Where the gas turbine has not been on rotor turning operation after shutdown
and a restart is attempted, as under conditions (a) and (b) above, the operator
should maintain a constant check on vibration velocity as the unit is brought
up to its rated speed. If the vibration velocity exceeds one inch per second at
any speed, the unit should be shut down and the shaft rotated for at least one
hour before a second starting attempt is made. If seizure occurs during the turn-
ing operation of the gas turbine, the turbine should be shut down and remain
idle for at least 30 hours, or until the rotor is free. The turbine may be rotated
at any time during the 30-hour period if it is free; however, audible checks
should be made for rubs.
NOTE
The vibration velocity must be measured at points near the gas turbine bear-
ing caps.
Standby AC power insures the immediate startup capability of particular turbine equipment and related
control systems when the start signal is given. Functions identified by asterisk are also necessary for unit
environmental protection and should not be turned off except for maintenance work on that particular
function. Standby AC power is required for:
1. Lube oil heaters, which when used in conjunction with the lube oil pumps, heat and circulate turbine
lube oil at low ambient temperatures to maintain proper oil viscosity.
2. *Control panel heating.
3. *Generator heating.
4. Lube oil pumps. Auxiliary pump should be run at periodic intervals to prevent rust formation in the
lube oil system.
5. Fuel oil heaters, where used. These heaters used in conjunction with the fuel oil pumps, heat and
circulate fuel oil at low ambient temperatures to maintain proper fuel oil viscosity.
6. Compartment heating.
7. *Operation of control compartment air conditioner during periods of high ambient temperature to
maintain electrical equipment insulation within design temperature limits.
8. *Battery charging (where applicable).
9. Heating diesel engine cooling water to assure quick starting capability. (Applicable to diesel engine
starting only.)
If a black start is required, it is recommended that the turbine be started and loaded within one hour of
losing AC power.
UOGTNODLN–7
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
The following checks are to be made before attempting to operate a new turbine or an overhauled turbine.
It is assumed that the turbine has been assembled correctly, is in alignment and that calibration of the
SPEEDTRONIC system has been performed per the Control Specifications. A standby inspection of
the turbine should be performed with the lube oil pump operating and emphasis on the following areas:
1. Check that all piping and turbine connections are securely fastened and that all blinds have been
removed. Most tube fittings incorporate a stop collar which insures proper torquing of the fittings at
initial fitting make up and at reassembly. These collars fit between the body of the fitting and the nut
and contact in tightening of the fitting. The stop collar is similar to a washer and can be rotated freely
on unassembled fittings. During initial assembly of a fitting with a stop collar, tighten the nut until it
bottoms on the collar. The fitting has to be sufficiently tightened until the collar cannot be rotated by
hand. This is the inspection for a proper fitting assembly. For each remake of the fitting, the nut
should again be tightened until the collar cannot be rotated.
2. Inlet and exhaust plenums and associated ducting are clean and rid of all foreign objects. All access
doors are secure.
3. Where fuel, air or lube oil filters have been replaced check that all covers are intact and tight.
4. Verify that the lube oil tank is within the operating level and if the tank has been drained that it has
been refilled with the recommended quality and quantity of lube oil. If lube oil flushing has been
conducted verify that all filters have been replaced and any blinds if used, removed.
5. Check operation of auxiliary and emergency equipment, such as lube oil pumps, water pumps, fuel
forwarding pumps, etc. Check for obvious leakage, abnormal vibration (maximum 3 mils), noise or
overheating.
6. Check lube oil piping for obvious leakage. Also using provided oil flow sights, check visually that
oil is flowing from the bearing drains. The turbine should not be started unless flow is visible at each
flow sight.
7. Check condition of all thermocouples and/or resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) on the <I>
CRT. Reading should be approximately ambient temperature.
8. Check spark plugs for proper arcing.
* * * WARNING * * *
If the arc occurs anywhere other than directly across the gap at the tips of the electrodes, or if by
blowing on the arc it can be moved from this point, the plug should be cleaned and the tip clearance
adjusted. If necessary, the plug should be replaced. Verify the retracting piston for free operation.
UOGTNODLN–8
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
ing system cleaners are acceptable and will not damage the carbon and rubber parts of the pump
mechanical seals or rubber parts in the piping.
Refer to “Cooling Water Recommendations for Combustion Gas Turbine Closed Cooling Systems” in-
cluded under tab titled Fluid Specifications. Note the following regarding antifreeze.
CAUTION
Do not change from one type antifreeze to another without first flushing the
cooling system very thoroughly. Inhibitors used may not be compatible and can
cause formation of gums, in addition to destroying effectiveness as an inhibitor.
Consult the antifreeze vendor for specific recommendations.
Following the water system refill ensure that water system piping, primarily pumps and flexible cou-
plings, do not leak. It is wise not to add any corrosion inhibitors until after the water system is found to
be leak free.
11. Turbines having a diesel engine starting means should have the engine tested using the diesel test
pushbutton in the accessory compartment.
12. The use of radio transmitting equipment in the vicinity of open control panels is not recommended.
Prohibiting such use will assure that no extraneous signals are introduced into the control system
that might influence the normal operation of the equipment.
13. Check the Cooling and Sealing Air Piping against the assembly drawing and piping schematic, to
ensure that all orifice plates are of designated size and in designated positions.
14. At this time all annunciated ground faults should be cleared. It is recommended that units not be
operated when a ground fault is indicated. Immediate action should be taken to locate all grounds
and correct the problems.
The following is a list of important checks to be made on a new or newly overhauled turbine with the
OPERATION SELECTOR in various modes. The Control Specifications — Control Systems Adjust-
ments should be reviewed prior to operating the turbine.
CAUTION
Where an electric motor is used as the starting means refer to the Control Speci-
fications for maximum operating time.
When a unit has been overhauled those parts or components that have been removed and taken apart for
inspection/repair should be critically monitored during unit startup and operation. This inspection
should include: leakage check, vibration, unusual noise, overheating, lubrication.
1. Crank
a. Listen for rubbing noises in the turbine compartment and in the reduction gear compartment
especially in the load tunnel area. A soundscope or some other listening type device is sug-
gested. Shutdown and investigate if unusual noise occurs.
UOGTNODLN–9
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
2. Fire
* * * WARNING * * *
Due to the complexity of gas turbine fuel systems, it is imperative for ev-
eryone to exercise extreme caution in and near any turbine compartment,
fuel handling system, or any other enclosures or areas containing fuel pip-
ing or fuel system components.
Do not enter the turbine compartment unless absolutely necessary. When
it is necessary, exercise caution when opening and entering the compart-
ment. Be aware of the possibility of fuel leaks, and be prepared to shut
down the turbine and take action if a leak is discovered.
At any time, if/when entering the turbine compartment or when in the vi-
cinity of the fuel handling system or other locations with fuel piping, fuel
system components, or fuel system connections, while the turbine is oper-
ating, implement the following:
Conduct an environmental evaluation of the turbine compartment,
fuel handling system, or specific area. Pay particular attention to all
locations where fuel piping/components/connections exist.
Follow applicable procedures for leak testing. If fuel leaks are discov-
ered, exit the area quickly, shut the turbine down, and take appropri-
ate actions to eliminate the leak(s).
UOGTNODLN–10
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
a. Bleed fuel oil filters, if appropriate. Then check entire fuel system and the area immediately
around the fuel nozzle for leaks. In particular check for leaks at the following points:
Turbine Compartment
CAUTION
b. Monitor FLAME status on the <I> processor to verify all flame detectors are correctly indicat-
ing flame. Two sight glasses are included as part of the unit startup kit. Use of sight glasses to be
limited to initial startup and special requirements, as opposed to normal operation. Following
initial startup remove sight glasses and plug opening.
c. Monitor the turbine control system readings on the <I> processor for unusual exhaust thermo-
couple temperature, wheelspace temperature, lube oil drain temperature, highest to lowest ex-
haust temperature spreads and “hot spots” i.e. combustion chamber(s) burning hotter than all
the others.
d. Listen for unusual noises and rubbing.
e. Monitor for excessive vibration.
3. Automatic, Remote
On initial startup, permit the gas turbine to operate for a 30 to 60 minute period in a full speed, no
load condition. This time period allows for uniform and stabilized heating of the parts and fluids.
Tests and checks listed below are to supplement those recorded in Control Specification — Control
System Adjustments. Record all data for future comparison and investigation.
a. Continue monitoring for unusual rubbing noises and shutdown immediately if noise persists.
b. Monitor lube oil tank, header and bearing drain temperatures continually during the heating pe-
riod. Refer to the Schematic Piping Diagram — Summary Sheets for temperature guidelines.
Adjust VTRs if required.
UOGTNODLN–11
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
c. At this time a thorough vibration check is recommended, using vibration test equipment such as
IRD equipment (IRD Mechanalysis, Inc.) or equivalent with filtered or unfiltered readings. It is
suggested that horizontal, vertical and axial data be recorded for the:
(1) accessory gear (when used) forward and aft sides
(5) reduction gear (when used) forward and aft sides, gear and pinion
A. General
The following instructions pertain to the operation of a model series 5001, 6001, 7001EA or 9001E gas
turbine unit designed for generator drive application. These instructions are based on use of Mark V
SPEEDTRONIC turbine control panels.
Functional description of the <I> CRT Main Display follows; however, panel installation, calibration,
and maintenance are not included.
Operational information includes startup and shutdown sequencing in the AUTO mode of operation.
The most common causes of alarm messages can be found in the concluding section.
It is not intended to cover initial turbine operation herein; rather, it will be assumed that initial startup,
calibration and checkouts have been completed. The turbine is in the cooldown or standby mode ready
for normal operation with AC and DC power available for all pumps, motors, heaters, and controls and
all annunciator drops are cleared.
Refer to the Control Specifications in this volume, and the previously furnished Control Sequence Pro-
gram (CSP) for additional operating sequence information and related diagrams.
UOGTNODLN–12
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
B. Start-Up
1. General
The following description lists operator, control system and machine actions or events in starting the
gas turbine.
Reference the section “Description of Panels and Terms — Turbine Control Panel” for description
of turbine panel devices. The following assumes that the unit is off of cooldown, and in a ready to
start condition.
2. Starting Procedure
a. Using the cursor positioning device, select “MAIN” display from the DEMAND DISPLAY
menu.
(1) The display will indicate speed, temperature, various conditions etc. Three lines displayed
on the <I> CRT will read:
SHUTDOWN STATUS
OFF COOLDOWN
OFF
b. Select “AUTO” and “EXECUTE”
(1) The <I> CRT display will change to:
STARTUP STATUS
READY TO START
AUTO
c. Select “START” and “EXECUTE”
(1) Unit auxiliaries will be started including a motor driven lube oil pump used to establish lube
oil pressure. The <I> CRT message SEQ IN PROGRESS will appear.
(2) If the starting clutch is not engaged, the rotor turning device will operate until the clutch
engages. With the clutch engaged, the lube oil pressure and all other permissives satisfied,
the master protective logic (L4) will be satisfied. The CRT display will change to:
STARTUP STATUS
STARTING
AUTO;
START
(3) Where a diesel engine is utilized as starting equipment, the starting diesel will start and run
at idle for two minutes to warm up. At the end of the diesel warmup period, the rotor turning
device will operate continuously and the diesel will accelerate. Where an electric motor is
utilized as starting equipment, the motor will start immediately.
UOGTNODLN–13
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
(4) The turbine shaft will begin to rotate and accelerate. When the unit reaches approximately
10 rpm, the turning device will be turned off. The <I> CRT display will change to START-
UP STATUS/CRANKING. The zero speed signal “14HR” will be displayed.
(5) When the unit reaches approximately 20% speed, the minimum speed signal “14HM” will
be displayed on the <I> CRT. (For machines with cooling water fan motors receiving power
from the generator terminals via the UCAT transformer, field flashing will be initiated to
build up generator voltage to power the fans; otherwise, field flashing to build up generator
voltage will occur at operating speed.)
(6) If the unit configuration requires purging of the gas path prior to ignition, the starting device
will crank the gas turbine at purge speed for a period of time determined by the setting of the
purge timer. See Control Specifications-Settings Drawing for purge timer settings.
(7) FSR will be set to firing value. (FSR, Fuel Stroke Reference, is the electrical signal that de-
termines the amount of fuel delivered to the turbine combustion system.) Ignition sequence
is initiated. The <I> CRT display will change to START UP STATUS/FIRING.
(8) When flame is established, the <I> CRT display will indicate flame in those combustors
equipped with flame detectors.
(9) FSR is set back to warm-up value, and the <I> CRT display will indicate STARTUP STA-
TUS/WARMING UP. If the flame goes out during the 60 second firing period, FSR will be
reset to firing value. (At the end of the ignition period, if flame has not been established, the
unit will remain at firing speed.) At this time the operator may shut the unit down or attempt
to fire again. To fire again select CRANK on the Main Display. The purge timer and firing
timer are reinitialized. The purge timer will begin to time. Reselecting AUTO will cause the
ignition sequence to repeat itself after the purge timer has timed out. If the unit is being oper-
ated remotely (REMOTE having previously been selected on the Main Display), and no fire
has been established at the end of the ignition period, the unit will be purged of unburned
fuel. At the end of the purge period (normally 1 to 2 minutes) ignition will be attempted
again. If flame is not established at this time, the starting sequence will be terminated and the
unit will shutdown.
At the end of the warmup period, with flame established, FSR will begin increasing. The
<I> CRT will indicate STARTUP STATUS/ACCELERATING and the turbine will increase
in speed. At approximately 50% speed, the accelerating speed signal “14HA” will be dis-
played on the <I> CRT.
(10) The turbine will continue to accelerate. When it reaches about 60% speed, the starting de-
vice will disengage and shutdown (if the starting device is a diesel engine, it will cooldown
at idle speed before shutting down). The <I> CRT will indicate the change in status from
STARTUP CONTROL to SPEED CONTROL at approximately 60% speed.
(11) When the turbine reaches operating speed, the operating speed signal “14HS” will be dis-
played on the <I> CRT. The motor-driven lube oil pump will shutdown, since lube oil is
being supplied by the shaft driven pump. Field flashing is terminated. If the synchronizing
selector switch (43S) on the generator control panel is in the OFF position and REMOTE is
not selected on the <I> CRT, as the turbine reaches operating speed, <I> CRT will now read:
UOGTNODLN–14
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
RUN STATUS
FULL SPEED NO LOAD
AUTO; START
If the synchronizing selector switch on the generator panel is in the AUTO position or RE-
MOTE is selected on the <I> CRT automatic synchronizing is initiated. The <I> CRT will read
SYNCHRONIZING.
The turbine speed is matched to the system (to less than 1/3 Hz difference) and when the proper
phase relationship is achieved the generator breaker will close. The machine will load to Spin-
ning Reserve unless a load control point BASE, PEAK or PRESELECTED LOAD has been
selected.
The <I> CRT will display SPINNING RESERVE, once the unit has reached this load point.
C. Synchronizing
When a gas turbine-driven synchronous generator is connected into a power transmission system, the
phase angle of the generator going on-line must correspond to the phase angle of the existing line voltage
at the moment of its introduction into the system. This is called synchronizing.
CAUTION
NOTE
Synchronizing cannot take place unless AUTO or REMOTE has been selected on
the <I> CRT Main Display and the turbine has reached full speed.
1. Place the synchronizing selector switch on the generator panel (43S) in the MANUAL position.
2. Select AUTO on the <I> CRT Main Display.
3. Select START and EXECUTE on the <I> CRT Main Display. This will start the turbine and acceler-
ate it to full speed as previously described. At this point the CRT will indicate RUN STATUS, FULL
SPEED NO LOAD.
4. Compare the generator voltage with the line voltage. (These voltmeters are located on the generator
control panel.)
5. Make any necessary voltage adjustment by operating the RAISE- LOWER (90R4) switch on the
generator panel until the generator voltage equals the line voltage.
UOGTNODLN–15
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
6. Compare the generator and line frequency on the synchroscope (located on the generator control
panel). If the pointer is rotating counterclockwise, the generator frequency is lower than the line fre-
quency and should be raised by increasing the turbine-generator speed. The brightness of the syn-
chronizing lights will change with the rotation of the synchroscope. When the lights are their dullest
the synchroscope will be at the 12 o’clock position. The lights should not be used to synchronize but
only to verify proper operation of the synchroscope.
7. Adjust the speed until the synchroscope rotates clockwise at approximately five seconds per revolu-
tion or slower.
8. The generator circuit breaker “close” signal should be given when it reaches a point approximately
one minute before the 12 o’clock position. This allows for a time lag for the breaker contacts to close
after receiving the close signal.
This procedure will start the turbine, and upon attainment of “complete sequence”, match generator volt-
age to line voltage (if equipped with optional voltage matching), synchronize the generator to the line
frequency, and load the generator to the preselected value. A “breaker closed” indicator will actuate
when the generator circuit breaker has closed placing the synchronized unit on-line.
Once the generator has been connected to the power system, the turbine fuel flow may be increased to
pick up load, and the generator excitation may be adjusted to obtain the desired KVAR value.
* * * WARNING * * *
In those cases where out-of-phase breaker closures are not so serious as to cause immediate equipment
failure or system disruption, cumulative damage may result to the on-coming generator. Repeated occur-
rences of out-of-phase breaker closures can eventually result in generator failure because of the stresses
created at the time of closure. Gear damage may result on load packages with a reduction gear in the gas
turbine-generator train. Such damage may occur separately or in conjunction with generator damage
from out-of-phase breaker closure. Damage may be to the gear teeth or to the quill shaft (if there is a
quill shaft).
Out-of-phase breaker closure of a magnitude sufficient to cause either immediate or cumulative equip-
ment damage mentioned above will usually result in annunciator drops to notify the operator of the prob-
lem. The following alarms have been displayed at various occurrences of known generator breaker mal-
closures:
UOGTNODLN–16
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
Out-of-phase breaker closure will result in abnormal generator noise and vibration at the time of closure.
If there is reason to suspect such breaker malclosure, the equipment should be immediately inspected
to determine the cause of the malclosure and for any damage to the generator and/or reduction gear.
Refer to the “Control and Protection” section of this volume for additional information on the synchro-
nizing system.
1. Manual Loading
Manual loading can also be accomplished by means of the governor control switch (70R4/CS) on
the generator control panel. Holding the switch to the right will increase the load; holding it to the left
will decrease the load.
Manual loading beyond the selected temperature control point BASE or PEAK is not possible. The
manual loading rate is shown in the Control Specification-Settings Drawing.
NOTE
When manually loading with the governor control switch (70R4/CS) for load
changes greater than 25% of full load, the operator should not change more than
25% of full load in one minute.
2. Automatic Loading
On startup if no load point is selected, the unit will load to the SPINNING RESERVE load point. The
SPINNING RESERVE load point is slightly greater than no load, typically 8% of base rating.
An intermediate load point, PRE-SELECTED load, and temperature control load points BASE and
PEAK can be selected anytime after a start signal has been given. The selection will be displayed on
the <I> CRT. The unit will load to the selected load point. PRESELECTED LOAD is a load point
greater than SPINNING RESERVE and less than BASE, typically 50%. The auto loading rate is
shown in Control Specification-Settings Drawing.
E. Remote Operation
To transfer turbine control from the control compartment to remotely located equipment, select RE-
MOTE on the <I> CRT Main Display. The turbine may then be started, automatically synchronized, and
loaded by the remote equipment.
If manual synchronization is to be performed at the remote location, the synchronizing selector switch
(43S) mounted on the generator control panel must be placed in the OFF/REMOTE position.
UOGTNODLN–17
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
1. Normal Shutdown
Normal shutdown is initiated by selecting STOP on the <I> CRT Main Display. The shutdown pro-
cedure will follow automatically through generator unloading, turbine speed reduction, fuel shutoff
at part speed and initiation of the cooldown sequence as the unit comes to rest.
2. Emergency Shutdown
3. Cooldown
Immediately following a shutdown, after the turbine has been in the fired mode, the rotor is turned to
provide uniform cooling. Uniform cooling of the turbine rotor prevents rotor bowing, resultant rub-
bing and imbalance, and related damage that might otherwise occur when subsequent starts are at-
tempted without cooldown. The turbine can be started and loaded at any time during the cooldown
cycle.
The cooldown cycle may be accelerated using the starting device; in which case it will be operated at
cranking speed. On units having an electric motor as the starting device, the operator must heed
instructions regarding the length of time the motor can be operated without overheating. Refer to the
control specifications.
The device furnished for cooldown rotation on MS 5001P, MS 6001B, and MS 7001EA units is
the hydraulic ratchet which is mounted as part of the torque converter. The ratchet cycles once
every 3.0 minutes to turn the rotor 47°. A description of rotor turning operation and servicing
can be found in the Starting System tab. The MS 9001E is a continuous turning gear system at
6.0 rpm.
The minimum time required for turbine cooldown depends mainly on the turbine ambient tem-
perature. Other factors, such as wind direction and velocity in outdoor installations and air
drafts in indoor installations, can have an affect on the time required for cooldown. The cool-
down times recommended in the following paragraphs are the result of GE Company operating
experience in both factory and field testing of GE gas turbines. The purchaser may find that
these times can be modified as experience is gained in operation of the gas turbine under his
particular site conditions.
Cooldown times should not be accelerated by opening up the turbine compartment doors or the
lagging panels since uneven cooling of the outer casings may result in excessive stress.
The unit must be on rotor turning operation immediately following a shutdown for at least 24
hours to ensure minimum protection against rubs and unbalance on a subsequent starting at-
tempt. The GE Company, however, recommends that the rotor turning operation continue for 48
hours after shutdown to ensure uniform rotor cooling.
UOGTNODLN–18
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
To terminate the cooldown sequence, prior to timer timeout select the Auxiliary Control Dis-
play on the <I> CRT. Select “RATCHET OFF”. This will cause the cooldown auxiliaries to be
turned off. Similarly, by selecting the “RATCHET ON” target, the cooldown auxiliaries can be
reinstated.
G. Special Operations
a. General
Gas turbine operation under “black start” conditions is defined as a requirement to start and run
the turbine when an external AC power source is not available. Diesel engines are normally uti-
lized as starting equipment with other compatible steam or gas starting means optional.
The prime DC controlling power for the turbine control system is derived from the unit battery.
Ignition and internal AC control power is obtained through DC conversion circuitry within the
SPEEDTRONIC power supply system.
b. Operation
When the turbine is started, the DC emergency lube pump will supply adequate lubrication until
the accessory gear-driven main lube oil pump pressure is established. The emergency pump
continues to run until the accelerating speed signal (14HA) indicates that the unit has acceler-
ated to 50% speed. The emergency pump then shuts down if lube oil pressure switch (63QL)
indicates adequate pressure.
Black start operation also requires the addition of the 88HR DC hydraulic ratchet pump assem-
bly. This unit furnishes the required hydraulic control oil pressure for operation of the starting
clutch and ratchet assembly.
For liquid fuel machines, fuel pressure delivered to the input of the turbine gear driven fuel
pump is provided by a dc/ac powered fuel forwarding pump. The DC motor drives the pump
until AC power is available to drive the AC motor. The turbine high pressure fuel oil require-
ments are satisfied by the normal accessory gear driven fuel pump.
Gas turbine AC powered cooling system fan drive motors are operated from partial to full power
by driven load generator output, as the gas turbine is brought up to operational speed level.
During turbine shutdown and cooldown periods, the operational lube supply is again furnished
by the emergency DC lube pump and the 88HR DC hydraulic ratchet supply pump assembly
mentioned previously operates to turn the rotor.
Refer to the Lube Oil and Hydraulic Oil Supply Schematic Piping Diagrams; and the SPEED-
TRONIC Control instructions of this service manual for further related information.
UOGTNODLN–19
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
Fuel transfer is initiated using the Fuel Mixture Display on the <I> CRT. When transferring from one
fuel to the other, there is a thirty second delay before the transfer begins. For the gas-to-distillate
transfer, the delay allows for filling the liquid fuel lines. For the distillate-to-gas transfer, the delay
allows time for the speed ratio valve (and gas control valve) to modulate the inter volume gas pres-
sure before the transfer begins. Once started, fuel transfer takes approximately thirty seconds. The
transfer can be stopped at any fuel mixture proportion within limits as specified in the Control Speci-
fication-Settings Drawing by setting the FUEL MIX SETPOINT and then selecting MIX. Fuel
transfer should be initiated prior to ignition or after the unit reaches operating speed.
In the event of low fuel gas pressure the turbine will transfer to liquid fuel. The transfer will occur
with no delay for line filling. To return to gas fuel operation after an automatic transfer, manually
reselect gas fuel.
The starting diesel may be tested either with the turbine operating or while shutdown. To test the
diesel, first select the Auxiliary Control Display on the <I> CRT. Select the “DIESEL TEST ON”
target. The diesel can now be tested by operating the diesel test pushbutton located on the accessory
base. The diesel will run at idle speed as long as the pushbutton is held in. (Do not exceed two (2)
minutes.)
A pushbutton (43HR) located on the accessory base is provided for manual jogging of the turbine
shaft by means of the hydraulic ratchet.
The DC emergency pump may be tested using the test pushbutton on the motor starter.
Overspeed trip system testing should be performed on an annual basis on peaking and intermittently
used gas turbines. On continuously operated units, the test should be performed at each scheduled
shutdown and after each major overhaul. All units should be tested after an extended shutdown peri-
od of two or more months unless otherwise specified in the Control Specifications-Adjustments
Drawing.
NOTE
The turbine should be operated for at least 30 minutes at rated speed before
checking the overspeed settings. This will allow determination of the actual
trip speed, which might be higher or lower than the “cold” trip speed depend-
ing upon several contributing factors, such as oil temperature and vibration.
UOGTNODLN–20
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
8. Electrical Overspeed
Turbine speed is controlled by the turbine speed reference signal TNR. The maximum speed called
for by TNR is limited by the high speed stop control constant. This value is nominally set at 107% of
rated speed. It will be necessary to enter a new constant value for the high speed stop constant that
will allow the speed to increase above the electrical overspeed trip setting. New constants can be
entered with the Control Constant Adjust display activated and via the <I> keypad. Reference the
control specification and the SPEEDTRONIC Mark V Maintenance Manual (GEH 5980) for de-
tails. For security, an identification code must be entered via the keypad in order to make any
changes to the control system constants. With the high speed stop constant adjusted to be higher than
the electrical overspeed trip speed, raise unit speed gradually by using the SPEED SP RAISE target
on the <I> Main Display and observe speed at which the unit trips against the value tabulated in the
Control Specifications — Setting drawing.
CAUTION
In order to test the mechanical overspeed bolt it is necessary to change the electrical overspeed trip
setting constant to be greater than the mechanical overspeed bolt overspeed setting. After changing
the required constants raise unit speed gradually by using the SPEED SP RAISE target on the <I>
Main Display and observe speed at which the unit trips against the value tabulated in the Control
Specifications — Settings drawing.
CAUTION
Record all trip speeds. Mechanical testing should also include the emergency trip button on the tur-
bine control panel and the manual overspeed mechanical trip located on the right side of the accesso-
ry gear. Successful completion of the above tests will assure that all shutdown devices are operating
correctly.
To reduce the possibility of overspeed bolt trip system degradation where the trip speed becomes
excessively high, especially after long periods of inactivity, it is recommended that the mechanical
bolt be tested periodically by carefully overspeeding the turbine and noting the speed at which the
trip occurs. If the trip does not occur within the limits, as defined in the Control Specifications, the
bolt should be sparingly oiled in place with a lightweight machine oil, stroked by manually depress-
ing the plunger several times through its stroke limits, and retested. The overspeed bolt should then
be tripped three successive times within 1% of nominal trip speed and within 1% repeatability unless
defined otherwise in the Control Specifications.
UOGTNODLN–21
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
CAUTION
1. Do not exceed the maximum search speed as defined in the Control Speci-
fications.
2. The turbine should not be operated unless the overspeed bolt, the over-
speed trip mechanisms, the fuel stop valves and other shutdown devices are
in reliable condition.
If a trip does not occur within reliable limits, refer to the adjustment instructions in the Service
Manual, Protection System, Overspeed Bolt Assembly. If three successive trips do not occur within
acceptable repeatability limits, see instructions for Maintenance and Replacement or contact your
Field Service Representative for assistance.
Before operating the steam injection system for the first time following an overhaul or periods of
extended shutdown, it is important that the following checks be made:
a. Steam supply is within design parameters
b. Instrument air supply is at required pressure
c. Steam line orifice size is correct
a. Pre-Operation Checks
b. Startup
The automatic control system, in conjunction with logic circuits of the microcomputer of the
SPEEDTRONIC control system, operates the steam injection system control valving and as-
sures that the proper amount of steam injection is provided to the turbine combustion system
during operation.
To initiate steam injection the operator must first select the Steam Injection Overview Display
on the <I> CRT. Selecting the STM INJ ON target initiates the steam injection control. At this
point the automatic steam control circuits will take over, initiate the drain and stop valve se-
quences and control the system. When steam conditions are correct, the steam control valve re-
leases steam into the combustion system at the proper steam-to-fuel flow ratio.
The startup and operating sequence of the steam injection system is described and explained in
the Steam Injection control system text of the Control and Protection Tab.
UOGTNODLN–22
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
c. Trouble Shooting
The purpose of the system is to provide steam to the turbine combustion system at the desired
pressure, temperature and flow. If this does not happen, the following problems may be the
cause:
(4) Check that instrument air supply pressure is sufficient and/or check solenoid control valve
operation.
Alarm and shutdown conditions of the steam injection system are detected by a protection pro-
gram built into Control Sequence Program. Alarm and trip indications are displayed on the <I>
CRT. An alarm condition is initiated by high or low pressure levels and by high or low tempera-
tures. See Control Specifications for alarm and trip point values.
The computer program is designed to trip the steam stop valve and prevent steam flow if steam
temperature becomes too high or too low. It can trip the system on temperature or pressure to
protect against loss of superheat and carry over of condensate. Steam at too high a pressure can
cause damage to valve stem packing and system seals. A steam injection trip only shuts down
the steam injection system. It does not trip the turbine.
a. General
Water washing should be scheduled during a normal shutdown, if possible. This will allow
enough time for the internal machine temperature to drop to the required levels for the washing.
The time required to cool the machine can be shortened by maintaining the unit at crank speed.
During this cooling of the turbine, the wash water is to be heated to the proper level.
b. Mandatory Precautions
Before water washing of the compressor begins, the turbine blading temperature must be low
enough so that the water does not cause thermal shock.
UOGTNODLN–23
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
CAUTION
The differential temperature between the wash water and the interstage wheel-
space temperature must not be greater than 120°F (48.9°C) to prevent thermal
shock to the hot gas parts. For wash water of 180°F (82.2°C), the maximum
wheelspace temperature must be no greater than 300°F (148.9°C) as measured
by the digital thermocouple readout system on the turbine control panel.
To reduce this difference, the wash water may be heated and the turbine kept on crank until the
wheelspace temperatures drop to an acceptable level. The wheelspace temperatures are read in
the control room on the <I> CRT.
CAUTION
If, during operation, there has been an increase in exhaust temperature spread
above the normal 15°F to 30°F (8.3°C to 16.6°C), the thermocouples in the ex-
haust plenum should be examined. If they are coated with ash, the ash should
be removed.
Radiation shields should also be checked. If they are not radially oriented rela-
tive to the turbine, they should be repositioned per the appropriate drawing. If
the thermocouples are coated with ash, or if the radiation shields are not proper-
ly oriented, a correct temperature reading will not be obtained.
If neither of the above conditions exists and there is no other explanation for the temperature
spread, consult the GE Installation and Service Engineering representative.
* * * WARNING * * *
The water wash operation involves water under high pressure. Caution
must be exercised to ensure the proper positioning of all valves during this
operation. Since the water may also be hot, necessary precautions should
be taken in handling valves, pipes, and potentially hot surfaces.
NOTE
Before water washing the compressor, inspect the inlet plenum and gas turbine
bellmouth for large accumulations of atmospheric contaminants which could be
washed into the compressor. These deposits can be removed by washing with a
garden hose.
The GE Company recommends the following procedures for gas turbines subject to extended shut-
downs.
UOGTNODLN–24
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
a. The turbine rotor should be operated on turning gear or ratchet for one hour each day to prevent
the buildup of corrosive deposits in the turbine wheel dovetails, OR
b. The gas turbine should be operated at full speed, no load for one hour per week to dry the turbine
out and thereby preventing moisture condensation in the turbine wheel dovetail crevices.
The turbine control panel contains the hardware and software required to operate the turbine.
EMERGENCY STOP (5E) — This red pushbutton is located on the front of the TCP. Operation of this
pushbutton immediately shuts off turbine fuel.
BACKUP OPERATOR INTERFACE (BOI) — This interactive display is mounted on the front of the
TCP. All operator commands can be issued from this module. In addition, alarm management can be
performed and turbine parameters can be monitored from the <BOI>.
B. <I> CRT
The <I> CRT is a personal computer that directly interfaces to the turbine control panel. This is the pri-
mary operator station. All operator commands can be issued from the <I> CRT. Alarm management can
be performed and turbine parameters can be monitored. With the proper password, editing can also be
accomplished.
1. Main Display
Operator selector targets and master control selector targets can be actuated from the main display
by using the cursor positioning device (CPD). Operator selector targets include:
CRANK — With crank selected, a start signal will bring the machine to cranking speed (14HM).
FIRE — With FIRE selected, a START signal will bring the machine to minimum speed and estab-
lish flame in the combustors. Selecting FIRE while the machine is on CRANK will initiate the firing
sequence and establish flame in the combustors.
AUTO — With AUTO selected, a START signal will bring the machine to operating speed. Chang-
ing selections from FIRE to AUTO will allow the machine to accelerate to operating speed.
REMOTE — With REMOTE selected, control for the unit is transferred to the remote control equip-
ment.
START — A START selection will cause the unit to start. With AUTO selected, the unit will load to
the SPINNING RESERVE load point.
UOGTNODLN–25
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
FAST START - A FAST START selection will cause the unit to start. With AUTO selected, the unit
will load to the PRESELECTED load point. The machine will load at the manual loading rate.
STOP - A STOP selection will cause the unit to initiate a normal shutdown.
All operator selector switches and master control selector targets are green and are located on the
right side of the display. All green targets are the AUTO/EXECUTE type, which means that the tar-
get must be selected with the CPD and then, within three seconds, the EXECUTE target at the bot-
tom of the display must also be selected in order to actuate that command.
Load selector targets can be actuated from the load control display by using the cursor positioning
device (CPD). Load selector targets include:
Fuel selector targets are used to select the desired fuel by using the cursor positioning device (CPD).
Fuel selector targets include:
MIX SELECT - Selecting MIX while on 100% single fuel will cause the machine to transfer to
mixed fuel operation at a preset mixture.
Governor selector targets are used to select the desired type of speed control by using the cursor posi-
tioning device (CPD). Governor selector targets include:
The inlet guide vane (IGV) temperature control targets are IGV TEMP CNTL ON and IGV TEMP
CNTL OFF. The IGV AUTO target selects normal operation of the IGVs. The IGV MANUAL tar-
get allows the maximum IGV angle to be manually set by the operator (not normally used while
on-line).
*Optional equipment
UOGTNODLN–26
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
6. Alarm Display
This screen displays the current un-reset alarms, the time when each alarm occurred, the alarm drop
number and a word description of the alarm. An “*” indicates that the alarm has not been acknowl-
edged. The “*” disappears after the alarm has been acknowledged. For more information, see the
Mark V Users’ Manual (GEH 5979).
7. Auxiliary Display
COOLDOWN ON and COOLDOWN OFF can be selected from this display. The DIESEL TEST
ON and DIESEL TEST OFF targets (if diesel starting means is used) can also be selected from this
display. Selecting the DIESEL TEST ON target enables the permissive which allows the Diesel Test
Pushbutton to be manually operated.
After selecting the ENABLE SOFTSW’s target, the OVERSPEED TEST HP target can be selected.
This will adjust the electrical overspeed setpoint to allow testing of the mechanical overspeed
equipment.
Selecting the manual reset target resets the Master Reset Lockout function. This target must be se-
lected so that the unit can be restarted following a trip.
C. Definition of Terms
SPINNING RESERVE - The minimum load control point based on generator output. The spinning re-
serve magnitude in MWs can be found in the control specifications (5–10% of rating is a typical value).
PRESELECTED LOAD - A load control point based on generator output. The preselected load point
is adjustable within a range designated in the Control Specification. The preselected load point is nor-
mally set below the base load point (50–60% of rating is a typical value).
BASE LOAD - This is the normal maximum loading for continuous turbine operation as determined by
turbine exhaust temperature levels.
PEAK LOAD (Optional) - This is the maximum allowable output permitted for relatively long-duration,
emergency power requirement situations consistent with acceptable turbine parts life. Peak loading
duration is based on turbine exhaust temperature levels.
SYNCHRONIZING LAMPS — Rough indication of the speed and phase relationship between the gen-
erator and the bus.
UOGTNODLN–27
UOGTNODLN Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas)
SYNCHROSCOPE — Indicates the phase relationship between the generator and bus voltage.
GENERATOR AMMETER — Indicates generator phase current. The phase current to be read is se-
lected on the three position ammeter selector switch.
SYNCHRONIZING SELECTOR SWITCH (43S/CS) — Three position switch used to select the syn-
chronizing mode.
Manual — Selects manual synchronizing mode. In this position the generator frequency and voltage,
bus voltage, and phase relationship will be displayed to facilitate manual synchronizing.
Off/Remote — Used when the unit is being controlled from the remote control equipment.
VOLTMETER SWITCH (VS) — Used to select the phase of the bus voltage to be displayed on the run
voltmeter.
VOLTAGE/VAR CONTROL SWITCH (90R4/CS) — Controls generator voltage when the unit is off
the line, and controls voltage/vars when the machine is on the line. (Increase — Right; Decrease — Left;
spring return to normal.)
GENERATOR BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH (52G/CS) — Used to open or close the generator
breaker. The indicator lights above the switch indicate Open (Green) and Closed (Red).
NOTE
Using this switch, the generator breaker should be closed only when proper syn-
chronizing techniques are used or when the system onto which the generator is be-
ing brought is not energized.
GENERATOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK-OUT SWITCH (86G) — Manual reset lockout switch which
operates in the event of a generator fault.
UOGTNODLN–28
Unit Operation/Turbine (Gas) UOGTNODLN
The turbine is provided with a motor control center for the control of the electrical auxiliaries. The motor
control center includes AC and DC distribution systems.
Motor controllers are used for auxiliaries such as motors and heaters. Each motor controller normally
consists of a breaker, control power transformer, control circuit, power contactor, selector switch and
indicator lights. The selector switch is normally left in AUTO. Each motor control center is also provided
with AC and DC distribution panel boards with circuit breakers.
Supervisory equipment is normally functionally the same as the equipment described in the cable con-
nected master panel. However, it may differ somewhat in metering and indications. Refer to the supervi-
sory manufacturer’s instruction manual for details.
G. Annunciator System
The attached alarm list is a maxcase of alarms that may be available. All alarms may not be used on this
project.
Alarms are displayed on the <I> CRT when the ALARM Display mode is selected. Before clearing an
alarm, action should be taken to determine the cause and perform the necessary corrective action. The
following is a list of annunciator messages along with suggested operator action.
NOTE
The alarm messages can be categorized as either “trip” or “alarm”. The “trip” mes-
sages contain the word TRIP in the message. The “alarm” messages do not indicate
TRIP. For those alarms associated with permissive to start and trip logics latched
up through the MASTER RESET function, it will be necessary to call up the <I>
CRT Display with the Master Reset target in order to unlatch and clear these
alarms.
UOGTNODLN–29
DT-1C G
E
O
ffi
ci
al
SIZE DWG. NO. SH. REV.
A3 132B8218 1 E
SW17
PDH UDH ADH TRUNK
SW18
PDH UDH ADH TRUNK
UPS-
P49A P49A
UPS-
110VAC 110VAC
B
(1)
M
9G2 9G1
UPS- UPS- UPS-
SW5 110VAC 110VAC 110VAC
SW13 SW3
PDH
PDH
GCP GCP
BN Mark VI C (from 9G4) (5) BN Mark VI
UDH
UDH
EX2100 D (from 9G5)
EPM
P49A EX2100
T60B
G60A
G60B
T S R P50A
T60B
G60B
G60A
RIM
T S R
RIM
V
M2 M1 E (from 9G6) V
TRUNK
max max M2 M1
ADH
ADH
P48A J (from 9G4) same I (from 9G4)
TRUNK
PDH
TRUNK
as
9G2
UPS- UPS- UPS-
SW6 110VAC 110VAC 110VAC
SW14 SW4
PDH
PDH
F (from 9G4) (5)
UDH
HMI HMI
UDH
G (from 9G5)
UDH
RS2 32 UDH PDH
P49A RS2 32 UDH PDH
ADH
Single-Unit 110VAC Single-Unit 110VAC
P48A L (from 9G4) K (from 9G4)
TRUNK
Server
PDH
TRUNK
Server
Alarm Printer Alarm Printer
UPS- UPS-
110VAC 110VAC
SW19
SW20
PDH UDH ADH TRUNK PDH UDH ADH TRUNK
(1) (6)
M
9G5 9G6
UPS- UPS- UPS-
SW7 110VAC SW15 110VAC SW9 110VAC
PDH
PDH
GCP GCP
BN Mark VI UDH
I (from 9G1) BN Mark VI
GPP AVR GPP AVR
UDH
EPM
UDH
EPM
EX2100
P49A J (from 9G2) EX2100
T60B
G60B
G60A
T S R P50A
G60B
G60A
RIM
T S R
T60B
RIM
C (from 9G3) (5)
V
max M2 M1 TRUNK V
max M2 M1
ADH
ADH
P48A same
TRUNK
PDH
TRUNK
D (from 9G3) as E (from 9G3)
9G5
UPS- UPS- UPS-
SW8 110VAC SW16 110VAC SW10 110VAC
PDH
PDH
K (from 9G1)
UDH
HMI HMI
UDH
UDH
RS2 32 UDH PDH
P49A L (from 9G2) RS2 32 UDH PDH
ADH
Single-Unit 110VAC Single-Unit 110VAC
P48A
TRUNK
PDH
Server
TRUNK
Alarm Printer
Server
Alarm Printer
UPS- UPS-
G (from 9G3) H (from 9G3)
110VAC 110VAC
Switch : SW1 Location : ECB 9G1 Switch : SW3 Location : ECB 9G2 Switch : SW5 Location : ECB 9G3
Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP49A
Port_1 GT1_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT2_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT3_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 9G1\G60A Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G2\G60A Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G3\G60A Cat 5 PDH
Port_3 9G1\EPM Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G2\EPM Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G3\EPM Cat 5 PDH
Port_6 9G1\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G2\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_4 CRM3_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_7 9G1\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_7 9G2\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_5 9G3_DCS\GSM-A_GT3_SVR Cat 5 PDH
Port_9 GT1_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_9 GT2_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_6 9G3\BN Cat 5 PDH
Port_10 9G1\R Cat 5 UDH Port_10 9G2\R Cat 5 UDH Port_7 9G3\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH
Port_13 9G1\M1 Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G2\M1 Cat 5 UDH Port_8 Network Time Server 1\PDH Cat 5 PDH
Port_20 SW2\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_20 SW4\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_9 GT3_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
FOPort_1 9G3\SW13\FOPort_1 Fiber FO FOPort_1 9G3\SW13\FOPort_2 Fiber FO Port_10 9G3\R Cat 5 UDH
FOPort_2 9G4\SW15\FOPort_3 Fiber FO FOPort_2 9G4\SW15\FOPort_4 Fiber FO Port_13 9G3\M1 Cat 5 UDH
Port_15 CRM3_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Switch : SW2 Location : ECB 9G1 Switch : SW4 Location : ECB 9G2 Port_16 Network Time Server 1\UDH Cat 5 UDH
Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP50A Port_20 SW13\Port_8 Crossover Trunk
Port_1 GT1_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT2_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH FOPort_1 CRM\SW17\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
Port_2 9G1\G60B Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G2\G60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_3 9G1\T60B Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G2\T60B Cat 5 PDH Switch : SW6 Location : ECB 9G3
Port_6 9G1\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G2\BN Cat 5 PDH Type : 323A4747NZP49A
Port_9 GT1_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_9 GT2_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_1 GT3_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_11 9G1\S Cat 5 UDH Port_11 9G2\S Cat 5 UDH Port_2 9G3\G60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_12 9G1\T Cat 5 UDH Port_12 9G2\T Cat 5 UDH Port_3 9G3\T60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_13 9G1\M2 Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G2\M2 Cat 5 UDH Port_4 CRM3_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_14 9G1\Vmax Cat 5 UDH Port_14 9G2\Vmax Cat 5 UDH Port_5 9G3_DCS\GSM-B_GT3_SVR Cat 5 PDH
Port_20 SW1\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_20 SW3\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_6 9G3\BN Cat 5 PDH
FOPort_1 9G3\SW14\FOPort_2 Fiber FO FOPort_1 9G3\SW14\FOPort_1 Fiber FO Port_7 9G3_DCS\BN-A Cat 5 PDH
FOPort_2 9G4\SW16\FOPort_3 Fiber FO FOPort_2 9G4\SW16\FOPort_4 Fiber FO Port_8 9G3_DCS\BN-RIM Cat 5 PDH
Port_9 GT3_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_11 9G3\S Cat 5 UDH
Port_12 9G3\T Cat 5 UDH
Port_13 9G3\M2 Cat 5 UDH
Port_14 9G3\Vmax Cat 5 UDH
Port_15 CRM3_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_20 SW14\Port_8 Crossover Trunk
FOPort_1 CRM\SW18\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
Switch : SW7 Location : ECB 9G4 Switch : SW9 Location : ECB 9G5 Switch : SW11 Location : ECB 9G6
Type : 323A4747NZP49A Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP50A
Port_1 GT4_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT5_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT6_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 9G4\G60A Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G5\G60A Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G6\G60A Cat 5 PDH
Port_3 9G4\EPM Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G5\EPM Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G6\EPM Cat 5 PDH
Port_5 9G4_DCS\GSM-A_GT4_SVR Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G5\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G6\BN Cat 5 PDH
Port_6 9G4\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_7 9G5\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_7 9G6\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH
Port_7 9G4\BN\RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_9 GT5_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_9 GT6_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Port_8 Network Time Server 2\PDH Cat 5 PDH Port_10 9G5\R Cat 5 UDH Port_10 9G6\R Cat 5 UDH
Port_9 GT4_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G5\M1 Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G6\M1 Cat 5 UDH
Port_10 9G4\R Cat 5 UDH Port_20 SW10\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_20 SW12\Port_20 Crossover Trunk
Port_13 9G4\M1 Cat 5 UDH FOPort_1 9G3\SW13\FOPort_4 Fiber FO FOPort_1 9G3\SW13\FOPort_5 Fiber FO
Port_16 Network Time Server 2\UDH Cat 5 UDH FOPort_2 9G4\SW15\FOPort_2 Fiber FO FOPort_2 9G4\SW15\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
Port_20 SW15\Port_8 Crossover Trunk
FOPort_1 CRM\SW19\FOPort_1 Fiber FO Switch : SW10 Location : ECB 9G5 Switch : SW12 Location : ECB 9G6
Type : 323A4747NZP50A Type : 323A4747NZP50A
Switch : SW8 Location : ECB 9G4 Port_1 GT5_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH Port_1 GT6_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Type : 323A4747NZP49A Port_2 9G5\G60B Cat 5 PDH Port_2 9G6\G60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_1 GT4_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G5\T60B Cat 5 PDH Port_3 9G6\T60B Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 9G4\G60B Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G5\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_6 9G6\BN Cat 5 PDH
Port_3 9G4\T60B Cat 5 PDH Port_9 GT5_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_9 GT6_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_5 9G4_DCS\GSM-B_GT4_SVR Cat 5 PDH Port_11 9G5\S Cat 5 UDH Port_11 9G6\S Cat 5 UDH
Port_6 9G4\BN Cat 5 PDH Port_12 9G5\T Cat 5 UDH Port_12 9G6\T Cat 5 UDH
Port_7 9G4_DCS\BN-A Cat 5 PDH Port_13 9G5\M2 Cat 5 UDH Port_13 9G6\M2 Cat 5 UDH
Port_8 9G4_DCS\BN-RIM Cat 5 PDH Port_14 9G5\Vmax Cat 5 UDH Port_14 9G6\Vmax Cat 5 UDH
Port_9 GT4_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_20 SW9\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_20 SW11\Port_20 Crossover Trunk
Port_11 9G4\S Cat 5 UDH FOPort_1 9G3\SW14\FOPort_4 Fiber FO FOPort_1 9G3\SW14\FOPort_5 Fiber FO
Port_12 9G4\T Cat 5 UDH FOPort_2 9G4\SW16\FOPort_1 Fiber FO FOPort_2 9G4\SW16\FOPort_2 Fiber FO
Port_13 9G4\M2 Cat 5 UDH
Port_14 9G4\Vmax Cat 5 UDH
Port_20 SW16\Port_8 Crossover Trunk
FOPort_1 CRM\SW20\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
Switch : SW17 Location : Control Room Switch : SW19 Location : Control Room
Type : 323A4747NZP49A Type : 323A4747NZP49A
Port_1 CRM1_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_1 HIST1_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 CRM2_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_2 PERF_MONITOR Cat 5 PDH
Port_4 CRM4_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH Port_3 OSM\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_7 Laser Printer PRT1 Cat 5 PDH Port_5 CRM5_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_9 CRM1_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_6 CRM6_SVR\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_10 CRM2_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_7 Laser Printer PRT3 Cat 5 PDH
Port_12 CRM4_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH Port_9 HIST1_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Port_20 SW18\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_10 CRM5_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Port_21 SW19\Port_21 Crossover Trunk Port_11 CRM6_SVR\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
FOPort_1 9G3\SW5\FOPort_1 Fiber FO Port_12 OSM\UDHA Cat 5 UDH
Port_20 SW20\Port_20 Crossover Trunk
Switch : SW18 Location : Control Room Port_21 SW17\Port_21 Crossover Trunk
Type : 323A4747NZP49A FOPort_1 9G4\SW7\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
Port_1 CRM1_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_2 CRM2_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_4 CRM4_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH Switch : SW20 Location : Control Room
Port_7 Laser Printer PRT2 Cat 5 PDH Type : 323A4747NZP49A
Port_9 CRM1_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_1 HIST1_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_10 CRM2_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_2 PERF_MONITOR Cat 5 PDH
Port_12 CRM4_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH Port_3 OSM\PDHA Cat 5 PDH
Port_20 SW17\Port_20 Crossover Trunk Port_5 CRM5_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
Port_21 SW20\Port_21 Crossover Trunk Port_6 CRM6_SVR\PDHB Cat 5 PDH
FOPort_1 9G3\SW6\FOPort_1 Fiber FO Port_7 Laser Printer PRT4 Cat 5 PDH
Port_9 HIST1_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_11 OSM\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_13 CRM5_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_14 CRM6_SVR\UDHB Cat 5 UDH
Port_20 SW19\Port_20 Crossover Trunk
Port_21 SW18\Port_21 Crossover Trunk
FOPort_1 9G4\SW8\FOPort_1 Fiber FO
GE Power Systems
SPEEDTRONIC™
Mark VI Turbine
Control System
Walter Barker
Michael Cronin
GE Power Systems
Schenectady, NY
SPEEDTRONIC™ Mark VI Turbine Control System
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Triple Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
I/O Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General Purpose I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Application Specific I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Software Maintenance Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Communication Link Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Codes and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Printed Wire Board Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CE – Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CE – Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Gas Contaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Dust Contaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Seismic Universal Building Code (UBC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Introduction Architecture
The SPEEDTRONIC™ Mark VI turbine control The heart of the control system is the Control
is the current state-of-the-art control for GE tur- Module, which is available in either a 13- or 21-
bines that have a heritage of more than 30 years slot standard VME card rack. Inputs are
of successful operation. It is designed as a com- received by the Control Module through termi-
plete integrated control, protection, and moni- nation boards with either barrier or box-type
toring system for generator and mechanical terminal blocks and passive signal conditioning.
drive applications of gas and steam turbines. It is Each I/O card contains a TMS320C32 DSP
also an ideal platform for integrating all power processor to digitally filter the data before con-
island and balance-of-plant controls. Hardware version to 32 bit IEEE-854 floating point format.
and software are designed with close coordina- The data is then placed in dual port memory
tion between GE’s turbine design engineering that is accessible by the on-board C32 DSP on
and controls engineering to insure that your con- one side and the VME bus on the other.
trol system provides the optimum turbine per-
In addition to the I/O cards, the Control
formance and you receive a true “system” solu-
Module contains an “internal” communication
tion. With Mark VI, you receive the benefits of
card, a main processor card, and sometimes a
GE’s unmatched experience with an advanced
flash disk card. Each card takes one slot except
turbine control platform. (See Figure 1.)
for the main processor that takes two slots.
Cards are manufactured with surface-mounted
technology and conformal coated per IPC-CC-
830.
I/O data is transmitted on the VME backplane
between the I/O cards and the VCMI card
located in slot 1. The VCMI is used for “inter-
nal” communications between:
■ I/O cards that are contained within its
card rack
■ I/O cards that may be contained in
expansion I/O racks called Interface
Modules
• Over 30 years experience ■ I/O in backup <P> Protection
Modules
• Complete control, protection, and
monitoring ■ I/O in other Control Modules used in
triple redundant control
• Can be used in variety of applications configurations
• Designed by GE turbine and controls ■ The main processor card
engineering The main processor card executes the bulk of
the application software at 10, 20, or 40 ms
depending on the requirements of the applica-
Figure 1. Benefits of Speedtronic™ Mark VI tion. Since most applications require that spe-
cific parts of the control run at faster rates (i.e. Protection Module, but it is not required for
servo loops, pyrometers, etc.), the distributed tripping.
processor system between the main processor
and the dedicated I/O processors is very impor- Triple Redundancy
tant for optimum system performance. A QNX Mark VI control systems are available in
operating system is used for real-time applica- Simplex and Triple Redundant forms for small
tions with multi-tasking, priority-driven preemp- applications and large integrated systems with
tive scheduling, and fast-context switching. control ranging from a single module to many
Communication of data between the Control distributed modules. The name Triple Module
Module and other modules within the Mark VI Redundant (TMR) is derived from the basic
control system is performed on IONet. The architecture with three completely separate and
VCMI card in the Control Module is the IONet independent Control Modules, power supplies,
bus master communicating on an Ethernet and IONets. Mark VI is the third generation of
10Base2 network to slave stations. A unique pol- triple redundant control systems that were pio-
ing type protocol (Asynchronous Drives neered by GE in 1983. System throughput
Language) is used to make the IONet more enables operation of up to nine, 21-slot VME
deterministic than traditional Ethernet LANs. racks of I/O cards at 40 ms including voting the
An optional Genius Bus™ interface can be pro- data. Inputs are voted in software in a scheme
vided on the main processor card in Mark VI called Software Implemented Fault Tolerance
Simplex controls for communication with the (SIFT). The VCMI card in each Control
GE Fanuc family of remote I/O blocks. These Module receives inputs from the Control
blocks can be selected with the same software Module back-plane and other modules via “its
configuration tools that select Mark VI I/O own” IONet.
cards, and the data is resident in the same data- Data from the VCMI cards in each of the three
base. Control Modules is then exchanged and voted
The Control Module is used for control, pro- prior to transmitting the data to the main
tection, and monitoring functions, but some processor cards for execution of the application
applications require backup protection. For software. Output voting is extended to the tur-
example, backup emergency overspeed protec- bine with three coil servos for control valves and
tion is always provided for turbines that do not 2 out of 3 relays for critical outputs such as
have a mechanical overspeed bolt, and backup hydraulic trip solenoids. Other forms of output
synch check protection is commonly provided voting are available, including a median select
for generator drives. In these applications, the of 4-20ma outputs for process control and 0-
IONet is extended to a Backup Protection 200ma outputs for positioners.
Module that is available in Simplex and triple Sensor interface for TMR controls can be either
redundant forms. The triple redundant version single, dual, triple redundant, or combinations
contains three independent sections (power of redundancy levels. The TMR architecture
supply, processor, I/O) that can be replaced supports riding through a single point failure in
while the turbine is running. IONet is used to the electronics and repair of the defective card
access diagnostic data or for cross-tripping or module while the process is running. Adding
between the Control Module and the sensor redundancy increases the fault tolerance
of the overall “system.” Another TMR feature is has one, fixed, box-type terminal block. It can
the ability to distinguish between field sensor accept one 3.0 mm2 (#12AWG) wire or two 2.0
faults and internal electronics faults. mm2 (#14AWG) wires with 300 volt insulation.
Diagnostics continuously monitor the 3 sets of I/O devices on the equipment can be mounted
input electronics and alarms any discrepancies up to 300 meters (984 feet) from the termina-
between them as an internal fault versus a sen- tion boards, and the termination boards must
sor fault. In addition, all three main processors be within 15 m (49.2’) from their correspon-
continue to execute the correct “voted” input ding I/O cards. Normally, the termination
data. (See Figure 2.) boards are mounted in vertical columns in ter-
mination cabinets with pre-assigned cable
ToTo Other
Other
Control
Control
GEGE
Systems
Systems
Operator
Operator Maintenance
/Maintenance
Interface
Interface
lengths and routing to minimize exposure to
Communications to DCS
Unit
Unit Data
Data Highway
Highway
CommunicationsToDCS
1.RS232
1. RS232 Modbus
Modbus Slave/Master
Slave/Master emi-rfi for noise sensitive signals such as speed
Ethernet
Ethernet Ethernet TCP-IP
2.Ethernet TCP-IPModbus
Modbus Slave
Slave
CIMPLICITY® Display
CIMPLICITY RDisplay System
System
WindowsNT TM OperatingSystem
Windows NT™ Operating System
3.
3.Ethernet
Ethernet TCP-IP GSM
TCP-IPGSM inputs and servo loops.
Backup Protection
Primary Controllers BackupProtection
Primary Controllers 1.Emergency
Emergency Overspeed
1. Control 1. Overspeed
1. Control
2.2.Protection
Protection
2. Synch
2. Synch Check
Check Protection
Protection General Purpose I/O
3.
3.Monitoring
Monitoring <P>
<P>
<R>
<R>
Protection
Protection Module
Module Discrete I/O. A VCRC card provides 48 digital
Ethernet Control
Control Module
Module
Ethernet
P.S.
P.S.
CPU
inputs and 24 digital outputs. The I/O is divid-
X CPU
P
S
I/O
I/O
ed between 2 Termination Boards for the con-
Redundant Unit tact inputs and another 2 for the relay outputs.
RedundantUnit
Data Highway
Data Highway
(Required)
(ifrequired)
Ethernet- IONet
Ethernet - IONet (See Table 1.)
<S><S>
Control
Control Module
Module Analog I/O. A VAIC card provides 20 analog
Voting
SoftwareVoting
P.S.
P.S.
Y CPU
CPU inputs and 4 analog outputs. The I/O is divided
Software
P I/O
S I/O
between 2 Termination Boards. A VAOC is ded-
icated to 16 analog outputs and interfaces with
Ethernet --IONet
Ethernet IONet
1 barrier-type Termination Board or 2 box-type
<T>
<T>
Control
Control Module
Module Termination Boards. (See Table 2.)
P.S.
P.S.
Z CPU
CPU
P
S
I/O
I/O Temperature Monitoring. A VTCC card pro-
vides interface to 24 thermocouples, and a
Ethernet
Ethernet - IONet
- IONet VRTD card provides interface for 16 RTDs. The
input cards interface with 1 barrier-type
Figure 2. Mark VI TMR control configuration
TB Type I/O Characteristics
TBCI Barrier 24 CI 70-145Vdc, optical isolation, 1ms SOE
the devices on the equipment for maximum DTUR Box 4 Pulse Rate Passive magnetic speed sensors (2-14k Hz)
DRLY Box 12 Relays Form “C” contacts – previously described
effectiveness. This data is used to analyze device DTRT Transition board between VTUR & DRLY
and system performance. A subtle benefit of Table 4. VTUR I/O terminations from Control
this design is that spare-parts inventories are Module
used to extend the voting of analog outs to the mination board can be provided with active iso-
servo coils. Two coil servos can also be used. lation amplifiers to buffer the sensor signals
One, two, or three LVDT/Rs feedback sensors from BNC connectors. These connectors can be
can be used per servo channel with a high select, used to access real-time data by remote vibra-
low select, or median select made in software. At tion analysis equipment. In addition, a direct
least 2 LVDT/Rs are recommended for TMR plug connection is available from the termina-
applications because each sensor requires an AC tion board to a Bently Nevada 3500 monitor.
excitation source. (See Table 6 and Table 7.) The 16 vibration inputs, 8 DC position inputs,
and 2 Keyphasor inputs on the VVIB are divid-
TB Type I/O Characteristics
TSVO Barrier 2 chnls. (2) Servo current sources
ed between 2 TVIB termination boards for
(6) LVDT/LVDR feedback 3,000 rpm and 3,600 rpm applications. Faster
0 to 7.0 Vrms
(4) Excitation sources shaft speeds may require faster sampling rates
7 Vrms, 3.2k Hz on the VVIB processor, resulting in reduced
(2) Pulse rate inputs (2-14k Hz)
*only 2 per VSVO vibration inputs from 16-to-8. (See Table 8.)
DSVO Box 2 chnls. (2) Servo current sources
(6) LVDT/LVDR feedback
0 to 7.0 Vrms
VVIB I/O Terminations from Control Module
(2) Excitation sources
7 Vrms, 3.2k Hz TB Type I/O Characteristics
(2) Pulse rate inputs (2-14k Hz) TVIB Barrier 8 Vibr. Seismic, Proximitor,
*only 2 per VSVO Velomitor, accelerometer
charge amplifier
Table 6. VSVO I/O terminations from Control DC inputs
4 Pos.
Module 1 KP Keyphasor
Current limited –24Vdc
provided per probe
Nominal Servo Valve Ratings
Coil Nominal Coil Mark VI Table 8. VVIB I/O terminations from Control
Type Current Resistance Control
#1 +/- 10 ma 1,000 ohms Simplex & TMR Module
#2 +/- 20 ma 125 ohms Simplex
#3 +/- 40 ma 62 ohms Simplex Three phase PT and CT monitoring. The VGEN
#4 +/- 40 ma 89 ohms TMR
#5 +/- 80 ma 22 ohms TMR
card serves a dual role as an interface for 3
#6 +/- 120 ma 40 ohms Simplex phase PTs and 1 phase CTs as well as a special-
#7 +/- 120 ma 75 ohms TMR
ized control for Power-Load Unbalance and
Table 7. Nominal servo valve ratings Early-Valve Actuation on large reheat steam tur-
bines. The I/O interface is split between the
Vibration / Proximitor® Inputs. The VVIB card TGEN Termination Board for the PT and CT
provides a direct interface to seismic (velocity), inputs and the TRLY Termination Board for
Proximitor®, Velomitor®, and accelerometer relay outputs to the fast acting solenoids. 4-
(via charge amplifier) probes. In addition, DC 20ma inputs are also provided on the TGEN for
position inputs are available for axial measure- monitoring pressure transducers. If an EX2000
ments and Keyphasor® inputs are provided. Generator Excitation System is controlling the
Displays show the 1X and unfiltered vibration generator, then 3 phase PT and CT data is com-
levels and the 1X vibration phase angle. -24vdc municated to the Mark VI on the network
is supplied from the control to each Proximitor rather than using the VGEN card. (See Table 9.)
with current limiting per point. An optional ter- Optical Pyrometer Inputs. The VPYR card moni-
be sorted according to ID, Resource, Device, made with password protection (5 levels) and
Time, and Priority. Operators can add com- downloaded to the Control Module while the
ments to alarm messages or link specific alarm process is running. All application software is
messages to supporting graphics. stored in the Control Module in non-volatile
Data is displayed in either English or Metric flash memory.
engineering units with a one-second refresh Application software is executed sequentially
rate and a maximum of one second to repaint a and represented in its dynamic state in a ladder
typical display graphic. Operator commands diagram format. Maintenance personnel can
can be issued by either incrementing / decre- add, delete, or change analog loops, sequenc-
menting a setpoint or entering a numerical ing logic, tuning constants, etc. Data points can
value for the new setpoint. Responses to these be selected and “dragged” on the screen from
commands can be observed on the screen one one block to another to simplify editing. Other
second from the time the command was issued. features include logic forcing, analog forcing,
Security for HMI users is important to restrict and trending at frame rate. Application soft-
access to certain maintenance functions such as ware documentation is created directly from
editors and tuning capability, and to limit cer- the source code and printed at the site. This
tain operations. A system called “User includes the primary elementary diagram, I/O
Accounts” is provided to limit access or use of assignments, the settings of tuning constants,
particular HMI features. This is done through etc. The software maintenance tools (Control
the Windows NT User Manager administration System Toolbox) are available in the HMI and
program that supports five user account levels. as a separate software package for virtually any
Windows 95 or NT based PC. The same tools
Software Maintenance Tools are used for EX2000 Generator Excitation
The Mark VI is a fully programmable control Systems, and Static Starters. (See Figure 4 and
system. Application software is created from in- Figure 5.)
house software automation tools which select
proven GE control and protection algorithms Communications
and integrate them with the I/O, sequencing, Communications are provided for internal data
and displays for each application. A library of transfer within a single Mark VI control; com-
software is provided with general-purpose munications between Mark VI controls and
blocks, math blocks, macros, and application peer GE control systems; and external commu-
specific blocks. It uses 32-bit floating point data nications to remote systems such as a plant dis-
(IEEE-854) in a QNX operating system with tributed control system (DCS).
real-time applications, multitasking, priority- The Unit Data Highway (UDH) is an Ethernet-
driven preemptive scheduling, and fast context based LAN with peer-to-peer communication
switching. between Mark VI controls, EX2000 Generator
Software frame rates of 10, 20, and 40 ms are Excitation Controls, Static Starters, the GE
supported. This is the elapsed time that it takes Fanuc family of PLC based controls, HMIs, and
to read inputs, condition the inputs, execute Historians. The network uses Ethernet Global
the application software, and send outputs. Data (EGD) which is a message-based protocol
Changes to the application software can be with support for sharing information with mul-
selected to be outside the normal control ing the correct termination point. One wire in
requirements range but inside the linear hard- each connector is dedicated to transmitting an
ware operational range (before the hardware identification message with a bar-code serial
reaches saturation). Diagnostic messages for number, board type, hardware revision, and a
hardware limit checks and all other hardware connection location to the corresponding I/O
diagnostics for the card can be accessed with card in the Control Module.
the software maintenance tools (Control System
Toolbox). A composite logic output is provided
Power
in the data base for each card, and another
logic output is provided to indicate a high/low In many applications, the control cabinet is
(hardware) limit fault of any analog input or powered from a 125Vdc battery system and
the associated communications for that signal. short circuit protected external to the control.
Both sides of the floating 125Vdc bus are con-
The alarm management system collects and
tinuously monitored with respect to ground,
time stamps the diagnostic alarm messages at
and a diagnostic alarm is initiated if a ground is
frame rate in the Control Module and displays
detected on either side of the 125Vdc source.
the alarms on the HMI. Communication links
to a plant DCS can contain both the software When a 120/240vac source is used, a power
(system) diagnostics and composite hardware converter isolates the source with an isolation
diagnostics with varying degrees of capability transformer and rectifies it to 125Vdc. A diode
depending on the protocol’s ability to transmit high select circuit chooses the highest of the
the local time tags. Separate manual reset com- 125Vdc busses to distribute to the Power
mands are required for hardware and system Distribution Module. A second 120/240vac
(software) diagnostic alarms assuming that the source can be provided for redundancy.
alarms were originally designated as latching Diagnostics produce an under-voltage alarm if
alarms, and no alarms will reset if the original either of the AC sources drop below the under-
cause of the alarm is still present. voltage setting. For gas turbine applications, a
Hardware diagnostic alarms are displayed on separate 120/240vac source is required for the
the yellow “status” LED on the card front. Each ignition transformers with short circuit protec-
card front includes 3 LEDs and a reset at the tion of 20A or less.
top of the card along with serial and parallel The resultant “internal” 125Vdc is fuse-isolated
ports. The LEDs include: RUN: Green; FAIL: in the Mark VI power distribution module and
Red; STATUS: Yellow. fed to the internal power supplies for the
Each circuit card and termination board in the Control Modules, any expansion modules, and
system contains a serial number, board type, the termination boards for its field contact
and hardware revision that can be displayed; 37 inputs and field solenoids. Additional 3.2A fuse
pin “D” type connector cables are used to inter- protection is provided on the termination
face between the Termination Boards and the board TRLY for each solenoid. Separate 120Vac
J3 and J4 connectors on the bottom of the feeds are provided from the motor control cen-
Control Module. Each connector comes with ter for any AC solenoids and ignition trans-
latching fasteners and a unique label identify- formers on gas turbines. (See Table 11.)
List of Figures
Figure 1. Benefits of Speedtronic™ Mark VI
Figure 2. Mark VI TMR control configuration
Figure 3. Operator interface graphics: 7FA Mark VI
Figure 4. Software maintenance tools – card configuration
Figure 5. Software maintenance tools – editors
List of Tables
Table 1. Discrete I/O
Table 2. Analog I/O
Table 3. Temperature Monitoring
Table 4. VTUR I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 5. VPRO I/O terminations from Backup Protection Module
Table 6. VSVO I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 7. Nominal servo valve ratings
Table 8. VVIB I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 9. VGEN I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 10: VPYR I/O terminations from Control Module
Table 11: Power requirements
g
(Supersedes GEH-6126)
GE Industrial Systems
Operator’s Guide
Document: GEH-6126A Volume I (1 of 2)
Issued: 2002-02-14
Operator’s Guide
© 2002 General Electric Company, USA.
All rights reserved.
GE provides the following document and the information included therein as is and without
warranty of any kind, express or implied, including but not limited to any implied statutory
warranty of merchantability or fitness for particular purpose.
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance. The
information is supplied for informational purposes only, and GE makes no warranty as to the
accuracy of the information included herein. Changes, modifications, and/or improvements to
equipment and specifications are made periodically and these changes may or may not be reflected
herein. It is understood that GE may make changes, modifications, or improvements to the
equipment referenced herein or to the document itself at any time. This document is intended for
trained personnel familiar with the GE products referenced herein.
GE may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document.
The furnishing of this document does not provide any license whatsoever to any of these patents.
All license inquiries should be directed to the address below. If further information is desired, or if
particular problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purpose, the matter
should be referred to:
GE Industrial Systems
Post Sales Service
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA
Phone: + 1 888 GE4 SERV (888 434 7378, United States)
+ 1 540 378 3280 (International)
Fax: + 1 540 387 8606 (All)
(“+” indicates the international access code required when calling from outside the USA)
This document contains proprietary information of General Electric Company, USA and is
furnished to its customer solely to assist that customer in the installation, testing, operation, and/or
maintenance of the equipment described. This document shall not be reproduced in whole or in
part nor shall its contents be disclosed to any third party without the written approval of GE
Industrial Systems.
b • Safety Symbol Legend HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
To:
g GE Industrial Systems
Documentation Design, Rm. 291
Reader Comments 1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA
General Electric Company Fax: 1-540-387-8651
(GE Internal DC 8-278-8651)
Fax No.
Your Company’s Name and Address Job Site
Phone No.
GE Requisition No.
E-mail
Your Job Function / How You Use This Publication Publication No.
Address
General Rating
Excellent Good Fair Poor Additional Comments
Contents ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Organization ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Technical Accuracy ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Clarity ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Completeness ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Drawings / Figures ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Tables ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Referencing ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Readability ¡ ¡ ¡ ¡ _____________________________________________________________
Specific Suggestions (Corrections, information that could be expanded on, and such.)
Page No. Comments
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
______ __________________________________________________________________________________
Other Comments (What you like, what could be added, how to improve, and such.) ________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Overall grade (Compared to publications from other manufacturers of similar products, how do you rate this publication?)
¡ Superior ¡ Comparable ¡ Inferior ¡ Do not know Comment ____________________________________________
____________________________ Place
stamp
____________________________ here.
____________________________
GE Industrial Systems
Documentation Design, Rm. 291
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA
Reader Comments
Chapter 1 Overview
Introduction ..............................................................................................................1-1
HMI Overview..........................................................................................................1-2
Product Features ................................................................................................1-2
HMI Components ..............................................................................................1-3
Graphic Displays ...............................................................................................1-4
Communications................................................................................................1-6
Optional Features ..............................................................................................1-7
Application-Specific Features ...........................................................................1-7
Technical Specifications...........................................................................................1-7
Related Documentation ............................................................................................1-8
How to Use This Document .....................................................................................1-9
Text Conventions ..............................................................................................1-9
How to Get Help.....................................................................................................1-10
Glossary
Index
Introduction
GE document GEH-6126A The Human-Machine Interface (HMI) for SPEEDTRONIC turbine control is a user-
Volume 2 describes HMI friendly operator interface for real-time control of power-plant processes and
maintenance features equipment. It runs on a pc-based workstation using a Microsoft® Windows NT®
introduced in this chapter. client-server architecture. The HMI provides operator display and control for the
Mark IV, Mark V, Mark V LM, and Mark VI turbine controllers.
This document covers HMI operation. It is written as a guide to assist the operator in
using applicable HMI and supported CIMPLICITY® HMI functions with the
SPEEDTRONIC Mark IV, Mark V, Mark V LM, and Mark VI turbine controllers.
Refer to How to Use This Document for more information.
This chapter provides a brief overview of the HMI, including both operator and
maintenance features. Additionally, it defines the document content and structure to
help the user better understand the information provided.
This chapter is organized as follows:
Section Page
HMI Overview..........................................................................................................1-2
Product Features ................................................................................................1-2
HMI Components ..............................................................................................1-3
Graphic Displays ...............................................................................................1-4
Communications................................................................................................1-6
Optional Features ..............................................................................................1-7
Application-Specific Features ...........................................................................1-7
Technical Specifications...........................................................................................1-7
Related Documentation ............................................................................................1-8
How to Use This Document .....................................................................................1-9
Text Conventions ..............................................................................................1-9
How to Get Help.....................................................................................................1-10
An operator can use the HMI for the following turbine control functions:
• Monitor one or more turbines through graphical displays (for example, alarms,
wheelspace temperatures, and vibration feedback)
• Issue commands to the selected turbine or driven device (for example, Start,
Stop, Cooldown On, Auto, and Raise Speed/Load)
Product Features
The HMI contains a number of product features important for power plant control:
• Dynamic graphics
• Alarm displays
• Process variable trending
• Point control panel display (for maintenance)
• HMI access security
1-2 • Chapter 1 Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
HMI Components
The turbine control HMI consists of the following functional components (refer to
Figure 1-1):
GFK-1180 provides a detailed • CIMPLICITY HMI is used primarily to display turbine status screens, which
description of the CIMPLICITY enable an operator to monitor the unit(s). Refresh rate is typically 1 second.
product’s capabilities. CIMPLICITY cannot configure the turbine control.
– HMI Server is the hub of the system, channeling data between the Unit Data
Highway and the Plant Data Highway (Mark VI only), and providing data
support and system management. The server also provides device
communication for both internal and external data interchanges.
– HMI Viewer provides the visual functions, and is the client of the server. It
contains the operator interface software, which allows the operator or
maintenance personnel to view screen graphics, data values, alarms, and
trends, as well as to issue commands, edit control coefficient values, and
obtain system logs and reports.
• Turbine Control Interface (TCI) is used to display higher speed data (faster
than 1-second updates), and to configure and control a turbine unit. TCI allows
remote access to turbine data and controls the following data functions:
– Provides real-time device communications to the turbine control (Mark IV
and V)
– Provides turbine control configuration capabilities (Mark IV and V)
– Collects data, alarms and forwards commands to the turbine control (Mark
VI)
– Maintains a data dictionary (Mark IV and V)
• TCIMB (TCI/CIMPLICITY Bridge, previously called CIMB or CIMBridge) is
an interface between the CIMPICITY and TCI, as follows:
– Enables CIMPLICITY to collect data and alarms from a turbine unit
– Forwards points (Mark IV, V, V LM) and alarms (all) to CIMPLICITY
• System database (Mark VI only) establishes signal management and definition
for the control system. It provides a single repository for system alarm messages
and definitions, and defines mapping between controller software and physical
I/O. Additionally, it defines Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchanges. The
database is used for system configuration, but not required for running the
system.
Depending on the size of the system, these elements can be combined into a single
pc, or distributed in multiple units. The modular nature of the HMI allows units to be
expanded incrementally as system needs change.
Point Alarm
Database Queue
Devices
A l Device
int Collector
Po
Devcom
(EGD...)
Devices
Graphic Displays
The HMI uses the graphics and alarm features of the CIMPLICITY software to
integrate controls from a variety of applications. The graphical displays offer
realistic viewing in a real-time environment.
Screens are developed using The HMI displays data and processes operator commands using screens that
preconfigured graphic building represent a variety of signals, their values, and units. Display items change color
blocks that provide based on logic signals, while certain objects are dynamic and refresh with every data
commonality to different plant update, like bar graphs. High-speed viewing allows the displayed data to be updated
applications that use the HMI. once per second, and special tools allow collection and storage of data at rates as fast
as 10 ms.
HMI graphic displays include main unit, vibration, sensor readings, control setpoints,
alarms, permissives, logic forcing, demand display, sequence editor, dynamic rung
display, trip history display, trending, and many others depending on the application.
An operator can view alarms from any HMI on the network as they occur and to
freeze the scrolling as needed to address an alarm condition. The alarm management
feature provides options for response.
Figure 1-2 illustrates a typical Viewer screen using graphics to display real-time
turbine data.
The associated printer(s) enables the operator to manually select and copy any
display, to automatically log selected parameters, and to log alarms.
1-4 • Chapter 1 Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Alarm Viewer Setpoint Entry Alarm Detail Shaft Vibration
window selection display selection display selection
Figure 1-2. Sample HMI Display Showing Steam Turbine and Generator Data
The graphic system performs key HMI functions and provides the operator with real-
time process visualization and control using the following:
GFK-139 provides a detailed • CimEdit is an object-oriented program that creates and maintains the user
description of the CimEdit and graphic screen displays. Editing and animation tools, with the familiar Windows
CimView applications. environment, provide an intuitive, easy to use interface. Features include:
– Standard shape library
– Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
– Movement and rotation animation
– Filled object capabilities, and interior and border animation
• CimView is the HMI run-time portion, displaying the process information in
graphical formats (as shown in Figure 1-2). In CimView, the operator can view
the system screens, and screens from other applications, using OLE automation,
run scripts, and get descriptions of object actions. Screens have a 1-second
refresh rate, and a typical graphical display takes one second to repaint. HMI
opens in CimView.
Communications
Refer to GEH-6126 Vol. II Figure 1-3 shows the networks used by the HMI to communicate within a
and individual controller SPEEDTRONIC turbine control system.
documents for more detail
about the networks and
protocol used for HMI Mark VI Plant Data Highway (Ethernet)
communication.
Data Data
HMI
HMI Server # 1 HMI Server # 2 Viewer Historian
TR
Mark V Stagelink
1-6 • Chapter 1 Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
For Ethernet TCP/IP communication to third party equipment, such as a distributed
control system (DCS ), the HMI provides GE Industrial Systems standard messages
(GSM) and Modbus® protocol. GSM application layer protocols support four classes
of application-level messages: administration, event-driven, periodic data, and
common request messages.
Alternatively, communication to remote DCS equipment is available through a
Modbus interface, where the HMI acts as a slave to the DCS master. Such a system
allows an operator at a remote location to initiate any operator command and to
monitor turbine data.
Optional Features
Document GEH-6422 provides The HMI supports a Windows NT®-based Historian computer, which collects and
information about the stores data from the control units for later analysis. OSI’s PI-ProcessBook® provides
Historian. historical and real-time trending of all process data, and can run in the Historian
and/or HMI Viewer. The HMI communicates with the Historian through the
Ethernet-based Plant Data Highway (PDH) and through RS-232C lines.
The HMI includes a time synchronization capability in both low- and high-
resolution forms. When redundant time masters are available, all turbine controllers
and operator interface units on a system automatically select the same, highest
quality time master.
A Web Gateway allows operators to access HMI data from anywhere in the world
over the Internet. Third party interfaces allow the HMI to exchange data with the
DCS, programmable logic controllers, I/O devices, and other computers.
Application-Specific Features
When the HMI is paired with either the Mark V or the Mark VI turbine
controllers, the turbine control software tools can be added to as an integral part of
the HMI. The Mark VI features are based on the GE Control System Toolbox
(toolbox).
When the HMI is used in our Integrated Control Systems (ICS) product line or as a
Balance-of-Plant (BOP) control interface, the ICS/BOP toolset becomes part of the
HMI.
Technical Specifications
Exact hardware and software specifications for the HMI are determined according to
the customer’s needs and purchased options. The HMI workstation is typically sent
to the customer with the HMI program already installed.
1-8 • Chapter 1 Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
How to Use This Document
The user of this document should be familiar with the Microsoft Windows pc
interface and experienced with SPEEDTRONIC controllers and operating turbine
control systems.
For an exact outline of the This document is organized into the following chapters and appendices to assist an
document’s content and operator in understanding and using the HMI.
organization, refer to the Table
Chapter 1, Overview, provides an introductory product summary with related
of Contents.
reference information to assist the user.
Chapter 2, Quick Startup, serves as a reference to assist the operator in starting up
the HMI.
Chapter 3, Display-Only Applications, describes HMI programs for data display,
including sample screens.
Chapter 4, Control (Command) Applications, describes HMI programs for
displaying and controlling data, including sample screens.
Chapter 5, CIMPLICITY Displays, covers HMI functions that use CIMPLICITY
screens, including ActiveX objects and filtered alarms.
Chapter 6, CIMPLICITY Project Configuration, defines applications used to
configure a CIMPLICITY project.
Appendix A, HMI Function Reference, lists all current HMI functions and
identifies which SPEEDTRONIC controller includes each function.
Appendix B, Alarm Overview, a general overview of turbine controller alarms
viewed and addressed using the HMI.
Text Conventions
The following symbols, formatting, and presentation conventions are used in this
document to assist the user.
Convention Meaning
Ø A procedure follows.
Numbered list Procedural steps to be followed in order (for example, 1, 2, 3).
Alphabetized list Procedural substeps (of numbered steps) to be followed in
order (for example, a, b, c).
Bulleted (•) list Related items or procedures, but order does not matter.
w A procedure with only one step.
Boxed (¨) list A checklist.
Arial Bold When describing software, indicates the actual command or
option that is chosen from a menu or dialog box, or typed in a
text box or at the command prompt.
Monospace Represents examples of DOS screen text or display.
Note Please have the GE requisition or shop order number and the equipment serial
or model number available to exactly identify the equipment when calling.
1-10 • Chapter 1 Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Chapter 2 Quick-Start Procedures
Introduction
A facility receives the HMI pre-loaded with all the programs and customized
software required for the customer’s application. It is then configured during
installation to automatically log on and open to the main operator screen when
powered-up.
This chapter provides basic startup procedures to help the operator use the HMI.
Detail of these HMI features is covered in the other sections of this document.
This chapter is organized as follows:
Section Page
Starting Up HMI.......................................................................................................2-2
Alarm Displays.........................................................................................................2-3
Opening Projects ......................................................................................................2-4
Other Tools...............................................................................................................2-5
Dynamic Rung Display .....................................................................................2-5
Trip History .......................................................................................................2-5
Trip Log Viewer................................................................................................2-5
Demand Display................................................................................................2-6
Alarm Logger Control .......................................................................................2-6
Hold List Display (Steam Turbine Applications) ..............................................2-6
Note The HMI displays for your system are CimView screens (*.cim files), which
may open before CIMPLICITY finishes loading. If at first the screen is not animated
or setpoints fail, wait a few minutes for the startup to complete before beginning
operation.
Select an alarm listed, then click the button for the desired Alarm Display (see Figure 2-2)
for action
2-2 • Chapter 2 Quick-Start Procedures HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Alarm Displays
OCX is an object linking and Alarm Viewer is an OCX object embedded into a CIMPLICITY HMI screen, as
embedding (OLE) custom shown in Figure 2-1. It provides alarm management functions such as sorting and
control. filtering by priority, unit, time, or source device. Also supported are configurable
alarm field displays.
Custom TCI programs are used to enhance the CIMPLICITY alarm viewer for
Turbine applications. TCI provides the Silence, Lock, and Unlock Alarm Viewer
features (see Extended Alarm Commands in Chapter 5).
To apply a button to an alarm, highlight the alarm from the list, then click the button
Left to right:
Left to right: - Configuration update
- Dynamic update - Status log
- Stop project - Project properties Right pane Search
- Start project - Project wizard views Help Properties Field chooser
Screens
Points
Application folder
Objects in application
Runtime
Alarms
2-4 • Chapter 2 Quick-Start Procedures HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Other Tools
The following sections provide simple Windows-based start-up instructions for HMI
display-only and control applications. However, they can also be started up and
configured using typed in commands, as described in Chapters 3 and 4 of this
document.
Trip History
Refer to Chapter 3 for more The Trip History program provides a chronological record (log) of relevant data
information. gathered by the unit control. The data is organized according to post-trip, pre-trip,
and alarm categories.
2-6 • Chapter 2 Quick-Start Procedures HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs
Introduction
The HMI provides an online database for collecting and storing data from multiple
controllers. Refer to the controller documentation for a description of this.
Chapter 4 describes control The HMI’s display-only programs allow you to view turbine control data as needed
(command) programs. to monitor the system. You cannot, however, send control commands from these.
This chapter describes display-only programs. It is presented as follows:
Section Page
File Structure
Table 3-1. Dynamic Rung Display File Description
The files are used by the Dynamic Rung Display to coordinate and accurately display
the unit control data. These files are also used for unit control configuration and
cannot be altered by the Dynamic Rung Display. It is imperative that the
configuration and sequencing files in the unit control and in the operator interface
match. The Dynamic Rung Display does not independently verify that the operator
interface files match the unit control files. If these files do not match, the Dynamic
Rung Display may display data that does not reflect the state of the unit control.
3-2 • Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
The Dynamic Rung Display can save picture file displays in a text format for future
reference. These text files may be opened by any text editor or word processor. It
also creates temporary Demand Display files (*.DM2) in the system temporary
directory when the Demand Display is used to show the points and values from a
given rung. These files are automatically deleted when the Demand Display closes.
Rung Windows
Rung windows (see Figure 3-1) are used to display the animation of the control
sequencing and navigate through the control sequencing segments. They can display
data from main sequencing rungs or sub rungs that are predefined into Big Blocks.
Header data is located in the The type of information in the header timetag depends on the type of display:
upper left of the window.
• In both the RLD and primitive rung displays, the timetag provides the oldest
piece of data being displayed in the RLD portions of the rung. If it has not
received data from the unit, the timetag display is No Valid Data. If the oldest
piece of data in the rung has not been updated for at least five seconds, the
timetag is highlighted. Rung animation occurs once per second (see Table 3-2).
• In both the big block and comment rung displays, the timetag indicates the
operator interface time when the rung was displayed. It does not update.
Note RLD Rung displays update automatically, and thus are animated in the rung
window. Parameter information passed in Primitive Block and Big Block rungs is
not animated in the rung window, although you can update the display manually.
Comment Rungs do not update.
Table 3-2. Animation Rules for Both RLD and Primitive Rungs
Rung
Component Animation Rule
Normally • A green rectangle between the contacts shows continuity.
Open
Contacts • No rectangle between the contacts shows an open circuit.
• A ">" symbol between the contacts means forced signals.
• A rectangle outline around the ">" symbol highlights contacts that are forced to the open condition.
3-4 • Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Ø To update the Primitive Block Rung or Big Block Rung display to
show passed parameters
w Select either Picture File or Demand Display from the View menu.
The type of information in the header timetag depends on the type of display:
• For a values display, the timetag provides the oldest piece of data being
displayed as a passed parameter. This includes the coil output for primitive
blocks. If it has not received data from the unit, the timetag display is No Valid
Data. If the oldest piece of data in the rung has not been updated for at least five
seconds, the timetag is highlighted.
• For a static display, the header timetag provides the operator interface time of
when the rung was displayed.
3-6 • Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Selecting a Sequencing Display Screen
Sequencing files contain the Control Sequence for each control segment. The
following rules apply when opening these files:
• Selecting File then Open can only open a regular sequencing segment from the
files listed in the MSTR_SEQ.CFG.
• You must select a unit before you can open a sequencing file.
• You can open more than segment at a time, or have multiple views of the same
segment.
• Use the Window menu to change between views.
• To navigate within a segment, use the Rung menu and toolbar buttons.
The Find All Results dialog box contains four columns, as follows:
• The first column displays the rung number where the rung was found.
• The second column shows the segment name.
• The third column shows the rung type.
• The fourth column shows how the signal is used in the rung.
Note The Find All Results dialog box remains open until you select the Close
button or change units.
3-8 • Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Trip History
Mark VI uses the Control The Trip History program provides a chronological record (log) of relevant data
System Toolbox for this gathered by the Mark V or V LM unit control. The data is organized according to
function. post-trip, pre-trip, and alarm categories. The program is used to help evaluate turbine
trip events.
You can use this program to retrieve data from the unit control and view it on the
operator interface (see Trip History Dialog Box below).
Control Signal Database Points (CSDBs) can be defined for collection. These
definitions (64 max.) are made in a single file (HIST_B.SRC). All data in the display
is chronologically indexed according to Mark V controller time and a separate
controller counter (HIS_AGE).
Note After modifying the Trip History file, you should process and downloaded it.
3-10 • Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Starting Trip History
You can start the Trip History program any of four ways:
• Double-click the program icon (if it is available on the desktop).
• On the Windows desktop, select Start, Turbine Control Maintenance Group,
Unit T#, then Trip History.
Trip History is saved when the turbine trips. For Mark V LM unit
controls, the data is saved in the control even after the control is reset.
Saved Data is saved into the control memory when you collect New
Data. It remains in memory until it is overwritten by New Data or until
the control is reset.
New Data is saved to the control memory when the user collects New
Data. The data reflects the most recent control data. The data remains
in the control memory as Saved Data until it is overwritten or until the
control is reset.
Enumerated state variable data Each record consists of the following fields:
is displayed as numbers, not as
text strings. • Timetag
• Value of from 1 to 64 points from the CSDB.
3-12 • Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Header, identifies the unit and location.
10-sec. list
Ten 1-sec records
1-min. list
Five 10-sec records
Unit name
3-14 • Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Select to view log
Identifies location
Select to exit dialog box
Figure 3-7. Mark V and Mark V LM Trip Log Viewer Dialog Box
Viewing Results
Refer to the previous Data History Results Window for a detailed description of the
data format and viewer program.
3-16 • Chapter 3 Display-Only Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Chapter 4 Control (Command)
Programs
Introduction
Chapter 3 describes display- The HMI’s control (command) programs allow you to control system operation by
only programs. sending commands to the controller.
This chapter describes the HMI control programs. It is presented as follows:
Section Page
The Demand Display program can be started and customized through either Win-
dows or a DOS-based line command (see Starting Demand Display). This chapter
includes instructions using Demand Display with Mark IV, V, and V LM controllers.
For Mark VI controllers, use the toolbox.
4-2 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Ø To load an existing .DM2 file from the Demand Display
1. From the File menu, select Open.
Or click .
2. Select the file from the directory that displays.
If no existing file is specified when executing Demand Display the default file
DEMAND01.DM2 (located in the F:\RUNTIME directory) loads.
Note Exiting either the screen or file without saving loses changes to the file.
xxxxx.DM2 RUNTIME directory in the F:\ Demand Display files, which are in binary format, contain defini-
drive (typically). The Demand tions for all of the Data screens listed on the Demand Display Menu
Display program saves new for that file. One file generally saves several Demand Display
files in the directory in which screens. One unit may use several of these files. Open, modify,
the program was executed, and save these files using the Demand Display program (do not
unless a different directory is edit the files directly).
selected.
unitname.DD Files that make up the Data Data Dictionary files contain the point list available for use in the
(unitname varies Dictionary for a unit are stored Data screens. Demand Display obtains points values directly from
as needed.) in its unit-specific directory and the Data Dictionary. (SYSTEM.DD is the master data dictionary file,
should always be kept there. which contains pointers to all *.DD files used by the Demand Dis-
plays).
Data Area
4-4 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
The Data Dictionary data screen is built auto-
matically from point information stored in the
Data Dictionary. It configures the screens from
options that select the points and commands to
display. The Value field updates once each
second.
Header
This data screen is used for
examining specific point types Legend
and command options.
Figure 4-3. Example of Data Dictionary Type of Data Screen Using Logics
Both Demand Display windows are made up of three main regions (refer to Figures
4-1 through 4-3):
GE recommends that you keep • The screen Header is non-scrolling process identification data. It contains the:
the screen header visible at all – Unit name
times. – Site name
– Program name
– Display screen name
– Timetag (pc time) for the oldest piece of data in the Data Area.
Although the header cannot scroll off the screen, you can toggle it on or off by
selecting Header from the View menu.
The Timetag displays the oldest of the displayed point name timetags in the
controller. If the Data Area is empty (contains no valid points), or the Data Area
contains valid points but no data has been received from the unit, then the timetag
is No Valid Data. A highlighted timetag indicates that the oldest piece of data in
the Data Area has not been updated for five seconds.
GE recommends that you keep • The Legend displays the non-scrolling column headers for the Data Area. Al-
the column headers visible at though the header cannot scroll off the screen, you can toggle it on or off by se-
all times. lecting Header from the View menu.
• The Data Area is below the Header and Legend. In the Menu screen, the Data
Area consists of a list of the Data screens available for viewing. In a Data screen,
the Data Area consists of an unlimited list of point names, their values, and units.
This information is in a tabular format. (See Data Area Description below for
more details.)
Any Command Targets defined display on the right side of the window. (See
Command Target Types below for more details.)
Note Requiring command confirmation before sending them to the unit prevents
execution of false commands.
4-6 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Speed or Temperature references • Analog Setpoint type changes the setpoint value of the specified control. It does
are examples of control signals. not use feedback logic. When selected, a Setpoint Dialog box (see Figure 4-4)
opens, requesting the new value for the control signal. No response cancels the
command through default.
These targets are gray and their text turns yellow if the feedback logic is supplied
and met.
Note You can also use command line arguments to start Demand Display and open
specific screens and files. Refer to the Command Line Configuration section of this
chapter for the instructions.
Note Saving a Demand Display file and a Demand Display screen require different
steps. How to save a screen is described below.
4-8 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
3. In the Display Title text box, type a new name, if desired.
Figures 4-2 and 4-3 provide 4. Use the Display Type options to change between a Point List type or a Data
samples of these types of Data Dictionary type, as desired.
screens.
5. Select OK to save the changes.
6. Save the Data screen, as described below.
4-10 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Working with Command Targets
Value holds the value the Command target sends to the unit.
Use the following guidelines (based on pointnames):
• A Target’s value is the number of scans to hold the
target (pushbutton) true. The minimum value is four scans.
• Logic States require a value of 1 or 0.
• Analog setpoints require a value in the engineering units
specified for the command signal point.
4-12 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Other Options
There are several other options available in the Demand Display program:
• Selecting Set Font from the Edit menu displays the Windows Font dialog box.
You can then select the font and color of the Demand Display screen. The selec-
tion applies to all Demand Display screens, except for the Command Targets,
whose colors are predefined.
• Selecting Select Unit from the Edit menu allows you to select a unit. In multiple
unit sites, any unit can be monitored from one Demand Display screen. Select
Unit displays the Unit Selection dialog box. The currently selected unit is high-
lighted. The available units display in alphabetical order. Select the desired unit.
This option is not available in single unit sites.
• Selecting Menu from the View menu toggles between the menu and the most re-
cently viewed Data screen. Toggling to the Menu screen from a Data screen loses
any changes if the Data screen is not saved. The Demand Display program asks
whether or not to save the Demand Display screen. Selecting Yes saves the
screen, No toggles to the Menu window without saving. Selecting Menu from
the Demand Display Menu screen displays the most recently viewed screen.
• The /UNIT: argument starts the Demand Display program for the unit specified.
For example:
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /UNIT:T1
The unit name must be a valid unit. Selecting an invalid unit or no unit displays
the Unit Selection dialog box. Single unit sites ignore this argument and default
to the single unit.
• The /FILE: argument executes the Demand Display program and loads a re-
quested Demand Display file. For example:
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /FILE:OPERATOR.DM2
or
F:\RUNTIME>DEMAND /FILE:F:\RUNTIME\OPERATOR.DM2
Incorrect entries cause error This argument requires permission to read the file and/or directory. Entering an
messages. invalid path or filename displays an error message and a blank, untitled Demand
Display file. When entering no filename, the program attempts to open the de-
fault file F:\RUNTIME\DEMAND01.DM2. If it cannot open the file, the program
displays an error message and a blank file.
4-14 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Alarm Logger Control
This program is used with Mark Several classes of turbine control actions can be automatically logged to a printer.
IV, V, V LM, and VI control- The HMI’s Alarm Logger allows you to select alarms and events to output to the
lers. printer using the Alarm Logger Control dialog box (see Figure 4-8).
The Alarm Logger Control does not access any files when making its changes. In-
stead, it writes its output to a special section of global memory that is then read by
the Alarm Logger program, which writes the alarms and events to the alarm printer.
4-16 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
• A picked up hold point may be overridden by an operator using the Lock com-
mand button.
• An overridden point displays Locked as the first part of their long name text.
• An overridden point loses its override when it drops out (1 -> 0).
• The Hold List displays the time of the last pickup or override, unit, acknowledge
state, current state, override status, and the short and long name of each hold
point in the list.
• The text Hold displays in the drop number field and the CSDB offset displays in
the reference field. The reference field is typically not displayed.
• The Hold List program in <C>, not <D>, outputs a logic signal indicating that
there are one or more active holds that have not been overridden. This point is
named L68DW_ATS_HL. ATS and the turbine control use this signal to set speed,
load, and valve position targets.
4-18 • Chapter 4 Control (Command) Programs HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays
Introduction
The CIMPLICITY HMI product The CIMPLICITY HMI collects data from plant sensors and devices, then
must be installed before these transforms the data into dynamic text, alarm, and graphic displays. Operators can
applications can be used. access real-time information when monitoring and making control decisions. The
turbine control HMI supports many CIMPLICITY applications for operation.
GFK-1180 provides a detailed CIMPLICITY is used primarily to display turbine status screens, which enable an
description of the CIMPLICITY operator to monitor the unit(s). Refresh rate is typically 1 second. CIMPLICITY
display features. cannot configure the turbine control.
CIMPLICITY supports OLE and ActiveX applications for automation displays.
CIMB (CIMPLICITY Bridge) enables CIMPLICITY to collect data and alarms from
a turbine unit with Mark V. (Mark VI used EGD) TCIMB provides the following
software functions:
• MARKV_RP collects data from a turbine using TCI and forwards the information
to the CIMPLICITY Point Manager.
• EXTMGR collects alarms and forwards them to the CIMPLICITY Alarm
Manager. (See Chapter 6.)
• LOCKOUT sends a lockout command to a unit using TCI. (See Extended Alarm
Commands below.)
• SILENCE sends a silence command to a unit using TCI. (See Extended Alarm
Commands below.)
This chapter identifies these functions, as follows:
Section Page
Note When you push the Breaker Close or Breaker Trip button, a dialog box
displays with two buttons for command confirmation:
• Command sends the breaker close or trip command when selected and released
• Done exits the dialog box and cancels the breaker close or trip command
5-2 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Configuring the Synchroscope
To configure the Synchroscope part of the object, enter parameters into the Scope
tab.
(Optional.) Signal indicating state of Sync relay. Each time signal is true
and pointer is updated, a green dot is drawn at end of pointer. Scope’s R
button (located top right; see Figure 5-1) is used to reset dots.
5-4 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Configuring Values
To configure the object’s Values, enter data into the Value tab.
Like the Manual Synchronizing Display, Triggered Plot is run from a CIMPLICITY
server for the desired controller (see Figure 5-2). You configure the object by setting
configuration information on the Triggered Plot Control Properties tabs, which is a
CIMPLICITY HMI Properties dialog box (see Figure 5-3).
5-6 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Configuring Object Properties
There are six tabs for configuring Triggered Plot Control Properties (see Figure
5-3).
Note The procedures in this section require that you have a working knowledge of
CIMPLICITY, including its Workbench application, User Configuration, Resource
Configuration, and various aspects of Alarms. Document GFK-1180 provides this
information.
Configuring Users
A user is an individual person working with a CIMPLICITY HMI project. Each
CIMPLICITY HMI user has the following attributes, which must be configured:
Security – A user may be assigned a Password. If a Password is configured and
enabled, then a user cannot access CIMPLICITY HMI project functions without
entering both the User ID and Password.
Roles and Privileges – A user is assigned a role. Each role in the CIMPLICITY
HMI project has certain privileges assigned to it. The privileges define the functions
the user can access. If a user lacks the privilege to access a secure function, an error
message is displayed and access is denied.
View of Resources – A user’s view determines the accessible resource data.
Alarms for resources outside a user’s view do not display on the user’s Alarm
Viewer window.
¨ All procedures in this Ø To configure Users for the CIMPLICITY HMI project
section were completed
1. Open the project in the CIMPLICITY Workbench (refer to Chapter 6 for an
successfully.
overview).
2. In the Workbench left pane under the Security folder, select Users, as shown
below.
5-8 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Left pane
displays
CIMPLICITY
application
folders
Select
Right pane
displays files
or records of
selected object.
3. Open the New User dialog box and add a new user called OPERATOR.
Select tab.
The Resources properties let 5. Select the Resources tab and add all resources T1 through T8.
you define the resources for
which the user can view
alarms. Select tab.
Displays resources
currently assigned
to user.
To add resources,
select from
Available box then
click Add .
Note Resources can be added or removed based on the User’s rights. For example
if you want to have a User name as User1 who is supposed to operate only Gas
Turbine T1 (GT1), then add only T1 as the Resource for the User1.
5-10 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
6. Define the Role Properties for the user OPERATOR, as shown below.
Select
options Click boxes
to select
Select
2. Add a New Resource T1 and click OK, as shown in the figure below.
5-12 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
3. Add the Resource Definition for T1, as shown in the figure below.
Type in Description.
4. Using the procedures in steps 2 and 3, add resources from T1 to T8 for GT1 to
GT8, as shown in the figure below.
Select
Type in
Select
The Order value is the priority for the
Alarms that fall under that particular class.
The lower the Order number, the higher
the priority.
Select options
Click to exit
5-14 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
3. Using the procedures in step 2, add the classes and descriptions shown in the
figure below.
1. Select
2. Select
5-16 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
5. Right click in CimEdit, then select Edit to open the following Alarms screen.
Open Frame Container from the menu, as shown below.
Select
1. Select
2. Select
5-18 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
7. Add the project, by clicking Add Project, as shown below.
Select (the
Select Project
dialog box
displays).
Projects are
listed here after
being added.
For servers, select.
(Connect to the remote project
only when the alarm is not
available locally
Select to apply
changes, thus
adding new
project.
9. Open the Alarm.cim file in CimVview and click Setup, as shown below. The
Alarm Setup dialog box displays.
Click
5-20 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Bet sure to include the “$” 10. Add a Setup called $DIAG_GT1, as shown below.
symbol at the beginning of
the Setup name. This makes
it accessible to all users.
Without the symbol, it can be
accessed only by the user
account that created it.
Type in Setup name
Click
11. Select the Classes tab, then select DIAG from the list box.
Click
Click
(Do not click
OK)
Click
Click
Click
14. Follow the same procedure (steps 10 to 13) to create other setup.
5-22 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Examples of Screens for Filtered Alarms
After configuring filtered alarms, triggered alarms display according to the filter
setup for that particular screen. Figures 5-4 through 5-6 show examples.
Figure 5-4. Screen for Gas Turbine T1, Displaying Alarm Only for T1
Note Typically the top alarm window is for process alarms and the bottom one for
diagnostic alarms.
5-24 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Figure 5-6. Screen for All, Displaying Alarms for All
Ø To edit custom alarm features for the Silence, Lock, and Unlock
buttons
1. Right-click on the white background of the Alarm window.
A menu displays, as shown below.
2. Select CIMPLICITY AMV Control Object, then Properties.
The properties window displays. Make the Buttons tab selections, as shown in
the figure below.
Select to move
highlighted button up
Button list. Highlight or down.
button name to select for
modifying. Select to modify
highlighted button’s
properties.
Select to display the
Lock, Unlock, and
Silence button list. (A
different list displays for
each selection.)
3. In the Button Caption window, modify the button properties as shown in the
figure below.
5-26 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Enter button name
Enter configuration
properties command
5-28 • Chapter 5 CIMPLICITY Displays HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project
Configuration
Introduction
The CIMPLICITY HMI product This chapter provides information about configuring CIMPLICITY projects for use
must be installed before these with the turbine control HMI product. To understand and implement the information
applications can be used. in this chapter, you should have a working knowledge of CIMPLICITY projects.
Document GFK-1180 provides this information.
CIMPLICITY HMI should be configured with the following project properties:
Project Name – Appropriate name (for example, SVR1)
Sub Directory – Must be Cimproj
Path – F:\Cimproj
General options – Basic control, external alarm manager
Protocols – MarkV+ Communication (this is TCIMB)
Others determined by the type of controller
The project properties can be examined using the CIMPLICITY Workbench (see
Figure 6-2).
This chapter is organized as follows:
Section Page
Using Workbench.....................................................................................................6-2
Opening a Project .....................................................................................................6-3
Signal Manager.........................................................................................................6-4
Setup..................................................................................................................6-4
Signals ...............................................................................................................6-5
Alarms ...............................................................................................................6-6
Importing Signals ..............................................................................................6-8
External Alarm Manager ........................................................................................6-10
SDB Exchange .......................................................................................................6-10
SDB Utilities ..........................................................................................................6-10
®
Modbus Data Interface .........................................................................................6-11
OLE for Process Controls (OPC) ...........................................................................6-12
6-2 • Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project Configuration HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Vol. I
Opening a Project
Using the CIMPLICITY HMI, there are three ways to open a project, as described
below.
Ø To open a CIMPLICITY project through the Windows Start menu
1. Click Start on the Windows task bar.
2. Select Programs, then CIMPLICITY, HMI, and Workbench.
A blank CIMPLICITY Workbench now opens.
3. From the Workbench window, select Open from the File menu.
4. Select the project you want to open.
Setup
Ø To enable alarms for CIMPLICITY
1. Create a new project.
2. Select options in the New Project dialog box , shown below.
Click
when
completed
Select
directory
Select
Select
applicable
After creating a new CIMPLICITY project, you must configure a CIMPLICITY Port
for the communications protocol. This enables signals to be imported into the
project. Refer to the CIMPLICITY Base System User’s Manual GFK-1180 for more
information on creating projects and configuring ports.
6-4 • Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project Configuration HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Vol. I
When the Signal Manager imports controller signals into CIMPLICITY, it
configures any needed CIMPLICITY devices and resources, if they are not already
present. For example, when importing signals for unit T1, the utility configures a
CIMPLICITY device and a CIMPLICITY resource, both called T1.
MARKV_RP is TCIMB function For each device that Signal Manager configures, it a also configures three virtual
that collects data from a points needed by the MARKV_RP program. For example, for a device called T1, the
turbine using TCI and forwards utility produces the following virtual points:
the information to the
CIMPLICITY Point Manager. • T1_TIME, which contains the unit’s current time
• T1_DATE, which contains the unit’s current date
• T1_VALID, a Boolean value that indicates if the HMI is currently
communicating with the unit
Signals
CSDB is Control System Signal Manager displays data from the Data Dictionary, which describes the unit’s
Database. CSDB. Each row of the display shows information about a signal, divided into
columns that display the following signal attributes:
Signal
attribute Description
Name Signal’s name
Access Read /write
Cim Type CIMPLICITY point type that corresponds to this signal
Description Description of the signal
Eng. Units Engineering Units
Flags Signal attributes (for example, alarm, command, permanent)
High Limit High limit for the signal’s value
Low Limit Low limit for the signals value
Offset Offset into the CSDB where this signal is located
Precision Numeric precision for display of the signal’s value
Scale Code Scale code for engineering unit conversion
Synonym Optionally specified synonym for this signal
Type Datatype for this signal
Value Signal’s current value
You can configure the items listed. The display is a standard Windows List Control,
which supports the expected user interface commands for selecting items, sorting
rows, and sizing columns.
When the Signal Manager configures alarms, it also configures alarm classes, as
follows:
• If a needed alarm class is not configured, it is added to the CIMPLICITY
configuration
• If the alarm class is already configured, the existing alarm class definition is used
• The following alarm classes apply:
Class Definition
PRC Process alarms
DIAG Diagnostic alarms
HOLD Hold list entries
SOE Sequence of events
EVENT Digital events
EX2K Exciter alarms (see below)
6-6 • Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project Configuration HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Vol. I
Ø To configure alarms for EX2000 exciters
1. Select EX2000 Alarms from the Action menu.
Signal Manager then configures exciter alarms as defined in F:\EX2000.DAT and
displays the Exciter Fault Code dialog box.
2. Make the signal selections as shown in the figure below.
Signal Manager then runs command line utilities and displays their output in a
scrolling text box. In CIMPLICITY, these utilities configure events and actions
that generate alarms when the value of the fault code CIMPLICITY point
changes value.
3. After these events and actions are configured, specify additional exciter fault
code points using the Exciter Fault Code box as in step 2.
4. When completed, select Done.
6-8 • Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project Configuration HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Vol. I
Ø To individually import signals individually into CIMPLICITY
w In Signal Manager, select the desired signals from the displayed list.
You may sometimes want to populate the CIMPLICITY point database with points
from a set of screens.
SDB Exchange
The System Database (SDB) Exchange is available for Mark VI controllers. It
provides a way to populate the CIMPLICITY point and alarm databases with the
data extracted from the Mark VI SDB.
Refer to GEI-100279 for more information about the SDB Exchange.
SDB Utilities
The SDB Utilities must run on The SDB Utilities are available for Mark VI controllers. They provide a way to
the PC that is the CIMPLICITY populate the CIMPLICITY point and alarm databases with the data extracted from
Server. the Mark VI SDB. The SDB Utilities support four sources for importing signal and
alarm data into the CIMPLICITY HMI Project:
• Signals from the SDB, which contains data used by one or more system devices.
• Signals from a comma separated variable file (*.csv), which is a common text
format for spreadsheet and database output.
• Signals from a shared name file (*.snf), associated with the Series 90™-70
programmable logic controller (PLC).
• Alarms imported from the SDB into the CIMPLICITY HMI Project alarm
definitions.
Refer to GEI-100500 for more information about the SDB Utilities.
.
6-10 • Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project Configuration HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Vol. I
Modbus® Data Interface
This utility is used with Mark The HMI acts as a Modbus slave (see Figure 6-7). This means that it waits for
IV and VI controllers. requests from another computer (a Modbus master) and answers them by returning
the current value of the variables requested. When the HMI receives turbine control
Modbus is an industry standard
commands, it forwards them to the turbine controller. Both RS-232C and Ethernet
communication link used by the
links are supported.
HMI to provide the current
value of variables from the CimMod is a program supplied by Industrial Systems (Salem, VA) as part of the
HMI to any system that CIMPLICITY project. Its function is to communicate between the CIMPLICITY
requests it via the Modbus link. point database and the TCI Modbus slave. This allows transfer of data to the Modbus
master.
HMI Server
Mark VI
TCI
Mark IV TCI CIMMOD Modbus DCS
CIMPLICITY
Slave
Mark V
& Mark
V LM
6-12 • Chapter 6 CIMPLICITY Project Configuration HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Vol. I
Appendix A HMI Function Reference
Section Page
HMI Functions for GE Turbine Controllers ............................................................A-1
CIMPLICITY HMI Supported Functions ...............................................................A-4
CIMPLICITY Add-ons
CIMPLICITY Bridge ü ü ü ü
Signal Manager ü ü ü ü SDB Exchange for Mark VI
Emissions Analysis ü ü
Triggered Plot ü ü
Unit Communications
Stagelink ü ü
CSF ü Not available in some Mark IVs
EGD ü
Unit Communications (continued)
Process Alarms ü ü ü ü
Diagnostic Alarms ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Events ü ü ü ü
SOEs ü ü ü ü
Hold List ü ü Controllers with Steam ATS only
Table Compiler ü ü
Application Code Downloads ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Mark V Make ü ü
Card Identification ü ü ü TSM for Mark VI
Alarm List ü ü ü ü
FMV ID ü
LDB Configuration Tools ü
I/O Configuration Tool ü ü ü Toolbox function for Mark VI
Time Synchronizing
Timesync Function ü ü ü ü NTP for Mark VI
GPS ü ü ü ü Option
NTP ü ü ü ü Option
A-2 • Appendix A HMI Function Reference HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A, Volume I
Mark Mark Mark Mark
HMI Function Application Notes
IV V V LM VI
Other Functions
Alarm Printing ü ü ü ü
Alarm History ü ü ü ü
Trip History Automatic Collection ü ü ü Capture Blocks + Data Historian for Mark VI
GSM ü ü ü ü
Power Block Control ü ü ü ü
Performance Monitor ü ü ü Simple cycle only
Earliest
Supported CIMPLICITY Function Supported Application Notes
Version
Alarm Blocking
Alarm Horn
3.2 SP7 Basic Control Engine ü Visual Basic for applications scripting language
Dynamic Measurement Systems Dynamically switch between English and metric units
A-4 • Appendix A HMI Function Reference HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A, Volume I
Earliest
Supported CIMPLICITY Function Supported Application Notes
Version
3.2 SP7 Real-time Trends ü Interactive ActiveX object for viewing trend
3.2 SP7 Series 90™ PLC Fault Tables ü View PLC faults
4.01 SP2 SmartObjects™ ü Reusable drag and drop graphic and scripted objects
3.2 SP7 Web Gateway ü Send CIMPLICITY HMI data to web pages
3.2 SP7 XY Plots ü ActiveX object for plotting multiple x-y data
A-6 • Appendix A HMI Function Reference HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A, Volume I
Appendix B Alarm Overview
Introduction
The turbine controllers generate three types of alarms, which are viewed on the HMI
or toolbox: Process, Hold List, and Diagnostic (see Figure B-1).
Alarm Diagnostic
HMI HMI Toolbox
Display Display
UDH
Diagnostic
I/O I/O I/O
Alarm Bits
This appendix provides a general overview of turbine controller alarms viewed and
addressed using the HMI. It is intended to assist the operator in understanding how to
use the HMI for monitoring, using the features described in this document.
Process Alarms
Process Alarms are caused by machinery and process problems, and alert the
operator by means of messages on the HMI screen. The alarms are created in the
controller using alarm bits generated in the I/O boards or in sequencing. The user
configures the desired analog alarm settings in sequencing using the toolbox.
Process Alarms are generated by the transition of Boolean signals configured by the
toolbox (for Mark VI) with the alarm attribute. The signals may be driven by
sequencing or they may be tied to input points to map values directly from I/O
boards. Process alarm signals are scanned each frame after the sequencing is run. In
TMR systems, process signals are voted and the resulting composite diagnostic is
present in each controller.
A useful application for process alarms is the annunciation of system limit checking.
Limit checking takes place in the I/O boards at the frame rate, and the resulting
Boolean status information is transferred to the controller and mapped to Process
Alarm signals.
Two system limits are available for each process input, including thermocouple,
RTD, current, voltage, and pulse rate inputs. System limit 1 can be the high or low
alarm setting, and system limit 2 can be a second high or low alarm setting. These
limits are configured from the toolbox in engineering units.
There are several choices when configuring system limits. Limits can be configured
as enabled or disabled, latched or unlatched, and greater than or less than the preset
value. System out of limits can be reset with the RESET_SYS signal.
B-2 • Appendix B Alarm Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Mark VI Controller UDH Mark VI HMI
Input Signal 1
. . Alarm
Report
Alarm
Receiver
Alarm
Viewer
Alarm
. . Scanner
. . Alarm
Com-
mand Alarm Queue
Input Signal n Operator Commands
Alarm
Queue - Ack
Alarm Logic Including - Reset
Variable Time - Lock
- Unlock
Alarm ID - Override for Hold Lists
Diagnostic Alarms
Diagnostic Alarms are caused by equipment problems, and use settings factory
programmed in the boards. Diagnostic Alarms identify the failed module to help the
service engineer quickly repair the system. For details of the failure, the operator can
request a display on the toolbox screen (Mark VI) or review the details in the HMI
Alarm Display screen.
The controller and I/O boards all generate diagnostic alarms, including the VCMI,
which generates diagnostics for the power subsystem. The controller has extensive
self-diagnostics, most that are available directly at the toolbox (for Mark VI).
Diagnostic alarms can be viewed from the toolbox by selecting the desired board,
clicking the right mouse button to display the drop down menu, and selecting display
diagnostics. A list of the diagnostic alarms for any I/O board can be displayed, and
may be reset from the toolbox.
B-4 • Appendix B Alarm Overview HMI for SPEEDTRONIC Turbine Control GEH-6126A Volume I
Glossary
ActiveX
ActiveX, developed by Microsoft, is a set of rules for how applications should share
information. With ActiveX, users can ask or answer questions, use pushbuttons, and
interact in other ways with the web page or compatible program. It is not a
programming language, but rather a model for writing programs so that other
programs and the operating system can call them. ActiveX technology is used with
Microsoft Internet Explorer® to make interactive web pages that look and behave
like computer programs, rather than static pages.
ActiveX control
A control (object) using ActiveX technologies to enable animation. An ActiveX
control can be automatically downloaded and executed by a web browser.
Programmers can develop ActiveX controls in a variety of languages, including C,
C++, Visual Basic, and Java. ActiveX controls have full access to the Windows
operating system.
alarm
A message notifying an operator or administrator of equipment, network, or process
problems.
Alarm Viewer
A standalone window within CIMPLICITY (an OCX control) for monitoring and
responding to alarms.
AMV
Alarm Viewer.
application
A complete, self-contained program that performs a specific function directly for the
user. Application programs are different than system programs, which control the
computer and run application programs and utilities.
ARCNET
Attached Resource Computer Network, a LAN communications protocol developed
by Datapoint Corporation. ARCNET defines the physical (coax and chip) and
datalink (token ring and board interface) layer of a 2.5 MHz communication
network.
board
Printed wiring board, or circuit board, used for electronic circuits.
Boolean
Digital statement that expresses a condition that is either True or False, also called a
discrete, or logical signal.
<C>
The turbine controller’s Communicator core (processor).
CimEdit
An object-oriented graphics editor tool of CIMPLICITY HMI that functions with its
runtime viewer CimView. It can create graphical screens with animation, scripting,
colors, and a variety of graphical elements that represent power plant operation.
CIMPLICITY HMI
Pc-based operator interface software from GE Fanuc Automation, configurable to
work with a wide variety of control and data acquisition equipment.
cimproj
The required subdirectory name for a CIMPLICITY HMI project (F:\Cimproj). The
project configuration Workbench (.gef) is located in this subdirectory.
CimView
An interactive graphical user interface of CIMPLICITY HMI used to monitor and
control power plant equipment, displaying data as text or a variety of graphic objects.
Its screens were created with CimEdit. They include a variety of interactive control
functions for setting point values, displaying other graphic screens, and initiating
custom software routines and other Windows applications.
client-server
Software architecture where one software product makes requests on another
software product. For example, an arrangement of PCs with software making one a
data acquisition device and the other a data using device.
command line
The line on a computer display where the user types commands to be carried out by a
program. This is a feature of a text-based interface such as MS-DOS, as opposed to a
graphical user interface (GUI) such as Windows.
configure
Select specific options, either by editing disk files, or by setting the location of
hardware jumpers, or by loading software parameters into memory.
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check which is used to detect errors in data such as
transmissions or files on a disk.
cross plot
Display of two variables, plotted one against the other over time, in an X-Y type plot
to detect signal correlations and to analyze performance.
CSDB
Control Signal Database, used in the turbine controller to store real time process data
used in the control calculations.
CSF
Control System Freeway, a token passing communication network, typically using
TWINAX cabling, running at 2.3 MHz.
<D>
The turbine controller’s backup Communicator core (processor). (Also see <C>.)
data dictionary
A system file that contains the information needed to operate a database in a
database management system. This file includes basic operating information about
the records and fields of a certain database, the limits on acceptable data values, and
access-authorization information. For the HMI, the data dictionary files contain
information about unit-specific control signal database pointnames, alarm text
messages (for both process and diagnostic alarms), and display information for
signal pointnames (type/units, messages, and such). The primary unit Data
Dictionary file, UNITDATA.DAT, can be created on an HMI in the unit-specific
directory.
DCS
Distributed Control System, used for process control applications including control
of boilers and other power plant equipment.
deadband
Range of values inside of which the incoming signal can be altered without changing
the output response. The Historian uses a sophisticated deadband algorithm to decide
whether to save or discard incoming data, as part of its data compression function.
device
A configurable component of a process control system.
Devcom
Application program that serves as a communications bridge between the
CIMPLICITY HMI Point Manager and a device being monitored.
dynamic
An attribute emphasizing motion, change, and process as opposed to static.
EGD
Ethernet Global Data, a network protocol used by some controllers. Devices share
data through periodic EGD exchanges (pages of data).
Ethernet
LAN with a 10 or 100 megabaud data rate, used to link one or more computers
and/or controllers together. It features a collision avoidance/collision detection
system. It uses TCP/IP and I/O services layers that conform to the IEEE 802.3
standard, developed by Xerox, Digital Equipment Corporation (DEC), and Intel.
event
Discrete signal generated by a change in a status of a logic signal in a controller.
EX2000
GE generator exciter control. It regulates the generator field current to control the
generator output voltage.
fault code
A message from the controller to the HMI indicating a controller warning or failure.
firmware
Set of executable software, stored in memory chips that hold their content without
electrical power, such as EPROM or Flash memory.
filter
A program that separates data or signals in accordance with specified criteria.
forcing
Setting a signal to a particular value, regardless of the value the blockware or I/O is
writing to that signal.
frame rate
Basic scheduling rate of the controller. It encompasses one complete input-compute-
output cycle for the controller.
header
Textual information, such as a title, date, name, or other applicable identifying
information, positioned at the top of a screen, column, or page, and usually repeated
at every occurrence.
Historian
A client/server-based data archival system for data collection, storage, and display of
power island and auxiliary process data.. It combines high-resolution digital event
data from the turbine controller with process analog data to create a sophisticated
tool for investigating cause-effect relationships.
HMI
Human-Machine Interface. The GE HMI is a Windows NT-based operator interface
to the turbine controllers and auxiliary power plant equipment. The HMI uses
CIMPLICITY as the operator interface, and supports the Historian Client Toolset for
viewing Historian data.
HRSG
Heat Recovery Steam Generator. This uses exhaust heat from a gas turbine to
generate steam.
icon
A small picture intended to represent something (a file, directory, or action) in a
graphical user interface. When an icon is clicked on, some action is performed, such
as opening a directory or aborting a file transfer
ICS
Integrated Control System. The GE ICS combines various power plant controls into
a single distributed control system.
initialize
Set values (addresses, counters, registers, and such) to a beginning value prior to the
rest of processing.
LAN
Local area network (communications). A typical LAN consists of peripheral devices
and controllers contained in the same building, and often on the same floor.
logical
Statement of a true/false sense, such as a Boolean.
Mark IV
SPEEDTRONIC gas turbine controller, introduced in 1983. The first GE triple
modular redundant (TMR) control for fault-tolerant operation.
Mark V
All-digital SPEEDTRONIC gas and steam turbine controller, introduced in 1991,
available in Simplex and TMR control versions. At first equipped with a DOS-based
pc operator interface, later upgraded to use the NT-based CIMPLICITY HMI.
Mark V LM
SPEEDTRONIC gas turbine controller, introduced in 1995, designed specifically to
support the aeroderivative Dry Low Emissions (DLE) technology developed by GE
Aircraft Engines. Equipped to use the NT-based CIMPLICITY HMI.
Mark VI
VME-based SPEEDTRONIC gas and steam turbine controller, available in Simplex
and TMR control versions. Equipped to use the NT-based CIMPLICITY HMI and
Control System Toolbox.
menu
(Software.) A list from which the user may select an operation to be performed.
Modbus
Serial communication protocol, initially developed by Gould Modicon for use
between PLCs and other computers.
network
A data communication system that links two or more computers and peripheral
devices.
object
(Software.) Generally, any item that can be individually selected and manipulated.
This can include shapes and pictures that appear on a display screen, as well as less
tangible software entities. In object-oriented programming, for example, an object is
a self-contained entity that consists of both data and procedures to manipulate the
data.
OCX
OLE custom control. An independent program module that can be accessed by other
programs in a Windows environment. ActiveX (Microsoft’s next generation of
controls) is backward compatible OCX.
OPC
OLE for Process Controls. The OPC Specification is a non-proprietary technical
specification that defines a set of standard interfaces based upon Microsoft’s
OLE/COM technology. The application of the OPC standard interface makes
possible interoperability between automation/control applications, field
systems/devices, and business/office applications.
panel
The side or front of a piece of equipment on which terminations and termination
assemblies are mounted.
pc
Abbreviation for personal computer.
PDH
See Plant Data Highway.
permissives
Conditions that allow advancement from one state to another.
PLC
Programmable logic controller. These are designed for discrete (logic) control of
machinery, and they also compute math (analog) functions and perform regulatory
control.
plot
To draw an image by connecting a series of precisely placed points on a screen or
paper, using a series of lines.
point
Basic unit for variable information in the controller, also referred to as signal.
reboot
Restart the controller or pc after a controlled shutdown.
resources
Also known as groups. Resources are systems (devices, machines, or work stations
where work is performed) or areas where several tasks are carried out. Resource
configuration plays an important role in the CIMPLICITY system by routing alarms
to specific users and filtering the data users receive.
runtime
See product code.
server
A pc that gathers data over Ethernet from plant devices, and makes the data available
to pc-based operator interfaces known as Viewers.
setpoint
Value of a controlled variable, departure from which causes a controller to operate to
reduce the error and restore the intended steady state.
signal
Basic unit for variable information in the controller, also referred to as point.
Simplex
Operation that requires only one set of control and I/O, and generally uses only one
channel.
SOE
See Sequence of Events.
SRTP
Service Request Transfer Protocol. An Ethernet communications protocol for
communications between the turbine controller and the HMI.
synchroscope
Instrument for detecting whether two moving parts are synchronized
tag
Identifying name given to a process measurement point.
TCEA
DS200TCEA Emergency Overspeed Board (TCEA), located in the controller’s
Protective Core <P1>, is used for the high-speed protection circuitry. It is often
referred to as the Protective Processor. The three TCEA boards used in the <P1>
core are referred to as the <X>, <Y>, and <Z> processors. These boards scale and
condition input for high and low shaft speed, flame detection, and automatic
synchronization. They then output the signals via the TCEA (location 1) board over
the IONET to the <R1> core’s DS200STCA board. The TCEAs send emergency trip
signals to the Turbine Trip Board (DS200TCTG). Each TCEA has its own power
supply and power supply diagnostics.
TCI
Turbine Control Interface. The GE-supplied software package on the HMI that
interfaces to the turbine control.
TCP/IP
Communications protocols developed to inter-network dissimilar systems. It is a de
facto UNIX standard, but is supported on almost all systems. TCP controls data
transfer and IP provides the routing for functions, such as file transfer and e-mail.
timetag
Information added to data to indicate the time at which it was collected. Also called a
time stamp.
TMR
Triple Modular Redundancy. This is an architecture that uses three identical sets of
control and I/O, and votes the results to obtain highly reliable output signals.
trend
Time-based screen plot showing the history of process values, available in the
Historian, HMI, and the Control System Toolbox.
trigger
Transition in a discrete signal from 0 to 1, or from 1 to 0, initiating an action or
sequence.
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time, an international time-reference standard.
utility
A small helper program that performs a specific task, usually related to managing
system resources. Utilities differ from applications mostly in terms of size,
complexity, and function.
web browser
Pc software, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator, allowing
screens and data to be viewed over a network from a server.
Windows NT
Advanced 32-bit operating system from Microsoft Corporation for 386-based PCs
and above.
Workbench
A CIMPLICITY HMI program used to view, configure, organize, and manage every
component of a CIMPLICITY project through a single window.
V
S
valve travel, 5-6
SDB Exchange, 1-8, 6-10
SDB Utilities, 6-10, A-2
security, 1-2, 5-8, 5-12 W
Sequence of Events (SOE), 6-6 web, A-5
Sequencing Display, 3-7 Diagnostic Functions, A-3
setpoint, 4-7, 6-12, 4-7 Gateway, 1-7, A-5
Signal Manager, 6-4 – 6-9, A-1 Workbench, 2-4, 5-8, 5-12, 5-14, 5-16, 6-1 – 6-3
signals, importing, 6-8
SOE (see Sequence of Events)
specifications, 1-7
SPEEDTRONIC controllers
Mark IV, 1-1, 1-3, 4-2, 4-13, 4-15, 5-28, 6-4, 6-10,
6-11, A-1, A-2, B-1
5RDQRNH%OYG
ZZZ*(LQGXVWULDOFRP 6DOHP9$86$
g GE Energy
GEH-6421H, Volume I
TM
SPEEDTRONIC
Mark VI Control
System Guide, Volume I
TM
SPEEDTRONIC
Mark VI Control
System Guide, Volume I
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to
provide for every possible contingency to be met during installation, operation, and
maintenance. The information is supplied for informational purposes only, and GE makes
no warranty as to the accuracy of the information included herein. Changes,
modifications, and/or improvements to equipment and specifications are made
periodically and these changes may or may not be reflected herein. It is understood that
GE may make changes, modifications, or improvements to the equipment referenced
herein or to the document itself at any time. This document is intended for trained
personnel familiar with the GE products referenced herein.
GE may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this
document. The furnishing of this document does not provide any license whatsoever to
any of these patents. All license inquiries should be directed to the address below. If
further information is desired, or if particular problems arise that are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purpose, the matter should be referred to:
GE Energy
Post Sales Service
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA
Phone: 1 888 GE4 SERV (888 434 7378, United States)
+ 1 540 378 3280 (International)
Fax: + 1 540 387 8606 (All)
(“+” indicates the international access code required when calling from outside the
USA)
This document contains proprietary information of General Electric Company, USA and
is furnished to its customer solely to assist that customer in the installation, testing,
operation, and/or maintenance of the equipment described. This document shall not be
reproduced in whole or in part nor shall its contents be disclosed to any third party
without the written approval of GE Energy.
Fax No.
Your Company’s Name and Address Job Site
Phone No.
GE Requisition No.
E-mail
Your Job Function / How You Use This Publication Publication No.
Address
General Rating
Excellent Good Fair Poor Additional Comments
Contents { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Organization { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Technical Accuracy { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Clarity { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Completeness { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Drawings / Figures { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Tables { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Referencing { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Readability { { { { ____________________________________________________________
Specific Suggestions (Corrections, information that could be expanded on, and such.)
Page No. Comments
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
_____ _________________________________________________________________________________
Other Comments (What you like, what could be added, how to improve, and such.) ________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Overall grade (Compared to publications from other manufacturers of similar products, how do you rate this publication?)
{ Superior { Comparable { Inferior { Do not know Comment ____________________________________________
____________________________ Place
stamp
____________________________ here.
____________________________
GE Energy
Documentation Design, Rm. 291
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA
Index I-1
Chapter 1 Overview
Related Documents..................................................................... 1-2
How to Get Help......................................................................... 1-3
Acronyms and Abbreviations ..................................................... 1-3
Introduction
This document describes the SPEEDTRONIC™ Mark VI turbine control system.
Mark VI is used for the control and protection of steam and gas turbines in electrical
generation and process plant applications.
The main functions of the Mark VI turbine control system are as follows:
Note To obtain the highest reliability, Mark VI uses a TMR architecture with
sophisticated signal voting techniques.
The following figure shows a typical Mark VI control system for a steam turbine
with the important inputs and control outputs.
(24) Relays
(24) Thermocouples
Actuator
Actuator
Inlet Pressure
Trip
Generator
Speed
Extraction Pressure
Exhaust Pressure
Shaft Voltage & Current Monitor
Automatic Synchronizing
Vibration, Thrust, Eccentricity
Temperature (RTDs)
Temperature (Thermocouples)
Generator 3-Phase PTs & CT
Typical Turbine Control System
Related Documents
For additional information, refer to the following documents:
GE Energy
Post Sales Service
1501 Roanoke Blvd. Salem, VA 24153-6492 USA
Phone: 1 888 GE4 SERV (888 434 7378, United States)
+ 1 540 378 3280 (International)
Fax: + 1 540 387 8606 (All)
Note "+" indicates the international access code required when calling from outside
the USA.
Introduction
This chapter defines the architecture of the Mark VI turbine control system,
including the system components, the three communication networks, and the
various levels of redundancy that are possible. It also discusses system reliability and
availability, and third-party connectivity to plant distributed control systems.
System Components
This section summarizes the main subsystems that make up the Mark VI control
system. These include the controllers, I/O boards, terminal boards, power
distribution, cabinets, networks, operator interfaces, and the protection module.
Control Cabinet
The control cabinet contains either a single (simplex) Mark VI control module or
three TMR control modules. These are linked to their remote I/O by a single or triple
high speed I/O network called IONet, and are linked to the UDH by their controller
Ethernet port. Local or remote I/O is possible. The control cabinet requires 120/240
V ac and/or 125 V dc power. This is converted to 125 V dc to supply the modules.
I/O Cabinet
The I/O cabinet contains either single or triple interface modules. These are linked to
the controllers by IONet, and to the terminal boards by dedicated cables. The
terminal boards are in the I/O cabinet close to the interface modules. Power require-
ments are 120/240 V ac and/or 125 V dc power.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-1
Unit Data Highway (UDH)
The UDH connects the Mark VI control panels with the HMI or HMI/Data Server.
The network media is UTP or fiber-optic Ethernet. Redundant cable operation is
optional and, if supplied, unit operation continues even if one cable is faulted. Dual
cable networks still comprise one logical network. Similar to the plant data highway
(PDH), the UDH can have redundant, separately powered network switches, and
fiber optic communication.
UDH command data is replicated to all three controllers. This data is read by the
Master communication controller board (VCMI) and transmitted to the other
controllers. Only the UDH communicator transmits UDH data (refer to the section,
UDH Communicator).
Note The UDH network supports the Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol for
communication with other Mark VIs, HRSG, Exciter, Static Starter, and Balance of
Plant (BOP) control.
Router
HMI HMI HMI Field
Viewer Viewer Viewer Support
Supervisory Layer
PLANT DATA H IGHWAY
PLANT DATA H IGHWAY
HMI Servers
Control Layer
U NIT D ATA H IGHWAY
U NIT DATA H IGHWAY
Mark VI
Genius
IONet IONet
Bus
I/O Boards I/O Boards I/O Boards
2-2 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
Typical HMI’s are computers running Windows operating system with
communication drivers for the data highways, and CIMPLICITY operator display
software. The operator initiates commands from the real time graphic displays, and
can view real time turbine data and alarms on the CIMPLICITY graphic displays.
Detailed I/O diagnostics and system configuration are available using the toolbox
software. An HMI can be configured as a server or viewer, and can contain tools and
utility programs.
An HMI may be linked to one data highway, or redundant network interface boards
can be used to link the HMI to both data highways for greater reliability. The HMI
can be cabinet, control console or table-mounted.
Servers
CIMPLICITY servers collect data on the UDH and use the PDH to communicate
with viewers. Multiple servers can be used to provide redundancy.
Note Redundant data servers are optional, and if supplied, communication with the
viewers continues even if one server fails.
The COI can be installed in many different configurations, depending on the product
line and specific requisition requirements. The only cabling requirements are for
power and for the Ethernet connection to the UDH. Network communication is via
the integrated auto-sensing 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection. Expansion
possibilities for the computer are limited, although it does support connection of
external devices through FDD, IDE, and USB connections.
The COI can be directly connected to the Mark VI or Excitation Control System, or
it can be connected through an EGD Ethernet switch. A redundant topology is
available when the controller is ordered with a second Ethernet port.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-3
Interface Features
EGD pages transmitted by the controller are used to drive numeric data displays. The
refresh rate depends both on the rate at which the controller transmits the pages, and
the rate at which the COI refreshes the fields. Both are set at configuration time in
the toolbox.
The COI uses a touch screen, and no keyboard or mouse is provided. The color of
pushbuttons is driven by state feedback conditions. To change the state or condition,
press the button. The color of the button changes if the command is accepted and the
change implemented by the controller.
Touching an input numeric field on the COI touch screen displays a numeric keypad
and the desired number can be entered.
An Alarm Window is provided and an alarm is selected by touching it. Then Ack,
Silence, Lock, or Unlock the alarm by pressing the corresponding button. Multiple
alarms can be selected by dragging through the alarm list. Pressing the button then
applies to all selected alarms. For complete information, refer to GEI-10043,
Computer Operator Interface (COI) for Mark VI or EX2100 Systems.
Operator Console
The turbine control console is a modular design, which can be expanded from two
monitors, with space for one operator, to four monitors, with space for three
operators. Printers can be table-mounted, or on pedestals under the counter. The full
size console is 5507.04 mm (18 ft 0 13/16 in) long, and 2233.6 mm (7 ft 3 15/16 in)
wide. The center section, with space for two monitors and a phone/printer bay, is a
small console 1828.8 mm (6 ft) wide.
2-4 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Excitation Control System
The excitation control system supplies dc power to the field of the synchronous
generator. The exciter controls the generator ac terminal voltage and/or the reactive
volt-amperes by means of the field current.
Generator Protection
The generator protection system is mounted in a single, indoor, freestanding cabinet.
The ensclosure is NEMA 1, and weighs 1133 kg (2500 lbs). The generator cabinet
interfacesto the Mark VI with hard-wired I/O, and has an optional Modbus interface
to the HMI.
The static starter cabinet is a ventilated NEMA 1 free standing enclosure made of 12-
gauge sheet steel on a rigid steel frame designed for indoor mounting.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-5
Control Module
The control module is available as an integrated control and I/O module, or as a
stand-alone control module only. The integrated control and I/O rack can be either a
21-slot or 13-slot VME size. The 13-slot rack can accommodate all the boards for
control of a small turbine. The backplane has P1 and P2 connectors for the VME
boards. The P1 connectors communicate data across the backplane, and the P2
connectors communicate data between the board and 37-pin J3 and J4 connectors
located directly beneath each board. Cables run from the J3 and J4 connectors to the
terminal boards.
There can be one control module (simplex) or three triple modular redundant (TMR)
control modules. Each of these configurations supports remote I/O over IONet. The
simplex control modules can be configured to support up to three independent
parallel IONet systems for higher I/O throughput. Multiple communication boards
may be used in a control module to increase the IONet throughput.
The following figure shows a 21-slot rack with a three-IONet VCMI communication
board, and a UCVx controller. The UCVx must go in slot 2. The remaining slots are
filled with I/O boards.
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
VME Chassis,
21 slots
Power
Supply
UDH
Port
VCMI
Communication
Board, with
One or Three
IONet Ports
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Note: This rack is for the UCVx controller, connectors Connectors for Cables to
J302 and J402 are not present. UCVB and UCVD Terminal Boards (J3 & J4)
controllers can be used in this rack.
Control Module with Control, Communication, and I/O Boards
2-6 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
The I/O racks and the I/O processor boards are shielded to control EMI/RFI
emissions. This shielding also protects the processor boards against interference from
external sources.
Do not plug the UCVx controller into any rack that has J302
and J402 connectors.
The stand-along controller module is a VME rack with the UCVx controller board,
VCMI communication board, and VDSK interface board as shown in the following
figure. This version is for remote I/O systems. The rack is powered by an integrated
power supply.
VDSK supplies 24 V dc to the cooling fan mounted under the rack, and monitors the
Power Distribution Module (PDM) through the 37-pin connector on the front. The
VDSK board is ribbon cabled in the back to the VCMI to transmit the PDM
diagnostics.
x x x x
VME Rack
POWER
SUPPLY
Power Supply
x x x x
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-7
Interface Module
The interface module houses the I/O boards remote from the control module. The
rack, shown in the following figure is similar to the control module VME rack, but
without the controller, interface board VDSK, and cooling fan. Each I/O board
occupies one or two slots in the module and has a backplane connection to a pair of
37-pin D connectors mounted on an apron beneath the VME rack. Cables run from
the 37-pin connectors to the terminal boards. Most I/O boards can be removed, with
power removed, and replaced without disconnecting any signal or power cable.
Communication with the module is via a VCMI communication board with a single
IONet port, located in the left slot. The module backplane contains a plug wired to
slot 1, which is read by the communication board to obtain the identity of the module
on the IONet.
VCMI
Communication x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
IONet Link
to Control
Module
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2-8 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Controller
The controller is a single-slot VME board, housing a high-speed processor, DRAM,
flash memory, cache, an Ethernet port, and two serial RS-232C ports. It must always
be inserted in slot 2 of an I/O rack designed to accommodate it. These racks can be
identified by the fact that there are no J3 and J4 connectors under slot 2. The
controller provides communication with the UDH through the Ethernet port, and
supports a low-level diagnostic monitor on the COM1 serial port. The base software
includes appropriate portions of the existing Turbine Block Library of control
functions for the steam, gas, and Land-Marine aero-derivative (LM) products. The
controller can run its program at up to 100 Hz, (10 ms frame rate), depending on the
size of the system configuration.
External data is transferred to/from the controller over the VME bus by the VCMI
communication board. In a simplex system, the data consists of the process I/O from
the I/O boards, and in a TMR system, it consists of voted I/O. Refer to GEH-6421,
Volume II.
Status LEDs
STATUS
VMEbus SYSFAIL
Monitor Port for GE use
Flash Activity
S
V
Power Status
G
Keyboard/mouse port A
for GE use
M
/
COM1 RS-232C Port for K
Initial Controller Setup; C
COM2 RS-232C Port for O
M
Serial communication 1:2 Ethernet Status LEDs
L Active
A
N
Ethernet Port for Unit Data Link
RST
Highway Communication
P
C Notice: To connect
M batteries, user to set jumper
I E8 to pins 7-8 ("IN") and
P
jumper E10 to ("IN")
M
E
Z
Z
A
N
I
N
E
UCVE
H2A
x
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-9
VCMI Communication Board
The VCMI board in the control and interface module communicates internally to the
I/O boards in its rack, and to the other VCMI cards through the IONet. There are two
versions, one with one Ethernet IONet port for simplex systems, and the other with
three Ethernet ports for TMR systems. Simplex systems have one control module
connected to one or more interface modules using a single cable. The VCMI with
three separate IONet ports is used in TMR systems for communication with the three
I/O channels Rx, Sx, and Tx, and with the two other control modules. This is shown
in the following figure.
Control Module R0
VCMI Board
with V U
Three IONet C C I/O
Ports M V Boards
I X
IONet - T to other Control, Interface, & Protection Modules
IONet - S to other Control, Interface, & Protection Modules
IONet - R
Interface Module R1
VCMI Board with V
One IONet Port C I/O
M Boards
I
IONet to other
Interface Modules &
Protection Module
VCMI Boards providing I/O Communication and I/O Voting
In TMR mode, the VCMI voter in the control module is always the Master of the
IONet and also provides the IONet clock. Time synch messages from the time source
on the UDH are sent to the controllers and then to the VCMIs. All input data from a
single rack is sent in one or more IONet packets (approximately 1500 bytes per
packet maximum). The VCMI in the control module broadcasts all data for all
remote racks in one packet, and each VCMI in the remote rack extracts the
appropriate data from the packet.
2-10 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
IONet
The IONet connection on the VCMI is a BNC for 10Base2 Ethernet. The interface
circuit is high impedance allowing “T” tap connections with 50 : terminal at the
first and last node. The cabling distances are restricted to 185 meters per segment
with up to eight nodes, using RG-58C/U or equivalent cable.
The Link Layer protocol is IEEE 802.3 standard Ethernet. The application layer
protocol uses Asynchronous Device Language (ADL) messaging with special
adaptations for the input/output handling and the state exchanges.
The VCMI board acts as IONet Master and polls the remote interface module for
data. The VCMI Master broadcasts a command to all slave stations on a single IONet
causing them to respond with their message in a consecutive manner. To avoid
collisions on the media, each station is told how long to delay before attempting to
transmit. Utilizing this Master/slave mechanism, and running at 10 Mb/s, the IONet
is capable of transmitting a 1000 byte packet every millisecond (8 MHz bit rate).
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-11
I/O Boards
Most I/O boards, are single width VME boards, of similar design and front cabinet,
using the same digital signal processor (TMS320C32).
The central processing unit (CPU) is a high-speed processor designed for digital
filtering and for working with data in IEEE 32-bit floating point format. The task
scheduler operates at a 1 ms and 5 ms rate to support high-speed analog and discrete
inputs. The I/O boards synchronize their input scan to complete a cycle before being
read by the VCMI board. Contact inputs in the VCCC and VCRC are time stamped
to 1 ms to provide a sequence of events (SOE) monitor.
Each I/O board contains the required sensor characteristic library, for example
thermocouple and RTD linearizations. Bad sensor data and alarm signal levels, both
high and low, are detected and alarmed. The I/O configuration in the toolbox can be
downloaded over the network to change the program online. This means that I/O
boards can accept tune-up commands and data while running.
Certain I/O boards, such as the servo and turbine board, contain special control
functions in firmware. This allows loops, such as the valve position control, to run
locally instead of in the controller. Using the I/O boards in this way provides fast
response for a number of time critical functions. Servo loops, can be performed in
the servo board at 200 times per second.
Each I/O board sends an identification message (ID packet) to the VCMI when
requested. The packet contains the hardware catalog number of the I/O board, the
hardware revision, the board barcode serial number, the firmware catalog number,
and the firmware version. Also each I/O board identifies the connected terminal
boards via the ID wire in the 37-pin cable. This allows each connector on each
terminal board to have a separate identity.
I/O Processor Terminal I/O Signal Types No. per I/O Type of Terminal Comments
Board Board Processor Board
Board
VAIC TBAI (2) Analog inputs, 01mA, 20 TMR, simplex
420 mA, voltage 4
Analog outputs, 420 mA,
0200 mA
VAOC TBAO Analog outputs, 420 mA 16 TMR, simplex
VCCC and TBCI (2) Contact inputs 48 TMR, (VCCC is two slots)
VCRC TRLY (2) Relay Outputs (note 1)* 24 simplex
TMR, simplex
VCCC TICI (2) Point Isolated Contact 48 TMR, simplex VCCC-only in place of
inputs TBCI. (optional)
VGEN TGEN Analog inputs, 420 mA 4 TMR, simplex
Potential transformers 2
Current transformers 3
TRLY Relay outputs (optional) 12 for FAS (PLU)
VPRO (3) TPRO Pulse rate 3 TMR Emergency Protect
Potential transformers 2
Thermocouples 3
Analog inputs, 420 mA 3
2-12 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
TREG (2) Solenoid drivers 6 TMR Gas turbine
Trip contact inputs 7
Emergency stop 2 Hardwire,Trip ,Clamp
TREL Solenoid drivers 3 TMR Large steam
Trip contact inputs 7
TRES Solenoid drivers 3 TMR, simplex Small/medium steam
Trip contact inputs 7
VPYR TPYR Pyrometers (4 analog 2 TMR, simplex
inputs each)
KeyPhasor shaft position 2
sensors
VRTD TRTD, Resistance Temperature 16 TMR, simplex 3 wire
Devices (RTD)
VSVO TSVO (2) Servo outputs to valve 4 TMR, simplex Trip, Clamp, Input
hydraulic servo
LVDT inputs from valve 12
LVDT excitation 8
Pulse rate inputs for flow 2
monitoring
Pulse rate excitation 2
VTCC TBTC Thermocouples 24 TMR, simplex
VTUR TTUR Pulse rate magnetic 4 TMR, simplex
pickups
Potential transformers, 2
gen. and bus
Shaft current and voltage 2
monitor
Breaker interface 1
TRPG Flame detectors 8 TMR, simplex Gas turbine
(Geiger Mueller)
Solenoid drivers (note 2)* 3
TRPL Solenoid drivers 3 TMR Large steam
Emergency stop 2
TRPS Solenoid drivers 3 TMR, simplex Small/med. steam
Emergency stop 2
VVIB TVIB (2) Shaft vibration probes 16 TMR, simplex Buffered using BNC
(Bently Nevada)
Shaft proximity probes 8
(Displacement)
Shaft proximity reference 2
(KeyPhasor)
*Note 2: VTURH2 occupies two slots and supports two TRPG boards, flame
detector support on only the first TRPG.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-13
Terminal Boards
The terminal board provides the customer wiring connection point, and fans out the
signals to three separate 37-pin D connectors for cables to the R, S, and T I/O boards.
Each type of I/O board has its own special terminal board, some with a different
combination of connectors. For example, one version of the thermocouple board
does not fan out and has only two connectors for cabling to one I/O board. The other
version does fan out and has six connectors for R, S, and T. Since the fan out circuit
is a potential single point failure, the terminal board contains a minimum of active
circuitry limited primarily to filters and protective devices. Power for the outputs
usually comes from the I/O board, but for some relay and solenoid outputs, separate
power plugs are mounted on the terminal board.
Smaller DIN-rail mounted terminal boards are available for simplex applications.
These low cost, small size simplex control systems are designed for small gas and
steam turbines. IONet is not used since the D-type terminal boards cable directly into
the control chassis to interface with the I/O boards. The types of DIN-rail boards are
shown in the following table.
2-14 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
DIN–Rail Mounted Terminal Boards
DIN Euro Size Number of Description of I/O Associated I/O
Terminal Board Points Processor Board
DTTC 12 Thermocouple temperature VTCC
inputs with one cold junction
reference
DRTD 8 RTD temperature inputs VRTD
DTAI 10 Analog current or voltage inputs VAIC
with on-board 24 V dc power
supply
2
Analog current outputs, with
choice of 20 mA or 200 mA
DTAO 8 Analog current outputs, 0-20 mA VAOC
DTCI 24 Contact Inputs with external 24 VCRC (or VCCC)
V dc excitation
DRLY 12 Form-C relay outputs, dry VCRC (or VCCC)
contacts, customer powered
DTRT ------- Transition board between VTUR VTUR
and DRLY for solenoid trip
functions
DTUR 4 Magnetic (passive) pulse rate VTUR
pickups for speed and fuel flow
measurement
DSVO 2 Servo-valve outputs with choice VSVO
of coil currents from 10 mA to
120 mA
6
LVDT valve position sensors
with on-board excitation
2 Active pulse rate probes for flow
measurement, with 24 V dc
excitation provided
DVIB 8 Vibration, Position, or Seismic, VVIB
or Accelerometer, or Velomiter
1 KeyPhasor (reference)
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-15
Relay Terminal Boards
The following table provides a comparison of the features offered by the different
relay terminal boards.
Relay Terminal Boards
Power
Board Relays Feedback Relay type Redundancy Suppression Terminals
Distribution
12 form C relays
soldered
24dc@10A
sealed
DRLYH1A 125dc@0.5A none none none, simplex only No 72 Euro-box
mechanical
120ac@10A
relays
240ac@3A
12 form C relays
soldered
24dc@2A
sealed
DRLYH1B 125dc@0.5A none none none, simplex only No 72 Euro-box
mechanical
120ac@1A
relays
240ac@0.5A
12 form C relays 6 fused socketed
Coil drive = voted
24dc@3A branches, voted sealed
TRLYH1B TMR input or MOV 48 Barrier
125dc@0.6A 1 special coil drive mechanical
simplex input
120/240ac@3A unfused relays
6 fused isolated socketed
12 form C relays Coil drive = voted
branches, contact sealed MOV &
TRLYH1C 125dc@0.6A TMR input or 48 Barrier
1 special voltage mechanical R-C
120/240ac@3A simplex input
unfused feedback relays
6 fused isolated socketed
Coil drive = voted
12 form C relays branches, contact sealed MOV &
TRLYH2C TMR input or 48 Barrier
24dc@3A 1 special voltage mechanical R-C
simplex input
unfused feedback relays
ohm
meter socketed
6 form A relays Coil drive = voted
6 fused (dc sealed
TRLYH1D 24dc@3A TMR input or MOV 24 Barrier
branches solenoid mechanical
125dc@0.6A simplex input
integrity relays
monitor)
isolated
soldered Coil drive = voted
12 form A relays contact
TRLYH1E none solid-state TMR input or No 24 Barrier
120/240ac@6A voltage
relays simplex input
feedback
isolated
soldered Coil drive = voted
12 form A relays contact
TRLYH2E none solid-state TMR input or No 24 Barrier
24dc@7A voltage
relays simplex input
feedback
isolated
soldered Coil drive = voted
12 form A relays contact
TRLYH3E none solid-state TMR input or No 24 Barrier
125dc@3A voltage
relays simplex input
feedback
soldered
none non-
sealed Relay contact 48 Barrier
TRLYH1F 12 form A relays without voted No
mechanical voting, TMR only (24 used)
WPDF coil drive
relays
soldered
With WPDF, non-
sealed Relay contact
TRLYH1F 12 form A relays 12 fused voted No 48 Barrier
mechanical voting, TMR only
outputs coil drive
relays
2-16 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
soldered
none non-
sealed Relay contact 48 Barrier
TRLYH2F 12 form B relays without voted No
mechanical voting, TMR only (24 used)
WPDF coil drive
relays
soldered
With WPDF, non-
sealed Relay contact
TRLYH2F 12 form B relays 12 fused voted No 48 Barrier
mechanical voting, TMR only
outputs coil drive
relays
The following table provides a comparison of the features offered by the different
trip terminal boards.
Power Sources
A reliable source of power is provided to the rack power supplies from either a
battery, or from multiple power converters, or from a combination of both. The
multiple power sources are connected as high select in the Power Distribution
Module (PDM) to provide the required redundancy.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-17
Turbine Protection Module
The Turbine Protection Module (VPRO) and associated terminal boards (TPRO and
TREG) provide an independent emergency overspeed protection for turbines that do
not have a mechanical overspeed bolt. The protection module is separate from the
turbine control and consists of triple redundant VPRO boards, each with their own
on-board power supply, as shown in the following figure. VPRO controls the trip
solenoids through relay voting circuits on the TREG, TREL, and TRES boards.
To TREG
Power In
125 Vdc
Turbine Protection Module with Cabling Connections
The TPRO terminal board provides independent speed pickups to each VPRO, which
processes them at high speed. This high speed reduces the maximum time delay to
calculate a trip and signal the ETR relay driver to 20 ms. In addition to calculating
speed, VPRO calculates acceleration which is another input to the overspeed logic.
TPRO fans out generator and line voltage inputs to each VPRO where an
independent generator synchronization check is made. Until VPRO closes the K25A
permissive relay on TTUR, generator synchronization cannot occur. For gas turbine
applications, inputs from temperature sensors are brought into the module for
exhaust over temperature protection.
The VPRO boards do not communicate over the VME backplane. Failures on TREG
are detected by VPRO and fed back to the control system over the IONet. Each
VPRO has an IONet communication port equivalent to that of the VCMI.
2-18 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Operating Systems
All operator stations, communication servers, and engineering workstations use the
Windows operating system. The HMIs and servers run CIMPLICITY software, and
the engineer's workstation runs toolbox software for system configuration.
The I/O system, because of its TMR requirements, uses a proprietary executive
system designed for this special application. This executive is the basis for the
operating system in the VCMI and all of the I/O boards.
The controller uses the QNX operating system from QNX Software Systems Ltd.
This is a real time POSIX-compliant operating system ideally suited to high speed
automation applications such as turbine control and protection
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-19
Levels of Redundancy
The need for higher system reliability has led vendors to develop different systems of
increasing redundancy.
Simplex systems are the simplest systems having only one chain, and are therefore
the least expensive. Reliability is average.
TMR systems have a very high reliability, and since the voting software is simple,
the amount of software required is reasonable. Input sensors can be triplicated if
required.
Vote
Input Controller
Simplex systems in a typical power plant are used for applications requiring
normal reliability, such as control of auxiliaries and balance of plant (BOP). A single
PLC with local and remote I/O might be used in this application. In a typical Mark
VI, many of the I/O are non-critical and are installed and configured as simplex.
These simplex I/O boards can be mixed with TMR boards in the same interface
module.
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) control systems, such as Mark VI, are used
for the demanding turbine control and protection application. Here the highest
reliability ensures the minimum plant downtime due to control problems, since the
turbine can continue running even with a failed controller or I/O channel. In a TMR
system, failures are detected and annunciated, and can be repaired online. This
means the turbine protection system can be relied on to be fully operational, if a
turbine problem occurs.
2-20 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Control and Protection Features
This section describes the fault tolerant features of the TMR part of the control
system. The control system can operate in two different configurations:
The voting of inputs and outputs provides a high degree of fault masking. When
three signals are voted, the failure of any one signal is masked by the other two good
signals. This is because the voting process selects the median of the three analog
inputs. In the case of discrete inputs, the voting selects the two that agree. In fact, the
fault masking in a TMR system hides the fault so well that special fault detection
functions are included as part of the voting software. Before voting, all input values
are compared to detect any large differences. This value comparison generates a
system diagnostic alarm.
In addition to fault masking, there are many other features designed to prevent fault
propagation or to provide fault isolation. A distributed architecture with dc isolation
provides a high degree of hardware isolation. Restrictions on memory access using
dual-port memories prevent accidental data destruction by adjacent processors.
Isolated power sources prevent a domino effect if a faulty module overloads its
power supply.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-21
TMR Architecture
The TMR control architecture has three duplicate hardware controller modules
labeled R, S, and T. A high-speed network connects each control module with its
associated set of I/O modules, resulting in three independent I/O networks. Each
network is also extended to connect to separate ports on each of the other controllers.
Each of the three controllers has a VCMI communication board with three
independent I/O communication ports to allow each controller to receive data from
all of the I/O modules on all three I/O networks. The three protection modules are
also on the I/O networks.
IONet - R
IONet - S
IONet - T
TMR Architecture with Local & Remote I/O, and Protection Module
Each of the three controllers is loaded with the same software image, so that there
are three copies of the control program running in parallel. External computers,
such as the HMI operator stations, acquire data from only the designated controller.
The designated controller is determined by a simple algorithm.
A separate protection module provides for very reliable trip operation. The VPRO
is an independent TMR subsystem complete with its own controllers and integral
power supplies. Separate independent sensor inputs and voted trip relay outputs are
used
2-22 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Redundant
Unit Data
Highway Control Cabinet Termination Cabinet
Power
1 Serial <R x > Interface Module Supply
Terminal
V
I I I DC
Boards
Power DC C
V C I I I /
Supply / M U
C
V
D IONET M / / / 21 SLOT / / /
DC
<R> I O O O VME RACK O O O DC
I V S H
H X K Ethernet 1
2
10Base2
<R> Control Module Thin
Coax
Power
1 Serial <S x > Interface Module Supply
V DC
Power DC V U V C I I I I I I
/
Supply / C D IONET M / / / 21 SLOT / / /
DC M C I O O O VME RACK O OO
DC
I V S <S>
H X K H
2 Ethernet 1
10Base2
<S> Control Module
Thin
Coax
Power
1 Serial <T x > Interface Module Supply
V DC
Power DC V U V C I I I I I I
/
Supply / C
M C D IONET M / / / 21 SLOT / / /
DC
DC I O O O VME RACK O O O
I V S <T> H
H X K Ethernet 1
2 10Base2
<T> Control Module Thin
Coax
Input
+125Vdc
Power <R> Internal
Power Protection V V V
Converter <S> Buss Modules P P P
Input to R R R
Input T
Power <T> Power IONET Power O O O
Supplies Interface <R8> <S8><T8> R
Converter Converter
to I
Input other I/O <R> P
Input
Power Cabinet Power <S>
Lineups +125Vdc
Converter Converter <T> Internal Power
(Optional)
Busses to
Input <R8> Power Supplies &
Power <S8> Terminal Boards
Converter <T8>
To
Input Contact Input Excitatn. Terminal
Power Solenoid Power
Cond. Boards
Customer
Customer Supplied Sensor Cables
Power Input(s)
Typical Cabinet Layout of Mark VI TMR System
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-23
TMR Operation
Voting systems require that the input data be voted, and the voted result be available
for use on the next calculation pass. The sequential operations for each pass are
input, vote, calculate, and output. The time interval that is allotted to these operations
is referred to as the frame. The frame is set to a fixed value for a given application so
that the control program operates at a uniform rate.
With each controller using the same software, the mode control software in each
controller is synchronizing with, and responding to, an identical copy of itself that is
operating in each of the other controllers. The three programs acting together are
referred to as the distributed executive and coordinate all operations of the controllers
including the sequential operations mentioned above.
2-24 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Designated Controller
Although three controllers R, S, and T contain identical hardware and software, some
of the functions performed are individually unique. A single designated controller is
automatically chosen to perform the following functions:
UDH Communicator
Controller communications takes place across the Unit Data Highway (UDH). A
UDH communicator is a controller selected to provide the cabinet data to that
network. This data includes both control signals (EGD) and alarms. Each controller
has an independent, physical connection to the UDH. In the event that the UDH
fractures and a controller becomes isolated from its companion controllers, it
assumes the role of UDH communicator for that network fragment. While for one
cabinet there can be only one designated controller, there may be multiple UDH
communicators. The designated controller is always a UDH communicator.
When a controller does not receive expected external EGD data from its UDH
connection, (for example, due to a severed network) it will request that the data be
forwarded across the IONet from another UDH communicator. One or more
communicators may supply the data and the requesting controller uses the last data
set received. Only the EGD data used in sequencing by the controllers is forwarded
in this manner.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-25
Output Processing
The system outputs are the portions of the calculated data that have to be transferred
to the external hardware interfaces and then to the various actuators controlling the
process. Most of the outputs from the TMR system are voted in the output hardware,
but the system can also output individual signals in a simplex manner. Output voting
is performed as close to the final control element as possible.
Normally, outputs from the TMR system are calculated independently by the three
voting controllers and each controller sends the output to its associated I/O hardware
(for example, R controller sends to R I/O). The three independent outputs are then
combined into a single output by a voting mechanism. Different signal types require
different methods of establishing the voted value.
The signal outputs from the three controllers fall into three groups:
x Signals exist in only one I/O channel and are driven as single ended non-
redundant outputs
x Signals exist in all three controllers and are sent as output separately to an
external voting mechanism
x Signals exist in all three controllers but are merged into a signal by the output
hardware
For normal relay outputs, the three signals feed a voting relay driver, which operates
a single relay per signal. For more critical protective signals, the three signals drive
three independent relays with the relay contacts connected in the typical six-contact
voting configuration. The following figure shows two types of output boards.
Relay Output
I/O Board
Channel T
I/O Board KR KS
Channel R Relay KR
Coil
Driver
KS KS KT Relay Output
I/O Board Relay
Coil
Channel S Driver
KT KT KR
Relay
I/O Board Coil
Driver
Channel T
Relay Output Circuits for Protection
2-26 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
For servo outputs as shown in the following figure, the three independent current
signals drive a three-coil servo actuator, which adds them by magnetic flux
summation. Failure of a servo driver is sensed and a deactivating relay contact is
opened.
I/O Boards
Servo Driver Output
Terminal Coils
Channel R
D/A Board on Servo
Valve
Servo Driver
Channel S
D/A
Servo Driver
Channel T
D/A
Hydraulic
Servo
Valve
TMR Circuit to Combine Three Analog Currents into a Single Output
The following figure shows 4-20 mA signals combined through a 2/3 current sharing
circuit that allows the three signals to be voted to one. This unique circuit ensures
that the total output current is the voted value of the three currents. Failure of a 4-20
mA output is sensed and a deactivating relay contact is opened.
I/O Boards
4-20 mA Driver Output Current
Channel R Terminal Feedback
D/A Board
Output
4-20 mA Driver
Load
Channel S
D/A
4-20 mA Driver
Channel T
D/A
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-27
Input Processing
All inputs are available to all three controllers but there are several ways that the
input data is handled. For those input signals that exist in only one I/O module, the
value is used by all three controllers as common input without SIFT-voting as shown
in the following figure. Signals that appear in all three I/O channels may be
application-voted to create a single input value. The triple inputs either may come
from three independent sensors or may be created from a single sensor by hardware
fanning at the terminal board.
A single input can be brought to the three controllers without any voting as shown in
the following figure. This arrangement is used for non-critical, generic I/O, such as
monitoring 4-20 mA inputs, contacts, thermocouples, and RTDs.
A SC R
One sensor can be fanned to three I/O boards for medium-integrity applications as
shown in the following figure. This configuration is used for sensors with medium-
to-high reliability. Three such circuits are needed for three sensors. Typical inputs
are 4-20 mA inputs, contacts, thermocouples, and RTDs.
SC S Voted (A)
S Voter
SC T Voted (A)
T Voter
2-28 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Three independent sensors can be brought into the controllers without voting to
provide the individual sensor values to the application. Median values can be
selected in the controller if required. This configuration, shown in the following
figure, is used for special applications only.
SC A Median (A,B,C)
B B MSB A
S C S B
C
A Median (A,B,C)
SC MSB
C B A
T C T B
C
Three Independent Sensors with Common Input, Not Voted
The following figure shows three sensors, each one fanned and then SIFT-voted.
This arrangement provides a high reliability system for current and contact inputs,
and temperature sensors.
Field Wiring Termin. Bd. I/O Board VCMI IONet VCMI Controller
B SC S Voted "A"
Control
Same S Voter Voted "B"
Block
Voted "C"
SC T Voted "A"
C Control
Same T Voter Voted "B"
Block
Voted "C"
Three Sensors, Each One Fanned and Voted, for Medium to High Reliability Applications
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-29
Speed inputs to high reliability applications are brought in as dedicated inputs and
then SIFT-voted. The following figure shows the configuration. Inputs such as speed
control and overspeed are not fanned so there is a complete separation of inputs with
no hardware cross-coupling which could propagate a failure. RTDs, thermocouples,
contact inputs, and 4-20 mA signals can also be configured this way.
Field Wiring Termin. Bd. I/O Board VCMI IONet VCMI Controller
SC R Voted (A,B,C)
A
R Voter
B SC S Voted (A,B,C)
S Voter
SC T Voted (A,B,C)
C
T Voter
Three Sensors with Dedicated Inputs, Software Voted for High Reliability Applications
State Exchange
Voting all of the calculated values in the TMR system is unnecessary and not
practical. The actual requirement is to vote the state of the controller database
between calculation frames. Calculated values such as timers, counters, and
integrators are dependent on the value from the previous calculation frame. Logic
signals such as bistable relays, momentary logic with seal-in, cross-linked relay
circuits, and feedbacks have a memory retention characteristic. A small section of the
database values is voted each frame.
2-30 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Median Value Analog Voting
The analog signals are converted to floating point format by the I/O interface boards.
The voting operation occurs in each of the three controller modules (R, S, and T).
Each module receives a copy of the data from the other two channels. For each voted
data point, the module has three values including its own. The median value voter
selects the middle value of the three as the voter output. This is the most likely of the
three values to be closest to the true value. In the following figure shows some
examples.
The disagreement detector (see the section, Disagreement Detector) checks the
signal deviations and sets a diagnostic if they exceed a preconfigured limit, thereby
identifying failed input sensors or channels.
The logical data has an auxiliary function called forcing which allows the operator to
force the logical state to be either true or false and have it remain in that state until
unforced. The logical data is packed in the input tables and the state exchange tables
to reduce the bandwidth requirements. The input cycle involves receive, vote,
unpack, and transfer to the controller database. The transfer to the database must
leave the forced values as they are.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-31
Disagreement Detector
A disagreement detector is provided to continuously scan the prevote input data sets
and produce an alarm bit if a disagreement is detected between the three values in a
voted data set. The comparisons are made between the voted value and each of the
three prevote values. The delta for each value is compared with a user programmable
limit value. The limit can be set as required to avoid nuisance alarms but give
indication that one of the prevote values has moved out of normal range. Each
controller is required to compare only its prevote value with the voted value, for
example, R compares only the R prevote value with the voted value.
Failure of one of the three voted input circuits has no effect on the controlled process
since the fault is masked by SIFT. Without a disagreement detector, a failure could
go unnoticed until occurrence of a second failure.
Peer I/O
In addition to the data from the I/O modules, there is a class of data that comes from
other controllers in other cabinets that are connected through a common data
network. For the Mark VI controller the common network is the UDH. For integrated
systems, this common network provides a data path between multiple turbine
controllers and possibly the controls for the generator, the exciter, or the
HRSG/boiler.
Selected signals from the controller database may be mapped into a page of peer
outputs that are broadcast periodically on the UDH to provide external panels a
status update. For the TMR system this action is performed by the UDH
communicator using the data from its internal voted database.
Command Action
Commands sent to the TMR control require special processing to ensure that the
three voting controllers perform the requested action at the same time. Typically, the
commanding device is a PC connected to the UDH and sending messages over a
single network so there is no opportunity to vote the commands in each controller.
Moreover, commands may be sent from one of several redundant computers at the
operator position(s).
By default the HMIs are predisposed to send all commands to the UDH
communicator.
Rate of Response
The control system can run selected control programs at the rate of 100 times per
second, (10 ms frame rate) for simplex systems and 50 times per second (20 ms
frame rate) for TMR systems.
2-32 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Failure Handling
The general operating principle on failures is that corrective or default action takes
place in both directions away from the fault. This means that, in the control hierarchy
extending from the terminal mounts through I/O boards, backplanes, networks and
main CPUs, when a fault occurs, there is a reaction at the I/O processor and also at
the main controller if still operating. When faults are detected, health bits are reset in
a hierarchical fashion. If a signal goes bad, the health bit is set false at the control
module level. If a board goes bad, all signals associated with that board, whether
input or output, have the health bits set false. A similar situation exists for the I/O
rack. In addition, there are preconfigured default failure values defined for all input
and output signals so that normal application code may cope with failures without
excessive healthy bit referencing. Healthy bits in TMR systems are voted if the
corresponding signal is TMR.
Loss of Simplex I/O Board in TMR System - If the failed simplex I/O board is
in a TMR system, the inputs and outputs are handled as described herein if they were
in a simplex system.
Loss of TMR I/O Board in TMR System - If a TMR I/O board fails in a TMR
system, inputs and outputs are handled. TMR SIFT and hardware output voting keep
the process running.
Loss of IONet in Simplex System - If the IONet fails in a simplex system, the
output boards in the I/O racks timeout and set the preconfigured default output
values. The Master VCMI board defaults the inputs so that UDH outputs can be
correctly set.
Loss of IONet in TMR System - If the IONet fails in a simplex system, outputs
follow the same sequence as for a Loss of Control Module in simplex. Inputs follow
the same sequence as for Loss of I/O VCMI in TMR.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-33
Turbine Protection
Turbine overspeed protection is available in three levels, control, primary, and
emergency. Control protection comes through closed loop speed control using the
fuel/steam valves. Primary overspeed protection is provided by the controller. The
TTUR terminal board and VTUR I/O board bring in a shaft speed signal to each
controller where they are median selected. If the controller determines a trip
condition, the controller sends the trip signal to the TRPG terminal board through the
VTUR I/O board. The three VTUR outputs are 2/3 voted in three-relay voting
circuits (one for each trip solenoid) and power is removed from the solenoids. The
following figure shows the primary and emergency levels of protection.
Software
Voting
2-34 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Emergency overspeed protection is provided by the independent triple redundant
VPRO protection system. This uses three shaft speed signals from magnetic pickups,
one for each protection module. These are brought into TPRO, a terminal board
dedicated to the protection system. Either the controllers or the protection system can
independently trip the turbine. Each VPRO independently determines when to trip,
and the signals are passed to the TREG terminal board. TREG operates in a similar
way to TRPG, voting the three trip signals in relay circuits and removing power from
the trip solenoids. This system contains no software voting, making the three VPRO
modules completely independent. The only link between VPRO and the other parts
of the control system is the IONet cable, which transmits status information.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-35
Reliability and Availability
System reliability and availability can be calculated using the component failure
rates. These numbers are important for deciding when to use simplex circuits versus
TMR circuits. TMR systems have the advantage of online repair discussed in the
section, Online Repair for TMR Systems.
Many signals are reduced to a single customer wire at the terminal boards so removal
of the terminal board requires that the wires be disconnected momentarily. Each type
of terminal board must be evaluated for the application and the signal type involved.
Voltages in excess of 50 V are present in some customer wiring. Terminal boards
that have only signals from one controller channel may be replaced at any time if the
faulty signals are being masked by the voter. For other terminal boards such as the
relay outputs, the individual relays may be replaced without disconnecting the
terminal board.
For those singular signals that are driven from only one I/O board, there is no
redundancy or masking. These are typically used for non-critical functions such as
pump drives, where loss of the control output simply causes the pump to run
continuously. Application designers must avoid using such singular signals in critical
circuits. The TMR system is designed such that any of the three controllers may send
outputs to the singular signals, keeping the function operational even if the normal
sending controller fails.
Note Before performing an online repair, power down only the module (rack) that
has the fault. Failure to observe this rule may cause an unexpected shutdown of the
process (each module has its own power disconnect or switch). The modules are
labeled such that the diagnostic messages identify the faulty module.
Repair the faulty modules as soon as possible. Although the TMR system will
survive certain multiple faults without a forced outage, a lurking fault problem may
exist after the first unrepaired failure occurs. Multiple faults within the same module
cause no concern for online repair since all faults will be masked by the other voters.
However, once a second unrelated fault occurs in the same module set, then either of
the faulty modules of the set that is powered down will introduce a dual fault in the
same three signal set which may cause a process shutdown.
2-36 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Reliability
Reliability is represented by the Mean Time Between Forced Outage (MTBFO) of
the control system. The MTBFO is a function of which boards are being used to
control and protect the turbine. The complete system MTBFO depends on the size of
the system, number of simplex boards, and the amount of sensor triplication.
Availability is the percentage of time the system is operating, taking into account the
time to repair a failure. Availability is calculated as follows:
MTBFO x 100%
-----------------------
MTBFO + MTTR
where:
MTTR is the Mean Time To Repair the system failure causing the forced outage.
With a TMR system there can be failures without a forced outage because the system
can be repaired while it continues to run. The MTBFO calculation is complex since
essentially it is calculating the probability of a second (critical) failure in another
channel during the time the first failure is being repaired. The time to repair is an
important input to the calculation.
Note To avoid possible forced outages from powering down the wrong module,
check the diagnostics for identification of the modules which contain the failure.
System reliability has been determined by calculating the Failures In Time (FIT)
(failures per 109 hours) based on the Bellcore TR-332 Reliability Prediction
Procedure for Electronic Equipment. The Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) can
be calculated from the FIT.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 2 System Architecture x 2-37
Third Party Connectivity
The Mark VI can be linked to the plant Distributed Control System (DCS) in three
different ways as follows.
x Modbus link from the HMI Server RS-232C port to the DCS
x A high speed 10 Mbaud Ethernet link using the Modbus over TCP/IP protocol
x A high speed 10 Mbaud Ethernet link using the TCP/IP protocol with an
application layer called GEDS Standard Messages (GSM)
The Mark VI can be operated from the plant control room.
GSM supports turbine control commands, Mark VI data and alarms, the alarm
silence function, logical events, and contact input sequence of events records with 1
ms resolution. The following figure shows the three options. Modbus is widely used
to link to DCSs, but Ethernet GSM has the advantage of speed, distance, and
functionality.
UCVx
Controller
x
To Plant Data
Highway (PDH)
Ethernet Ethernet
UCVE
x
Ethernet
2-38 x Chapter 2 System Architecture GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
CHAPTER 3
Chapter 3 Networks
Network Overview ..................................................................... 3-1
Data Highways ........................................................................... 3-4
IONet.......................................................................................... 3-9
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) ...................................................... 3-12
Modbus Communications........................................................... 3-14
Ethernet Modbus Slave............................................................... 3-15
Serial Modbus Slave................................................................... 3-17
Ethernet GSM............................................................................. 3-22
PROFIBUS Communications..................................................... 3-24
Fiber-Optic Cables...................................................................... 3-27
Time Synchronization ................................................................ 3-32
Introduction
This chapter defines the various communication networks in the control system.
These networks provide communication with the operator interfaces, servers,
controllers, and I/O. It also provides information on fiber-optic cables, including
components and guidelines.
Network Overview
The Mark VI system is based on a hierarchy of networks used to interconnect the
individual nodes. These networks separate the different communication traffic into
layers according to their individual functions. This hierarchy extends from the I/O
and controllers, which provide real-time control of the turbine and its associated
equipment, through the operator interface systems, and up to facility wide
monitoring or distributed control systems (DCS). Each layer uses standard
components and protocols to simplify integration between different platforms and
improve overall reliability and maintenance. The layers are designated as the
Enterprise, Supervisory, Control, and I/O.
Note Ethernet is used for all Mark VI data highways and the I/O network.
Enterprise Layer
The Enterprise layer serves as an interface from specific process control into a
facility wide or group control layer. These higher layers are provided by the
customer. The network technology used in this layer is generally determined by the
customer and may include either Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network
(WAN) technologies, depending on the size of the facility. The Enterprise layer is
generally separated from other control layers through a router, which isolates the
traffic on both sides of the interface. Where unit control equipment is required to
communicate with a facility wide or DCS system, GE uses either a Modbus interface
or a TCP/IP protocol known as GE Standard Messaging (GSM).
This layer may be used as a single or dual network configuration. A dual network
provides redundant Ethernet switches and cables to prevent complete network failure
if a single component fails. The network is known as the Plant Data Highway (PDH).
Router
HMI HMI HMI Field
Viewer Viewer Viewer Support
Supervisory Layer
PLANT DATA H IGHWAY
P LANT DATA H IGHWAY
HMI Servers
Control Layer
U NIT D ATA H IGHWAY
U NIT DATA H IGHWAY
Mark VI
Genius
IONet IONet
Bus
I/O Boards I/O Boards I/O Boards
Printer
Printer
Network Switch A
Network Switch A
Controller Controller
Network Switch B
Network Switch B
Network Switch A
TMR
Fiber-optic cable provides the best signal quality, completely free of electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI). Large point-to-point
distances are possible, and since the cable does not carry electrical charges, ground
potential problems are eliminated.
PDH
PDH
UDH
UDH
UDH
ADH
ADH
ADH
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
CROSSOVER UTP
CROSSOVER UTP
CROSSOVER UTP
220VAC 220VAC 220VAC
UPS UPS UPS
PDH
PDH
UDH
UDH
UDH
ADH
ADH
ADH
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
21
A B A B A A B A B A B A B
NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2
M M M M M
M
SW16
SW13
SW15
220VAC
220VAC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
UPS
UPS
GSM 1 GSM 2
GSM 2
GSM 3 GSM 3
4
GSM 1
A B A B A B A B A B A B
NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2
M M M M M M
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH
UD H
UD H
UPS UPS UPS
UDH
UDH
UDH
ADH
ADH
ADH
ADH
ADH
ADH
TRU NK
TRU NK
TRU NK
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
CROSSOVER UTP
CROSSOVER UTP
CROSSOVER UTP
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH
PDH
U DH
U DH
U DH
U DH
UDH
UDH
ADH
ADH
ADH
AD H
ADH
ADH
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRUNK
TRU NK
TRU NK
A B A B A B A B A B A B
NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2
M M M M M M
SW16
SW13
SW15
220VAC
220VAC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
UPS
UPS
PDH UD H PDH UD H
A B A B A B A B A B A B
NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2 NIC1 NIC2
M M M
M M M
UNIT DATA HIGHWAY (UDH)
CRM1_SVR CRM2_SVR CRM3_SVR
18in. Desktop LCD(dual) 18in. Desktop LCD(dual) 18in. Desktop LCD(dual)
Mouse Mouse Mouse
Note Switches are configured by GE for the control system, pre configured switches
should be purchased from GE. Each switch is configured to accept UDH and PDH.
GE Part # 323A4747NZP31(A,B or C)
Configuration A B C
PDH 1-8 Single VLAN May me 1-18,23-26
used for UDH or PDH
UDH 9-16 None
ADH 17-19 19-21
Uplinks 20-26 22 to Router
Configuration A B
PDH 1-3 Single VLAN May me used for UDH or
UDH 5-7 PDH
ADH None
Uplinks 4,8,9-16
Virtual LAN (VLAN) technology is used in the UDH and PDH infrastructure to
provide separate and redundant network infrastructure using the same hardware. The
multi-VLAN configuration (Configuration A) provides connectivity to both PDH
and UDH networks. Supplying multiple switches at each location provides
redundancy. The switch fabric provides separation of the data. Each uplink between
switches carries each VLANs data encapsulated per IEEE 802.1q. The UDH VLAN
data is given priority over the other VLANs by increasing its 802.1p priority.
Note Each item on the network such as a controller, server, or viewer must have an
IP address. The above addresses are recommended, but if this is a custom
configuration, the requisition takes precedence.
Note Remote I/O can be located up to 185 m (607 ft) from the controller.
Another application is to use the interface module as a remote I/O interface located at
the turbine or generator.
The following figure shows a TMR configuration using remote I/O and a protection
module.
R0 S0 T0 R8 S8 T8
TMR System V
V U V U V U V V
with Remote P
C C C C C C P P
I/O Racks M R
M V M V V R R
I X I X I X O O O
IONet - R
IONet - S
IONet - T
R1 S1 T1 UCVX is Controller,
V V V VCMI is Bus Master,
VPRO is Protection
C I/O C I/O C I/O Module,
M Boards M Boards M Boards I/O are VME boards.
I I I (Terminal Boards not
IONet Supports
Multiple Remote shown)
I/O Racks
The VCMI serves as the Master frame counter for all nodes on the IONet. Frames
are sequentially numbered and all nodes on IONet run in the same frame This
ensures that selected data is being transmitted and operated on correctly.
The VCMI in slot 1 of the control module operates as the IONet Master. As packets
of input data are received from various racks on the IONet, the VCMI collects them
and transfers the data through the VME bus to the I/O table in the controller. After
application code completion, the VCMI transfers output values from the controller
I/O table to the VCMI where the data is then broadcast to all the I/O racks.
I/O Data Collection and Voting, TMR Systems - For a small TMR system, all
the I/O may be in one module (triplicated). In this case the VCMI transfers the input
values from each of the I/O boards through the VME bus to an internal buffer. After
the individual board transfers are complete, the entire block of data is transferred to
the pre-vote table, and also sent as an input packet on the IONet. As the packet is
being sent, corresponding packets from the other two control modules are being
received through the other IONet ports. Each of these packets is then transferred to
the pre-vote table.
After all packets are in the pre-vote table, the voting takes place. Analog data
(floating point) goes through a median selector, while logical data (bit values) goes
through a two-out-of-three majority voter. The results are placed in the voted table.
A selected portion of the controller variables (the states such as counter/timer values
and sequence steps) must be transferred by the Master VCMI boards to the other
Master VCMI boards to be included in the vote process. At completion of the voting
the voted table is transferred through the VME bus to the state table memory in the
controller.
For a larger TMR system with remote I/O racks, the procedure is very similar except
that packets of input values come into the Master VCMI over IONet. After all the
input data is accumulated in the internal buffer, it is placed in the pre-vote table and
also sent to the other control modules over IONet. After all the packets and states are
in the pre-vote table, they are voted, and the results are transferred to the controller.
Output Data Packet - All the output data from a control module VCMI is placed
in packets. These packets are then broadcast on the IONet and received by all
connected interface and control modules. Each interface module VCMI extracts the
required information and distributes to its associated I/O boards.
The exchange contains a configuration signature, which shows the revision number
of the exchange configuration. If the consumer receives data with an unknown
configuration signature then it makes the data unhealthy.
In the case of a transmission interruption, the receiver waits three periods for the
EGD message, after which it times out and the data is considered unhealthy. Data
integrity is preserved by:
These features add a level of Ethernet fault tolerance to the basic protocol.
<R>
EGD
Redundant
path for UDH
<R> IONET
<S>
EGD
<S> IONET
<T>
EGD
Note The Modbus support is available in either the simplex or TMR configurations.
Messages are transmitted and received using the Modbus RTU transmission mode
where data is transmitted in 8-bit bytes. The other Modbus transmission mode where
characters are transmitted in ASCII is not supported. The supported Modbus point
data types are bits, shorts, longs and floats. These points can be scaled and placed
into compatible Mark VI signal types.
x Input coils
x Output coils
x Input registers
x Holding registers
Since the Mark VI has high priority control code operating at a fixed frame rate, it is
necessary to limit the amount of CPU resources that can be taken by the Modbus
interface. To limit the operation time, a limit on the number of commands per second
received by the Mark VI is enforced. The Mark VI control code also can disable all
Modbus commands by setting an internal logical signal.
There are two diagnostic utilities that can be used to diagnose problems with the
Modbus communications on a Mark VI. The first utility prints out the accumulated
Modbus errors from a network and the second prints out a log of the most recent
Modbus messages. This data can be viewed using the toolbox.
The Mark VI controller will respond to Ethernet Modbus commands received from
any of the Ethernet ports supported by its hardware configuration.
Ethernet Ethernet
Modbus Modbus
Mark VI 90-70 PLC
ENET1
ENET1
ENET2
UCVx
VC MI
CPU
I/ O
I/ O
I/ O
ENET2
Simplex
RS-232C
Serial Modbus
Ethernet Modbus
Note The Mark VI controller also supports serial Modbus slave as a standard
interface.
The HMI Server supports serial Modbus as a standard interface. The DCS sends a
request for status information to the HMI, or the message can be a command to the
turbine control. The HMI is always a slave responding to requests from the serial
Modbus Master, and there can only be one Master.
Serial Modbus Features
Serial Modbus Feature Description
Type of Master/slave arrangement with the slave controller following
Communication the Master; full duplex, asynchronous communication
Speed 19,200 baud is standard; 9,600 baud is optional
Media and Distance Using an RS-232C cable without a modem, the distance is
15.24 m (50 ft); using an RS-485 converter it is 1.93 km (1.2
miles).
Mode ASCII Mode - Each 8-bit byte in the message is sent as two
ASCII characters, the hexadecimal representation of the byte.
(Not available from the HMI server.)
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) Mode - Each 8-bit byte in the
message is sent with no translation, which packs the data
more efficiently than the ASCII mode, providing about twice
the throughput at the same baud rate.
Redundancy Supports register map sharing with Ethernet Modbus.
Message Security An optional parity check is done on each byte and a CRC16
check sum is appended to the message in the RTU mode; in
the ASCII mode an LRC is appended to the message instead
of the CRC.
Note This section discusses serial Modbus communication in general terms. Refer
to GEH-6410, Innovation Series Controller System Manual and HMI manuals for
additional information. Refer to GEH-6126, HMI Application Guide and GFK-1180,
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual. For details on
how to configure the graphic screens refer to GFK-1396, CIMPLICITY HMI for
Windows NT and Windows 95 CimEdit Operation Manual.
The binary RTU message mode uses an 8-bit binary character data for messages.
RTU mode defines how information is packed into the message fields by the sender
and decoded by the receiver. Each RTU message is transmitted in a continuous
stream with a 2-byte CRC checksum and contains a slave address. A slave station’s
address is a fixed unique value in the range of 1 to 255.
The Serial Modbus communications system supports 9600 and 19,200 baud, none,
even, or odd parity, and 7 or 8 data bits. Both the Master and slave devices must be
configured with the same baud rate, parity, and data bit count.
Modbus Function Codes
Function Title Message Description
Codes
01 01 Read Holding Coils Read the current status of a group of 1 to 2000
Boolean signals
02 02 Read Input Coils Read the current status of a group of 1 to 2000
Boolean signals
03 03 Read Holding Read the current binary values in 1 to 125
Registers analog signal registers
04 04 Read Input Registers Read the current binary values in 1 to125
analog signal registers
05 05 Force Single Holding Force (or write) a single Boolean signal to a
Coil state of ON or OFF
06 06 Preset Single Preset (or write) a specific binary value into a
Holding Register holding register
07 07 Read Exception Read the first 8 logic coils (coils 1-8) - short
Status message length permits rapid reading of these
values
08 08 Loopback Test Loopback diagnostic to test communication
system
15 15 Force Multiple Coils Force a series of 1 to 800 consecutive Boolean
signals to a specific state
16 16 Preset Multiple Set binary values into a series of 1 to 100
Holding Registers consecutive analog signals
Using this definition, the GE slave Serial Modbus device is DTD because it transmits
serial data on pin 3 (TD) of the 9-pin RS-232C cable. If the master serial Modbus
device is also a DTD, connecting the master and slave devices together requires an
RS-232C null modem cable.
The RS-232C standard specifies 25 signal lines: 20 lines for routine operation, two
lines for modem testing, and three remaining lines unassigned. Nine of the signal
pins are used in a nominal RS-232C communication system. Cable references in this
document will refer to the 9-pin cable definition found in the following table.
Terms describing the various signals used in sending or receiving data are expressed
from the point of view of the DTE. For example the signal, transmit data (TD),
represents the transmission of data coming from the DTD going to the DCE.
Each RS-232C signal uses a single wire. The standard specifies the conventions used
to send sequential data as a sequence of voltage changes signifying the state of each
signal. Depending on the signal group, a negative voltage (less than -3 V) represents
either a binary 1 data bit, a signal mark, or a control off condition, while a positive
voltage (greater that +3 V) represents either a binary zero data bit, a signal space, or
a control on condition. Because of voltage limitations, an RS-232C cable may not be
longer than 15.2 m (50 ft).
The nine RS-232C signals used in the asynchronous communication system can be
broken down into four groups of signals: data, control, timing, ground.
Data Signal wires are used to send and receive serial data. Pin 2 (RD) and pin 3
(TD) are used for transmitting data signals. A positive voltage (> +3 V) on either of
these two pins signifies a logic 0 data bit or space data signal. A negative voltage (< -
3 V) on either of these two pins signifies a logic 1 data bit or mark signal.
Control Signals coordinate and control the flow of data over the RS-232C cable.
Pins 1 (DCD), 4 (DTR), 6 (DSR), 7 (RTS), and 8 (CTS) are used for control signals.
A positive voltage (> +3 V) indicates a control on signal, while a negative voltage (<
-3 V) signifies a control off signal. When a device is configured for hardware
handshaking, these signals are used to control the communications.
Timing Signals are not used in an asynchronous 9-wire cable. These signals,
commonly called clock signals, are used in synchronous communication systems to
synchronize the data rate between transmitting and receiving devices. The logic
signal definitions used for timing are identical to those used for control signals.
UARTs support three serial data transmission modes: simplex (one way only), full
duplex (bi-directional simultaneously), and half duplex (non-simultaneous bi-
directional). GE’s Modbus slave device supports only full duplex data transmission.
Baud rate is the serial data transmission rate of the Modbus device measured in bits
per second. The GE Modbus slave device supports 9,600 and 19,200 baud (default).
Stop bits are used to pad the number of bits that are transmitted for each byte of
serial data. The GE Modbus slave device supports 1 or 2 stop bits. The default is 1
stop bit.
Parity provides a mechanism to error check individual serial 8-bit data bytes. The
GE Modbus slave device supports none, even, and odd parity. The default is none.
Code (byte size) is the number of data bits in each serial character. The GE
Modbus slave device supports 7 and 8-bit data bytes. The default byte size is 8 bits.
Note The HMI server has the turbine data to support GSM messages.
An Ethernet link is available using TCP/IP to transmit data with the local time tags to
the plant level control. The link supports all the alarms, events, and SOEs in the
Mark VI cabinet. GE supplies an application layer protocol called GSM (GEDS
Standard Messages), which supports four classes of application level messages. The
HMI Server is the source of the Ethernet GSM communication.
(DCS)
Ethernet Ethernet
GSM Modbus
Modbus Communication
Event Driven Messages are sent from the HMI to the DCS spontaneously when a
system alarm occurs or clears, a system event occurs or clears, or a contact input
(SOE) closes or opens. Each logic point is transmitted with an individual time tag.
Periodic Data Messages are groups of data points, defined by the DCS and
transmitted with a group time tag. All of the 5,000 data points in the Mark VI are
available for transmission to the DCS at periodic rates down to 1 second. One or
multiple data lists can be defined by the DCS using controller names and point
names.
Common Request Messages are sent from the DCS to the HMI including
turbine control commands and alarm queue commands. Turbine control commands
include momentary logical commands such as raise/lower, start/stop, and analog
setpoint target commands. Alarm queue commands consist of silence (plant alarm
horn) and reset commands as well as alarm dump requests which cause the entire
alarm queue to be transmitted from the Mark VI to the DCS.
At the physical layer, PROFIBUS supports three transmission mediums: RS-485 for
universal applications; IEC 1158-2 for process automation; and optical fibers for
special noise immunity and distance requirements. The Mark VI PROFIBUS
controller provides opto-isolated RS-485 interfaces routed to 9-pin D-sub
connectors. Termination resistors are not included in the interface and must therefore
be provided by external connectors. Various bus speeds ranging from 9.6 kbit/s to 12
Mbit/s are supported, although maximum bus lengths decrease as bus speeds
increase.
Mark VI UCVE controller versions are available providing one to three PROFIBUS-
DP Masters. Each may operate as the single bus Master or may have several Masters
on the same bus. Without repeaters, up to 32 stations (Masters and slaves) may be
configured per bus segment. With repeaters, up to 126 stations may exist on a bus.
Configuration
The properties of all PROFIBUS Master and slave devices are defined in electronic
device data sheets called GSD files (for example, SOFTB203.GSD). PROFIBUS can
be configured with configuration tools such as Softing AG’s PROFI-KON-DP.
These tools enable the configuration of PROFIBUS networks comprised of devices
from different suppliers based on information imported from corresponding GSD
files.
The third party tool is used rather than the toolbox to identify the devices making up
PROFIBUS networks as well as specifying bus parameters and device options (also
called parameters). The toolbox downloads the PROFIBUS configurations to Mark
VI permanent storage along with the normal application code files.
Data transfers initiated by multiple blocks operating during a frame are fully
coherent since data exchange with slave devices takes place at the end of each frame.
Note PROFIBUS diagnostics can be monitored by the toolbox and the Mark VI
application.
The main advantages of fiber-optic transmission in the power plant environment are:
x Fiber segments can be longer than copper because the signal attenuation per foot
is less.
x In high lightning areas, copper cable can pick up currents, which can damage the
communications electronics. Since the glass fiber does not conduct electricity,
the use of fiber-optic segments avoids pickup and reduces lightning-caused
outages.
x Grounding problems are avoided with optical cable. The ground potential can
rise when there is a ground fault on transmission lines, caused by currents
coming back to the generator neutral point, or lightning.
x Optical cable can be routed through a switchyard or other electrically noisy area
and not pick up any interference. This can shorten the required runs and simplify
the installation.
x Fiber optic-cable with proper jacket materials can be run direct buried in trays or
in conduit.
x High quality optical fiber cable is light, tough, and easily pulled. With careful
installation, it can last the life of the plant.
Disadvantages of fiber optics include:
x The cost, especially for short runs, may be more for a fiber-optic link.
x Inexpensive fiber-optic cable can be broken during installation, and is more
prone to mechanical and performance degradation over time. The highest quality
cable avoids these problems.
Components
Basics
Each fiber link consists of two fibers, one outgoing, and the other incoming to form a
duplex channel. A LED drives the outgoing fiber, and the incoming fiber illuminates
a phototransistor, which generates the incoming electrical signal.
Multimode fiber, with a graded index of refraction core and outer cladding, is
recommended for the optical links. The fiber is protected with buffering which is the
equivalent of insulation on metallic wires. Mechanical stress is bad for fibers so a
strong sheath is used, sometimes with pre-tensioned Kevlar fibers to carry the stress
of pulling and vertical runs.
Connectors for a power plant need to be fastened to a reasonably robust cable with
its own buffering. The square connector (SC) type connector is recommended. This
connector is widely used for LANs, and is readily available.
Multimode fibers are rated for use at 850 nm and 1300 nm wavelength. Cable
attenuation is between 3.0 and 3.3 db/km at 850 nm. The core of the fiber is normally
62.5 microns in diameter, with a gradation of index of refraction. The higher index of
refraction is at the center, gradually shifting to a medium index at the circumference.
The higher index slows the light, therefore a light ray entering the fiber at an angle
curves back toward the center, out toward the other side, back toward the center, etc.
This ray travels further but goes faster because it spends most of its time closer to the
circumference where the index is less. The index is graded to keep the delays nearly
equal, thus preserving the shape of the light pulse as it passes through the fiber.
The inner core is protected with a low index of refraction cladding, which for the
recommended cable is 125 microns in diameter. 62.5/125 optical cable is the most
common type of cable and should be used.
Never look directly into a fiber. Although most fiber links use
LEDs that cannot damage the eyes, some longer links use lasers,
which can cause permanent damage to the eyes.
x Gel filled (or loose tube) cables should not be used because of difficulties
making installations, and terminations, and the potential for leakage in vertical
runs.
x Use a high quality break out cable, which makes each fiber a sturdy cable, and
helps prevent too sharp bends.
x Sub-cables are combined with more strength and filler members to build up the
cable to resist mechanical stress and the outside environment
x Two types of cable are recommended, one with armor and one without. Rodent
damage is a major cause of optical cable failure. If this is a problem in the plant,
the armored cable should be used. If not, the armor is not recommended because
it is heavier, has a larger bend radius, is more expensive, attracts lightning
currents, and has lower impact and crush resistance.
x Optical characteristics of the cable can be measured with an optical time domain
reflectometer. Some manufacturers will supply the OTDR printouts as proof of
cable quality. A simpler instrument is used by installer to measure attenuation,
and they should supply this data to demonstrate the installation has a good
power margin.
x Cables described here have four fibers, enough for two fiber-optic links. This
can be used to bring redundant communications to a central control room, or the
extra fibers can be retained as spares for future plant enhancements. Cables with
two fibers are available for indoor use.
Fiber-Optic connections are normally terminated at the 100BaseFX Fiber port of the
Ethernet switch. Occasionally, the Mark VI communication system may require an
Ethernet media converter to convert selected UDH and PDH electrical signals to
fiber-optic signals. The typical media converter makes a two-way conversion of one
or more Ethernet 100BaseTX signals to Ethernet 100Base FX signals.
100Base FX 100BaseTX
Port Port
Connectors
The 100Base FX fiber-optic cables for indoor use in Mark VI have SC type
connectors. The connector, shown in the following figure, is a keyed, snap-in
connector that automatically aligns the center strand of the fiber with the
transmission or reception points of the network device. An integral spring helps to
keep the SC connectors from being crushed together, to avoid damaging the fiber.
The two plugs can be held together as shown, or they can be separate.
Locating
Key
.
Fiber
.
Solid Glass
Center
Snap-in connnectors
SC Connector for Fiber-Optic Cables
System Considerations
Redundancy should be considered for continuing central control room (CCR) access
to the turbine controls. Redundant HMIs, fiber-optic links, Ethernet switches, and
power supplies are recommended.
Installation of the fiber can decrease its performance compared to factory new cable.
Installers may not make the connectors as well as experts can, resulting in more loss
than planned. The LED light source can get dimmer over time, the connections can
get dirty, the cable loss increases with aging, and the receiver can become less
sensitive. For all these reasons there must be a margin between the available power
budget and the link loss budget, of a minimum of 3 dB. Having a 6 dB margin is
more comfortable, helping assure a fiber link that will last the life of the plant.
Installation
Planning is important for a successful installation. This includes the layout for the
required level of redundancy, cable routing distances, proper application of the
distance rules, and procurement of excellent quality switches, UPS systems, and
connectors.
x Install the fiber-optic cable in accordance with all local safety codes.
Polyurethane and PVC are two possible options for cable materials that might
NOT meet the local safety codes.
x Select a cable strong enough for indoor and outdoor applications, including
direct burial.
x Adhere to the manufacturer's recommendations on the minimum bend radius and
maximum pulling force.
x Test the installed fiber to measure the losses. A substantial measured power
margin is the best proof of a high quality installation.
x Use trained people for the installation. If necessary hire outside people with fiber
LAN installation experience.
x The fiber switches and converters need reliable power, and should be placed in a
location that minimizes the amount of movement they must endure, yet keep
them accessible for maintenance.
Fiber-Optic Cable:
Siecor Corporation
PO Box 489
Hickory, NC 28603-0489
Phone: (800)743-2673
Fiber-Optic Connectors:
Local time is used for display of real-time data by adding a local time correction to
UTC. A node’s internal time clock is normally global rather than local. This is done
because global time steadily increases at a constant rate while corrections are
allowed to local time. Historical data is stored with global time to minimize
discontinuities.
Introduction
This chapter describes the codes, standards, and environmental guidelines used for
the design of all printed circuits, modules, cores, panels, and cabinet line-ups in the
control system. Requirements for harsh environments, such as marine applications,
are not covered here.
Safety Standards
EN 61010-1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General
Requirements
CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 1010.1-92 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General
Requirements
ANSI/ISA 82.02.01 1999 Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test,
Measuring, Controlling, and Related Equipment – General
Requirements
IEC 60529 Intrusion Protection Codes/NEMA 1/IP 20
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment x 4-1
Electrical
Printed Circuit Board Assemblies
UL 796 Printed Circuit Boards
ANSI IPC guidelines
ANSI IPC/EIA guidelines
4-2 x Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Supply Voltage
Line Variations
IEEE Std 141-1993 defines the Equipment Terminal Voltage – Utilization voltage.
The above meets IEC 60204-1 1999, and exceeds IEEE Std 141-1993, and ANSI
C84.1-1989.
Dc Supplies – Operating line variations of -30 %, +20 % or 145 V dc. This meets
IEC 60204-1 1999.
Voltage Unbalance
Harmonic Distortion
Voltage: Less than 10% of total rms voltage between live conductors for 2nd
through 5th harmonic
Additional 2% of total rms voltage between live conductors for sum of 6th – 30th
harmonic
Less than 15% of maximum demand load current for harmonics less than 11
Less than 7% of maximum demand load current for harmonics between 11 and 17
Less than 6% of maximum demand load current for harmonics between 17 and 23
Less than 2.5% of maximum demand load current for harmonics between 23 and 35
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment x 4-3
Frequency Variations
Frequency variation of ±5% when operating from ac supplies (20 Hz/sec slew rate)
Surge
This meets IEC 61000-4-5 (ENV50142), and ANSI C62.41 (combination wave).
Clearances
This meets IEC 61010-1:1993/A2: 1995, CSA C22.2 #14, and UL 508C.
Power Loss
100 % Loss of supply - minimum 500 ms before control products require reset (only
applicable to ac powered systems with DACAs; not applicable to dc-only powered
Mark VIs).
4-4 x Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Environment
Storage
If the system is not installed immediately upon receipt, it must be stored properly to
prevent corrosion and deterioration. Since packing cases do not protect the
equipment for outdoor storage, the customer must provide a clean, dry place, free of
temperature variations, high humidity, and dust.
x Place the equipment under adequate cover with the following requirements:
– Keep the equipment clean and dry, protected from precipitation and
flooding.
– Use only breathable (canvas type) covering material – do not use
plastic.
x Unpack the equipment as described, and label it.
– Maintain the following environment in the storage enclosure:
– Recommended ambient storage temperature limits from -40 to 80°C (-
40 to 176 °F).
– Surrounding air free of dust and corrosive elements, such as salt spray
or chemical and electrically conductive contaminants
– Ambient relative humidity from 5 to 95% with provisions to prevent
condensation
– No rodents
– No temperature variations that cause moisture condensation
Condensation occurs with temperature drops of 15°C (27 °F) at 50% humidity over a
4 hour period, and with smaller temperature variations at higher humidity.
If the storage room temperature varies in such a way, install a reliable heating system
that keeps the equipment temperature slightly above that of the ambient air. This can
include space heaters or cabinet space heaters (when supplied) inside each enclosure.
A 100 W lamp can sometimes serve as a substitute source of heat.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment x 4-5
Operating
The Mark VI control components are suited to most industrial environments. To ensure
proper performance and normal operational life, the environment should be
maintained as follows:
Note Higher ambient temperature decreases the life expectancy of any electronic
component.
The preferred location for the Mark VI control system cabinet would be in an
environmentally controlled room or in the control room itself. The cabinet should be
mounted where the floor surface allows for attachment in one plane (a flat, level, and
continuous surface). The customer provides the mounting hardware. Lifting lugs are
provided and if used, the lifting cables must not exceed 45° from the vertical plane.
Finally, the cabinet is equipped with a door handle, which can be locked for
security.
Interconnecting cables can be brought into the cabinet from the top or the bottom
through removable access plates. Convection cooling of the cabinet requires that
conduits be sealed to the access plates. Also, air passing through the conduit must be
within the acceptable temperature range as listed previously. This applies to both top
and bottom access plates.
4-6 x Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Elevation
Equipment elevation is related to the equivalent ambient air pressure.
Note A guideline for system behavior as a function of altitude is that for altitudes
above 1000 m (3300 ft), the maximum ambient rating of the equipment decreases
linearly to a derating of 5°C (41°F) at 3050 m (10000 ft).
Contaminants
Gas
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment x 4-7
Vibration
Seismic
Packaging
The standard Mark VI cabinets meet NEMA 1 requirements (similar to the IP-20
cabinet). Optional cabinets for special applications meet NEMA 12 (IP-54), NEMA
4 (IP-65), and NEMA 4X (IP-68) requirements. Redundant heat exchangers or air
conditioners, when required, can be supplied for the above optional cabinets.
Division 2 is described by NFPA 70 NEC 1999 Article 500 (NFPA - National Fire
Protection Assocation, NEC - National Electrical Code).
The Mark VI boards/board combinations that are listed may be found under file
number E207685 at the UL website and currently include:
x IS200VCMIH1B, H2B
x IS200DTCCH1A, IS200VTCCH1C
x IS200DRTDH1A, IS200VRTDH1C
x IS200DTAIH1A, IS200VAICH1C
x IS200DTAOH1A, IS200VAOCH1B
x IS200DTCIH1A, IS200VCRCH1B
x IS200DRLYH1B
x IS200DTURH1A, IS200VTURH1B
x IS200DTRTH1A
x IS200DSVOH2B, IS200VSVOH1B
x IS200DVIBH1B, IS200VVIBH1C
x IS200DSCBH1A, IS200VSCAH2A
x IS215UCVEH2A, M01A, M03A, M04A, M05A
x IS215UCVDH2A
x IS2020LVPSG1A
4-8 x Chapter 4 Codes, Standards, and Environment GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
CHAPTER 5
Introduction
This chapter defines installation requirements for the Mark VI control system.
Specific topics include GE installation support, wiring practices, grounding, typical
equipment weights and dimensions, power dissipation and heat loss, and
environmental requirements.
Installation Support
GE’s system warranty provisions require both quality installation and that a qualified
service engineer be present at the initial equipment startup. To assist the customer,
GE offers both standard and optional installation support. Standard support consists
of documents that define and detail installation requirements. Optional support is
typically the advisory services that the customer may purchase.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-1
Early Planning
To help ensure a fast and accurate exchange of data, a planning meeting with the
customer is recommended early in the project. This meeting should include the
customer’s project management and construction engineering representatives. It
should accomplish the following:
GE Installation Documents
Installation documents consist of both general and requisition-specific information.
The cycle time and the project size determine the quantity and level of
documentation provided to the customer.
5-2 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Technical Advisory Options
To assist the customer, GE Energy offers the optional technical advisory services of
field engineers for:
Installation
Support
Startup
Begin
Installation
Commissioning
Complete
Installation
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-3
Installation Plan and Support
The cable and conduit schedule should include the signal level definitions in the
instructions. This provides all level restriction and practice information needed
before installing cables.
The conduit and cable schedule should indicate shield terminal practice for each
shielded cable (refer to section, Connecting the System).
5-4 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Equipment Receiving and Handling
Note For information on storing equipment, refer to Chapter 4
GE inspects and packs all equipment before shipping it from the factory. A packing
list, itemizing the contents of each package, is attached to the side of each case.
Upon receipt, carefully examine the contents of each shipment and check them with
the packing list. Immediately report any shortage, damage, or visual indication of
rough handling to the carrier. Then notify both the transportation company and GE
Energy. Be sure to include the serial number, part (model) number, GE requisition
number, and case number when identifying the missing or damaged part.
GE Energy
Post Sales Service
1501 Roanoke Blvd.
Salem, VA 24153-6492
Note "+" indicates the international access code required when calling from outside
of the USA.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-5
Weights and Dimensions
Cabinets
A single Mark VI cabinet is shown below. This can house three controllers used in a
system with all remote I/O. Dimensions, clearance, bolt holes, lifting lugs, and
temperature information is included.
610 mm
(24)
5-6 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
The controller cabinet is for small gas turbine systems (simplex only). It contains
control, I/O, and power supplies, and weighs 620 kg (1,367 lbs) complete.
(2.47) 387.6
(15.26) View of top looking down
62.74 254.0 in direction of arrow "A"
(10.0)
775.97 61.47
69.09 317.25
(30.55)
(2.72) (2.42) (12.49)
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-7
The two-door cabinet shown in the following figure is for small gas turbine systems.
It contains control, I/O, and power supplies, and weighs approximately 720 kg
(1,590 lbs) complete. A 1600 mm wide version of this cabinet is available, and
weighs approximately 912 kg ( 2,010 lbs) complete.
Lift Angles with two 30.2 (1.18) Two Panel Lineup (Two Doors)
holes, should be left in place for
Seismic Zone 4, if removed, fill
bolt holes.
912 kg
Total Weight
(2010lbs)
Cabinet Depth 903.9 mm
(35.59 in)
387.5
(15.26)
387.5
(15.26) 6 holes, 16 mm (0.635 inch)
dia, in base for customers
mounting studs or bolts.
1225.0
62.5 (48.23)
(2.46)
62.5
(2.46)
View of base looking down in direction of arrow "A"
Typical Controller Cabinet
5-8 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
A typical lineup for a complete Mark VI system is shown in the following figure.
These cabinets contain controllers, I/O, and terminal boards, or they can contain just
the remote I/O and terminal boards.
Lift Angles front and back, Three Cabinet Lineup (Five Doors)
should be left in place for
Seismic Zone 4, if removed,
fill bolt holes. Total Weight 1770 kg
(3,900 lbs)
Cabinet Depth 602 mm
(23.7 in)
237.5
(9.35)
237.5
(9.35) 18 holes, 16 mm (0.635 in)
dia, in base for
62.5 customers mounting
1475.0 875.0 1475.0
(2.46) (34.45) (58.07) studs or bolts.
(58.07)
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-9
Control Console (Example)
The turbine control HMI computers can be table-mounted, or installed in the optional
control console shown in the following figure. The console is modular and
expandable from an 1828.8 mm version with two computers. A 5507 mm version
with four computers is shown. The console rests on feet and is not usually bolted to
the floor.
Full Console
5507 mm
(18 '- 0 13/16 ")
Short Console
1828.8 mm
(72 ")
Phone Phone
Printer
Monitor Monitor Monitor Monitor
1181.1mm
Printer Undercounter Keyboards (46.5 ")
Pedestal
5-10 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Power Requirements
The Mark VI control cabinet can accept power from multiple power sources. Each
power input source (such as the dc and two ac sources) should feed through its own
external 30 A two-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker before entering the Mark VI
enclosure. The breaker should be supplied in accordance with required site codes.
For a single control cabinet containing three controllers only (no I/O), the following
table shows the nominal power requirements. This power generates heat inside the
control cabinet. Heat Loss in a typical TMR controller cabinet is 300 W.
The current draw number in the following table is assuming a single voltage source,
if two or three sources are used, they share the load. The actual current draw from
each source cannot be predicted because of differences in the ac/dc converters. For
further details on the cabinet power distribution system, refer to Volume II of this
System Guide.
Power Requirements for Cabinets
Cabinet Voltage Frequency Current Draw
4200 mm 125 V dc 100 to 144 V dc N/A N/A 10.0 A dc (see Note 1)
Cabinet (see Note 5)
120 V ac 108 to 132 V ac 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz 17.3 A rms (see Notes 2 and 4)
(see Note 6)
240 V ac 200 to 264 V ac 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz 8.8 A rms (see Notes 3 and 4)
Controller 125 V dc 100 to 144 V dc N/A N/A 1.7 A dc
Cabinet (see Note 5)
120 V ac 108 to 132 V ac 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz 3.8 A rms
(see Note 6)
240 V ac 200 to 264 V ac 50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz 1.9 A rms
* Notes on table (these are external and do not create cabinet heat load).
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-11
Installation Support Drawings
This section describes GE installation support drawings. These drawings are usually
B-size AutoCAD drawings covering all hardware aspects of the system. A few
sample drawings include:
x System Topology
x Cabinet Layout
x Cabinet Layout
x Circuit Diagram
In addition to the installation drawings, site personnel will need the I/O Assignments
(IO Report).
5-12 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
GPS Plant Data Highway (GE PS)
(ICS)
Plant
SCADA 2 Local
21 Color inkjet Local
21 1 21 Laser printer GT
'' (ICS) Printer (ICS) GT
'' '' '' (ICS) Server
Server
ST Interface (ICS)
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 17 17
21
'' '' '' '' '' '' '' " "
''
g g
g
g g g g g
Centralog
Centralog C1 Gas Turbine Gas Turbine
CVS CVS S1 HRSG1 HRSG2 BOP 1 X1 MarkVI (ICS) Mark VI TMR Mark VI TMR
(ALSTOM)(ALSTOM) MarkVI (ICS) MarkVI (ICS) MarkVI (ICS)MarkVI (ICS) EX2100 Unit #1 Unit #2
Printer Air
Modbus
Aux Boiler
Gas Chromatograph #1 Data Water g g g g
via Gas Reduction Sta PLC Treatment
(ERM)
(400 PTS)
Serial
Gas Chromatograph #2 EX2100 LS2100 EX2100 LS2100
1I5 1J5
Equipment Grounding
Equipment grounding and signal referencing have two distinct purposes:
x Ground each cabinet or cabinet lineup to the equipment ground at the source of
power feeding it.
– See NEC Article 250 for sizing and other requirements for the
equipment grounding conductor.
– For dc circuits only, the NEC allows the equipment grounding
conductor to be run separate from the circuit conductors.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-17
x With certain restrictions, the NEC allows the metallic raceways or cable trays
containing the circuit conductors to serve as the equipment grounding
conductor:
– This use requires that they form a continuous, low-impedance path
capable of conducting anticipated fault current.
– This use requires bonding across loose-fitting joints and discontinuities.
See NEC Article 250 for specific bonding requirements. This chapter
includes recommendations for high frequency bonding methods.
– If metallic raceways or cable trays are not used as the primary
equipment grounding conductor, they should be used as a
supplementary equipment grounding conductor. This enhances the
safety of the installation and improves the performance of the Signal
Reference Structure (see later).
x The equipment grounding connection for the Mark VI cabinets is plated copper
bus or stub bus. This connection is bonded to the cabinet enclosure using bolting
that keeps the conducting path’s resistance at 1 ohm or less.
x There should be a bonding jumper across the ground bus or floor sill between all
shipping splits. The jumper may be a plated metal plate.
x The non-current carrying metal parts of the equipment covered by this section
should be bonded to the metallic support structure or building structure
supporting this equipment. The equipment mounting method may satisfy this
requirement. If supplementary bonding conductors are required, size them the
same as equipment grounding conductors.
The guidelines below are for metal framed buildings. For non-metal framed
buildings, consult the GE factory.
x A buried ground ring should encircle the building. This ring should be
interconnected with the bonding conductor running between the steel reinforcing
bars and the building columns.
x All underground, metal water piping should be bonded to the building system at
the point where the piping crosses the ground ring.
x NEC Article 250 requires that separately derived systems (transformers) be
grounded to the nearest effectively grounded metal building structural member.
x Braze or exothermically weld all electrical joints and connections to the building
structure, where practical. This type of connection keeps the required good
electrical and mechanical properties from deteriorating over time.
5-18 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Signal Reference Structure (SRS)
On modern equipment communicating at high bandwidths, signals are typically
differential and/or isolated electrically or optically. The modern SRS system replaces
the older single-point grounding system with a much more robust system. The SRS
system is also easier to install and maintain.
The goal of the SRS is to hold the electronics at or near case potential to prevent
unwanted signals from disturbing operation. The following conditions must all be
met by an SRS:
x Bonding connections to the SRS must be less than 1/20 wavelength of the
highest frequency to which the equipment is susceptible. This prevents standing
waves. In modern equipment using high-frequency digital electronics,
frequencies as high as 500 MHz should be considered, which translates to about
30 mm (1in).
x SRS must be a good high frequency conductor. (Impedance at high frequencies
consists primarily of distributed inductance and capacitance.) Surface area is
more important than cross-sectional area because of skin effect. Conductivity is
less important (steel with large surface area is better than copper with less
surface area).
x SRS must consist of multiple paths. This lowers the impedance and the
probability of wave reflections and resonance
In general, a good signal referencing system can be obtained with readily available
components in an industrial site. All of the items listed below can be included in an
SRS:
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-19
Connection of the protective earth terminal to the installation ground system must
first comply with code requirements and second provide a low-impedance path for
high-frequency currents, including lightning surge currents. This grounding
conductor must not provide, either intentionally or inadvertently, a path for load
current. The system should be designed such that in so far as is possible the control
system is not an attractive path for induced currents from any source. This is best
accomplished by providing a ground plane that is large and low impedance, so that
the entire system remains at the same potential. A metallic system (grid) will
accomplish this much better than a system that relies upon earth for connection. At
the same time all metallic structures in the system should be effectively bonded both
to the grid and to each other, so that bonding conductors rather than control
equipment become the path of choice for noise currents of all types.
In the Mark VI cabinet, the electronics cabinet is insulated from the chassis and
bonded at one point. The grounding recommendations shown in the following figure.
Call for the equipment grounding conductor to be 120 mm2 (AWG 4/0) gauge wire,
connected to the building ground system. The Functional Earth (FE) is bonded at one
point to the Protective Earth (PE) ground using two 25 mm2 (4 AWG) green/yellow
bonding jumpers.
Functional
Earth
Two 25 mm sq. (4 AWG)
(FE) Green/Yellow insulated
bonding jumpers
Equipment grounding conductor,
Identified 120 mm sq. (4/0 AWG),
insulated wire, short a distance
as possible Protective Conductor Terminal
Protective Earth (PE)
PE
Building Ground
System
Grounding Recommendations for Single Mark VI Cabinet
5-20 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
If acceptable by local codes, the bonding jumpers may be removed and a 4/0 AWG
identified insulated wire run from FE to the nearest accessible point on the building
ground system, or to another ground point as required by the local code. The distance
between the two connections to building ground should be approximately 4.6 m (15
ft), but not less than 3 m (10 ft).
Grounding for a larger system is shown in following figure. Here the FE is still
connected to the control electronics section, but the equipment-grounding conductor
is connected to the center cabinet chassis. Individual control and I/O panels are
connected with bolted plates.
Control
I/O Panel Electronics I/O Panel
Panel
Panel Grounding
Connection Plates
Functional
Earth Two 25 mm sq. 4AWG
(FE) Green/Yellow Bonding
Jumper wires
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-21
Notes on Grounding
Cable spacing - Maintain cable spacing between signal levels in cable drops, as
recommended here.
Conduit sleeves - Where conduit sleeves are used for bottom-entry cables, the
sleeves should be bonded to the floor decking and equipment enclosure with short
bonding jumpers.
Embedded conduits - Bond all embedded conduits to the enclosure with multiple
bonding jumper connections following the shortest possible path.
Galvanized steel sheet floor decking - Floor decking can serve as a high
frequency signal reference plane for equipment located on upper floors. With typical
building construction, there will be a large number of structural connections between
the floor decking and building steel. If this is not the case, then an electrical bonding
connection must be added between the floor decking and building steel. These added
connections need to be as short as possible and of sufficient surface area to be low
impedance at high frequencies.
High frequency bonding jumpers - Jumpers must be short, less than 500 mm
(20 in) and good high frequency conductors. Thin, wide metal strips are best with
length not more than three times width for best performance. Jumpers can be
copper, aluminum, or steel. Steel has the advantage of not creating galvanic half-
cells when bonded to other steel parts.
Jumpers must make good electrical contact with both the enclosure and the signal
reference structure. Welding is best. If a mechanical connection is used, each end
should be fastened with two bolts or screws with star washers backed up by large
diameter flat washers.
Each enclosure must have two bonding jumpers of short, random lengths. Random
lengths are used so that parallel bonding paths are of different quarter wavelength
multiples. Do not fold bonding jumpers or make sharp bends.
Metallic cable tray - System must be installed per NEC Article 318 with signal
level spacing per the next section. This serve as a signal reference structure between
remotely connected pieces of equipment. The large surface area of cable trays
provides a low impedance path at high frequencies.
Metal framing channel - Metal framing channel cable support systems also serves
as part of the signal reference structure. Make certain that channels are well bonded
to the equipment enclosure, cable tray, and each other, with large surface area
connections to provide low impedance at high frequencies.
5-22 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Noise-sensitive cables - Try to run noise-sensitive cables tight against a vertical
support to allow this support to serve as a reference plane. Cables that are extremely
susceptible to noise should be run in a metallic conduit, preferably ferrous. Keep
these cables tight against the inside walls of the metallic enclosure, and well away
from higher-level cables.
Power cables - Keep single-conductor power cables from the same circuit tightly
bundled together to minimize interference with nearby signal cables. Keep 3-phase
ac cables in a tight triangular configuration.
Woven wire mesh - Woven wire mesh can serve as a high frequency signal
reference grid for enclosures located on floors not accessible from below. Each
adjoining section of mesh must be welded together at intervals not exceeding 500
mm (20 in) to create a continuous reference grid. The woven wire mesh must be
bonded at frequent intervals to building structural members along the floor
perimeter.
Where it is not possible to connect conduit directly to tray (such as with large
conduit banks), conduit must be terminated with bonding bushings and bonded to
tray with short bonding jumpers.
Signal and power levels - See section, Cable Separation and Routing for
guidelines.
Solid-bottom tray - Use steel solid bottom cable trays with steel covers for low-
level signals most susceptible to noise.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-23
Level P
Level L
Solid
Bottom
Tray
5-24 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Cable Separation and Routing
This section provides recommended cabling practices to reduce electrical noise.
These include signal/power level separation and cable routing guidelines.
Note Electrical noise from cabling of various voltage levels can interfere with
microprocessor-based control systems, causing a malfunction. If a situation at the
installation site is not covered in this document, or if these guidelines cannot be met,
please contact GE before installing the cable.
x All analog and digital signals including LVDTs, Servos, RTDs, Analog Inputs
and Outputs, and Pyrometer signals
x Thermocouples are in a special category (Level LS) because they generate
millivolt signals with very low current.
x Network communication bus signals: Ethernet, IONet, UDH, PDH, RS-232C,
and RS-422
x Phone circuits
Note Signal input to analog and digital blocks or to programmable logic control
(PLC)-related devices should be run as shielded twisted-pair (for example, input
from RTDs).
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-25
Medium-Level Signals (Level M)
x Analog signals less than 50 V dc with less than 28 V ac ripple and less than 0.6
A current
x 28 V dc light and switching circuits
x 24 V dc switching circuits
x Analog pulse rate circuits
Note Level M and level L signals may be run together only inside the control
cabinet.
x Contact inputs
x Relay outputs
x Solenoid outputs
x PT and CT circuits
Note Flame detector (GM) type signals, 335 V dc, and Ultraviolet detectors are a
special category (Level HS). Special low capacitance twisted shielded pair wiring is
required.
Power (Level P)
5-26 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Class Codes
Certain conditions can require that specific wires within a level be grouped in the
same cable. This is indicated by class codes, defined as follows:
S Special handling of specified levels can require special spacing of conduit and
trays. Check dimension chart for levels. These wires include:
It is good practice to mark the cableway cables, conduit, and trays in a way that
clearly identifies their signal/power levels. This helps ensure correct level separation
for proper installation. It can also be useful during equipment maintenance.
Cables can be marked by any means that makes the level easy to recognize (for
example, coding or numbering). Conduit and trays should be marked at junction
points or at periodic intervals.
General Practices
The following general practices should be used for all levels of cabling:
x All cables of like signal levels and power levels must be grouped together in like
cableways.
x In general, different levels must run in separate cableways, as defined in the
different classes. Intermixing cannot be allowed, except as noted by exception.
x Interconnecting wire runs should carry a level designation.
x If wires are the same level and same type signal, group those wires from one
cabinet to any one specific location together in multiconductor cables.
x When unlike signals must cross in trays or conduit, cross them in 90° angles at
maximum spacing. Where it is not possible to maintain spacing, place a
grounded steel barrier between unlike levels at the crossover point.
x When entering terminal equipment where it is difficult to maintain the specific
spacing guidelines shown in the following tables, keep parallel runs to a
minimum, not to exceed 1.5 m (5 ft) in the overall run.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-27
x Where the tables show tray or conduit spacing as 0, the levels can be run
together. Spacing for other levels must be based on the worst condition.
x Trays for all levels should be galvanized steel and solidly grounded with good
ground continuity. Conduit should be metal to provide shielding.
The following general practices should be used for specific levels of cabling:
x When separate trays are impractical, levels L and M can combined in a common
tray if a grounded steel barrier separates levels. This practice is not as effective
as tray separation, and may require some rerouting at system startup. If levels L
and M are run side-by-side, a 50 mm (2-inch) minimum spacing is
recommended.
x Locate levels L and M trays and conduit closest to the control panels.
x Trays containing level L and level M wiring should have solid galvanized steel
bottoms and sides and be covered to provide complete shielding. There must be
positive and continuous cover contact to side rails to avoid high-reluctance air
gaps, which impair shielding.
x Trays containing levels other than L and M wiring can have ventilation slots or
louvers.
x Trays and conduit containing levels L, M, and H(S) should not be routed parallel
to high power equipment enclosures of 100 kV and larger at a spacing of less
than 1.5 m (5 ft) for trays, and 750 mm (2-1/2 ft) for conduit.
x Level H and H(S) can be combined in the same tray or conduit but cannot be
combined in the same cable.
x Level H(S) is listed only for information since many customers want to isolate
unfused high voltage potential wires.
x Do not run levels H and H(S) in the same conduit as level P.
x Where practical for level P and/or P(S) wiring, route the complete power circuit
between equipment in the same tray or conduit. This minimizes the possibility
of power and control circuits encircling each other.
The following tables show the recommended distances between metal trays and
metal conduit carrying cables with various signal levels, and the cable-to cable
distance for non-metal conduit and trays.
5-28 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Table 1. Spacing Between Metal Cable Trays, inches(mm)
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-29
Cable Routing Guidelines
Pullboxes and Junction Boxes
Keep signal/power levels separate inside pullboxes and junction boxes. Use
grounded steel barriers to maintain level spacing. Tray-to-conduit transition spacing
and separation are a potential source of noise. Be sure to cross unlike levels at right
angles and maintain required separation. Protect transition areas per the level spacing
recommendations.
Transitional Areas
When entering or leaving conduit or trays, make sure that cables of unlike levels do
not intermix. If the installation needs parallel runs over 1.5 m (5 ft), grounded steel
barriers may be needed for proper level separation.
Reducing electrical noise on retrofits requires careful planning. Lower and higher
levels should never encircle each other or run parallel for long distances. It is
practical to use existing conduit or trays as long as the level spacing can be
maintained for the full length of the run. Existing cables are generally of high voltage
potential and noise producing. Therefore, route levels L and M in a path apart from
existing cables when possible. Use barriers in existing pullboxes and junction boxes
for level L wiring to minimize noise potential. Do not loop level L signals around
high control or level P conduit or trays.
Care should be taken to plan level spacing on both embedded and exposed conduit in
and around machinery. Runs containing mixed levels should be minimized to 1.5 m
(5 ft) or less in the overall run. Conduit running through and attached to machinery
housing should follow level spacing recommendations. This should be discussed
with the contractor early in the project.
Trunnions entering floor mounted operator station cabinets should be kept as short as
possible when used as cableways. This helps minimize parallel runs of unlike levels
to a maximum of 1.5 m (5 ft) before entering the equipment. Where different
signal/power levels are running together for short distances, each level should be
connected by cord ties, barriers, or some logical method. This prevents intermixing.
RF Interference
To prevent radio frequency (RF) interference, take care when routing power cables
in the vicinity of radio-controlled devices (for example, cranes) and audio/visual
systems (public address and closed-circuit television).
Suppression
5-30 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Cable Specifications
Wire Sizes
The recommended current carrying capacity for flexible wires up to 1,000 V, PVC
insulated, based on DIN VDE 0298 Part 4, is shown in following table. Cross section
references of mm2 versus AWG are based on EN 60204 Part 1, VDE 0113 Part 1.
NFPA 70 (NEC) may require larger wire sizes based on the type of wire used.
Current Cross Section Wire Size Circular
Amp Area (mm2) AWG No. mils
15 0.75
0.82 18
19 1
1.31 16
24 1.5
2.08 14
32 2.5
3.31 12
42 4
5.26 10
54 6
8.36 8
73 10
13.3 6
98 16
21.15 4
129 25
33.6 2
158 35 69,073
42.4 1
198 50 92,756
53.5 1/0
67.4 2/0
245 70 138,146
85 3/00
292 95 187,484
107 4/00
344 120 236,823
391 150 296,000
448 185 365,102
528 240 473,646
608 300 592,057
726 400 789,410
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-31
General Specifications
x Maximum length (unless specified) 300 m (1000 ft)
x Individual minimum stated wire size is for electrical needs
x Clamp-type terminals accept two 14 AWG wires or one 12 AWG wire
x Mark VI terminal blocks accept two 12 AWG wires
x PTs and CTs use 10 AWG stranded wire
Wire
Insulator
Note The specifications listed are for sensitive computer-based controls. Cabling
for less sensitive controls should be considered on an individual basis.
5-32 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Multi-conductor Shielded Cable, Rated 300 V
x 18 AWG minimum, stranded conductors individually insulated per cable with
minimum 85% to 100% coverage shield
x Protective insulating cover for shield
x Wire rating: 300 V minimum
x Mutual capacitance between conductors with shield grounded: 394 pF/m (120
pF/ft) maximum
x Capacitance between one conductor and all other conductors and grounded
shield: 213 pF/m (65 pF/ft)
RS-232C Communications
x Modbus communication from the HMI: for short distances use RS-232C cable;
for distances over 15 m (50 feet) add a modem
x Modbus communication from the controller COM2 port: for use on small
systems, RS-232C cable with Micro-D adapter cable (GE catalog No.
336A4929G1). For longer distances over 15 m (50 feet), add a modem.
Note For more information on Modbus and wiring, refer to Chapter 3, Networks.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-33
Instrument Cable, 4 – 20 mA
x With Tefzel® insulation and jacket: Belden catalog no. 85231 or equivalent
x With plastic jacket: Belden catalog no. 9316 or equivalent
Note Belden refers to the Belden Wire & Cable Company, a subsidiary of Belden,
Inc.
5-34 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Connecting the System
The panels come complete with the internal cabling. This cabling will probably
never need to be replaced. I/O cables between the control modules and interface
modules and the I/O racks are run in plastic racks behind the mounting plates as
shown in the following figure.
Power cables from the Power Distribution Module to the control modules, interface
modules, and terminal boards are secured by plastic cable cleats located behind the
riser brackets. Most of this cabling is covered by the mounting brackets and plates.
Plate
Mounting Panel
Lexan Tray for
I/O Cables
I/O Cable
3/4 inch Cable
Cleat for Power
Cables
Riser
Bracket
Insulating Plate
Cable Trays and Mounting Brackets for Terminal Boards
The upper diagram in the following figure shows routing of the I/O
cables and power cables in a typical 1600 mm cabinet line-up.
Dotted outlines show where terminal boards and I/O modules will
be mounted on top. These cables are not visible from the front.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-35
Tray I/O Powr
PDM
T Main
125 V dc
Supply
IM
R
IM
S
IM
T
5-36 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
I/O Wiring
I/O connections are made to terminal blocks on the Mark VI terminal boards. The
various terminal boards and types of I/O devices used are described in Volume II of
the system guide. Shielding connections to the shield bar located to the left of the
terminal board is shown in the following figure below.
Shield
Terminal
Block
Shield
Terminal
Board
Shield
Cable
I/O Wiring Shielding Connections to Ground Bar at Terminal Board
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-37
The grounded shield bars provide an equipotential ground plane to which all cable
shield drain wires should be connected, with as short a pigtail as practical. The
length should not exceed 5 cm (2 in) to reduce the high-frequency impedance of the
shield ground. Reducing the length of the pigtail should take precedence over
reducing the length of exposed wire within the cabinet. Pigtails should not be
connected except at the grounding bars provided, to avoid loops and maintain a
radial grounding system. Shields should be insulated up to the pigtail. In most cases
shields should not be connected at the far end of the cable, to avoid circulating
power-frequency currents induced by pickup.
A small capacitor may be used to ground the far end of the shield, producing a
hybrid ground system, and may improve noise immunity. Shields must continue
across junction boxes between the control and the turbine, and should match up with
the signal they are shielding. Avoid hard grounding the shield at the junction boxes,
but small capacitors to ground at junction boxes may improve immunity.
x Made from a polyester resin material with 130°C (266 °F) rating
x Terminal rating is 300 V, 10 A, UL class C general industry, 0.375 in (9.525
mm) creepage, 0.250 in (6.35 mm) strike
x UL and CSA code approved
x Screws finished in zinc clear chromate and contacts in tin
x Each block screw is number labeled 1 through 24 or 25 through 48 in white
x Recommended screw tightening torque is 8 in lbs.
Power System
The 125 V dc supply must be installed and maintained such that it meets
requirements of IEC 61010-1 cl. 6.3.1 to be considered Not Hazardous Live. The
BJS berg jumper must be installed in the PDM to provide the monitored ground
reference for the 125 V dc. If there are multiple PDMs connected to the dc mains,
only one has the Berg jumper installed. If the dc mains are connected to a 125 V dc
supply (battery) it must be floated, that is isolated from ground.
Note The DS200TCPD board in the PDM must provide the single, monitored,
ground reference point for the 125 V dc system. Refer to section, Wiring and Circuit
Checks.
Installing Ethernet
The Mark VI modules communicate over several different Ethernet LANs (refer to
Chapter 3 Networks). IONet uses Ethernet 10Base2 cable. The data highways use a
number of 10BaseT segments, and some 10Base2 segments and fiber-optic
segments. These guidelines comply with IEEE 802.3 standards for Ethernet. For
details on installing individual Ethernet LAN components, refer to the instructions
supplied by the manufacturer of that equipment.
5-38 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Installing Ethernet 10Base2 Coax Cable for IONet
x The maximum length of a 10Base2 coax cable segment is 185 m (610 ft)
x Both ends of each segment should be terminated with a 50 : resistor
x All connectors and terminators must be isolated from ground to prevent ground
loops (grounding of shield controlled by Mark VI boards)
x The maximum length of cable is 925 m (3035 ft) using the IEEE 5-4-3 rule
x Maximum length of a transceiver and repeater cable: 50 m (164 ft)
x Minimum distance between transceivers: 2.5 m (8.2 ft)
x Maximum device connections (taps) per segment: 100, including repeater taps
x In systems with repeaters, transceivers should have the SQE test (heartbeat)
switch disabled
Preventing Reflections
Short segments should have no breaks with 50 : terminations on both ends. This
produces minimal reflections from cable impedance discontinuities.
A coaxial barrel connector is used to join smaller segments. However, the joint
between the two segments makes a signal reflection point. This is caused by
impedance discontinuity from the batch-to-batch impedance tolerance of the
manufactured cable. If cables are built from smaller sections, all sections should
either come from the same manufacturer and lot, or with one of the IEEE
recommended standard segment lengths.
These standard sections can be used to build a cable segment up to 500 m (1640 ft)
long. To prevent excessive reflections, the segment should be an odd multiple of
23.4 m (76.75 ft) lengths. For example:
These lengths are odd integral multiples of a half wavelength in the cable at 5 MHz.
Any mix of these cable sections (only) can be used.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-39
Ethernet Cable Component Descriptions
Component Description Part Number
10Base2 Connector Connector for Ethernet 10Base2 trunk BNC coax connector with gold-plated
ThinWire coax cable pin, MilesTek catalog no. 10-02001-
233
BNC F-Adapter, MilesTek catalog no.
10-02918
BNC Goal Post Adapter, MilesTek
catalog no. 10-02914
10Base2 Terminator BNC terminator for Ethernet trunk coax MilesTek catalog no. 10-02406-009
cable, 50 :
10Base2 Connection Quick crimp tool kit for crimping MilesTek catalog no. 40-50156/GE
Tools connectors on Ethernet trunk 10Base2
coax cable, including strip tool, flush
cutter, and case.
5-40 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Startup Checks
All Mark VI control panels are pre-cabled and factory-tested before shipment.
However, final checks should be made after installation and before starting the
equipment.
Inspect the control panel components for any damage, which might have occurred
during shipping. Check for loose cables or wires, connections or loose components
such as relays or retainer clips. Report any damage that may have occurred during
shipping to GE Product Service.
Board Inspections
Perform the following to inspect the printed circuit boards, jumpers, and wiring:
x Inspect the boards in each module checking for loose or damaged components.
x Verify the Berg jumpers on each I/O board are set correctly for the slot number
in the VME rack (see the following figure). If the boards do not have Berg
jumpers, then the VCMI identifies all the I/O boards during startup by
communication over the VME backplane. At this point do not replug the I/O
boards. This will be done after the rack power supply check.
x Check the EMI spring-gasket shield on the right hand side of the board front
(see the following figure). If the installed boards do not have EMI emissions
shielding, and a board with a shield gasket is present, remove this gasket by
sliding it out vertically. Failure to do this could result in a damaged board.
Board ID
Berg
1 2 4 8 16
Jumpers
Jumper Binary Values
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-41
VME I/O Board
EMI spring gasket to reduce EMI/RFI
Gasket emissions. Use only with adjacent
removal EMI-shielded I/O boards.
1 2
RO-SMP
5-42 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Ethernet ID Plug Jumper Positions
Conn. Connector Pins Pins Pins Pins Pins Pins Pins Pins Notes
P/N Label 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
10 R0-SMP X X X X X X
11 R1 X X X X X
12 R2 X X X X X
13 R3 X X X X
14 R4 X X X X X
15 R5 X X X X
16 R6 X X X X
17 R7 X X X
18 R8 X X X X X
19 R9 X X X X
20 R10 X X X X
21 R11 X X X
22 R12 X X X X
23 R13 X X X
Future
28 R0-DPX X X X X X X
29 R0-TPX X X X X X
30 R0-TMR X X X X X X X
Future
40 S0-SMP X X X X X X
41 S1 X X X X X
42 S2 X X X X X
43 S3 X X X X
44 S4 X X X X X
45 S5 Future
46 S6 Future
47 S7 Future
48 S8 X X X X X
Future
60 S0-TMR X X X X X X X
Future
70 T0-SMP X X X X X
71 T1 X X X X
72 T2 X X X X
73 T3 X X X
74 T4 X X X X
75 T5 Future
76 T6 Future
77 T7 Future
78 T8 X X X X
Future
90 T0-TMR X X X X X X
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-43
Wiring and Circuit Checks
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock or
burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained and
thoroughly familiar with the equipment and the instructions
should install, operate, or maintain this equipment.
The following steps should be completed to check the cabinet wiring and circuits.
1 Check that all incoming power wiring agrees with the supplied elementary
drawings.
2 Make sure that the incoming power wiring conforms to approved wiring
practices as described previously in this chapter.
3 Check that all electrical terminal connections are tight.
4 Make sure that no wiring has been damaged or frayed during installation.
Replace if necessary.
5 Check that incoming power (125 V dc, 115 V ac, 230 V ac) is the correct
voltage and frequency, and that it is clean and free of noise. Make sure the ac to
dc converters, if used, are set to the correct voltage (115 or 230 V ac) by
selecting the JTX1 or JTX2 jumper positions on the front of the converter.
6 If the installation includes more than one PDM on an interconnected 125 V dc
system, the BJS jumper must be installed in one and only one PDM. This
arrangement is required because the parallel connection of more than one ground
reference circuit will reduce the impedance to the point where the 125 V dc no
longer meets the Not Hazardous Live requirement.
5-44 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Startup and Configuration
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric
shock or burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained
and thoroughly familiar with the equipment and the
instructions should install, operate, or maintain this
equipment.
Assuming all the above checks are complete, use the following steps to apply power,
load the application code, and startup the Mark VI system.
Note It is recommended that the initial rack energization be done with all the I/O
boards removed to check the power supply in an unloaded condition.
1 Unlock the I/O boards and slide them part way out of the racks.
2 Apply power to the PDM and to the first VME I/O rack power supply.
3 Check the voltages at the test points located at the lower left side of the VME
rack. These are shown in the following following figure.
4 If the rack voltages check out, switch off the power supply, and carefully replace
the boards in that rack.
5 Reapply power. All the I/O boards should flash green within five minutes
displaying normal operation in the RUN condition.
6 Repeat steps 1-5 for all the racks.
Bottom of VME
Rack Backplane
P5 P15 N15
VME Rack Power
DCOM1 ACOM P28AA
Supply Test Points
P28BB
P28CC
P28DD
P28EE
PCOM
N28
DCOM
SCOM
ETHERNET ID
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-45
Topology and Application Code Download
Network topology defines the location of the control and interface modules (racks)
on the IONet network, and is stored in the VCMI.
Note If you have a new controller, before application code can be downloaded, the
TCP/IP address must be loaded. Refer to GEH-6403 Control System Toolbox for a
Mark VI Controller for details.
1 From the toolbox Outline View, select the first VCMI (R0), and right click on it.
2 From the shortcut menu, select Download. The network topology configuration
downloads to the Master VCMI in the first controller rack and now knows the
location of the Interface Modules (R0, R1, R2, ...).
3 Repeat for all the Master VCMIs in the controller racks S, and T.
4 Cycle power to reboot all three controllers. The controllers reboot and initialize
their VCMIs. The VCMIs expect to see the configured number of racks on
IONet. If an Ethernet ID plug does not identify a rack, then communication with
that rack is not possible. Similarly if a VCMI is not responding, then
communication with that rack is not possible. The VCMI will work even if there
are no I/O boards in its rack.
5 Following the above procedure, download the network topology to the slave
VCMI in the I/O racks (R1, R2, R3 ...). The VCMI now knows what I/O boards
are in its rack. Download to each rack in turn, or all racks at once.
6 Cycle power to reboot all racks.
7 Download the I/O configuration to all the I/O boards, one at a time or all at
once. With all racks running you are now ready to check the I/O.
5-46 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Online Download
When there are minor changes to the application code, the new code can be
downloaded online using the toolbox. The advantage of online downloading is that
it does not require restarting the controller (as in an offline download); the
controllers continue to operate during and after the online download. The code is
downloaded both to memory and storage.
Download Prerequisites
x Code Compatibility – Verify that the new code is compatible with the existing
code and TMR interface to prevent inadvertent trips after the new code has been
downloaded.
x Review TMR Test – Each time new code is downloaded, the TMR system must
be tested online to verify that the new code is compatible, operates the system
properly, and maintains TMR capability. Before beginning, review the records
from the last TMR test from the previous download.
1 Refer to the section, Download Prerequisites and verify that these requirements
have been met, prior to an online download.
2 From the toolbox, select the Device menu and select Download, Application
Code
or
Click the Download Application Code button. The Download Application Code
dialog box displays. The Download to Memory option and Download to
Storage option are already checked by default indicating that the application code
will be downloaded to memory and storage.
3 Click OK.
4 Perform the TMR Test from the procedures in the section, Post-Download TMR
Test.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-47
Offline Download
When there are major changes to the application code, the new code must be
downloaded offline using the toolbox. An offline download consists of making a
build image of the code, downloading the code, restarting the controller, and testing
the TMR. The code is downloaded to storage.
1 Refer to the section, Download Prerequisites and verify that these requirements
have been met, prior to an offline download.
2 From the toolbox, select the Device menu and select Download, Application
Code
or
Click the Download Application Code button. The Download Application Code
dialog box displays. The Download to Memory option and Download to
Storage option are already checked by default indicating that the application code
will be downloaded to memory and storage.
3 Click OK.
4 Perform the TMR Test from the procedures in the section, Post-Download TMR
Test.
1 Power down one controller/protective module at a time from the PDM. For R0,
S0, T0, R8, S8, T8, and optional R7, S7, and T7 processors, power down one at
a time in random order.
2 Wait 10 seconds, then power back up.
3 Wait for the processor to go back online.
4 Check for alarm messages.
5 Verify that there are no messages requesting a trip condition. Clear all alarm
messages.
6 Once the system returns online, wait five minutes before powering down the
next processor.
5-48 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Controller Offline While System Online
Problem: After multiple online code downloads in the absence of TMR testing on
previous downloads, including those with EGD page differences, one controller may
remain offline while the other two controllers are online.
Corrective Action:
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration x 5-49
Notes
5-50 x Chapter 5 Installation and Configuration GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
CHAPTER 6
Introduction
This chapter summarizes the tools used for configuring, loading, and operating the
Mark VI system. These include the Control System Toolbox (toolbox),
CIMPLICITY HMI operator interface, and the Turbine Historian.
Toolbox
The toolbox is Windows®-based software for configuring and maintaining the Mark
VI control system. The software usually runs on an engineering workstation or a
CIMPLICITY HMI located on the Plant Data Highway. For details refer to GEH-
6403, Control System Toolbox for a Mark VI Controller.
IONet communicates with all the control and interface racks. This network topology
is configured using the toolbox. Similarly, the toolbox configures all the I/O boards
in the racks and the I/O points in the boards. the following figure displays the
toolbox screen used to select the racks.
The Outline View on the left side of the screen is used to select the racks required for
the system. This view displays all the racks inserted under Mark VI I/O. In the
example, three TMR Rack 0s are included under the heading Rack 0 Channel R/S/T
(TMR).
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface x 6-1
Click on the TMR rack in the Outline View (Rack 0 The Summary View displays a
in this example) to view all the channels at the graphic of each rack and all the
same time in the Summary View. boards they contain.
6-2 x Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Configuring the Application
The turbine control application is configured in the toolbox using graphically
connected control blocks, which display in the Summary View. These blocks consist
of basic analog and discrete functions and a library of special turbine control blocks.
The Standard Block library contains over 60 different control blocks designed for
discrete and continuous control applications. Blocks provide a simple graphical way
for the engineer to configure the control system. The turbine block library contains
more than 150 additional blocks relating to turbine control applications.
The control system is configured in the toolbox work area, displayed in the following
figure The Outline View on the left side of the screen displays the control device.
The Summary View on the right side of the screen displays the graphical
configuration of the selected item. Block inputs and outputs are connected with
signals to form the control configuration. These connections are created by dragging
and dropping a signal from a block output to another block input. The connected
blocks form macros, and at a higher level, the blocks and macros form tasks covering
major sections of the complete control.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface x 6-3
CIMPLICITY HMI
The CIMPLICITY Human-Machine Interface (HMI) is the main operator interface to
the Mark VI turbine control system. HMI is a computer with a Windows operating
system and CIMPLICITY graphics display system, communicating with the
controllers over Ethernet.
For details refer to GEH-6126, HMI Application Guide. Also refer to GFK-1180,
CIMPLICITY HMI for Windows NT and Windows 95 User's Manual. For details on
how to configure the graphic screens refer to GFK-1396 CIMPLICITY HMI for
Windows NT and Windows 95 CimEdit Operation Manual.
Basic Description
The Mark VI HMI consists of three distinct elements:
HMI server is the hub of the system, channeling data between the UDH and the
PDH, and providing data support and system management. The server also provides
device communication for both internal and external data interchanges.
System database establishes signal management and definition for the control
system, provides a single repository for system alarm messages and definitions, and
contains signal relationships and correlation between the controllers and I/O. The
database is used for system configuration, but not required for running the system.
HMI viewer provides the visual functions, and is the client of the server. It contains
the operator interface software, which allows the operator or maintenance personnel
to view screen graphics, data values, alarms, and trends, as well as issue commands,
edit control coefficient values, and obtain system logs and reports.
Depending on the size of the system, these three elements can be combined into a
single computer, or distributed in multiple units. The modular nature of the HMI
allows units to be expanded incrementally as system needs change. A typical Viewer
screen using graphics and real-time turbine data is displayed in the following figure.
In the graphic display, special displays can be obtained using the buttons in the
column on the right side. Also note the setpoint button for numeric entry and the
raise/lower arrows for opening and closing valves.
6-4 x Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Alarm Detail
display selection
Shaft Vibration
display selection
Setpoint Entry
selection
Alarm Summary
window
Interactive Operator Display for Steam Turbine & Generator
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface x 6-5
Product Features
The HMI contains a number of product features important for power plant control:
x Dynamic graphics
x Alarm displays
x Process variable trending
x Point control display for changing setpoints
x Database logger
x HMI access security
x Data Distribution Equipment (DDE) application interface
The graphic system performs key HMI functions and provides the operator with real
time process visualization and control using the following:
CimEdit is an object-oriented program that creates and maintains the user graphic
screen displays. Editing and animation tools, with the familiar Windows
environment, provide an intuitive, easy to use interface. Features include:
Alarm Viewer provides alarm management functions such as sorting and filtering
by priority, by unit, by time, or by source device. Also supported are configurable
alarm field displays, and embedding dynamically updated objects into CimView
screens.
The point control cabinet provides a listing of points in the system with real-
time values and alarm status. Operators can view and change local and remote set
points using the up/down arrows or by direct numeric entry. Alarms can be enabled
and disabled, and alarm limits modified by authorized personnel.
The basic control engine allows users to define control actions in response to
system events. A single event can invoke multiple actions, or one action can be
invoked by many events. The program editor uses a Visual Basic for Applications
compliant programming language.
6-6 x Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Optional features include the Web Gateway that allows operators to access HMI data
from anywhere in the world over the Internet. Third party interfaces allow the HMI
to exchange data with distributed control systems (DCS), programmable logic
controllers, I/O devices, and other computers.
The COI can be installed in many different configurations, depending on the product
line and specific requisition requirements. For example, it can be installed in the
cabinet door for Mark VI applications or in a control room desk for Excitation
Control System applications. The only cabling requirements are for power and for
the Ethernet connection to the UDH. Network communication is via the integrated
auto-sensing 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection. Expansion possibilities for the
computer are limited, although it does support connection of external devices
through FDD, IDE, and USB connections.
The COI can be directly connected to the Mark VI or Excitation Control System, or
it can be connected through an EGD Ethernet switch. A redundant topology is
available when the controller is ordered with a second Ethernet port.
Interface Features
Numeric data displays are driven by EGD (Ethernet Global Data) pages transmitted
by the controller. The refresh rate depends both on the rate at which the controller
transmits the pages, and the rate at which the COI refreshes the fields. Both are set at
configuration time in the toolbox.
The COI uses a touch screen, and no keyboard or mouse is provided. The color of
pushbuttons are feedbacks and represent state conditions. To change the state or
condition, press the button. The color of the button changes if the command is
accepted and the change implemented by the controller.
Numeric inputs on the COI touch screen are made by touching a numeric field that
supports input. A numeric keypad then displays and the desired number can be
entered.
An Alarm Window is provided and an alarm is selected by touching it. Then Ack,
Silence, Lock, or Unlock the alarm by pressing the corresponding button. Multiple
alarms can be selected by dragging through the alarm list. Pressing the button then
applies to all selected alarms.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface x 6-7
Turbine Historian
The Turbine Historian is a data archival system based on client-server technology,
which provides data collection, storage, and display of power island and auxiliary
process data. Depending on the requirements, the product can be configured for just
turbine-related data, or for broader applications that include balance of plant process
data.
The Turbine Historian combines high-resolution digital event data from the turbine
controller with process analog data to create a sophisticated tool for investigating
cause-effect relationships. It provides a menu of predefined database query forms for
typical analysis relating to the turbine operations. Flexible tools enable the operator
to quickly generate custom trends and reports from the archived process data.
System Configuration
The Turbine Historian provides historical data archiving and retrieval functions.
When required, the system architecture provides time synchronization to ensure time
coherent data.
The Turbine Historian accesses turbine controller data via the UDH as shown in the
figure below. Additional Turbine Historian data acquisition is performed through
Modbus and/or Ethernet-based interfaces. Data from third-party devices such as
Bently Nevada monitors, or non-GE PLCs is usually obtained via Modbus, while
Ethernet is the preferred communication channel for GE/Fanuc PLC products.
The HMI and other operator interface devices communicate to the Turbine Historian
through the PDH. Network technology provided by the Windows operating system
allows interaction from network computers, including query and view capabilities,
using the Turbine Historian Client Tool Set. The interface options include the ability
to export data into spreadsheet applications.
6-8 x Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
System Capability
The Turbine Historian provides an online historical database for collecting and
storing data from the control system. Packages of 1,000, 5,000 or 10,000 point tags
may be configured and collected from as many as eight turbine controls.
A typical turbine control application uses less than 1,000 points of time tagged
analog and discrete data per unit. The length of time that the data is stored on disk,
before offline archiving is required, depends upon collection rate, dead-band
configuration, process rate of change, and the disk size.
Data Flow
The Turbine Historian has three main functions: data collection, storage, and
retrieval. Data collection is over the UDH and Modbus. Data is stored in the
Exception database for sequence of events (SOE), events, and alarms, and in the
archives for analog values. Retrieval is through a web browser or standard trend
screens.
Process
Turbine Control
Data Archives
Exception
Dictionary (Analog
Database Values)
(SOE)
Server Side
Client Side
Trend DataLink
Web Browser
Generation
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface x 6-9
Turbine Historian Tools
A selection of tools, screens, and reports are available to ensure that the operator can
make efficient use of the collected data as follows:
x Alarm and Event Report is a tabular display of the alarms, events, and SOE
for all Mark VI units connected to the Turbine Historian. This report presents
the following information on a point’s status: time of pickup (or dropout), unit
name, status, processor drop number, and descriptive text. This is a valuable tool
to aid in the analysis of the system, especially after an upset.
x Historical Cross Plot references the chronological data of two signal points,
plotted one against another, for example temperature against revolutions per
minute (RPM). This function permits visual contrasting and correlation of
operational data.
x Event Scanner function uses logic point information (start, trip, shutdown, or
user-defined) stored in the historical database to search and identify specific
situations in the unit control.
x Event/Trigger Query Results shows the user’s inputs and a tabular display
of resulting event triggers. The data in the Time column represents the time tag
of the specified Event Trigger.
x Process Data (Trends) is the graphical interface for the Turbine Historian
and can trend any analog or digital point. It is fully configurable and can auto-
range the scales or set fixed indexes. For accurate read out, the trend cursor
displays the exact value of all points trended at a given point in time. The
Turbine Historian can be set up to mimic strip chart recorders, analyze the
performance of particular parameters over time, or help troubleshoot root causes
of a turbine upset. The trend in the following figure is an example of a turbine
startup.
6-10 x Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Data Collection Details
Mark VI uses two methods to collect data. The first process uses EGD pages defined
in the SDB. The Turbine Historian uses this collection method for periodic storage of
control data. It also receives exception messages from the Mark VI controller for
alarm and event state changes. When a state change occurs, it is sent to the Turbine
Historian. Contact inputs or SOE changes are scanned, sent to the Turbine Historian
and stored in the Exception database with the alarms and event state changes. These
points are time-tagged by the Mark VI.
Time synchronization and time coherency are extremely important when the operator
or maintenance technician is trying to analyze and determine the root cause of a
problem. To provide this, the data is time-tagged at the controller that offers system
time-sync functions as an option to ensure that total integrated system data remain
time-coherent.
Data points configured for collection in the archives are sampled once per second
from EGD. Analog data that exceeds an exception dead-band and digital data that
changes state are sent to the archives. The Turbine Historian uses the swinging door
compression method that filters on the slope of the value to determine when to save a
value. This allows the Turbine Historian to keep orders of magnitude more data
online than in conventional scanned systems.
The web browser interface provides access to the Alarm & Event Report, the Cross-
Plot, the Event Scanner, and several Turbine Historian status displays. Configurable
trend displays are the graphical interface to the history stored in the archives. They
provide historical and real time trending of process data.
The PI DataLink (optional) is used to extract data from the archives into
spreadsheets, such as Excel for report generation and analysis.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface x 6-11
Notes
6-12 x Chapter 6 Tools and System Interface GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
CHAPTER 7
Introduction
This chapter discusses board maintenance and component replacement, alarm
handling, and troubleshooting in the Mark VI system. The configuration of process
alarms and events is described, and also the creation and handling of diagnostic
alarms caused by control system equipment failures.
Maintenance
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock or
burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained and thoroughly
familiar with the equipment and the instructions should install,
operate, or maintain this equipment.
Note Return the failed board to GE for repair. Do not attempt to repair it on site.
After long service in a very dirty environment it may be necessary to clean the
boards. If there is a dust build up it is advisable to vacuum around the rack and the
front of the boards before removing them. Remove the boards from the cabinet
before cleaning them. Dust can be removed with a low-pressure air jet. If there is
dirt, which cannot be removed with the air jet, it should be cleaned off using
deionized water. Shake off and allow the board to air-dry before re-applying power.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting x 7-1
Component Replacement
This equipment contains a potential hazard of electric shock or
burn. Only personnel who are adequately trained and thoroughly
familiar with the equipment and the instructions should install,
operate, or maintain this equipment.
Replacing a Controller
¾ To replace and reload the UCVx
1 If a controller has failed, the rack should be powered down, and all cables
disconnected from the controller board front.
2 Remove the controller and replace it with a spare controller.
3 Pull the VCMI out of the rack far enough to disconnect it from the backplane.
4 Connect the serial loader cable between the computer and COM1 of the
controller.
a. If the controller is a UCVB or UCVD, use the serial loader to download the
flash file system to the controller
b. If the controller is a UCVE or later, use the compact flash programmer to
download the flash file system. (The programmer is included in the service
kit)
5 Use the serial loader to configure the controller with its TCP/IP address.
6 Reconnect the Ethernet cable to the controller and power up the rack.
7 Use the toolbox to download runtime to the controller.
8 Use the toolbox to download application code, to permanent storage only, in the
controller.
9 Power down the rack.
10 Re-insert the VCMI into the backplane.
11 Power up the rack.
7-2 x Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Replacing a VCMI
¾ To replace and reload the VCMI
1 If a VCMI or VPRO has failed, the rack should be powered down, and the IONet
connector unplugged from the board front, leaving the network still running
through the T-fitting.
2 Remove the VCMI and replace it with a spare VCMI that has a clear flash disk
memory, then power up the rack.
3 From the toolbox Outline View, under item Mark VI I/O, locate the failed rack.
Locate the VCMI, which is usually under the simplex rack, and right-click the
VCMI.
4 From the shortcut menu, click Download. The topology downloads into the new
board.
5 Cycle power to the rack to establish communication with the controller.
For a successful download, the flash disk memory in the replacement VCMI should
be clear, because an old topology stored in flash can sometimes cause problems. If
the flash memory needs to be cleared, contact GE.
1 Power down the rack and remove the failed I/O board.
2 Replace the board with a spare board of the same type, first checking that the
jumper positions match the slot number (the same as the old board).
3 Power up the rack.
4 From the toolbox Outline View, under item Mark VI I/O, locate the failed rack.
Find the slot number of the failed board and right-click the board.
5 From the shortcut menu, click Download. The board configuration downloads.
6 Cycle power to the rack to establish communication with the controller.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting x 7-3
Replacing a Terminal Board
The terminal boards do not contain software requiring reload, but some have power
supplied to them.
1 Disconnect any power cables coming into the terminal board, and unplug the I/O
cables (J-plugs).
2 Loosen the two screws on the wiring terminal blocks and remove the blocks,
leaving the field wiring attached.
3 Remove the terminal board and replace it with a spare board, checking that any
jumpers are set correctly (the same as the old board).
4 Screw the terminal blocks back in place and plug in the J-plugs and the power
cables.
7-4 x Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Cable Replacement
The I/O cables or power cables are supported in plastic brackets behind the back
base. Since these brackets are not continuous, it is not recommended that the
replacement cable be pulled through behind the back bases.
1 Power down the interface module and disconnect the failed cable from the
module. Leave the cable in place.
2 Disconnect the failed cable from the terminal board.
3 Connect the replacement cable to the terminal board, and lay the new cable in
the field-wiring trough at the side of the I/O terminal boards. Use space at the
top and bottom of the cabinet to run the cable across the cabinet to the interface
module.
4 Connect the cable to the interface module and power up the module. Secure the
cable in place with tie wraps.
The power cables (125 V dc) are held in cable cleats behind the mounting panels. If a
power cable needs to be replaced, it is recommended it be run across the top or
bottom of the back base and down the side of the I/O wiring trough to the module
power supply.
Note Additional cables that may be required for system expansion can be installed
in this same way.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting x 7-5
Alarms Overview
Three types of alarms are generated by the Mark VI system, as follows:
Process alarms are caused by machinery and process problems and alert the
operator by means of messages on the HMI screen. The alarms are created in the
controller using alarm bits generated in the I/O boards or in sequencing. The user
configures the desired analog alarm settings in sequencing using the toolbox. As well
as generating operator alarms, the alarm bits in the controller can be used as
interlocks in the application program.
Hold list alarms are similar to process alarms with the additional feature that the
scanner drives a specified signal True whenever any hold list signal is in the alarm
state (hold present). This signal is used to disable automatic turbine startup logic at
various stages in the sequencing. Operators may override a hold list signal so that the
sequencing can proceed even if the hold condition has not cleared.
Diagnostic alarms are caused by Mark VI equipment problems and use settings
factory-programmed in the boards. Diagnostic alarms identify the failed module to
help the service engineer quickly repair the system. For details of the failure, the
operator can request a display on the toolbox screen.
Alarm Diagnostic
HMI HMI Toolbox
Display Display
UDH
Diagnostic
I/O I/O I/O
Alarm Bits
7-6 x Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Process Alarms
Process Alarms are generated by the transition of Boolean signals configured by the
toolbox with the alarm attribute. The signals may be driven by sequencing or they
may be tied to input points to map values directly from I/O boards. Process alarm
signals are scanned each frame after the sequencing is run. In TMR systems process
signals are voted and the resulting composite signal is present in each controller.
Two system limits are available for each process input, including thermocouple,
RTD, current, voltage, and pulse rate inputs. System limit 1 can be the high or low
alarm setting, and system limit 2 can be a second high or low alarm setting. These
limits are configured from the toolbox in engineering units.
There are several choices when configuring system limits. Limits can be configured
as enabled or disabled, latched or unlatched, and greater than or less than the preset
value. System out of limits can be reset with the RESET_SYS signal.
Operator commands from the HMI, such as alarm Acknowledge, Reset, Lock, and
Unlock, are sent back over the UDH to the alarm queue where they change the status
of the appropriate alarms. An alarm entry is removed from the controller queue when
its state has returned to normal and it has been acknowledged by an operator. Refer
to the following figure.
Hold alarms are managed in the same fashion but are stored on a separate queue.
Additionally, hold alarms cannot be locked but may be overridden.
Note The operator or the controller can take action based on process alarms.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting x 7-7
Mark VI Controller UDH Mark VI HMI
Input Signal 1
. . Alarm
Report
Alarm
Receiver
Alarm
Viewer
Alarm
. . Scanner
. . Alarm
Command
Alarm Queue
Input Signal n Operator Commands
Alarm
Queue - Ack
Alarm Logic including - Reset
variable Time - Lock
- Unlock
Alarm ID - Override for hold lists
To configure the alarm scanner on the controller, refer to GEH-6403 Control System
Toolbox for Mark VI Controller. To configure the controller to send alarms to all
HMIs, use the UDH broadcast address in the alarm IP address area.
7-8 x Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Diagnostic Alarms
The controller and I/O boards all generate diagnostic alarms, including the VCMI,
which generates diagnostics for the power subsystem. Alarm bits are created in the
I/O board by hardware limit-checking. Raw input-checking takes place at the frame
rate, and resulting alarms are queued.
x Each type of I/O board has hardware limit-checking based on preset (non-
configurable) high and low levels set near the ends of the operating range. If this
limit is exceeded a logic signal is set and some types of input are removed from
the scan.
x In TMR systems, a limit alarm associated with TMR Diff Limt is created if any
of the three inputs differ from the voted value by more than a preset amount.
This limit value is configured by the user and creates a voting alarm indicating a
problem exists with a specific input.
x If any one of the diagnostic alarms is set, it creates a board composite diagnostic
alarm, L3DIAG_xxxx, where xxxx is the board name. This signal can be used to
trigger a process alarm. Each board has three L3DIAG_ signals,
L3DIAG_xxxx1, 2, and 3. Simplex boards only use L3DIAG_xxxx1. TMR
boards use all three with the first assigned to the board in <R>, the second
assigned to the same board in <S>, and the third assigned to the same board in
<T>.
x The diagnostic signals can be individually latched, and then reset with the
RESET_DIA signal, typically in the form of a message from the HMI.
x Generally diagnostic alarms require two consecutive occurrences before being
set True (process alarms only require one occurrence).
In addition to inputs, each board has its own diagnostics. The VCMI and I/O boards
have a processor stall timer which generates a signal SYSFAIL. This signal lights the
red LED on the front cabinet. The watchdog timers are set as follows:
The three LEDs at the top of the front cabinet provide status information. The normal
RUN condition is a flashing green and FAIL is a solid red. The third LED is
normally off but shows a steady orange if a diagnostic alarm condition exists in the
board.
The controller has extensive self-diagnostics, most of which are available directly at
the toolbox. In addition, UCVB and UCVD runtime diagnostics, which may occur
during a program download, are displayed on LEDs on the controller front cabinet.
Each terminal board has its own ID device, which is interrogated by the I/O board.
The board ID is coded into a read-only chip containing the terminal board serial
number, board type, revision number, and the J type connector location.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting x 7-9
Voter Disagreement Diagnostics
Each I/O board produces diagnostic alarms when it is configured as TMR and any of
its inputs disagree with the voted value of that input by more than a configured
amount. This feature allows the user to find and fix potential problems that would
otherwise be masked by the redundancy of the control system. The user can view
these diagnostics the same way one views any other diagnostic alarms. The VCMI
triggers these diagnostic alarm when an individual input disagrees with the voted
value for a number of consecutive frames. The diagnostic clears when the
disagreement clears for a number of frames.
The user configures voter disagreement diagnostics for each signal. Boolean signals
are all enabled or disabled by setting the DiagVoteEnab signal to enable under the
configuration section for each input. Analog signals are configured using the
TMR_DiffLimit signal under configuration for each point. This difference limit is
defined in one of two ways. It is implemented as a fixed engineering unit value for
certain inputs and as a percent of configured span for other signals. For example, if a
point is configured as a 4-20 mA input scaled as 0-40 engineering unit, its
TMR_DiffLimit is defined as a percent of (40-0). The type of limit-checking used is
spelled out in the dialog box for the TMR_DiffLimit signal for each card type and is
summarized in the following table.
Type of TMR Limit-Checking
I/O Processor Type of I/O Delta Method
Board
VAIC % of Configured Span
VGEN Analogs % of Configured Span
PT, CT Engineering Units
VPRO Pulse rates Engineering Units
Thermocouples Engineering Units
Analogs % of Configured Span
PT, CT Engineering Units
VPYR mA % of Configured Span
Gap Engineering Units
VRTD -------- Engineering Units
VSVO Pulse rates Engineering Units
POS Engineering Units
mA % of Configured Span
VTCC -------- Engineering Units
VTURH1/H2 Pulse rates Engineering Units
PT Engineering Units
Flame Engineering Units
Shaft monitor Engineering Units
VVIB Vibration signals Engineering Units
For TMR input configuration, refer to GEH-6403 Control System Toolbox for a
Mark VI Controller. All unused signals will have the voter disagreement checking
disabled to prevent nuisance diagnostics.
7-10 x Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
Totalizers
Totalizers are timers and counters that store critical data such as number of trips,
number of starts, and number of fired hours. The Mark VI provides the special block,
Totalizer, that maintains up to 64 values in a protected section of Non-volatile RAM.
The Totalizer block should be placed in a protected macro to prevent the logic
driving its counters from being modified. Users with sufficient privilege may set and
clear Totalizer counter values from a toolbox dialogue. An unprivileged user cannot
modify the data, either accidentally or intentionally. The standard block library Help
file provides more details on using the Totalizer block.
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting x 7-11
Troubleshooting
To start troubleshooting, be certain the racks have correct power supply voltages;
these can be checked at the test points on the left side on the VME rack.
Refer to Help files as required. From the toolbox, click Help for files on Runtime
Errors and the Block Library. Also, from the Start button, navigate to the Mark VI
controller to see help files on Runtime, I/O networks, Serial Loader, Standard Block
Library, and Turbine Block Library.
First level troubleshooting uses the LEDs on the front of the I/O and VCMI boards.
If more information on the board problems and I/O problems is required, use the
toolbox diagnostic alarm display for details.
During normal operation all the Run LEDs on the board front panels flash green
together. All boards and all racks should flash green in synchronism. If one light is
out of sequence there could be a problem with the synchronizing on that board which
should be investigated. Contact your turbine control representative and have the
firmware revision number for that board available.
An orange Status LED lit on one board indicates there is an I/O or system diagnostic
in queue in that board. This is not an I/O board failure, but may be a sensor problem.
1 From the toolbox Outline View, select Online using the Go on/offline button.
2 Locate the rack in the Summary View and right-click the board. A pop-up menu
displays.
3 From the pop-up menu, select View Diagnostic Alarms. The Diagnostic Alarms
table displays. The following data is displayed in tabular form:
– Time - The time when the diagnostic was generated
– Fault Code - The fault code number
– Status - A 1 indicates an active alarm, and a 0 indicates a cleared, but
not reset (acknowledged), alarm
– Description - A short message describing the diagnostic
7-12 x Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
This diagnostic screen is a snapshot, but not real time. For new data, select the
Update command.
To display all of the real time I/O values in the Summary View, left-click the board
on the screen. The I/O values will display. All the real time I/O values display in the
Summary View. At the top of the list is the L3DIAG board alarm, followed by the
board point system limit values, and with the I/O (sensor) values at the bottom. From
these alarms and I/O values, determine whether the problem is in the terminal board
or in the sensor.
For example, if all the I/O points in a board are bad, the board has failed, a cable is
loose, or the board has not been configured. If only a few I/O points are bad, the I/O
values are bad, or part of the terminal board is burned up.
If a board has a red Fail LED lit, it indicates the board is not operating. Check if it is
loose in its slot and, if so, switch off the rack power supply, push the board in, and
turn on the power again.
If the red light still comes on, power down the rack, remove the board and check the
firmware flash chip. If the board has a socketed flash chip, this chip can be plugged
in the wrong way, which damages it; the following figure shows a typical I/O board
with the chip location. The chamfer on the chip should line up with the chamfer on
the receptacle, as shown. If no flash chip is installed, replace the board with a new
one. Newer boards have a soldered flash chip so no adjustment is possible.
I/O Board
GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting x 7-13
Earlier I/O board versions had a reset button on the front. If your board has this,
check to see if this button is stuck in. If so replace the board with a new one.
It is possible the failure is in the rack slot and not in the board. This can be
determined by board swapping, assuming the turbine is shut down. Remove the same
good board from the same slot in an adjacent TMR rack, and move the bad board to
this good slot. Be sure to power down the racks each time. If the problem follows the
board, replace the board. If it does not, there may be a problem with the VME
backplane. Inspect the board slot for damage; if no damage is visible, the original
board may not have been seated properly. Check the board for proper seating.
If several but not all I/O boards in a rack show red, this is probably caused by a rack
power supply problem.
Controller Failures
If the controller fails, check the VCMI and controller diagnostic queues for failure
information. Power down the controller rack and reboot by bringing power back (do
not use the Reset button). If the controller stays failed after reboot, replace it with a
spare.
If a controller fails to start, this usually indicates a runtime error that is typically a
boot-up or download problem. The runtime error number is usually displayed after
an attempted online download. The controller Runtime Errors Help screen on the
toolbox displays all the runtime errors together with suggested actions.
If the controller or its VCMI fails, then the IONet on this channel stops sending or
receiving data. This drives the outputs on the failed channel to their fail-safe state.
The failure does not affect the other two IONet channels, which keep running.
PDM diagnostic information is collected by the VCMI, including the 125 V dc bus
voltage and the status of the fuses feeding relay output boards. These can be viewed
on the toolbox by right-clicking the VCMI board, and then selecting View
Diagnostic Alarms.
7-14 x Chapter 7 Maintenance, Diagnostic & Troubleshooting GEH-6421H Mark VI Control System Guide Volume I
CHAPTER 8
Chapter 8 Applications
Generator Synchronization ......................................................... 8-1
Overspeed Protection Logic ....................................................... 8-15
Power Load Unbalance............................................................... 8-39
Early Valve Actuation ................................................................ 8-43
Fast Overspeed Trip in VTUR.................................................... 8-45
Compressor Stall Detection ........................................................ 8-48
Ground Fault Detection Sensitivity ............................................ 8-52
Introduction
This chapter describes some of the applications of the Mark VI hardware and
software, including the servo regulators, overspeed protection logic, generator
synchronization, and ground fault detection. This chapter is organized as follows:
Generator Synchronization
This section describes the Mark VI Generator Synchronization system. Its purpose is
to momentarily energize the breaker close coil, at the optimum time and with the
correct amount of time anticipation, so as to close the breaker contact at top center on
the synchroscope. Top center is often known as top dead center. Closure will be
within one degree of top center. It is a requirement that a normally closed breaker
auxiliary contact be used to interrupt the closing coil current.
The synchronizing system consists of three basic functions, each with an output
relay, with all three relays connected in series. All three functions have to be true
(relay picked up) simultaneously before the system applies power to the breaker
close coil. Normally there will be additional external permissive contacts in series
with the Mark VI system, but it is required that they be permissives only, and that the
precise timing of the breaker closure be controlled by the Mark VI system. The three
functions are:
The K25P relay is directly driven from the controller application code. In a TMR
system, it is driven from <R>, <S>, and <T>, using 2/3 logic voting. For a simplex
system, it may be configured by jumper to be driven from <R> only.
The K25 relay is driven from the VTUR auto synch algorithm, which is managed by
the controller application code. In a TMR system, it is driven from <R>, <S>, and
<T>, using 2/3 logic voting. Again for a simplex system, it may be configured by
jumper to be driven from <R> only.
The K25A relay is located on TTUR, but is driven from the VPRO synch check
algorithm, which is managed by the controller application code. The relay is driven
from VPRO, <R8>, <S8>, and <T8>, using 2/3 logic voting in TREG/L/S.
The synch check relay driver (located on TREG/L/S) is connected to the K25A relay
coil (located on TTUR) through cabling through J2 to TRPG/L/S. It then goes
through JR1 (and JS1, JT1) to J4 and VTUR, then J3, JR1 to TTUR.
Both sides of the breaker close coil power bus must be connected to the TTUR
board. This provides diagnostic information and also measures the breaker closure
time, through the normally open breaker auxiliary contact for optimization.
The breaker close circuit is rated to make (close) 10 A at 125 V dc, but to open only
0.6 A. A normally open auxiliary contact on the breaker is required to interrupt the
closing coil current.
J3 JR1 <T>
Generator, Cont'd 2/3 2/3
PT secondary, 17 Fan out
Cont'd
RD RD <S> P125/24 VDC
nomin. 115 Vac, connection JR1 J3 Slip +0.3 hz
(0.25 hz)
(75 to 130 Vac), 18 03
45 to 66 hz. +0.12 hz
(0.1 hz) 01
Phase K25P
JS1 CB_Volts_OK 04
+10 Deg 02
19 to <S> Gen lag Gen lead
Bus, L52G K25
PT secondary, a CB_K25P_PU
nomin. 115 Vac, 05
20 L52G
(75 to 130 Vac), JT1
45 to 66 hz. K25A 06 52G
to <T> Auto Synch CB_K25_PU
07 b
Algorithm
CB_K25A_PU Breaker
Close Coil
08
J4
N125/24 VDC
JR1 TRPG/L/S
JS1
JT1
J2
<T8>
<S8>
<R8> J2
TPRO VPRO TREG/L/S
x Match speeds
x Match voltages
x Energize the synch permissive relay, K25P
x Arm (grant permission to) the synch check function (VPRO, K25A)
x Arm (grant permission to) the auto synch function (VTUR, K25)
The following illustrations represent positive slip (Gen) and negative phase (Gen).
time V_Bus
V_Gen,
Lagging
Generator Synchronizing System
VTUR runs the auto synch algorithm. Its basic function is to monitor two Potential
Transformer (PT) inputs, generator and bus, to calculate phase and slip difference,
and when armed (enabled) from the application code, and when the calculations
anticipate top center, to attempt a breaker closure by energizing relay K25. The
algorithm uses the zero voltage crossing technique to calculate phase, slip, and
acceleration. It compensates for breaker closure time delay (configurable), with self-
adaptive control when enabled, with configurable limits. It is interrupt driven and
must have generator voltage to function. The configuration can manage the timing on
two separate breakers. For details, refer to the figure below.
The algorithm has a bypass function, two signals for redundancy, to provide dead
bus and Manual Breaker Closures. It anticipates top dead center, therefore it uses a
projected window, based on current phase, slip, acceleration, and breaker closure
time. To pickup K25, the generator must be currently lagging, have been lagging for
the last 10 consecutive cycles, and projected (anticipated) to be leading when the
breaker actually reaches closure. Auto synch will not allow the breaker to close with
negative slip. In this fashion, assuming the correct breaker closure time has been
acquired, and the synch check relay is not interfering, breaker closures with less than
1 degree error can be obtained.
Slip is the difference frequency (Hz), positive when the generator is faster than the
bus. Positive phase means the generator is leading the bus, the generator is ahead in
time, or the right hand side on the synchroscope. The standard window is fixed and is
not configurable. However, a special window has been provided for synchronous
condenser applications where a more permissive window is needed. It is selectable
with a signal space Boolean and has a configurable slip parameter.
The algorithm compensates for breaker closure time delay, with a nominal breaker
close time, provided in the configuration in milliseconds. This compensation is
adjusted with self-adaptive control, based upon the measured breaker close time. The
adjustment is made in increments of one cycle (16.6/20 ms) per breaker closure and
is limited in authority to a configurable parameter. If the adjustment reaches the
limit, a diagnostic alarm Breaker #n Slower/Faster Than Limits Allows is posted.
VTUR Config
SystemFreq
CB1CloseTime
CB1AdaptLimt
CB1AdapEnbl Slip +0.3 Hz
CB1FreqDiff (0.25Hz)
L3window
CB1PhaseDiff
- +0.12 Hz
etc. (0.1Hz) Signal Space, inputs
for CB2_Selected +10 Deg Phase Algorithm Outputs
Gen
TTUR CB2 AS_Win_Sel Lag
Gen
Lead
17 GenFreq
Generator, Phase, Slip, Freq, BusFreq
PT secondary 18 Amplitude, Bkr Close GenVoltsDiff
Time, Calculators GenFreqDiff
19 GenPhaseDiff
Bus, CB1CloseTime
PT secondary 20 Gen lagging (10) CB2CloseTime
01
L52G 02 L52G
a Sync_Perm_AS, L83AS
AND
PT Signal Validation
L3window AND
L52G
Ckt_Bkr
Sync_Bypass1
Sync_Bypass0
AND OR L25_Command
Sync_Monitor AND
Sync_Perm
Synch_Reset
CB_Volts_OK Diagn Gen_Sync_LO
CB_K25P_PU
CB_K25_PU
CB_K25A_PU
CB_Volts_OK
CB_K25P_PU
CB_K25_PU
CB_K25A_PU
The synch check algorithm is performed in the VPRO boards. Its basic function is to
monitor two Potential Transformer (PT) inputs, and to calculate generator and bus
voltage amplitudes and frequencies, phase, and slip. When it is armed (enabled) from
the application code, and when the calculations determine that the input variables are
within the requirements, the relay K25A will be energized. The above limits are
configurable. The algorithm uses the phase lock loop technique to derive the above
input variables, and is therefore relatively immune from noise disturbances. For
details, refer to the following figure.
The algorithm has a bypass function to provide dead bus closures. The window in
this algorithm is the current window, not the projected window (as used on the auto
synch function), therefore it does not include anticipation.
The Synch Check will allow the breaker to close with negative slip. Slip is the
difference frequency (Hz), positive when the Generator is faster than the Bus.
Positive phase means the generator is leading the Bus, the Generator is ahead in
time, or the right hand side on the synchroscope. The window is configurable and
both phase and slip are adjustable within predefined limits.
GenVolts
A L3GenVolts
GenVoltage 6.9 A>B
B
BusVolts
A L3BusVolts
BusVoltage A>B AND
6.9 B
GenVoltsDiff
A
VoltageDiff A<B L3window AND
2.8 B
SynCk_Perm L25A_Command
OR
SynCk_Bypass
dead bus TREG/L/S
L3GenVolts AND TRPG/L/S TTUR
VTUR
*Note: L3BusVolts
"ReferFreq" is a configuration parameter, used to K25A
make a selection of the variable that is used to RD
establish the center frequency of the "Phase Lock
Loop". It allows a choise between:
(a): "PR_Std" using speed input , PulseRate1, on a
single shaft application; speed input, PulseRate2,on
all multiple shaft applications.
(b): or "SgSpace", the Generator freq (Hz), from signal
space (application code), "DriveFreq".
Choise (b) is used when (a) is not applicable.
Synchronization Check on VTUR
VPRO configuration of the Synch Check Function is shown in the following table.
The configuration is located under J3: IS200TREX, signal K25A_Fdbk.
VTUR Auto Synch Configuration
VPRO Parameter Description Selection Choice
SynchCheck Enable Used, unused
SystemFreq System Frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
ReferFreq Phase Lock Loop center PR_Std, SgSpace
frequency Where PR_Std means use
PulseRate1 on a single shaft
application - use PulseRate2 on
all multiple shaft applications
SgSpace means use generator
freq (Hz), from signal space
(application code), DriveFreq
TurbRPM Load Turbine rated RPM 0 to 20,000
Used to compensate for driving
gear ratio between the turbine
and the generator
VoltageDiff Allowable voltage 1 to 1,000 Engineering units, kV
difference or percent
FreqDiff Allowable freq difference 0 to 0.5 Hz
PhaseDiff Allowable phase 0 to 30 degrees
difference
GenVoltage Allowable minimum gen 1 to 1,000 Engineering units, kV
voltage or percent
BusVoltage Allowable minimum bus 1 to 1,000 Engineering units, kV
voltage or percent
The VTUR signal space interface for the Auto Synch function is shown in the
following table.
VTUR Auto Synch Signal Space Interface
VTUR Signal Description Comments
Space Output
Sync_Perm_AS Auto Synch permissive Traditionally known as L83AS
Sync_Perm Synch permissive mode, Traditionally known as L25P;
L25P interface to control the K25P relay
Sync_Monitor Auto Synch monitor mode Traditionally known as L83S_MTR;
enables the Auto Synch function,
except it blocks the K25 relays from
picking up
Sync_Bypass1 Auto Synch bypass Traditionally known as
L25_BYPASS; to pickup L25 for
Dead Bus or Manual Synch
Sync_Bypass0 Auto Synch bypass Traditionally known as
L25_BYPASSZ; to pickup L25 for
Dead Bus or Manual Synch
CB2 Selected #2 Breaker is selected Traditionally known as L43SAUTO2;
to use the breaker close time
associated with Breaker #2
AS_WIN_SEL Special Auto Synch New function, used on synchronous
window condenser applications to give a
more permissive window
Synch_Reset Auto Synch reset Traditionally known as
L86MR_TCEA; to reset the synch
Lockout function
VTUR Signal
Space Inputs
Ckt_BKR Breaker State (feedback) Traditionally known as L52B_SEL
CB_Volts_OK Breaker Closing Coil Used in diagnostics
Voltage is present
CB_K25P_PU Breaker Closing Coil Used in diagnostics
Voltage is present
downstream of the K25P
relay contacts
CB_K25_PU Breaker Closing Coil Used in diagnostics
Voltage is present
downstream of the K25
relay contacts
CB_K25A_PU Breaker Closing Coil Used in diagnostics
Voltage is present
downstream of the K25A
relay contacts
Gen_Sync_LO Synch Lock out Traditionally known as L30AS1 or
L30AS2; it is a latched signal
requiring a reset to clear
(Synch_Reset). It detects a K25
relay problem (picked up when it
should be dropped out) or a slow
Synch Check (relay K25A) function
The VPRO signal space interface for the Synch Check function is shown in the
following table.
VPRO Synch Check Signal Space Interface
VPRO Signal Description Comments
Space Outputs
SynCk_Perm Synch Check permissive Traditionally known as L25X_PERM
SynCk_ByPass Synch Check bypass Traditionally known as
L25X_BYPASS; used for dead bus
closure
DriveRef Drive (generator) Traditionally known as TND_PC; used
frequency (Hz) used for only for non-standard drives where
Phase Lock Loop center the center frequency can not be
frequency derived from the pulserate signals
VPRO Signal
Space Inputs
K25A_Fdbk Feedback from K25A
relay
L25A_Cmd The synch check relay Traditionally known as L25X
close command
BusFreq Bus frequency Traditionally known as SFL2, Hz
GenFreq Generator frequency Hz
GenVoltsDiff The difference voltage Traditionally known as DV_ERR,
between the gen and bus engineering units kV or percent
GenFreqDiff The difference frequency Traditionally known as SFDIFF2, Hz
(slip) between the gen
and bus
GenPhaseDiff The difference phase Traditionally known as SSDIFF2,
between the gen and bus degrees
GenPT_Kvolts Generator voltage Traditionally known as DV,
engineering units kV or percent
BusPT_Kvolts Bus voltage Traditionally known as SVL,
engineering units kV or percent
L3BKR_GES – Auto Synch Relay is Slow. This means the K25 (auto synch)
relay has not picked up when it should have, or the K25P is not picked up, or there is
no breaker closing voltage source. It will cause the input signal Gen_Sync_LO to
become TRUE.
Synchronization Trouble – K25 Relay Locked Up. This means the K25 relay
is picked up when it should not be. It will cause the input signal Gen_Sync_LO to
become TRUE.
K25A Relay (synch check) Coil trouble, cabling to P28V on TTUR. This
means the K25A relay is not functional; it could be due to an open circuit between
the TREx and the TTUR terminal boards or to a missing P28 V source on the TTUR
terminal board.
1 Operate the K25P relay by forcing output signal Sync_Perm found under VTUR,
card points. Verify that the K25P relay is functional by probing TTUR screws 3
and 4. The application code has direct control of this relay.
2 Simulate generator voltage on TTUR screws 17 and 18. Operate the K25 relay
by forcing TTUR, card point output signals Sync_Bypass1 =1, and
Sync_Bypass0 = 0. Verify that the K25 relay is functional by probing screws 4
and 5 on TTUR.
3 Simulate generator voltage on TPRO screws 1 and 2. Operate the K25A relay
by forcing TPRO, card point output signals SynCK_Bypass =1, and
SynCk_Perm 1. The bus voltage must be zero (dead bus) for this test to be
functional. Verify that the K25A relay is functional by probing screws 5 and 6
on TTUR.
Synchronization Simulation
¾ To simulate a synchronization
Trip1_En_Cond Trip1_Inhbt, SS
L5Cont1_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT1
L3SS_Comm TDPU
TRIP
L5Cont1_Trip L86MR, SS
Trip2_En_Cond Trip2_Inhbt, SS
L5Cont2_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT2
L3SS_Comm TDPU TRIP
L5Cont2_Trip L86MR, SS
Trip3_En_Cond Trip3_Inhbt, SS
L5Cont3_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT3
L3SS_Comm TDPU
TRIP
L5Cont3_Trip L86MR, SS
Trip4_En_Cond Trip4_Inhibit, SS
L5Cont4_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT4
L3SS_Comm TDPU
TRIP
L5Cont4_Trip L86MR, SS
Trip5_En_Cond Trip5_Inhibit, SS
L5Cont5_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT5
L3SS_Comm TDPU TRIP
L5Cont5_Trip L86MR, SS
Trip6_En_Cond Trip6_Inhibit, SS
L5Cont6_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT6
L3SS_Comm TDPU
TRIP
L5Cont6_Trip L86MR, SS
Trip7_En_Cond Trip7_Inhibit, SS
L5Cont7_Trip, (SS)
CONTACT7
L3SS_Comm TDPU TRIP
L5Cont7_Trip L86MR, SS
OS1_Setpoint , SS
A |A|
RPM A
A-B A OS1_SP_CfgEr
OS_Setpoint, CFG A>B
B 1 RPM System Alarm, if the two
(J5, PulseRate1) RPM B
setpoints don't agree
A
Min
B
OS_Setpoint_PR1
OS_Stpt_PR1
A A
zero
Mult A A+B
0.04
B Min B
OS_Tst_Delta
B
CFG(J5, PulseRate1) RPM
OfflineOS1test, SS
OnlineOS1
PulseRate1, IO
A
OS1
A>=B
OS_Setpoint_PR1
B
OS1_Trip
OS1
Overspeed
Trip
OS1_Trip L86MRX
0 RPM
PulseRate1, IO CFG
A
PR1_Zero
Zero_Speed, A<B
CFG(J5,PulseRate1)
B
+
1 RPM _
A
PR1_Min
A>B
Min_Speed, CFG (J5, PulseRate1)
B
S PR1_Accel
A
(Der) PR1_Dec
A<B
-100 %/sec*
B
A
PR1_Acc
A>B
Acc_Setpoint, CFG (J5,PulseRate1)
B
Dec1_Trip
PR1_DEC
Decel Trip
Dec1_Trip L86MR,SS
PR1_Max_Rst
PR_Max_Rst
PR1_Zero_Old PR1_Zero
PR1_Zero
0.00
PR1_Max_Rst PR1_Max
Max
PulseRate1
PR1_Zero PR1_Zero_Old
OS_Setpoint_PR2
OS_Stpt_PR2
A A
Mult A A+B zero
0.04
B Min B
OS_Tst_Delta
B
CFG(J5, PulseRate2) RPM
OfflineOS2test, SS
OnlineOS2
PulseRate2, IO
A
OS2
A>=B
OS_Setpoint_PR2
B
OS2_Trip
OS2
Overspeed
Trip
OS2_Trip L86MR,SS
A
PR2_Min
A>B
Min_Speed, CFG (J5, PulseRate2)
B
S PR2_Accel
A
(Der) PR2_Dec
A<B
-100 %/sec*
B
A
PR2_Acc
A>B
Acc_Setpoint, CFG (J5,PulseRate2)
B
Dec2_Trip
PR2_DEC
Decel Trip
LP
Dec2_Trip L86MR,SS
PR_Max_Rst PR2_Max_Rst
PR2_Zero_Old PR2_Zero
PR2_Zero
0.00
PR2_Max_Rst Max PR2_Max
PulseRate2
PR2_Zero PR2_Zero_Old
LPShaftLocked L86MR, SS
OS_Stpt_PR3
OS_Setpoint_PR3
A A
Mult A A+B zero
0.04
B Min B
OS_Tst_Delta
B
CFG(J5, PulseRate3) RPM
OfflineOS3tst, SS
OnlineOS3tst, SS
PulseRate3, IO
A
OS3
A>=B
OS_Setpoint_PR3
B
OS3_Trip
OS3
Overspeed
Trip
OS3_Trip L86MRX
A
PR3_Min
A>B
Min_Speed, CFG (J5, PulseRate3)
B
S PR3_Accel
(Der) A
PR3_Dec
A<B
-100 %/sec*
B
A
PR3_Acc
A>B
Acc_Setpoint, CFG (J5,PulseRate3)
B
PR3_DEC Dec3_Trip
Decel Trip
IP
Dec3_Trip L86MR,SS
Enable Acc3_Trip
PR3_ACC PR3_MIN Acc3_TrEnab
Accel Trip
IP
Acc3_Trip L86MR,SS
PR_Max_Rst PR3_Max_Rst
PR3_Zero_Old PR3_Zero
PR3_Zero
0.00
PR3_Max_Rst PR3_Max
Max
PulseRate3
PR3_Zero PR3_Zero_Old
TC1 (SS)
TC_MED(SS
TC2 (SS) )
MED
TC3 (SS)
Zer
o
MA OTSPBias(SS)
X
OTBias,SS
L3SS_Com
m
OTBias_RampP,CF
G
OTBias_RampN,CF
ME
G D A
OTBias_Dflt,CFG A+B
A
B
A-B
B
-
1
Z
TC_ME
D A
Overtemp_Trip,CF L26T
A>=
G A B
A-B B
OTSPBias
B OTSetpoint(SS)
OT_Trip_Enable,CF
G
OT_Trip (SS)
L26T
L86MR,S
OT_Trip
S
RPM_116%
A TA_StptLoss,SS
OS1_TATrpSp,SS RPM A<B Alarm
B OR L30TA
A
A<B
RPM_103.5% B
TA_Spd_SP
RPM_106%
RPM_1%/sec
Rate
TA_Spd_SP TA_Spd_SPX, RPM
Ramp A
Trp_Anticptr
RPM_94% Reset A<B
(Out=In)
B
TrpAntcptTst Hyst
RPM_1%
PulseRate1, IO, RPM
L5Cont3_Trip
L5Cont4_Trip
L5Cont5_Trip
L5Cont6_Trip
L5Cont7_Trip
SmallSteam
ComposTrip1A
OS1_Trip
Composite
Dec1_Trip Trip 1A
L5CFG1_Trip
L5Cont_Trip
Acc1_Trip
Cross_Trip, SS
OT_Trip SteamTurbOnly
L3Z
LMTripZEnabl,
CFG(VPRO)
LPShaftLocked
OS3_Trip LM_3Shaft
Dec3_Trip
L5CFG3_Trip
Acc3_Trip
ComposTrip1 Composite
ComposTrip1A
Trip 1
ComposTrip1B
Dec1_Trip
L5CFG1_Trip
L5Cont_Trip
Acc1_Trip
Cross_Trip, SS
used ETR1
TA_Trip TestETR1 ComposTrip1 L5ESTOP1 Trip Relay,
ETR1_Enab
x x Energize
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE1*
ETR1 SOL1_Vfdbk KE1_Enab Economizing
TDPU Relay,
used Energize to
TA_Trp_Enabl1 Econ,
CFG(VPRO_CRD,CFG) KE1, J3
RelayOutput, CFG( J3,KE1_Vfdbk)
2 sec
used
L5ESTOP1 ETR2
TA_Trip TestETR2 ComposTrip1 Trip Relay,
ETR2_Enab Energize
x x
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE2*
ETR2 SOL2_Vfdbk KE2_Enab Economizing
TDPU Relay,
Energize to
used
TA_Trp_Enabl2 Econ,
CFG(VPRO_CRD,CFG) KE2, J3
RelayOutput, CFG(J3,KE2_Vfdbk)
2 sec
used ETR4
TA_Trip TestETR4 ComposTrip1 L5ESTOP2 Trip Relay,
ETR4_Enab
x x Energize
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE4*
ETR4 SOL4_Vfdbk KE4_Enab Economizing
TDPU Relay,
used Energize to
TA_Trp_Enabl4 Econ,
CFG(VPRO_CRD,CFG) KE1, J4
RelayOutput, CFG( J4,KE4_Vfdbk)
2 sec
used ETR5
ComposTrip1 L5ESTOP2 Trip Relay,
ETR5_Enab Energize
x x
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE5*
ETR5 SOL5_Vfdbk KE5_Enab Economizing
TDPU Relay,
Energize to
used
Econ,
KE2, J4
RelayOutput, CFG(J4,KE5_Vfdbk)
2 sec
used
ComposTrip2 ETR6
ETR6_Enab L5ESTOP2 Trip Relay,
x x Energize
to Run
TRES,TREL*
KE6* Economizing
ETR6 SOL6_Vfdbk KE6_Enab
TDPU Relay,
Energize to
used Econ,
KE3, J4
RelayOutput, CFG(J4,KE6_Vfdbk)
SynCk_Perm, SS GenFreq, SS
Synch Check Function
SynCk_ByPass, SS BusFreq, SS
GenVolts, SS
Slip
BusVolts, SS
GenFreqDiff, SS
DriveFreq Phase GenPhaseDiff, SS
GenVoltsDiff, SS
GenPT_KVolts, IO Synch
Window
BusPT_KVolts, IO L25A_Cmd, IO
K4CL
ComposTrip1 K4CL_Enab OnlineOS1Tst Servo Clamp
Relay, Energize
Used to Clamp, K4CL
RelayOutput,
CFG (J3,K4CL_Fdbk)
K25A
L25A_Cmd K25A_Enab Synch Check Relay
Energize to Close
Used Breaker, K25A
on TTUR via TREG
SynchCheck,
CFG (J3,K25A_Fdbk)
*Note: Each signal appears three times in the CSDB; declared Simplex
Cont1_TrEnab Configuration
Cont2_TrEnab Status
Cont3_TrEnab
Cont4_TrEnab
Cont5_TrEnab
Cont6_TrEnab
Cont7_TrEnab
Acc1_TrEnab
Acc2_TrEnab
Acc3_TrEnab
OT_TrEnab
GT_1Shaft
GT_2Shaft
LM_2Shaft
LM_3Shaft
LargeSteam
MediumSteam
SmallSteam
Stag_GT_1Sh
Stag_GT_2Sh
ETR1_Enab
ETR2_Enab
ETR3_Enab
ETR4_Enab
ETR5_Enab
ETR6_Enab
KE1_Enab
KE2_Enab
KE3_Enab
KE4_Enab
KE5_Enab
KE6_Enab
K4CL_Enab
K25A_Enab
Valve action occurs when the difference between turbine power and generator load is
typically 40% of rated load or greater, the difference has been sustained for at least
10 milliseconds and the load is lost at a rate equivalent to going from 22.5% rated
load to zero in approximately 6 ms (a PLU rate threshold of 37.5 Per Unit
Current/Second).
The 40% PLU level setting is standard. If it becomes necessary to deviate from this
setting for a specific unit, the fact will be noted by the unit-specific documentation.
The PLU unbalance threshold, (PLU_Unbal), may be adjusted from the toolbox.
Turbine mechanical power is derived from a milliamp reheat steam pressure signal.
The mechanical power signal source is configurable as follows:
The PLU signal actuates the CV and IV fast closing solenoids and resets the Load
Reference signal to the no-load value (and performs some auxiliary functions).
The three current signals from the station current transformers are reduced by three
auxiliary transformers on TGEN. These signals are summed in the controller and
compare to the power pressure signal from the reheat pressure sensor. The signals are
qualified (normalized) according to the Current Rating and Press Rating
configuration parameters. This comparison yields a qualified unbalance measure of
the PLU, as shown by signal B in the following figure. The output of the total
generator current is also fed into the current rate amplifier. This comparison provides
a measure of the rate of change of the generator current, signal A. The current rate
level may be adjusted through the PLU rate threshold function (PLU_Rate). This
value must be set at 37.5 (PU/Sec).
pi
-----
1
------------------ - PLU Unbalance
6 CurrentRatg (Cfg) A Out of Limits
TDPU
+ A>B
Note 3
10 ms [B]
B
Reheat Pressure PU Mechanical Power
PLU_Unbal (Cfg)
PLU Unbalanced
PLU_Enab (Cfg)
Threshold (0.4)
PLU Permissive
1
--------------------
PressRatg (Cfg)
PLU IV Event
[C]
PLU_Del_Enab (Cfg)
PLU Delay Enable
PLU CV Event
PLU Current Rate
[D]
Out of Limits
[A] No Delay
AND PLU Event
SET
[B] Delay S Q
PLU Unbalance
Out of Limits SET
S Q TDPU
R CLR
Q
OR R CLR
Q
PLU_Delay (Cfg)
TDPU
16 ms
fixed
A time-delay may be implemented for the PLU function. To initiate the delay, go to
the Enable PLU response delay parameter (PLU_Del_Enab) and select Enable. The
duration of the time-delay can be adjusted by altering the value of the PLU delay
(PLU_Delay) parameter.
These dropout times have been arrived at based on experience, and are used to
reduce the transient load on the hydraulic system.
The IVs and CVs may be operated through test signals from the controller. These
signals are executed individually and are logic ORed with the above signals as
shown in following figure. The IVs may also be driven by the Early Valve Actuation
(EVA) and IV Trigger (IVT) functions. Each solenoid has a unique dropout time
delay, refer to the following table and figure.
Solenoid Drop-Out Point Delay Values
Steam Valve IV1 IV2 IV3 IV4 IV5 IV6 CV1 CV2 CV3 CV4
Dropout 1.35 1.50 1.75 1.35 1.75 1.50 1.10 2.00 3.00 4.00
Delay,
seconds
Relay nn_Tst
Dropout
Delay
2
To TRLY, Control Valve 2
RelayDropTim (Cfg) Solenoid
OR
EVA_test_active
Dropout
Note 3
EVA OR Delay
[G]
3
Note 2 To TRLY, Control Valve 3
RelayDropTim (Cfg)
Solenoid
EVA_Enable (Cfg) OR
*
Control Valve 3 Test
Relay nn_Tst
Dropout
OR Delay
4
To TRLY, Control Valve 4
Notes: (1) Open when PLU_test_active RelayDropTim (Cfg)
Solenoid
(2) Open when EVA_test_active OR
(3) Closed when EVA_Enab (cfg) is enabled
(4) Closed when IVT_Enab (cfg) is enabled *
Control Valve 4 Test
Relay nn_Tst
Duplicate for IV 1 to 6
PLU_test_active
Pickup
Delay
1 * Signal to/from Signal Space
Fixed 15
msec
The peak speed following rejection of 10% or greater rated load cannot be
maintained within limits on some units by the normal speed and servo control action.
Approximately 70% of turbine power is generated in the reheat and low-pressure
turbine sections (the boiler re-heater volume represents a significant acceleration
energy source). Fast closing of the IVs can therefore quickly reduce turbine power
and peak overspeed. The action fulfills the first basic function of normal overspeed
control, limiting peak speed. The Intercept Valve Trigger (IVT) signal is produced in
the controller by the IVT algorithm and associated sequencing, see the previous
figure, EVA Valve Actuation Logic.
The EVA function may be implemented on sites where instability, such as loss of
synchronization, presents a problem. EVA closes the IVs for approximately one
second upon sensing a fault that is not a load rejection. This action reduces the
available mechanical power, thereby inhibiting the loss of synchronization that can
occur as a result of increased machine angle (unbalance between mechanical and
electrical power). If the fault persists, the generator loses synchronization and the
turbine is tripped by the overspeed control or out-of-step relaying.
The EVA is enabled in the toolbox by selecting Enable for the EVA_Enab
parameter. The conditions for EVA action are as follows:
x The difference between mechanical power (reheat pressure) and electrical power
(megawatts) exceeds the configured EVA unbalance threshold (EVA_Unbal)
input value.
x Electrical power (megawatts) decreases at a rate equivalent to (or greater than)
one of three rates configured for EVA megawatt rate threshold (EVA_Rate).
This value is adjustable according to three settings: HIgh, MEdium, and LOw.
These settings correspond to 50, 35, and 20 ms rates respectively.
Note The megawatt signal is derived from voltage and current signals provided by
customer-supplied transformers located on the generator side of the circuit breaker.
The EVA_Unbal value represents the largest fault a particular generator can sustain
without losing synchronization. Although the standard setting for this constant is
70%, it may be adjusted up or down 0 to 2 per unit from the toolbox. All EVA events
are annunciated.
x PR_Single. This uses two redundant VTUR boards by splitting up the two
redundant PR transducers, one to each board.
x PR_Max. This uses one VTUR board connected to the two redundant PR
transducers. PR_Max allows broken shaft and deceleration protection without
the risk of a nuisance trip if one transducer is lost.
The fast trips are linked to the output trip relays with an OR-gate as shown in the
following figures. VTUR computes the overspeed trip, not the controller, so the trip
is very fast. The time from the overspeed input to the completed relay dropout is 30
msec or less.
InForChanA Accel1
Accel2 Input AccelA
Accel3 cct. A S
Accel4 select A>B AccATrip
AccASetpoint
B R
AccelAEnab
AccelAPerm
InForChanB Accel1
Accel2 Input AccelB
Accel3 cct. A S AccBTrip
Accel4 select A>B
AccBSetpoint B R
AccelBEnab Fast Trip
AccelBPerm Path
ResetSys, VCMI, Mstr False = Run
OR
PTR1 Primary Trip Relay, normal Path, True= Run True = Run Output, J4,PTR1
AND
PTR1_Output
PTR2 Primary Trip Relay, normal Path, True= Run AND True = Run Output, J4,PTR2
PTR2_Output
PTR3 True = Run Output, J4,PTR3
PTR3_Output -------------Total of six circuits ----- Output, J4A,PTR4
PTR4 True = Run
PTR4_Output Output, J4A,PTR5
PTR5 True = Run
PTR5_Output True = Run Output, J4A,PTR6
PTR6
PTR6 Output
Fast Overspeed Algorithm, PR-Single
N/C FastOS3Trip
PR1/2Max N/C FastOS4Trip
A
|A-B| A
PR3/4Max A>B S
DiffSetpoint B FastDiffTrip
B
DiffEnab R
DiffPerm
Fast Trip
ResetSys, VCMI, Mstr Path
OR
False = Run
Real-time inputs are separated from the configured parameters for clarity. The
parameter CompStalType selects the type of algorithm required, either two
transducers or three. PS3 is the compressor discharge pressure, and a drop in this
pressure (PS3 drop) is an indication of a possible compressor stall. In addition to the
drop in pressure, the algorithm calculates the rate of change of discharge pressure,
dPS3dt, and compares these values with configured stall parameters (KPS3
constants). Refer to the figures below.
The compressor stall trip is initiated by VAIC, and the signal is sent to the controller
where it is used to initiate a shutdown. The shutdown signal can be used to set all the
fuel shut-off valves (FSOV) through the VCRC and TRLY or DRLY board.
SysLim2Enabl, Enabl
AnalogIny*
SysLim2Latch, Latch SysLimit1_y*
SysLim2Type, <=
SysLimit2_y*
SysLimit2, xxxx
AnalogInz*
SysLimit1_z*
SysLimit2_z*
Stall Detection
CompStalType
three_xducer
80
0
60 10
0 0
G
40 E
0
20 5
C
0 0
E. KPS3_Delta_S
B
0 F. KPS3_Delta_I
F G. KPS3_Delta_Mx
-200 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Initial Compressor Discharge Pressure PS3
The variables used by the stall detection algorithm are defined as follows:
PS3 Compressor discharge pressure
PS3I Initial PS3
KPS3_Drop_S Slope of line for PS3I versus dPS3dt
KPS3_Drop_I Intercept of line for PS3I versus dPS3dt
KPS3_Drop_Mn Minimum value for PS3I versus dPS3dt
KPS3_Drop_Mx Maximum value for PS3I versus dPS3dt
KPS3_Delta_S Slope of line for PS3I versus Delta PS3 drop
KPS3_Delta_I Intercept of line for PS3I versus Delta PS3
drop
KPS3_Delta_Mx Maximum value for PS3I versus Delta PS3
drop
P125 Vdc
Rb Rf Vout,Pos
Monitor1
Grd Vout,Neg
Rb Monitor2
N125 Vdc
Rb/2
Vbus/2 Vout,
Rf Bus Volts
wrt Ground
There is a relationship between the bridge resistors, the fault resistance, the bus
voltage, and the bus to ground voltage (Vout) as follows:
The ground fault threshold voltage is typically set at 30 V, that is Vout = 30 V. The
bridging resistors are 82 K each. Therefore, from the formula above, the sensitivity
of the control panel to ground faults, assuming it is on one side only, is as shown in
the following figure.
Note On Mark V, the bridging resistors are 33 K each so different Vout values
result.
The results for the case of 125 V dc bus voltage with various fault resistor values is
shown in the following figure.
40.0
30.0 Fault Resistance (Rf) Vs Threshold
Fault, Rf
Analysis of Results
On Mark VI, when the voltage threshold is configured to 30 V and the voltage bus is
125 V dc, the fault threshold is 38 :. When the voltage threshold is configured to 17
V and the voltage bus is 125 V dc, the fault threshold is 15 :.
The sensitivity of the ground fault detection is configurable. Balanced bus leakage
decreases the sensitivity of the detector.
application code
Software that controls the machines or processes, specific to the application.
ARCNet
Attached Resource Computer Network. A LAN communications protocol developed
by Datapoint Corporation.The physical (coax and chip) and datalink (token ring and
board interface) layer of a 2.5 MHz communication network which serves as the
basis for DLAN+.
ASCII
American Standard for Code for Information Interchange (ASCII). An 8-bit code
used for data.
attributes
Information, such as location, visibility, and type of data that sets something apart
from others. In signals, an attribute can be a field within a record.
baud
A unit of data transmission. Baud rate is the number of bits per second transmitted.
Bently Nevada
A manufacturer of shaft vibration monitoring equipment.
bit
Binary Digit. The smallest unit of memory used to store only one piece of
information with two states, such as One/Zero or On/Off. Data requiring more than
two states, such as numerical values 000 to 999, requires multiple bits (see Word).
board
Printed wiring board.
Boolean
Digital statement that expresses a condition that is either True or False. In the
toolbox, it is a data type for logical signals.
Bus
An electrical path for transmitting and receiving data.
byte
A group of binary digits (bits); a measure of data flow when bytes per second.
CIMPLICITY
Operator interface software configurable for a wide variety of control applications.
COM port
Serial controller communication ports (two). COM1 is reserved for diagnostic
information and the Serial Loader. COM2 is used for I/O communication.
configure
To select specific options, either by setting the location of hardware jumpers or
loading software parameters into memory.
data server
A computer which gathers control data from input networks and makes the data
available to computers on output networks.
device
A configurable component of a process control system.
DIN-rail
European standard mounting rail for electronic modules.
DLAN+
GE Energy LAN protocol, using an ARCNET controller chip with modified
ARCNET drivers. A communication link between exciters, drives, and controllers,
featuring a maximum of 255 drops with transmissions at 2.5 MBPS.
Ethernet
LAN with a 10/100 M baud collision avoidance/collision detection system used to
link one or more computers together. Basis for TCP/IP and I/O services layers that
conform to the IEEE 802.3 standard, developed by Xerox, Digital, and Intel.
EX2000 (Exciter)
Latest version of GE generator exciter control; regulates the generator field current to
control the generator output voltage.
fanned input
An input to the terminal board which is connected to all three TMR I/O boards.
fault code
A message from the controller to the HMI indicating a controller warning or failure.
Finder
A subsystem of the toolbox for searching and determining the usage of a particular
item in a configuration.
firmware
The set of executable software that is stored in memory chips that hold their content
without electrical power, such as EEPROM.
forcing
Setting a live signal to a particular value, regardless of the value blockware or I/O is
writing to that signal.
frame rate
Basic scheduling period of the controller encompassing one complete input-
compute-output cycle for the controller. It is the system-dependent scan rate.
function
The highest level of the blockware hierarchy, and the entity that corresponds to a
single .tre file.
gateway
A device that connects two dissimilar LANs or connects a LAN to a wide-area
network (WAN), computer, or a mainframe. A gateway can perform protocol and
bandwidth conversion.
Graphic Window
A subsystem of the toolbox for viewing and setting the value of live signals.
health
A term that defines whether a signal is functioning as expected.
Heartbeat
A signal emitted at regular intervals by software to demonstrate that it is still active.
hexadecimal (hex)
Base 16 numbering system using the digits 0-9 and letters A-F to represent the
decimal numbers 0-15. Two hex digits represent 1 byte.
I/O
Input/output interfaces that allow the flow of data into and out of a device.
I/O drivers
Interface the controller with input/output devices, such as sensors, solenoid valves,
and drives, using a choice of communication networks.
I/O mapping
Method for moving I/O points from one network type to another without needing an
interposing application task.
insert
Adding an item either below or next to another item in a configuration, as it is
viewed in the hierarchy of the Outline View of the toolbox.
instance
Update an item with a new definition.
IONet
The Mark VI I/O Ethernet communication network (controlled by the VCMIs)
IP Address
The address assigned to a device on an Ethernet communication network.
logical
A statement of a true sense, such as a Boolean.
macro
A group of instruction blocks (and other macros) used to perform part of an
application program. Macros can be saved and reused.
median
The middle value of three values; the median selector picks the value most likely to
be closest to correct.
Modbus
A serial communication protocol developed by Modicon for use between PLCs and
other computers.
module
A collection of tasks that have a defined scheduling period in the controller.
non-volatile
The memory specially designed to store information even when the power is off.
pcode
A binary set of records created by the toolbox, which contain the controller
application configuration code for a device. Pcode is stored in RAM and Flash
memory.
period
The time between execution scans for a Module or Task. Also a property of a
Module that is the base period of all of the Tasks in the Module.
pin
Block, macro, or module parameter that creates a signal used to make
interconnections.
PROFIBUS
An open fieldbus communication standard defined in international standard EN 50
170 and is supported in simplex Mark VI systems.
QNX
A real time operating system used in the controller.
realtime
Immediate response, referring to process control and embedded control systems that
must respond instantly to changing conditions.
reboot
To restart the controller or toolbox.
register page
A form of shared memory that is updated over a network. Register pages can be
created and instanced in the controller and posted to the SDB.
resources
Also known as groups. Resources are systems (devices, machines, or work stations
where work is performed) or areas where several tasks are carried out. Resource
configuration plays an important role in the CIMPLICITY system by routing alarms
to specific users and filtering the data users receive.
runtime
See product code.
runtime errors
Controller problems indicated on the front cabinet by coded flashing LEDS, and also
in the Log View of the toolbox.
sampling rate
The rate at which process signal samples are obtained, measured in samples/second.
server
A computer which gathers data over the Ethernet from plant devices, and makes the
data available to computer-based operator interfaces known as viewers.
signal
The basic unit for variable information in the controller.
simplex
Operation that requires only one set of control and I/O, and generally uses only one
channel. The entire Mark VI control system can operate in simplex mode, or
individual VME boards in an otherwise TMR system can operate in implex mode.
simulation
Running a system without all of the configured I/O devices by modeling the behavior
of the machine and the devices in software.
stall detection
Detection of stall condition in a gas turbine compressor.
static starter
This runs the generator as a motor to bring a gas turbine up to starting speed.
Status_S
GE proprietary communications protocol that provides a way of commanding and
presenting the necessary control, configuration, and feedback data for a device. The
protocol over DLAN+ is Status_S. It can send directed, group, or broadcast
messages.
Status_S pages
Devices share data through Status_S pages. They make the addresses of the points on
the pages known to other devices through the system database.
symbols
Created by the toolbox and stored in the controller, the symbol table contains signal
names and descriptions for diagnostic messages.
TCP/IP
Communication protocols developed to inter-network dissimilar systems. It is a de
facto UNIX standard, but is supported on almost all systems. TCP controls data
transfer and IP provides the routing for functions, such as file transfer and e-mail.
time slice
Division of the total module scheduling period. There are eight slices per single
execution period. These slices provide a means for scheduling modules and tasks to
begin execution at different times.
toolbox
A Windows-based software package used to configure the Mark VI controllers, also
exciters and drives.
trend
A time-based plot to show the history of values, similar to a recorder, available in the
Turbine Historian and the toolbox.
validate
Makes certain that toolbox items or devices do not contain errors, and verifies that
the configuration is ready to be built into pcode.
Windows NT
Advanced 32-bit operating system from Microsoft for 386-based computers and
above.
word
A unit of information composed of characters, bits, or bytes, that is treated as an
entity and can be stored in one location. Also, a measurement of memory length,
usually 4, 8, or 16-bits long.
A F
Acronyms and Abbreviations 1-3 Fault Detection 8-52
Alarms Overview 7-6 Fiber-Optic Cables 3-27
ANSI 4-1 firmware 2-12
Application Code 8-4
G
B
GE Installation Documents 5-2
Building Grounding System 5-18 Generator Protection 2-15
Grounding 5-17
C Ground Fault Detection 8-52
Cable Separation and Routing 5-25
H
Cable Specifications 5-31
CIMPLICITY 6-4 How To Get Help 1-3
Communications 3-10, 3-14 Human-Machine Interface (HMI) 2-3
Code Download 5-46
Components 2-1, 3-27 I
Computer Operator Interface (COI) 2-3, 6-7
Connecting the System 5-35 I/O Cabinets 2-1
Command action 2-32 I/O boards 2-12
Control Cabinet 2-1 interface modules 2-1
Control Module 2-6 Input Processing 2-28
Contaminants 4-7 Installation Support 5-1
Control and Protection 2-21 Installation Support Drawings 5-12
Control Layer 3-3 Interface Features 6-7
Controller 2-9 IONet 2-11, 3-9
IP Address 3-8
D
Data Highway Ethernet Switches 3-6 L
Data Highways 3-4 Levels of Redundancy 2-20
Designated Controller 2-25 Link to Distributed Control System (DCS) 2-4
Diagnostic Alarms 7-9
Disagreement Detector 2-32 M
E MTBFO 2-37
Median Value Analog Voting 2-31
Early Planning 5-2 Modbus 3-14
EGD 3-12
Electrical 4-2 N
Elevation 4-7
NEMA 1-4
Enterprise Layer 3-1
Network Overview 3-1
Environment 4-5
Equipment Grounding 5-17 O
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) 3-12
Ethernet GSM 3-22 Online Repair 2-36
Ethernet Modbus Slave 3-15 Output Processing 2-26
Excitation Control system 2-5
W
Windows NT G-9
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
TO CRT DISPLAY
FUEL
TEMPERATURE
TO CRT DISPLAY
FSR
FUEL
SPEED MINIMUM SYSTEM
VALUE
SELECT
LOGIC
ACCELERATION
RATE TO TURBINE
TO CRT
DISPLAY
START
UP
SHUT
DOWN
MANUAL
id0043
Operating conditions of the turbine are sensed and modes of acceleration, manual FSR, and shutdown
utilized as feedback signals to the SPEEDTRONIC operate in a similar manner.
control system. There are three major control loops –
startup, speed, and temperature – which may be in Fuel Stroke Reference (FSR) is the command signal
control during turbine operation. The output of these for fuel flow. The minimum value select gate con-
control loops is connected to a minimum value gate nects the output signals of the six control modes to
circuit as shown in Figure 1. The secondary control the FSR controller; the lowest FSR output of the six
Fund_Mk_VI 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
<R><S><T>
FSR FSRACC ACCELERATION
TNHAR CONTROL
LOGIC TNH
TNH TNHAR
FSRMIN
FSRSU FSR
<R><S><T>
LOGIC FSRMAN MANUAL FSR FSRACC
FSRC FSRMAN
FSRSD FSR
MIN
FSRN GATE
FSRT
LOGIC FSRSD
<R><S><T>
FSRC SHUTDOWN
TNHCOR FSRMIN CONTROL
FSR
CQTC
FSRMIN
LOGIC TNR
TNR
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
LOGIC TTRX
TBAI
VAIC <R><S><T>
96CD A/D
TTRX FSRT
FSR
LOGIC
<R><S><T>
FSR
TBTC TTXM
VTCC
TTXD <R><S><T> TTXM
TTXD A/D
MEDIAN
id0038V
control loops is allowed to pass through the gate to The following speed detectors and speed relays are
the fuel control system as the controlling FSR. The typically used:
controlling FSR will establish the fuel input to the
–L14HR Zero–Speed (approx. 0% speed)
turbine at the rate required by the system which is in
control. Only one control loop will be in control at –L14HM Minimum Speed (approx. 16%
any particular time and the control loop which is speed)
controlling FSR will be displayed on the <HMI>.
–L14HA Accelerating Speed (approx. 50%
Figure 2 shows a more detailed schematic of the speed)
control loops. This can be referenced during the ex- –L14HS Operating Speed (approx. 95%
planation of each loop to show the interfacing. speed)
The zero–speed detector, L14HR, provides the sig-
Start–up/Shutdown Sequence and Control nal when the turbine shaft starts or stops rotating.
When the shaft speed is below 14HR, or at zero–
Start–up control brings the gas turbine from zero speed, L14HR picks–up (fail safe) and the permis-
speed up to operating speed safely by providing sive logic initiates turning gear or slow–roll
proper fuel to establish flame, accelerate the turbine, operation during the automatic start–up sequence of
and to do it in such a manner as to minimize the low the turbine.
cycle fatigue of the hot gas path parts during the se- The minimum speed detector L14HM indicates that
quence. This involves proper sequencing of com- the turbine has reached the minimum firing speed
mand signals to the accessories, starting device and and initiates the purge cycle prior to the introduction
fuel control system. Since a safe and successful of fuel and ignition. The dropout of the L14HM
start–up depends on proper functioning of the gas minimum speed relay provides several permissive
turbine equipment, it is important to verify the state functions in the restarting of the gas turbine after
of selected devices in the sequence. Much of the shutdown.
control logic circuitry is associated not only with ac-
The accelerating speed relay L14HA pickup indi-
tuating control devices, but enabling protective cir-
cates when the turbine has reached approximately
cuits and obtaining permissive conditions before
50 percent speed; this indicates that turbine start–up
proceeding.
is progressing and keys certain protective features.
The gas turbine uses a static start system whereby The high–speed sensor L14HS pickup indicates
the generator serves as a starting motor. A turning when the turbine is at speed and that the accelerating
gear is used for rotor breakaway. sequence is almost complete. This signal provides
General values for control settings are given in this the logic for various control sequences such as stop-
description to help in the understanding of the oper- ping auxiliary lube oil pumps and starting turbine
ating system. Actual values for control settings are shell/exhaust frame blowers.
given in the Control Specifications for a particular Should the turbine and generator slow during an un-
machine. derfrequency situation, L14HS will drop out at the
under–frequency speed setting. After L14HS drops
Speed Detectors out the generator breaker will trip open and the Tur-
bine Speed Reference (TNR) will be reset to
An important part of the start–up/shutdown se- 100.3%. As the turbine accelerates, L14HS will
quence control of the gas turbine is proper speed again pick up; the turbine will then require another
sensing. Turbine speed is measured by magnetic start signal before the generator will attempt to auto–
pickups and will be discussed under speed control. synchronize to the system again.
Fund_Mk_VI 3 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
The actual settings of the speed relays are listed in OR LOWER” allows manual adjustment of FSR
the Control Specification and are programmed in the setting between FSRMIN and FSRMAX.
<RST> processors as EEPROM control constants.
While the turbine is at rest, electronic checks are
made of the fuel system stop and control valves, the
accessories, and the voltage supplies. At this time,
START–UP CONTROL “SHUTDOWN STATUS” will be displayed on the
<HMI>. Activating the Master Operation Switch
The start–up control operates as an open loop con- (L43) from “OFF” to an operating mode will acti-
trol using preset levels of the fuel command signal vate the ready circuit. If all protective circuits and
FSR. The levels are: “ZERO”, “FIRE”, “WARM– trip latches are reset, the “STARTUP STATUS” and
UP”, “ACCELERATE” and “MAX”. The Control “READY TO START” messages will be displayed,
Specifications provide proper settings calculated for indicating that the turbine will accept a start signal.
the fuel anticipated at the site. The FSR levels are set Clicking on the “START” Master Control Switch
as Control Constants in the SPEEDTRONIC Mark (L1S) and “EXECUTE” will introduce the start sig-
VI start–up control. nal to the logic sequence.
Start–up control FSR signals operate through the The start signal energizes the Master Control and
minimum value gate to ensure that other control Protection circuit (the “L4” circuit) and starts the
functions can limit FSR as required. necessary auxiliary equipment. The “L4” circuit
permits pressurization of the trip oil system. With
The fuel command signals are generated by the the “L4” circuit permissive and starting clutch auto-
SPEEDTRONIC control start–up software. In addi- matically engaged, the starting device starts turning.
tion to the three active start–up levels, the software Startup status message “STARTING” will be dis-
sets maximum and minimum FSR and provides for played on the <HMI>. See point “A” on the Typical
manual control of FSR. Clicking on the targets for Start–up Curve Figure
“MAN FSR CONTROL” and “FSR GAG RAISE 3.
SPEED – %
100
80
ACCELERATE
IGNITION &
CROSSFIRE WARMUP
60 IGV – DEGREES
START 1 MIN
AUXILIARIES &
DIESEL WARMUP
Tx – °F/10
40 PURGE COAST
DOWN
20
FSR – %
0
A B D
APPROXIMATE TIME – MINUTES id0093
The starting clutch is a positive tooth type overrun- eration. This is done by programming a slow rise in
ning clutch which is self–engagifng in the break- FSR. See point “C” on Figure 3. As fuel is increased,
away mode and overruns whenever the turbine rotor the turbine begins the acceleration phase of start–up.
exceeds the turning gear speed. The clutch is held in as long as the turning gear pro-
vides torque to the gas turbine. When the turbine
When the turbine ‘breaks away’ the turning gear will overruns the turning gear, the clutch will disengage,
rotate the turbine rotor from 5 to 7 rpm. As the static shutting down the turning gear. Speed relay L14HA
starter begins it’s sequence, and accelerates the rotor indicates the turbine is accelerating.
the starting clutch will automatically disengage the
turning gear from the turbine rotor. The turbine The start–up phase ends when the unit attains full–
speed relay L14HM indicates that the turbine is turn- speed–no–load (see point “D” on Figure 3). FSR is
ing at the speed required for proper purging and igni- then controlled by the speed loop and the auxiliary
tion in the combustors. Gas fired units that have systems are automatically shut down.
exhaust configurations which can trap gas leakage
The start–up control software establishes the maxi-
(i.e., boilers) have a purge timer, L2TV, which is ini-
mum allowable levels of FSR signals during start–
tiated with the L14HM signal. The purge time is set
up. As stated before, other control circuits are able to
to allow three to four changes of air through the unit
reduce and modulate FSR to perform their control
to ensure that any combustible mixture has been
functions. In the acceleration phase of the start–up,
purged from the system. The starting means will
FSR control usually passes to acceleration control,
hold speed until L2TV has completed its cycle.
which monitors the rate of rotor acceleration. It is
Units which do not have extensive exhaust systems
possible, but not normal, to reach the temperature
may not have a purge timer, but rely on the starting
control limit. The <HMI> display will show which
cycle and natural draft to purge the system.
parameter is limiting or controlling FSR.
The L14HM signal or completion of the purge cycle
(L2TVX) ‘enables’ fuel flow, ignition, sets firing Fired Shutdown
level FSR, and initiates the firing timer L2F. See
point “B” on Figure 3. When the flame detector out- A normal shutdown is initiated by clicking on the
put signals indicate flame has been established in the “STOP” target (L1STOP) and “EXECUTE”; this
combustors (L28FD), the warm–up timer L2W will produce the L94X signal. If the generator break-
starts and the fuel command signal is reduced to the er is closed when the stop signal is initiated, the Tur-
“WARM–UP” FSR level. The warm–up time is pro- bine Speed Reference (TNR) counts down to reduce
vided to minimize the thermal stresses of the hot gas load at the normal loading rate until the reverse pow-
path parts during the initial part of the start–up. er relay operates to open the generator breaker; TNR
then continues to count down to reduce speed. When
If flame is not established by the time the L2F timer the STOP signal is given, shutdown Fuel Stroke Ref-
times out, typically 60 seconds, fuel flow is halted. erence FSRSD is set equal to FSR.
The unit can be given another start signal, but firing
will be delayed by the L2TV timer to avoid fuel ac- When the generator breaker opens, FSRSD ramps
cumulation in successive attempts. This sequence from existing FSR down to a value equal to
occurs even on units not requiring initial L2TV FSRMIN, the minimum fuel required to keep the
purge. turbine fired. FSRSD latches onto FSRMIN and de-
creases with corrected speed. When turbine speed
At the completion of the warm–up period (L2WX), drops below a defined threshold (Control Constant
the start–up control ramps FSR at a predetermined K60RB) FSRSD ramps to a blowout of one flame
rate to the setting for “ACCELERATE LIMIT”. The detector. The sequencing logic remembers which
start–up cycle has been designed to moderate the flame detectors were functional when the breaker
highest firing temperature produced during accel- opened. When any of the functional flame detectors
Fund_Mk_VI 5 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
The Speed Control System controls the speed and TNR MAX. HIGH SPEED STOP
107
load of the gas turbine generator in response to the
actual turbine speed signal and the called–for speed
reference. While on speed control the control mode 104
message “SPEED CTRL”will be displayed.
Speed Signal
REFERENCE % (TNR)
SPEED
“FSNL”
Three magnetic sensors are used to measure the 100
RATED FSR
(77NH–1,–2,–3) are high output devices consisting
of a permanent magnet surrounded by a hermetically
MINIMUM FSR
MAX FSR
around a 60–toothed wheel on the gas turbine com-
pressor rotor. With the 60–tooth wheel, the frequen-
LOW SPEED STOP
cy of the voltage output in Hertz is exactly equal to 95
TNR MIN.
the speed of the turbine in revolutions per minute. FUEL STROKE REFERENCE (LOAD)
(FSR)
id0044
The voltage output is affected by the clearance be- Figure 4 Droop Control Curve
tween the teeth of the wheel and the tip of the mag-
netic pickup. Clearance between the outside
diameter of the toothed wheel and the tip of the mag- The turbine follows to 100.3% TNH for synchro-
netic pickup should be kept within the limits speci- nization. At this point the operator can raise or lower
fied in the Control Specifications (approx. 0.05 inch TNR, in turn raising or lowering TNH, via the
or 1.27 mm). If the clearance is not maintained with- 70R4CS switch on the generator control panel or by
in the specified limits, the pulse signal can be dis- clicking on the targets on the <HMI>, if required.
torted. Turbine speed control would then operate in Refer to Figure 4. Once the generator breaker is
response to the incorrect speed feedback signal. closed onto the power grid, the speed is held
constant by the grid frequency. Fuel flow in excess
The signal from the magnetic pickups is brought into of that necessary to maintain full speed no load will
the Mark VI panel, one mag pickup to each control- result in increased power produced by the generator.
ler <RST>, where it is monitored by the speed con- Thus the speed control loop becomes a load control
trol software. loop and the speed reference is a convenient control
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC 6 Fund_Mk_VI
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
of the desired amount of load to be applied to the tur- units have the same droop, all will share a load in-
bine–generator unit. crease equally. Load sharing and system stability are
the main advantages of this method of speed control.
Droop speed control is a proportional control,
changing FSR in proportion to the difference be- Normally 4% droop is selected and the setpoint is
tween actual turbine speed and the speed reference. calibrated such that 104% setpoint will generate a
Any change in actual speed (grid frequency) will speed reference which will produce an FSR result-
cause a proportional change in unit load. This pro- ing in base load at design ambient temperature.
portionality is adjustable to the desired regulation or
When operating on droop control, the full–speed–
“Droop”. The speed vs. FSR relationship is shown
no–load FSR setting calls for a fuel flow which is
on Figure 4.
sufficient to maintain full speed with no generator
If the entire grid system tends to be overloaded, grid load. By closing the generator breaker and raising
frequency (or speed) will decrease and cause an FSR TNR via raise/lower, the error between speed and
increase in proportion to the droop setting. If all reference is increased. This error is multiplied by a
<RST>
SPEED CONTROL
FSNL
TNR
SPEED
REFERENCE
+ ERROR + FSRN
+
– SIGNAL
TNH
SPEED
DROOP
<RST>
SPEED CHANGER LOAD SET POINT
MAX. LIMIT
L83SD
RATE
MEDIAN
L70R SELECT
RAISE
L70L
LOWER
L83PRES TNR
PRESET SPEED
LOGIC REFERENCE
PRESET
OPERATING
L83TNROP MIN.
MIN. SELECT LOGIC
START-UP
OR SHUTDOWN
id0040
gain constant dependent on the desired droop setting start–up control can drive FSR to zero and are not in-
and added to the FSNL FSR setting to produce the fluenced by FSRMIN.
required FSR to take more load and thus assist in
holding the system frequency. Refer to Figures 4 and
5. Synchronizing
The minimum FSR limit (FSRMIN) in the SPEED- Automatic synchronizing is accomplished using
TRONIC Mark VI system prevents the speed con- synchronizing algorithms programmed into <RST>
trol circuits from driving the FSR below the value and <VPRO> software. Bus and generator voltage
which would cause flameout during a transient signals are input to the <VPRO> core which con-
condition. For example, with a sudden rejection of tains isolation transformers, and are then paralleled
load on the turbine, the speed control system loop to <RST>. <RST> software drives the synch check
would want to drive the FSR signal to zero, but the and synch permissive relays, while <VPRO> pro-
minimum FSR setting establishes the minimum fuel vides the actual breaker close command. See Figure
level that prevents a flameout. Temperature and/or 6.
<XYZ>
AUTO SYNCH
<RST>
AUTO SYNCH
PERMISSIVE
CALCULATED PHASE WITHIN LIMITS AND
id0048V
There are three basic synchronizing modes. These For synchronizing, the unit is brought to 100.3%
may be selected from external contacts, i.e., genera- speed to keep the generator “faster” than the grid, as-
tor panel selector switch, or from the SPEEDTRON- suring load pick–up upon breaker closure. If the sys-
IC Mark VI <HMI>. tem frequency has varied enough to cause an
unacceptable slip frequency (difference between
1. OFF – Breaker will not be closed by SPEED- generator frequency and grid frequency), the speed
TRONIC Mark VI control matching circuit adjusts TNR to maintain turbine
speed 0.20% to 0.40% faster than the grid to assure
2. MANUAL – Operator initiated breaker closure
the correct slip frequency and permit synchronizing.
when permissive synch check relay 25X is satis-
fied
For added protection a synchronizing check relay is
3. AUTO – System will automatically match volt- provided in the generator panel. It is used in series
age and speed and then close the breaker at the with both the auto synchronizing relay and the
appropriate time to hit top dead center on the manual breaker close switch to prevent large out–
synchroscope of–phase breaker closures.
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC 8 Fund_Mk_VI
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
<RST>
.
TO
COMBUSTION
TTXDR TTXD2 MONITOR
TTXDS SORT
HIGHEST
TO
TTXDT LOWEST
REJECT REJECT
HIGH AVERAGE TTXM
LOW
TC’s AND REMAINING
QUANTITY LOW
OF TC’s USED
<RST> <RST>
GAIN
CORNER
FSR
ISOTHERMAL
id0032V
TTKn_K
TTKn_I ISOTHERMAL
TTKn_C
TEMPERATURE SELECTED
DIGITAL REFERENCE TEMPERATURE
INPUT DATA SELECT REFERENCE
TABLE
CONSTANT
CPD STORAGE
FSR
id0054
id0106
Figure 11 Exhaust Temperature Control Setpoints
Figure 12 Temperature Reference Select Program
Servo Drive System actuator. If the hydraulic actuator has spring return,
hydraulic oil will be ported to one side of the cylin-
The heart of the fuel system is a three coil electro– der and the other to drain. A feedback signal pro-
hydraulic servovalve (servo) as shown in Figure 13. vided by a linear variable differential transformer
The servovalve is the interface between the electri- (LVDT, Figure 13) will tell the control whether or
cal and mechanical systems and controls the direc- not it is in the required position. The LVDT outputs
tion and rate of motion of a hydraulic actuator based an AC voltage which is proportional to the position
on the input current to the servo. of the core of the LVDT. This core in turn is con-
nected to the valve whose position is being con-
3-COIL TORQUE MOTOR
trolled; as the valve moves, the feedback voltage
TORQUE changes. The LVDT requires an exciter voltage
MOTOR TORQUE
ARMATURE MOTOR which is provided by the VSVO card.
N N
Â
P R P card to the servo. This output to the servos is moni-
1 2 tored and there will be an alarm on loss of any one of
the three signals from <RST>.
SPOOL VALVE FILTER
DRAIN PS
HYDRAULIC
The liquid fuel system consists of fuel handling
ACTUATOR
components and electrical control components.
Some of the fuel handling components are: primary
TO <RST> LVDT
fuel oil filter, fuel oil stop valve, three fuel pumps,
ABEX Servovalve id0029 fuel bypass valve, fuel pump pressure relief valve,
Figure 13 Electrohydraulic Servovalve flow divider, combined selector valve/pressure
The servovalve contains three electrically isolated gauge assembly, false start drain valve, fuel lines,
coils on the torque motor. Each coil is connected to and fuel nozzles. The electrical control components
one of the three Controllers <RST>. This provides are: liquid fuel pressure switch (upstream) 63FL–2,
redundancy should one of the Controllers or coils fuel oil stop valve limit switch 33FL, liquid fuel
fail. There is a null–bias spring which positions the pump bypass valve servovalve 65FP, flow divider
servo so that the actuator will go to the fail safe posi- magnetic speed pickups 77FD–1, –2, –3 and
tion should ALL power and/or control signals be SPEEDTRONIC control cards TSVO and VSVO. A
lost. diagram of the system showing major components is
shown in Figure 15.
If the hydraulic actuator is a double–action piston,
the control signal positions the servovalve so that it The fuel bypass valve is a hydraulically actuated
ports high–pressure oil to either side of the hydraulic valve with a linear flow characteristic. Located
POSTION FEEDBACK
LVDT
<R>
FUEL
<S>
SERVO
VSVO 3.2KHZ VALVE
REF
D/A TORQUE
MOTOR
14
HYDRAULIC
ACTUATOR
HIGH
<T> PRESSURE
OIL
VSVO 3.2KHZ
EXCITATION
REF
D/A
GE Power Systems
POSTION FEEDBACK
LVDT
Fund_Mk_VI
id0026
GE Power Systems
between the inlet (low pressure) and discharge (high fuel necessary to meet the control system fuel de-
pressure) sides of the fuel pump, this valve bypasses mand. It is positioned by servo valve 65FP, which
excess fuel delivered by the fuel pump back to the receives its signal from the controllers.
fuel pump inlet, delivering to the flow divider the
<RST>
FQROUT <RST>
TSVO
TNH
L4 VSVO
L20FLX PR/A
P R 65FP TYPICAL
40µ DIFFERENTIAL FLOW FUEL NOZZLES
PRESSURE GUAGE DIVIDER
77FD-1
63FL-2 OH
HYDRAULIC COMBUSTION
SUPPLY CHAMBER
OFV
FUEL
STOP
VALVE VR4
OF AD
FUEL PUMP
(QTY 3)
33FL
M FALSE START
OLT- DRAIN VALVE
CONTROL CHAMBER OFD
OIL 77FD-2
TO DRAIN
77FD-3
id0031V
The flow divider divides the single stream of fuel VSVO card modulates servovalve 65FP based on
from the pump into several streams, one for each inputs of turbine speed, FSR1 (called–for liquid fuel
combustor. It consists of a number of matched high flow), and flow divider speed (FQ1).
volumetric efficiency positive displacement gear
pumps, again one per combustor. The flow divider is Fuel Oil Control – Software
driven by the small pressure differential between the
When the turbine is run on liquid fuel oil, the control
inlet and outlet. The gear pumps are mechanically
system checks the permissives L4 and L20FLX and
connected so that they all run at the same speed,
does not allow FSR1 to close the bypass valve unless
making the discharge flow from each pump equal.
they are ‘true’ (closing the bypass valve sends fuel to
Fuel flow is represented by the output from the flow
the combustors). The L4 permissive comes from the
divider magnetic pickups (77FD–1, –2 & –3). These
Master Protective System (to be discussed later) and
are non–contacting magnetic pickups, giving a
L20FLX becomes ‘true’ after the turbine vent timer
pulse signal frequency proportional to flow divider
times out. These signals control the opening and
speed, which is proportional to the fuel flow deliv-
closing of the fuel oil stop valve.
ered to the combustion chambers.
The FSR signal from the controlling system goes
The TSVO card receives the pulse rate signals from through the fuel splitter where the liquid fuel re-
77FD–1, –2, and –3 and outputs an analog signal quirement becomes FSR1. The FSR1 signal is mul-
which is proportional to the pulse rate input. The tiplied by TNH, so fuel flow becomes a function of
Fund_Mk_VI 15 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
tive fuel nozzles, and SPEEDTRONIC control cards tion is contained in subsequent para-
TBQB and TCQC. The components are shown graphs.
schematically in Figure 17. A functional explana-
SGCV T
QGCV
*
Q
GAS SKID TURBINE COMPARTMENT
VSVO
FPRG TSVO POS1 VSVO TSVO
FPG
VENT
COMBUSTION
CHAMBER
63FG-3
STOP/ GAS
RATIO CONTROL
VALVE VALVE
GAS
P2
Electrical
Connection GAS
MANIFOLD
Hydraulic LVDT’S LVDT’S
Piping 96SR-1,2 96GC-1,2
Gas Piping
VH5-1 DUMP
RELAY
TRIP
90SR SERVO
65GC SERVO
HYDRAULIC
SUPPLY id0059V
Gas Control Valves then output to the servo valve through the TSVO
The position of the gas control valve plug is intended card. The gas control valve stem position is sensed
to be proportional to FSR2 which represents called– by the output of a linear variable differential trans-
for gas fuel flow. Actuation of the spring–loaded gas former (LVDT) and fed back through the TSVO card
control valve is by a hydraulic cylinder controlled by to an operational amplifier on the VSVO card where
an electro–hydraulic servovalve. it is compared to the FSROUT input signal at a sum-
ming junction. There are two LVDTs providing
When the turbine is to run on gas fuel the permis- feedback ; two of the three controllers are dedicated
sives L4, L20FGX and L2TVX (turbine purge com- to one LVDT each, while the third selects the highest
plete) must be ‘true’, similar to the liquid system. feedback through a high–select diode gate. If the
This allows the Gas Control Valve to open. The feedback is in error with FSROUT, the operational
stroke of the valve will be proportional to FSR. amplifier on the VSVO card will change the signal
FSR goes through the fuel splitter (to be discussed in to the hydraulic servovalve to drive the gas control
the dual fuel section) where the gas fuel requirement valve in a direction to decrease the error. In this way
becomes FSR2, which is then conditioned for offset the desired relationship between position and FSR2
and gain. This signal, FSROUT, goes to the VSVO is maintained and the control valve correctly meters
card where it is converted to an analog signal and the gas fuel. See Figure 18.
<RST>
OFFSET
GAIN
<RST>
FSR2 +
TBQC
+
HIGH
SELECT
L4
L3GCV
FSROUT
ANALOG
I/O
GAS
P2
ÎÎ
GAS CONTROL VALVE
POSITION LOOP
ÎÎ
CALIBRATION
ÎÎ
POSITION
LVDT
LVDT’S
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 96GC-1, -2
GAS PIPING
SERVO
HYDRAULIC PIPING VALVE FSR
id0027V
<RST>
TNH
<RST>
GAIN
VSVO
+ FPRG
OFFSET + D
A
L4
FPG
L3GRV
HIGH POS2
SELECT
96FG-2A
96FG-2B
96FG-2C
SPEED RATIO VALVE
GAS
VAIC
ÎÎÎ
96SR-1,2
LVDT’S
OPERATING
CYLINDER
PISTON
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ TBAI
SERVO
VALVE
LEGEND
HYDRAULIC
ELECTRICAL OIL
CONNECTION
GAS PIPING
HYDRAULIC
PIPING P2
DIGITAL or PRESSURE
CONTROL VOLTAGE
TNH
Speed Ratio Valve Pressure Calibration
id0058V
The plug in the gas control valve is contoured to pro- The stop/speed ratio valve provides a positive stop
vide the proper flow area in relation to valve stroke. to fuel gas flow when required by a normal shut–
The gas control valve uses a skirted valve disc and down, emergency trip, or a no–run condition. Hy-
venturi seat to obtain adequate pressure recovery. draulic trip dump valve VH–5 is located between the
High pressure recovery occurs at overall valve pres- electro–hydraulic servovalve 90SR and the hydrau-
sure ratios substantially less than the critical pres- lic actuating cylinder. This dump valve is operated
sure ratio. The net result is that flow through the by the low pressure control oil trip system. If permis-
control valve is independent of valve pressure drop. sives L4 and L3GRV are ‘true’ the trip oil (OLT) is at
Gas flow then is a function of valve inlet pressure P2 normal pressure and the dump valve is maintained in
and valve area only. a position that allows servovalve 90SR to control the
cylinder position. When the trip oil pressure is low
As before, an open or a short circuit in one of the ser- (as in the case of normal or emergency shutdown),
vo coils or in the signal to one coil does not cause a the dump valve spring shifts a spool valve to a posi-
trip. Each GCV has two LVDTs and can run correct- tion which dumps the high pressure hydraulic oil
ly on one. (OH) in the speed ratio/stop valve actuating cylinder
to the lube oil reservoir. The closing spring atop the
valve plug instantly shuts the valve, thereby shutting
Stop/Speed Ratio Valve off fuel flow to the combustors.
In addition to being displayed, the feedback signals
The speed ratio/stop valve is a dual function valve. It and the control signals of both valves are compared
serves as a pressure regulating valve to hold a de- to normal operating limits, and if they go outside of
sired fuel gas pressure ahead of the gas control valve these limits there will be an alarm. The following are
and it also serves as a stop valve. As a stop valve it is typical alarms:
an integral part of the protection system. Any emer-
gency trip or normal shutdown will move the valve L60FSGH: Excessive fuel flow on start–up
to its closed position shutting off gas fuel flow to the L3GRVFB: Loss of LVDT feedback on the SRV
turbine. This is done either by dumping hydraulic oil
L3GRVO: SRV open prior to permissive to open
from the Stop/Speed Ratio Valve VH–5 hydraulic
trip relay or driving the position control closed elec- L3GRVSC: Servo current to SRV detected prior
trically. to permissive to open
L3GCVFB: Loss of LVDT feedback on the
The stop/speed ratio valve has two control loops. GCV
There is a position loop similar to that for the gas
control valve and there is a pressure control loop. L3GCVO: GCV open prior to permissive to
See Figure 19. Fuel gas pressure P2 at the inlet to the open
gas control valve is controlled by the pressure loop L3GCVSC: Servo current to GCV detected
as a function of turbine speed. This is done by pro- prior to permissive to open
portioning it to turbine speed signal TNH, with an
L3GFIVP: Intervalve (P2) pressure low
offset and gain, which then becomes Gas Fuel Pres-
sure Reference FPRG. FPRG then goes to the The servovalves are furnished with a mechanical
VSVO card to be converted to an analog signal. P2 null offset bias to cause the gas control valve or
pressure is measured by 96FG which outputs a volt- speed ratio valve to go to the zero stroke position
age proportional to P2 pressure. This P2 signal (fail safe condition) should the servovalve signals or
(FPG) is compared to the FPRG and the error signal power be lost. During a trip or no–run condition, a
(if any) is in turn compared with the 96SR LVDT positive voltage bias is placed on the servo coils
feedback to reposition the valve as in the GCV loop. holding them in the ‘valve closed’ position.
Fund_Mk_VI 21 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
Unlike the SRV and GCV’s the flow through the RATE
L83FG
splitter valve is not linear with valve position.The GAS SELECT
L83FL
control system linearizes the fuel split setpoint and LIQUID SELECT
the resulting valve position command FSRXPOUT FSR FSR1
LIQUID REF.
is used as the position reference.
FSR2
GAS REF.
id0034
Dual Fuel Control Figure 20 Fuel Splitter Schematic
Turbines that are designed to operate on both liquid Fuel Transfer – Liquid to Gas
and gaseous fuel are equipped with controls to pro-
vide the following features:
If the unit is running on liquid fuel (FSR1) and the
1.Transfer from one fuel to the other on com- “GAS” target on the <HMI> screen is selected the
mand. following sequence of events will take place, pro-
viding the transfer and fuel gas permissives are true
2. Allow time for filling the lines with the type of (refer to Figure 21):
fuel to which turbine operation is being trans-
ferred. FSR1 will remain at its initial value, but FSR2 will
step to a value slightly greater than zero, usually
3. Operation of liquid fuel nozzle purge when 0.5%. This will open the gas control valve slightly to
operating totally on gas fuel. bleed down the intervalve volume. This is done in
case a high pressure has been entrained. The pres-
4. Operation of gas fuel nozzle purge when oper-
ence of a higher pressure than that required by the
ating totally on liquid fuel.
speed/ratio controller would cause slow response in
The software diagram for the fuel splitter is shown in initiating gas flow.
Figure 20.
After a typical time delay of thirty seconds to bleed
down the P2 pressure and fill the gas supply line, the
Fuel Splitter software program ramps the fuel commands, FSR2
to increase and FSR1 to decrease, at a programmed
As stated before FSR is divided into two signals, rate through the median select gate. This is complete
FSR1 and FSR2, to provide dual fuel operation. See in thirty seconds.
Figure 20.
When the transfer is complete logic signal L84TG
FSR is multiplied by the liquid fuel fraction FX1 to (Total Gas) will de–energize the liquid fuel forward-
produce the FSR1 signal. FSR1 is then subtracted ing pump, close the fuel oil stop valve by de–ener-
from the FSR signal resulting in FSR2, the control gizing the liquid fuel dump valve 20FL, and initiate
signal for the secondary fuel. the purge sequence.
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC 22 Fund_Mk_VI
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
PURGE
instance, at the beginning of a transfer, FSR2 re-
SELECT DISTILLATE
TIME
mains at its initial value, but FSR1 steps to a value
slightly greater than zero. This will command a
Transfer from Full Distillate to Full Gas
small liquid fuel flow. If there has been any fuel leak-
FSR1
age out past the check valves, this will fill the liquid
fuel piping and avoid any delay in delivery at the be-
UNITS
PURGE
involves a double block and bleed arrangement,
TIME
SELECT GAS SELECT MIX wherby two purge valves (VA13–1, –2) are shut
id0033
when primary gas is flowing and intervalve vent so-
Figure 21 Fuel Transfer lenoid (20VG–2) is open to bleed any leakage across
the valves. The purge valves are air operated through
solenoid valves 20PG–1, –2. When there is no pri-
Liquid Fuel Purge mary gas flow, the purge valves open and allow com-
pressor discharge air to flow through the primary
fuel nozzle passages. Secondary purge is required
To prevent coking of the liquid fuel nozzles while for the secondary and tertiary nozzles when second-
operating on gas fuel, some atomizing air is diverted ary and tertiary fuel flow is reduced to zero and when
through the liquid fuel nozzles. The following se- operating on liquid fuel. This is a block and bleed ar-
quence of events occurs when transfer from liquid to rangement similar to the primary purge with two
gas is complete. purge valves (VA13–3, –4), intervalve vent solenoid
(20VG–3), and solenoid valves 20PG–3, –4.
Air from the atomizing air system flows through a
cooler (HX4–1), through the fuel oil purge valve
(VA19–3) and through check valve VCK2 to each
fuel nozzle.
MODULATED INLET GUIDE VANE
The fuel oil purge valve is controlled by the position SYSTEM
of a solenoid valve 20PL–2 . When this valve is en-
ergized , actuating air pressure opens the purge oil The Inlet Guide Vanes (IGVs) modulate during the
check valve, allowing air flow to the fuel oil nozzle acceleration of the gas turbine to rated speed, load-
purge check valves. ing and unloading of the generator, and deceleration
of the gas turbine. This IGV modulation maintains
proper flows and pressures, and thus stresses, in the
Fund_Mk_VI 23 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
compressor, maintains a minimum pressure drop bined cycle application, maintains high exhaust
across the fuel nozzles, and, when used in a com- temperatures at low loads.
<RST>
<RST>
CSRGV
VSVO
CSRGV IGV REF CSRGVOUT
D/A
HIGH
SELECT
TSVO
CLOSE
HM3-1
HYD.
SUPPLY R P OPEN
IN FH6 OUT
–1
90TV-1
2 1
A
96TV-1,2
OLT-1
TRIP OIL
C1
VH3-1
D C2
ORIFICES (2)
OD
id0030
0 100
As the unit is loaded and exhaust temperature in- CORRECTED SPEED–%
(TNHCOR) 0 100
LOAD–%
creases, the inlet guide vanes will go to the full open FSNL BASE LOAD
EXHAUST TEMPERATURE
position when the exhaust temperature reaches one id0037
of two points, depending on the operation mode se- Figure 24 Variable Inlet Guide Vane Schedule
lected. For simple cycle operation, the IGVs move to
the full open position at a pre–selected exhaust tem-
perature, usually 371° C (700° F). For combined PROTECTION SYSTEMS
cycle operation, the IGVs begin to move to the full
open position as exhaust temperature approaches The gas turbine protection system is comprised of a
the temperature control reference temperature; nor- number of sub–systems, several of which operate
mally, the IGVs begin to open when exhaust temper- during each normal start–up and shutdown. The oth-
ature is within 17° C (30° F) of the temperature er systems and components function strictly during
control reference. emergency and abnormal operating conditions. The
most common kind of failure on a gas turbine is the
During a normal shutdown, as the exhaust tempera- failure of a sensor or sensor wiring; the protection
ture decreases the IGVs move to the minimum full systems are set up to detect and alarm such a failure.
speed angle; as the turbine decelerates from 100% If the condition is serious enough to disable the
TNH, the inlet guide vanes are modulated to the ful- protection completely, the turbine will be tripped.
ly closed position. When the generator breaker Protective systems respond to the simple trip signals
opens, the compressor bleed valves will be opened. such as pressure switches used for low lube oil pres-
sure, high gas compressor discharge pressure, or
In the event of a turbine trip, the compressor bleed similar indications. They also respond to more com-
valves are opened and the inlet guide vanes go to the plex parameters such as overspeed, overtempera-
fully closed position. The inlet guide vanes remain ture, high vibration, combustion monitor, and loss of
fully closed as the turbine continues to coast down. flame. To do this, some of these protection systems
and their components operate through the master
For underspeed operation, if TNHCOR decreases control and protection circuit in the SPEEDTRON-
below approximately 91%, the inlet guide vanes IC control system, while other totally mechanical
modulate closed at 6.7 degrees per percent decrease systems operate directly on the components of the
in corrected speed. In most cases, if the actual speed turbine. In each case there are two essentially inde-
decreases below 95% TNH, the generator breaker pendent paths for stopping fuel flow, making use of
will open and the turbine speed setpoint will be reset both the fuel control valve (FCV) and the fuel stop
to 100.3%. The IGVs will then go to the minimum valve (FSV). Each protective system is designed in-
full speed angle. See Figure 24. dependent of the control system to avoid the possi-
Fund_Mk_VI 25 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
MASTER
PRIMARY PROTECTION GCV GAS FUEL
OVERSPEED CIRCUIT SERVOVALVE CONTROL VALVE
<RST>
OVERTEMP
COMBUSTION
MONITOR
RELAY
VOTING 20FG
MODULE
LOSS
of
FLAME
MASTER
PROTECTION
SECONDARY CIRCUIT BYPASS
<XYZ> VALVE
OVERSPEED FUEL
SERVOVALVE PUMP
RELAY LIQUID
VOTING 20FL FUEL STOP
MODULE VALVE
id0036V
Besides the tripping functions, trip oil also provides Dump Valve
a hydraulic signal to the fuel stop valves for normal
start–up and shutdown sequences. On gas turbines Each individual fuel branch in the trip oil system has
equipped for dual fuel (gas and oil) operation the a solenoid dump valve (20FL for liquid, 20FG for
system is used to selectively isolate the fuel system gas). This device is a solenoid–operated spring–re-
not required. turn spool valve which will relieve trip oil pressure
only in the branch that it controls. These valves are
Significant components of the Hydraulic Trip Cir- normally energized–to–run, deenergized–to–trip.
cuit are described below. This philosophy protects the turbine during all nor-
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC 26 Fund_Mk_VI
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
PROTECTIVE MASTER
SIGNALS PROTECTION
L4
CIRCUITS
LIQUID
FUEL
LIQUID FUEL
STOP VALVE
20FG 20FL
ORIFICE AND
CHECK VALVE
NETWORK
63HL
INLET ORIFICE
GAS FUEL
GAS SPEED RATIO/
FUEL STOP VALVE
WIRING 63HG
PIPING
GAS FUEL
DUMP RELAY
VALVE
OH
id0056
Check Valve & Orifice Network dividual fuel stop valve may be selectively closed by
dumping the flow of trip oil going to it. Solenoid
At the inlet of each individual fuel branch is a check valve 20FL can cause the trip valve on the liquid fuel
valve and orifice network which limits flow out of stop valve to go to the trip state, which permits clo-
that branch. This network limits flow into each sure of the liquid fuel stop valve by its spring return
branch, thus allowing individual fuel control with- mechanism. Solenoid valve 20FG can cause the trip
out total system pressure decay. However, when one valve on the gas fuel speed ratio/stop valve to go to
of the trip devices located in the main artery of the the trip state, permitting its spring–returned closure.
system, e.g., the overspeed trip, is actuated, the The orifice in the check valve and orifice network
check valve will open and result in decay of all trip permits independent dumping of each fuel branch of
pressures. the trip oil system without affecting the other
branch. Tripping all devices other than the individu-
Pressure Switches al dump valves will result in dumping the total trip
oil system, which will shut the unit down.
Each individual fuel branch contains pressure
switches (63HL–1,–2,–3 for liquid, 63HG–1,–2,–3 During start–up or fuel transfer, the SPEEDTRON-
for gas) which will ensure tripping of the turbine if IC control system will close the appropriate dump
the trip oil pressure becomes too low for reliable op- valve to activate the desired fuel system(s). Both
eration while operating on that fuel. dump valves will be closed only during fuel transfer
or mixed fuel operation.
Operation
The dump valves are de–energized on a “2–out–
The tripping devices which cause unit shutdown or of–3 voted” trip signal from the relay module. This
selective fuel system shutdown do so by dumping helps prevent trips caused by faulty sensors or the
the low pressure trip oil (OLT). See Figure 26. An in- failure of one controller.
Fund_Mk_VI 27 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
The signal to the fuel system servovalves will also <RST> <XYZ>
HIGH PRESSURE OVERSPEED TRIP
be a “close” command should a trip occur. This is
TNH HP SPEED
done by clamping FSR to zero. Should one control- A
A>B
L12H TO MASTER
PROTECTION
TRIP SETPOINT SET
ler fail, the FSR from that controller will be zero. TNKHOS B AND
AND ALARM
MESSAGE
LATCH
The output of the other two controllers is sufficient TNKHOST
TEST
By pushing the Emergency Trip Button, 5E P/B, the L86MR1 MASTER RESET
P28 vdc power supply is cut off to the relays control- SAMPLING RATE = 0.25 SEC
Overtemperature Protection
Overspeed Protection
The overtemperature system protects the gas turbine
The SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI overspeed system is against possible damage caused by overfiring. It is a
designed to protect the gas turbine against possible backup system, operating only after the failure of the
damage caused by overspeeding the turbine rotor. temperature control system.
Under normal operation, the speed of the rotor is
controlled by speed control. The overspeed system TTKOT1 TRIP
would not be called on except after the failure of oth-
er systems.
Electronic Overspeed Protection System Under normal operating conditions, the exhaust
temperature control system acts to control fuel flow
The electronic overspeed protection function is per- when the firing temperature limit is reached. In cer-
formed in both <RST> and <XYZ> as shown in Fig- tain failure modes however, exhaust temperature
ure 27. The turbine speed signal (TNH) derived from and fuel flow can exceed control limits. Under such
the magnetic pickup sensors (77NH–1,–2, and –3) is circumstances the overtemperature protection sys-
compared to an overspeed setpoint (TNKHOS). tem provides an overtemperature alarm about 14° C
When TNH exceeds the setpoint, the overspeed trip (25° F) above the temperature control reference. To
signal (L12H) is transmitted to the master protective avoid further temperature increase, it starts unload-
circuit to trip the turbine and the “OVERSPEED ing the gas turbine. If the temperature should in-
TRIP” message will be displayed on the <HMI>. crease further to a point about 22° C (40° F) above
This trip will latch and must be reset by the master the temperature control reference, the gas turbine is
reset signal L86MR. tripped. For the actual alarm and trip overtempera-
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC 28 Fund_Mk_VI
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
ture setpoints refer to the Control Specifications. will be tripped through the master protection circuit.
See Figure 29. The trip function will be latched in and the master re-
set signal L86MR1 must be true to reset and unlatch
Overtemperature trip and alarm setpoints are deter-
the trip.
mined from the temperature control setpoints
derived by the Exhaust Temperature Control soft-
ware. See Figure 30. Flame Detection and Protection System
TTXM
TRIP AND ALARM form two functions, one in the sequencing system
A
ALARM
A>B
L30TXA
ALARM
TO ALARM and the other in the protective system. During a nor-
TTKOT3 B MESSAGE
AND SPEED
SETPOINT mal start–up the flame detectors indicate when a
LOWER
flame has been established in the combustion cham-
TTRXB
bers and allow the start–up sequence to continue.
A
A>B Most units have four flame detectors, some have
TTKOT2 B
OR
two, and a very few have eight. Generally speaking,
A if half of the flame detectors indicate flame and half
A>B
TTKOT1
TRIP ISOTHERMAL
B
SET
AND
L86TXT
TRIP
TO MASTER
PROTECTION
(or less) indicate no–flame, there will be an alarm
LATCH
L86MR1
AND ALARM
MESSAGE but the unit will continue to run. If more than half in-
RESET
SAMPLING RATE: 0.25 SEC. dicate loss–of–flame, the unit will trip on “LOSS OF
id0055
FLAME.” This avoids possible accumulation of an
Figure 30 Overtemperature Trip and Alarm explosive mixture in the turbine and any exhaust
heat recovery equipment which may be installed.
Overtemperature Protection Software The flame detector system used with the SPEED-
TRONIC Mark VI system detects flame by sensing
ultraviolet (UV) radiation. Such radiation results
Overtemperature Alarm (L30TXA)
from the combustion of hydrocarbon fuels and is
The representative value of the exhaust temperature more reliably detected than visible light, which va-
thermocouples (TTXM) is compared with alarm and ries in color and intensity.
trip temperature setpoints. The “EXHAUST TEM- The flame sensor is a copper cathode detector de-
PERATURE HIGH” alarm message will be dis- signed to detect the presence of ultraviolet radiation.
played when the exhaust temperature (TTXM) The SPEEDTRONIC control will furnish +24Vdc
exceeds the temperature control reference (TTRXB) to drive the ultraviolet detector tube. In the presence
plus the alarm margin (TTKOT3) programmed as a of ultraviolet radiation, the gas in the detector tube
Control Constant in the software. The alarm will au- ionizes and conducts current. The strength of the
tomatically reset if the temperature decreases below current feedback (4 – 20 mA) to the panel is a pro-
the setpoint. portional indication of the strength of the ultraviolet
radiation present. If the feedback current exceeds a
Overtemperature Trip (L86TXT) threshold value the SPEEDTRONIC generates a
logic signal to indicate ”FLAME DETECTED” by
An overtemperature trip will occur if the exhaust
the sensor.
temperature (TTXM) exceeds the temperature con-
trol reference (TTRXB) plus the trip margin The flame detector system is similar to other protec-
(TTKOT2), or if it exceeds the isothermal trip set- tive systems, in that it is self–monitoring. For exam-
point (TTKOT1). The overtemperature trip will ple, when the gas turbine is below L14HM all
latch, the “EXHAUST OVERTEMPERATURE channels must indicate “NO FLAME.” If this condi-
TRIP” message will be displayed, and the turbine tion is not met, the condition is annunciated as a
Fund_Mk_VI 29 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
“FLAME DETECTOR TROUBLE” alarm and the and the turbine will continue to run. More than half
turbine cannot be started. After firing speed has been the flame detectors must indicate “NO FLAME” in
reached and fuel introduced to the machine, if at order to trip the turbine.
least half the flame detectors see flame the starting
Note that a short–circuited or open–circuited detec-
sequence is allowed to proceed. A failure of one de-
tor tube will result in a “NO FLAME” signal.
tector will be annunciated as “FLAME DETECTOR
TROUBLE” when complete sequence is reached
SPEEDTRONIC Mk VI Flame Detection
Turbine
Protection
Logic
28FD
UV Scanner
28FD
UV Scanner Analog Flame <HMI>
I/O Detection Display
28FD Logic
UV Scanner TBAI
VAIC
28FD
UV Scanner
Turbine
Control
Logic
Vibration Protection ceeded, the vibration protection system trips the tur-
bine and annunciates to indicate the cause of the trip.
The vibration protection system of a gas turbine unit Each channel includes one vibration pickup (veloc-
is composed of several independent vibration chan- ity type) and a SPEEDTRONIC Mark VI amplifier
nels. Each channel detects excessive vibration by circuit. The vibration detectors generate a relatively
means of a seismic pickup mounted on a bearing low voltage by the relative motion of a permanent
housing or similar location of the gas turbine and the magnet suspended in a coil and therefore no excita-
driven load. If a predetermined vibration level is ex- tion is necessary. A twisted–pair shielded cable is
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC 30 Fund_Mk_VI
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
id0057
The controllers contain a series of programs written
Figure 32 Vibration Protection to perform the monitoring tasks (See Combustion
When the “VIBRATION TRANSDUCER FAULT” Monitoring Schematic Figure 33). The main moni-
message is displayed and machine operation is not tor program is written to analyze the thermocouple
interrupted, either an open or shorted condition may readings and make appropriate decisions. Several
be the cause. This message indicates that mainte- different algorithms have been developed for this
nance or replacement action is required. With the depending on the turbine model series and the type
<HMI> display, it is possible to monitor vibration of thermocouples used. The significant program
levels of each channel while the turbine is running constants used with each algorithm are specified in
without interrupting operation. the Control Specification for each unit.
<RST>
MAX TTKSPL5
MIN TTKSPL7
CONSTANTS
A L60SP1
A>B
TTXD2 B
CALCULATE A L60SP2
ACTUAL A>B
SPREADS B
A L60SP3
A<B
B
A L60SP4
A<B
B
id0049
The most advanced algorithm, which is standard for a. SPREAD #1 (S1): The difference between the
gas turbines with redundant sensors, makes use of highest and the lowest thermocouple reading
the temperature spread and adjacency tests to differ- b. SPREAD #2 (S2): The difference between the
entiate between actual combustion problems and highest and the 2nd lowest thermocouple
thermocouple failures. The behavior is summarized reading
by the Venn diagram (Figure 34) where:
c. SPREAD #3 (S3): The difference between the
highest and the 3rd lowest thermocouple
reading
VENN DIAGRAM ALSO TRIP IF:
S2 S1
The allowable spread will be between the limits
S
allow S
allow
uK
1 TTKSPL7 and TTKSPL6, usually 17° C 〈30° F) and
53° C (125° F). The values of the combustion moni-
TRIP IF S1 & S2
OR S2 & S3 COMMUNICATIONS
ARE ADJACENT FAILURE
TYPICAL K1 = 1.0
K2 = 5.0
tor program constants are listed in the Control Speci-
TRIP IF S1 & S2
K3
ARE ADJACENT
K3 = 0.8
fications.
MONITOR TC ALARM
ALARM S1 The various controller processor outputs to the
K1 K2 S
allow
id0050
<HMI> cause alarm message displays as well as ap-
Figure 34 Exhaust Temperature Spread Limits
propriate control action. The combustion monitor
outputs are:
Sallow is the “Allowable Spread”, based on aver- Exhaust Thermocouple Trouble Alarm
age exhaust temperature and compressor dis- (L30SPTA)
charge temperature.
If any thermocouple value causes the largest spread
S1, S2 and S3 are defined as follows: to exceed a constant (usually 5 times the allowable
FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEEDTRONIC 32 Fund_Mk_VI
MARK VI CONTROL SYSTEM
GE Power Systems
spread), a thermocouple alarm (L30SPTA) is pro- If any of the trip conditions exist for 9 seconds, the
duced. If this condition persists for four seconds, the trip will latch and “HIGH EXHAUST TEMPERA-
alarm message “EXHAUST THERMOCOUPLE TURE SPREAD TRIP” message will be displayed.
TROUBLE” will be displayed and will remain on The turbine will be tripped through the master pro-
until acknowledged and reset. This usually indicates tective circuit. The alarm and trip signals will be dis-
a failed thermocouple, i.e., open circuit. played until they are acknowledged and reset.
19 G1\L33VS411CX_A GAS FUEL SHUT OFF VALVE CLOSED TROUBLE 492 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.290:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.290:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
19
G1\L33VS421O_AL GAS FUEL SHUT OFF VALVE LIMIT SWITCH NOT OPEN 493 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.210:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.210:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
20 20
G1\L33VS421OX_A GAS FUEL SHUT OFF VALVE OPEN TROUBLE 494 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.310:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.Valve_Skid.310:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
21 G1\L33WNC_ALM WATER INJECTION VALVE CLOSING PB 572 PRC 21
*G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.110:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.110:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
22 G1\L63FG2_ALM HEAT VENT 63FG-2 SENSOR TROUBLE 284 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.81:TIMER_SEC5.coil; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.81:TIMER_SEC5.40:_TIMER.AT_TIME
22
G1\L63FGL_ALM GAS FUEL PRESSURE LOW 286 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.250:_MOVE_B.DEST
23 23
G1\L63FL1_ALM LIQUID FUEL OIL SYSTEM HIGH PRESSURE 735 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.187:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ALARMS_MICS.187:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
24 G1\L63FLZ_ALM LIQUID FUEL PRESSURE LOW 502 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqSeq.68:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqSeq.68:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 24
25 G1\L63HF1H_ALM HYDRAULIC SUPPLY FILTER HIGH DIFF PRESSURE 290 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.ALARMS_MICS.50:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.ALARMS_MICS.50:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
25
G1\L63HQ1L_ALM HYDRAULIC SUPPLY SYSTEM OUTPUT PRESSURE LOW 291 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.ALARMS_MICS.30:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@HYDR_SUPPLY.ALARMS_MICS.30:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
26 26
G1\L63JSH_ALM WI COMP INLET FILTER CLOGGED - BY PASS OPEN 603 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.WI_Filter.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
27 G1\L63LF3H_ALM LIQUID FUEL FILTER DIFF PRESS HIGH 504 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqSeq.520:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqSeq.520:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 27
28 G1\L63PGFT_ALM GAS FUEL PURGE HIGH PRESS IN INTERVLV 505 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.GAS_PRIM.170:_BENG.OUT 28
G1\L63PLLZ_ALM LIQ FUEL PURGE LOW AIR PRESS 506 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.LIQ_NO_DLN.240:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GASLIQ_PURGE.LIQ_NO_DLN.240:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
29 29
G1\L63QA2L_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER LOW PRESSURE 292 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QA.90:_BENG.OUT
30 G1\L63QB1L_ALM GENERATOR LIFT LIFTING OUTPUT LOW PRESSURE ALM 605 PRC 30
*G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.440:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.440:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
31 G1\L63QBF1H_ALM GENERATOR LIFT HIGH FILTER DIFF PRESSURE #1 ALARM 606 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.390:_MOVE_B.DEST 31
G1\L63QBF2H_ALM GENERATOR LIFT HIGH FILTER DIFF PRESSURE #2 ALARM 607 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENERT_LIFT.GenBrgLftGE.400:_MOVE_B.DEST
32 32
G1\L63QQ10H_ALM LUBE OIL MIST ELIM FILTER HIGH DIFF PRESSURE 294 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QV_2.200:_MOVE_B.DEST
33 33
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Last Modified Module Revision Customer Title Mark VI Software
12/20/06 18:20:13 Reliance Alarm Report
Build Major Revision Type Site DM Number Requisition Toolbox Revision DWG Engineer
Modified TMR Jamnagar E0601 503150 V11.03.24C General Electric Company #A014/A210 Vikram Muralidharan
Build Minor Revision Print Date Process Application Serial Number Shop Order No. Machine Size Cont. on Sh. Sh. No.
Salem, Va. USA
Modified 20-Dec-06 GenDrive #890123 MS9171-STD 0010 0009
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Signal Name Description Alarm ID Alarm Class HMI Screen Written At
01 01
G1\L63QQ1H_ALM LUBE OIL FILTER HIGH DIFF PRESSURE 295 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.70:_MOVE_B.DEST
02 G1\L63QQ8H_ALM LUBE OIL TORQUE CONVERT FILTER HIGH DIFF PRESSURE 296 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.76:_MOVE_B.DEST 02
03 G1\L63QT_ALM LUBE OIL GEN PRESSURE LOW LOW 297 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.23:_BENG.OUT 03
G1\L63QT_SENSR LUBE OIL HEADER PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT 298 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.40:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.40:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
04 04
G1\L63QTX_ALM TURBINE LUBE OIL HEADER PRESS LOW TRIP 299 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@TRIP.Trip.3070:_MOVE_B.DEST
05 G1\L63TF1H_ALM FLOW INLET FILTER DIFF PRESSURE 300 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FLOW_INLET.ALARMS_MISC.70:_MOVE_B.DEST
05
06 G1\L63TK_ALM COOL SEAL AIR EXH BLOWER FAN#1 OR #2 LOW DIFF PRES 301 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.140:_MOVE_B.DEST 06
G1\L63TKY_ALM EXHAUST FRAME PRESS SW TROUBLE 302 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.ALARMS_MISC.240:_BENG.OUT
07 07
G1\L63VGH_ALM LOAD COMP INLET FILTER CLOGGED - BY PASS OPEN 507 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.Load_Filter.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
08 G1\L63VLH_ALM DLN COMP INLET FILTER CLOGGED - BY PASS OPEN 608 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@HEAT_VENT.DLN_Filter.40:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\L63WC1L_ALM COOLING WATER PUMP DISCH PRESS LOW 303 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.T88WC_Pumps.310:_BENG.OUT 09
G1\L63WN3H_ALM WATER INJECTION FILTER DIFF PRESS HIGH 609 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.45:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WATER_INJECT.ALARMS_MISC.45:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
10 10
G1\L64D_ALM BATTERY 125VDC GROUND 304 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CTRLMODE.CtrlMdStat.540:_BENG.OUT
11 G1\L71FA1L_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD ADDITIVE TANK LOW LEVEL ALM 610 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.340:_MOVE_B.DEST
11
12 G1\L71FA1LX_ALM CRUDE OIL FWD ADDITIVE TANK LOW LEVEL 30 MIN ALM 611 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.370:_MOVE_B.DEST 12
G1\L71FA2L_ALM CRUDE OIL ADDITIVE SKID TANK FAULT 612 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CRUDE_OIL.ADDITIVE.460:_MOVE_B.DEST
13 13
G1\l71ff4h High Leakage Level 666 PRC *Q0.S9.J33.Contact09
14 G1\l71ff5hh Very High Leakage Level 667 PRC *Q0.S12.J33.Contact09
14
15 G1\l71ff6hh Very High Leakage Level 668 PRC *Q0.S18.J33.Contact02 15
16 G1\L71QH_ALM LUBE OIL TANK HIGH LEVEL 317 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.100:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\L71QL_ALM LUBE OIL TANK LOW LEVEL 318 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.90:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\L71WG1_ALM GENERATOR LIQUID LEVEL DETECTOR 319 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@MISC.Misc_Alarms.440:_MOVE_B.DEST
18 G1\L71WL_ALM COOLING WATER TANK LEVEL LOW 320 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOLWATSUPP.ALARM_MISC.17:_MOVE_B.DEST 18
19 G1\L71WS1_ALM SUMP TANK HIGH LEVEL 321 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUMP_TANK.ALARM_MISC.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 19
G1\L71WS4_ALM SUMP TANK VERY LOW LEVEL 322 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@SUMP_TANK.ALARM_MISC.60:_MOVE_B.DEST
20 20
G1\L72QE_ALM LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP NOT IN OPERATION 323 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.410:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.410:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
21 G1\L72QETST_ALM DC PUMP DID NOT START 324 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.590:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.590:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT 21
22 G1\L72QEZ_ALM LUBE OIL EMERGENCY PUMP IN OPERATION 325 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.430:_BENG.OUT 22
G1\L83CBLIMIT CBV FAILED TO CLOSE-LOAD LIMITING 328 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COOL_AIR.OUT_MODULE.70:_BENG.OUT
23 23
G1\L83HOST_ALM OVERSPEED TEST MODE SELECTED 329 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@OVRSPD.OvrSpdHp.185:_MOVE_B.DEST
24 G1\L83LBSX_ALM 2nd BREAKER SWITCHING RELAY FAILURE 613 PRC 24
*G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Serialbkr.202:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Serialbkr.202:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSY
25 G1\L96FGDIFF_AL GAS FUEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS DIFFERENCE FAILURE 370 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasLeakTest.880:_BENG.OUT 25
G1\L96FGH_ALM FUEL GAS PRESSURE HIGH 371 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.270:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.270:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
26 26
G1\L96FGL_ALM GAS FUEL SUPPLY PRESSURE LOW 372 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSplyPress.140:_BENG.OUT
27 G1\L96QV1_ALM LUBE OIL MIST ELIM HIGH PRESSURE 719 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QV_2.230:_COMPARE_F.OUT 27
28 G1\L96VSTH_ALM VIBRATION BN GT. AXIAL SHAFT DISPLACEMENT ALERT 657 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB_BN.R35K_VibProx.40:_MOVE_B.DEST 28
G1\L96VSTHH_ALM VIBRATION BN GT. AXIAL SHAFT DISPLACEMENT DANGER 658 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@VIB_BN.R35K_VibProx.50:_MOVE_B.DEST
29 29
G1\LAFPAP_SENSR BAROMETRIC PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS DISAGREE 373 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@AIRFLOW.AmbientPress.10:XPTS00.LDIFLMT
30 G1\LCPD_SENSR COMPRESSOR DISCH XDUCER DIFF FAULT HIGH 374 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@CPR.Cpr.20:XPTS00.LDIFLMT 30
31 G1\LCPRERR_ALM COMP OP LIMIT PROTECTION MAX CTRL ERROR 375 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMP.CompProt.190:_MOVE_B.DEST 31
G1\LDB_ABRT_ALM UNIT ABORTING DEAD BUS MODE 659 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Deadbus.520:_BENG.OUT
32 32
G1\LDB_FAIL_ALM UNIT NOT READY FOR DEAD BUS MODE 660 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Deadbus.150:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Deadbus.150:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
33 33
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Last Modified Module Revision Customer Title Mark VI Software
12/20/06 18:20:13 Reliance Alarm Report
Build Major Revision Type Site DM Number Requisition Toolbox Revision DWG Engineer
Modified TMR Jamnagar E0601 503150 V11.03.24C General Electric Company #A014/A210 Vikram Muralidharan
Build Minor Revision Print Date Process Application Serial Number Shop Order No. Machine Size Cont. on Sh. Sh. No.
Salem, Va. USA
Modified 20-Dec-06 GenDrive #890123 MS9171-STD 0013 0012
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Signal Name Description Alarm ID Alarm Class HMI Screen Written At
01 01
G1\LDBMD_OF_ALM UNIT DEAD BUS BRKR CLOSURE SUCCESSFUL 661 PRC
02 G1\LDBMD_ON_ALM UNIT READY FOR DEAD BUS MODE 662 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENSYNC.Deadbus.380:_BENG.OUT 02
03 G1\LDWATT_ALM MEGAWATT TRANSDUCER SIGNAL TROUBLE 376 PRC 03
*G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.GenMwattCtrl.70:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.GenMwattCtrl.70:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
G1\LDWCAL_ALM DWATT NONZERO WITH BREAKER OPEN 377 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.GenMwattCtrl.117:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@GENMWATT.GenMwattCtrl.117:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
04 04
G1\LFAGNBA_A GCV REG AT NULL COMP AUTHORITY LIMIT 378 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasNullComp.50:_BENG.OUT
05 G1\LFALNBA_A LCV REG AT NULL COMP AUTHORITY LIMIT 517 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqNullComp.30:_BENG.OUT
05
06 G1\LFPG2_SENSR INTERVALVE PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS DISAGREE 379 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.10:XPTS00.LDIFLMT 06
G1\LFQGUV_ALM GAS FUEL FLOW OUT OF RANGE 380 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.INPUTSIGNALS.205:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.INPUTSIGNALS.205:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OU
07 07
G1\LFQLDIFF_ALM FLOW DIVIDER FUEL HIGH FLOW DIFFERENCE 518 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqDvd.150:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_LIQ.LiqDvd.150:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
08 G1\LFSGRH_ALM SRV OPEN AT 90 % - RISK OF TRIP ON HIGH EXH TEMP 381 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.840:_MOVE_B.DEST
08
09 G1\LFSGRHH_ALM SRV VLV OPEN AT 95 % - XFER TO LIQUID FUEL 519 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS.GasSRV.890:_MOVE_B.DEST 09
G1\LFSRCPR_ALM COMP LIMIT FSR BACKUP CONTROL ACTIVE 382 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@COMP.CompProt.180:_MOVE_B.DEST
10 10
G1\LFTG_ALM GAS FUEL THERMOCOUPLE SIGNAL TROUBLE 383 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@FUEL_GAS_AUX.INPUTSIGNALS.26:_MOVE_B.DEST
11 G1\LRB_ALM GAS TURBINE LOAD RUNBACK 663 *G1.UNIT1.G1@HRSG_HSTP.HRSGHiTmpPro.40:_BENG.OUT
11
12 G1\LTBRGH_ALM LUBE OIL TG TEMP FEED/RETURN DIFF HIGH 387 PRC 12
*G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.80:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.80:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
G1\LTBRGHH_ALM LUBE OIL TG TEMP FEED/RETURN DIFF HIGH HIGH 388 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.150:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.150:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
13 13
G1\LTGBRGH_ALM LUBE OIL GEN TEMP FEED/RETURN DIFF HIGH 389 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.210:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.210:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
14 G1\LTGBRGHH_ALM LUBE OIL GEN TEMP FEED/RETURN DIFF HIGH HIGH 390 PRC
14
*G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.260:TIMER_SEC.log_out; *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.BEARINGDRAIN.260:TIMER_SEC.50:_BFILT.OUT
15 G1\LTNHLOSS_ALM LOSS OF CTRL SPEED SIGNAL - START EMERG. LO PUMP 391 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.T88QE.70:_BENG.OUT 15
16 G1\LTTH1_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER SENSOR#1 FAULT 392 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.210:_MOVE_B.DEST 16
G1\LTTH2_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER SENSOR#2 FAULT 393 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.230:_MOVE_B.DEST
17 17
G1\LTTH3_ALM LUBE OIL HEADER SENSOR#3 FAULT 394 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@LUBE_OIL.ALARMS_MISC.250:_MOVE_B.DEST
18 G1\LWLX4MIN INJECTION TO FUEL RATIO LOW: 4 MIN AVG 664 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WLNOX.Epa_Monitor.30:EPA_MON.lwlx4mn; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WLNOX.Epa_Monitor.30:EPA_MON.710:_BENG.OUT 18
19 G1\LWLXHR INJECTION TO FUEL RATIO LOW:HOURLY AVG 665 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@WLNOX.Epa_Monitor.30:EPA_MON.lwlxhr; *G1.UNIT1.G1@WLNOX.Epa_Monitor.30:EPA_MON.760:_BENG.OUT 19
G1\R5E_ALM EMERGENCY REMOTE MANUAL TRIP - MKVI PANEL 395 PRC *G1.UNIT1.G1@TRIP.Trip.3440:_BENG.OUT
20 20
G1\XUCVXR0S02_A <R> SLOT 2 UCVX DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 396 PRC *Q0.S2.CP.L3DIAG_UCVXR
21 G1\XUCVXS0S02_A <S> SLOT 2 UCVX DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 397 PRC *Q0.S2.CP.L3DIAG_UCVXS 21
22 G1\XUCVXT0S02_A <T> SLOT 2 UCVX DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 398 PRC *Q0.S2.CP.L3DIAG_UCVXT 22
G1\XVAICR0S04_A <R> SLOT 4 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 399 PRC *Q0.S4.CP.L3DIAG_VAICR
23 23
G1\XVAICR0S06_A <R> SLOT 6 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 400 PRC *Q0.S6.CP.L3DIAG_VAICR
24 G1\XVAICR0S08_A <R> SLOT 8 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 401 PRC *Q0.S8.CP.L3DIAG_VAICR 24
25 G1\XVAICR0S15_A <R> SLOT 15 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 402 PRC *Q0.S15.CP.L3DIAG_VAICR 25
G1\XVAICS0S04_A <S> SLOT 4 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 403 PRC *Q0.S4.CP.L3DIAG_VAICS
26 26
G1\XVAICS0S06_A <S> SLOT 6 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 404 PRC *Q0.S6.CP.L3DIAG_VAICS
27 G1\XVAICS0S08_A <S> SLOT 8 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 520 PRC *Q0.S8.CP.L3DIAG_VAICS 27
28 G1\XVAICS0S15_A <S> SLOT 15 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 405 PRC *Q0.S15.CP.L3DIAG_VAICS 28
G1\XVAICT0S04_A <T> SLOT 4 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 406 PRC *Q0.S4.CP.L3DIAG_VAICT
29 29
G1\XVAICT0S06_A <T> SLOT 6 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 407 PRC *Q0.S6.CP.L3DIAG_VAICT
30 G1\XVAICT0S08_A <T> SLOT 8 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 521 PRC *Q0.S8.CP.L3DIAG_VAICT 30
31 G1\XVAICT0S15_A <T> SLOT 15 VAIC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 408 PRC *Q0.S15.CP.L3DIAG_VAICT 31
G1\XVCMIR0S01_A <R> SLOT 1 VCMI DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 409 PRC *R0.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VCMIR
32 32
G1\XVCMIS0S01_A <S> SLOT 1 VCMI DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 410 PRC *S0.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VCMIR
33 33
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Last Modified Module Revision Customer Title Mark VI Software
12/20/06 18:20:13 Reliance Alarm Report
Build Major Revision Type Site DM Number Requisition Toolbox Revision DWG Engineer
Modified TMR Jamnagar E0601 503150 V11.03.24C General Electric Company #A014/A210 Vikram Muralidharan
Build Minor Revision Print Date Process Application Serial Number Shop Order No. Machine Size Cont. on Sh. Sh. No.
Salem, Va. USA
Modified 20-Dec-06 GenDrive #890123 MS9171-STD 0014 0013
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Signal Name Description Alarm ID Alarm Class HMI Screen Written At
01 01
G1\XVCMIT0S01_A <T> SLOT 1 VCMI DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 411 PRC *T0.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VCMIR
02 G1\XVCRCR0S09_A <R> SLOT 9 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 412 PRC *Q0.S9.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR 02
03 G1\XVCRCR0S12_A <R> SLOT 12 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 413 PRC *Q0.S12.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR 03
G1\XVCRCR0S13_A <R> SLOT 13 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 414 PRC *Q0.S13.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR
04 04
G1\XVCRCR0S14_A <R> SLOT 14 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 415 PRC *Q0.S14.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR
05 G1\XVCRCR0S17_A <R> SLOT 17 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 416 PRC *Q0.S17.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR
05
06 G1\XVCRCR0S18_A <R> SLOT 18 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 417 PRC *Q0.S18.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR 06
G1\XVCRCR0S19_A <R> SLOT 19 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 522 PRC *S0.S19.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCR
07 07
G1\XVCRCS0S09_A <S> SLOT 9 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 418 PRC *Q0.S9.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS
08 G1\XVCRCS0S12_A <S> SLOT 12 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 419 PRC *Q0.S12.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS
08
09 G1\XVCRCS0S13_A <S> SLOT 13 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 420 PRC *Q0.S13.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS 09
G1\XVCRCS0S14_A <S> SLOT 14 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 421 PRC *Q0.S14.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS
10 10
G1\XVCRCS0S17_A <S> SLOT 17 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 422 PRC *Q0.S17.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS
11 G1\XVCRCS0S18_A <S> SLOT 18 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 423 PRC *Q0.S18.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCS
11
12 G1\XVCRCT0S09_A <T> SLOT 9 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 424 PRC *Q0.S9.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT 12
G1\XVCRCT0S12_A <T> SLOT 12 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 425 PRC *Q0.S12.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT
13 13
G1\XVCRCT0S13_A <T> SLOT 13 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 426 PRC *Q0.S13.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT
14 G1\XVCRCT0S14_A <T> SLOT 14 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 427 PRC *Q0.S14.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT
14
15 G1\XVCRCT0S17_A <T> SLOT 17 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 428 PRC *Q0.S17.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT 15
16 G1\XVCRCT0S18_A <T> SLOT 18 VCRC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 429 PRC *Q0.S18.CP.L3DIAG_VCRCT 16
G1\XVPROR8S01_A <X> VPRO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 430 PRC *Q8.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VPROR
17 17
G1\XVPROS8S02_A <Y> VPRO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 431 PRC *Q8.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VPROS
18 G1\XVPROT8S03_A <Z> VPRO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 432 PRC *Q8.S1.CP.L3DIAG_VPROT 18
19 G1\XVRTDR0S20_A <R> SLOT 20 VRTD DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 433 PRC *R0.S20.CP.L3DIAG_VRTDR 19
G1\XVRTDS0S20_A <S> SLOT 20 VRTD DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 434 PRC *S0.S20.CP.L3DIAG_VRTDR
20 20
G1\XVRTDT0S20_A <T> SLOT 20 VRTD DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 435 PRC *T0.S20.CP.L3DIAG_VRTDR
21 G1\XVSVOR0S05_A <R> SLOT 5 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 436 PRC *Q0.S5.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOR 21
22 G1\XVSVOR0S07_A <R> SLOT 7 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 437 PRC *Q0.S7.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOR 22
G1\XVSVOS0S05_A <S> SLOT 5 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 438 PRC *Q0.S5.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOS
23 23
G1\XVSVOS0S07_A <S> SLOT 7 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 439 PRC *Q0.S7.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOS
24 G1\XVSVOT0S05_A <T> SLOT 5 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 440 PRC *Q0.S5.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOT 24
25 G1\XVSVOT0S07_A <T> SLOT 7 VSVO DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 441 PRC *Q0.S7.CP.L3DIAG_VSVOT 25
G1\XVTCCR0S19_A <R> SLOT 19 VTCC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 442 PRC *R0.S19.CP.L3DIAG_VTCCR
26 26
G1\XVTCCR0S21_A <R> SLOT 21 VTCC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 443 PRC *R0.S21.CP.L3DIAG_VTCCR
27 G1\XVTCCS0S21_A <S> SLOT 21 VTCC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 444 PRC *S0.S21.CP.L3DIAG_VTCCR 27
28 G1\XVTCCT0S21_A <T> SLOT 21 VTCC DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 445 PRC *T0.S21.CP.L3DIAG_VTCCR 28
G1\XVTURR0S10_A <R> SLOT 10 VTUR DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 446 PRC *Q0.S10.CP.L3DIAG_VTURR
29 29
G1\XVTURS0S10_A <S> SLOT 10 VTUR DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 447 PRC *Q0.S10.CP.L3DIAG_VTURS
30 G1\XVTURT0S10_A <T> SLOT 10 VTUR DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 448 PRC *Q0.S10.CP.L3DIAG_VTURT 30
31 G1\XVVIBR0S16_A <R> SLOT 16 VVIB DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 449 PRC *Q0.S16.CP.L3DIAG_VVIBR 31
G1\XVVIBS0S16_A <S> SLOT 16 VVIB DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 450 PRC *Q0.S16.CP.L3DIAG_VVIBS
32 32
G1\XVVIBT0S16_A <T> SLOT 16 VVIB DIAGNOSTIC ALARM 451 PRC *Q0.S16.CP.L3DIAG_VVIBT
33 33
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Last Modified Module Revision Customer Title Mark VI Software
12/20/06 18:20:13 Reliance Alarm Report
Build Major Revision Type Site DM Number Requisition Toolbox Revision DWG Engineer
Modified TMR Jamnagar E0601 503150 V11.03.24C General Electric Company #A014/A210 Vikram Muralidharan
Build Minor Revision Print Date Process Application Serial Number Shop Order No. Machine Size Cont. on Sh. Sh. No.
Salem, Va. USA
Modified 20-Dec-06 GenDrive #890123 MS9171-STD Final 0014
GEFL3688B
GE Power Generation
GE Generators - An Overview
GE GENERATORS - AN OVERVIEW
J. J. Gibney, III
GE Industrial & Power Systems
Schenectady, NY
cooled units, through indirect hydrogencooled Totals 521 3,220 1,342 1,335 6,416
units to direct water-cooled units.
During the 1950s through the mid-1970s much
emphasis was placed on developing units to sup Figure 1. GE generator experience
port the rapid growth in unit ratings, which
increased from 100 MW to more than 1100 MW. paper will give an overview of each of these basic
It was during this time frame that such innovative design classifications.
design features as direct water-cooled armature
windings, gap-pickup rotor winding cooling,
Micapal II TM stator insulation, Class F rotor and DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
stator insulation, advanced TetralocTM stator end- The design of synchronous generators is an
winding support systems, and the side ripple- optimization process. A generator design engi-
spring armature bar slot support structure were neer’s challenge is to develop a final design that,
developed. as best as is practical, optimizes the overall size,
In the early 1960s packaged gas-turbinedriven efficiency, performance capabilities and electrical
generators were introduced. These applications parameters, while maintaining mechanical, ther-
were characterized by the ambient-temperature- mal and magnetic limits. In addition, the designer
following nature of the gas turbine output and the must be aware of the need to minimize the overall
ability of the gas turbine to provide peaking capa- cost impact of the design.
bility for short periods. Generator designs were The development of modern analytical calcu-
developed which were tailored to gas turbine lation methods, including finiteelement analysis,
applications. As new gas turbines were intro- supplemented with the use of improved materi-
duced, or as older designs were uprated, genera- als, building upon component testing, has aided
tor designs were introduced to match the new gas the generator designer in the pursuit of an opti-
turbine ratings. mal design.
Over the course of the past decade, the empha-
sis in new electric power generation installations AIR-COOLED GENERATORS
has swung away from large units delivering major Air-cooled generators are produced in two
blocks of power to smaller units operated not only basic configurations: open ventilated (OV) and
by utilities, but by cogenerators or other smaller totallyenclosed water-to-air-cooled (TEWAC) . In
independent power production companies. In the OV design, outside air is drawn directly from
response to this change, GE is placing a major outside the unit through filters, passes through
emphasis on the design and development of gen- the generator and is discharged outside the gener-
erators suited to these applications. ator. In the TEWAC design, air is circulated within
Excluding marine service applications, GE cur- the generator passing through frame-mounted
rently has more than 6400 generators in service air-to-water heat exchangers.
(Figure 1) . These generators can be placed in three The recent emphasis in the marketplace on
major design classifications based on the cooling steam and gas turbinegenerators in the 20- to lOO-
medium used: air, hydrogen and liquid cooled. This MVA size has provided GE with the impetus to
GER-3688B
restructure its aircooled machines. A consequence account is the use of steam and water injection for
of the historical development of the turbinegener- NO, control. The output of the gas turbine can
ator market was that two lines of generators increase by 5% or more above its dry IS0 rating,
evolved, one for steam turbine applications and the depending on the level of steam or water injection
other for gas turbine applications, with little stan- required to meet the emission requirements. An
dardization between the designs. As GE embarked approach that results in the generator having suf-
on this design restructuring, it took the opportunity ficient capacity to match the gas turbine at the
to look at other issues which GE judged were criti- required NO, requirements has been factored
cal to its ability to maintain leadership in the design into the generator rating.
and manufacture of this size generator. Among
these issues were performance parameters, avail-
ability of features, cycle time and cost effectiveness. STANDARDS
All new designs will meet the requirements of
the applicable ANSI and IEC standards, as did the
MARKET NEEDS older designs.
The basic design of a generator, while influ-
enced primarily by material and electromagnetic
properties, is also impacted by market require- RELIABILITY
ments. Hence, customer discussions as well as Particular attention has been paid to known
recent market trends are used in the development problem areas based on inservice generator experi-
of a final generator design. Some of these include: ence. The new designs strive for a high level of relia-
winding temperature rise, industry standards, gen- bility and availability through attention to detail
erator ratings, etc. design and to the problems that have caused down-
time on older designs. In addition, the reliability of
the product will improve through design simplifica-
TEMPERATURE RISES tion and standardization, discussed below.
In the early 1970s GE introduced insulation sys-
tems capable of operating at class F temperatures
(155 C, 311 F) for the life of the generator. This PRODUCT
enabled a significant uprating of generator designs STANDARDIZATION
(about 10%) with a minimal increase in cost. To Standardization of the product line has signifi-
capitalize on this technical capability, GE designed cant benefits both to the user and to the manufac-
generators with Class F insulation and Class F rises.
turer. From the user’s viewpoint, the standardiza-
Many such generators built by GE are in service
tion of the product line translates into a simpler
and operating successfully at Class F temperatures.
machine with fewer unique parts, easier spare
However, the trend in recent specifications has
parts access and the reliability benefit of a larger
been toward Class F insulation systems operating at
fleet of identical machines, with the rapid identifi-
Class B temperatures. In order to be responsive to
cation of any performance problems that this
these requirements, the new designs will operate at
brings. The benefits to the manufacturer are that,
Class B temperatures according to ANSI and IEC
with fewer unique parts to track and check, fewer
standards.
different assemblies to build and fewer drawings
to keep up to date, the job of building a highqual-
GENERATOR RATINGS ity machine becomes simpler.
In a rapidly developing technology, such as that Standardization is being implemented at three
of the combustion turbine, it is inevitable that the levels. At the highest level, the number of differ-
output of a given gas turbine frame size will be ent designs can be reduced by careful selection of
increased from time to time. This has required generator ratings and the use of common designs
redesign of the generator to keep pace with the for gas and steam turbines. At the time the
rise in turbine output. The ratings of the genera- redesign project was begun, there were 17 unique
tors designed to match the gas turbine frame sizes air-cooled generator designs between 12 MVA and
have been set so that the generator will meet or 100 MVA. With careful choice this has been
exceed the gas turbine capability over the full reduced to six basic electromagnetic designs.
operating temperature range, taking into account The second level of standardization is illustrat-
the expected turbine upratings duriiig the life- ed in Figure 2. This shows the high level of stan-
time of the design. dardization achieved in covering the basic config-
Another important consideratioil that affects urations of the generator for the Frame 6 gas
the generator rating which must be taken into turbine (designated 6A3), 50 Hz or 60 Hz, open
2
GER-3688B
Design Option
6A3
5oHz
6OHz 6OHZ
Generator Component TEWAC ov TEWAC ov
BSBSBSBS
Frame.. ............................................... . .. . ,
Core.. ............................................... . . .. . . . .
Base .................................................
................................................. .
. .
. .
. .
. l .
. l
B - Brushless Excitation
* .%me Canp~nent Applied to Deoign Option
S - Static Excitation
GT164SOA
ventilated (OV) or totally enclosed (TEWAC) , and addition, while the gas turbines are the primary
brushless or static excitation. For example, the sta- application of the new air-cooled generators, they
tor frame, core and base, and the rotor forging can and have been applied with steam turbine
and rotor copper cross section are identical for drives as well (Figure 3).
any combination of these features. The only dif- The most detailed level of standardization is
ference between the 50-Hz stator and the 60-Hz with hardware such as fasteners and small compo
stator is the different stator bar. Everything else is nents. A carefully constructed list of preferred
the same. This component standardization can be hardware has been developed and the number of
extended to other ratings when the same compo different nuts, bolts and similar items has been
nent is used for two different machines. For exam- drastically reduced.
ple, the generator base is the same for the Frame The impact of standardization is illustrated in
5 generator as it is for the Frame 6 generator. In Figure 4, which shows the reduction in the num-
ber of parts and drawings required to build a sin-
I- ,
OLD DESIGN NEW DESIGN
REL. # OF
PARTS 1.0 0.6
REL. # OF
DRAWINGS 1.0 0.7
GT19263 GT1649’
Figure 3. Air-cooled steam turbine generator Figure 4. Impact of standardization
3
GER-3688B
gle new design as compared to its predecessor. configuration, a large range of design alternates
When these gains are compounded by the was considered, and the final choice of design
reduced number of unique designs, there is a pro reflects the optimization of the types of considera-
found effect on the productivity and quality of the tion described herein.
manufacturing operation.
One of the potential adverse effects of stan-
dardization can be a loss of flexibility to meet an
STATOR DESIGN
individual customer’s needs. This has been The stator frame is divided onto an inner and an
addressed first by building into the design those outer section, both of which mount on a single
features that are frequently specified. An example base fabrication. The inrrer frame is a very simple
is the use of stainless steel oil feed piping. This fea- structure designed to support the stator core and
ture is not requested by every customer, but it is winding while providing some guidance to the air
asked for often enough such that it is easier to flow in the machine. The stator core, made from
build every unit with the stainless steel piping. The grainoriented silicon steel for low loss and high
second way in which individual needs have been permeability, is mounted rigidly in the inrrer frame.
met is through “standard options.” These are pre- Isolation of the core vibration from the remainder
engineered options commonly requested for of the structure is accomplished through the use of
which drawings have been prepared ahead of flexible pads between the feet on the inner frame
time. and the base structure. The combined core and
These options can be readily incorporated in inner frame are designed to have a four-nodal natu-
the machine, within normal material procure- ral frequency well removed from 100 Hz or 120 Hz,
ment and manufacturing cycles. An additional and tests on the assembled inner frame confirmed
group of options is available that have not been the predicted natural frequencies.
pre-engineered due to the low frequency of The outer frame is a simple fabricated enclo-
request. These are available but with longer lead sure, which supports either the air inlets and
times since the necessary engineering work must silencers if the unit is open ventilated (Figure 5)
be accommodated. or the roof and cooler enclosure if the unit is
totally enclosed, water-to-air-cooled. The outer
frame further acts as an air guide to complete the
DESIGN AND ventilation paths and as a soundproof enclosure
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES to keep noise levels low. Since the rotor is pedestal
The design teams involved were organized with mounted, the end shields are very simple struc-
representation from all the major business func- tures. As with the inner frame, the outer frame
tions, and members of the design teams visited was designed to be free of resonances below 80
some representative customers to better under- Hz, and again, tests of the completed structure
stand user needs. In this way, the technical confirmed the design analysis.
requirements of the designs were influenced by The entire generator is mounted on a single
the needs of all the functions involved in the fabricated base, which supports the pedestals, the
design, manufacture, marketing and maintenance inrrer and outer frames, and the brush rigging or
of the generator. Features were incorporated into the exciter. The base contains piping for oil sup
the design specifically to aid producibility. Visits to plies, conduit for wiring and a number of compo
and discussions with potential vendors influenced nents associated with the main leads, such as light-
the design of components both for improved per- ning arresters and surge capacitors. The structural
formance and to suit vendors’ capabilities. Careful vibration of the base was also confirmed by test to
cost comparisons were made of alternative design be well away from any frequency of concern.
approaches to ensure that the final configuration The stator winding is a conventional lapwound
was cost effective. design. The insulating materials are those used
since the early 1930s thus maintaining the proven
reliability record. The materials are all designed
ELECTROMAGNETIC DESIGN and tested to provide reliable performance at
To achieve the reliability objectives of the pro Class F temperatures for the life of the machine.
ject, no new electromagnetic design limits have The stator bar copper is stranded and insulated
been used. The designs are based on proven tech- with Class F materials and is Roebelled for mini-
nology used in generators already in service. mum losses. The ground wall insulation is Micapal
Where appropriate, the technology used in larger HT, a proven Class F system (Reference 1). This is
units has been drawn upon to improve the a resin-rich tape system, with the volatiles removed
designs of these machines. In reaching the final under vacuum, which is then cured under pres-
4
GER-3688B
JGEWERMRI
,YR-:
sIL:zlc4
I
1; .:* I
I I GENERATOR
AIR
lNLET
GENERAlOR CGMPIRTYEN,
GT18560
Figure 5. Generator packaging
\RTD OR
FILLER
GLASS TAPE -E
ARMOR I SIDE RIPPLE
SPRING
TOP RIPPLE j
SPRING
f
FILLER/ J \ WEDGE
GT18494A-1
Figure 6. Stator slot section
GER-3688B
! - STATOR
FLANGE
i r BINDING
/ ’ BAND
I ;I SUPPORT
STAT01
KEYBA.. \
TION
STATOR
PUNCHINGS--,
\
VENTILATION - . .. ..
DUCT
BETWEEN BAR
FILLER
_----
\ ‘- GLASS
.------
WFDCXS -‘-\ \
\
?
\ M&END
ROVING
TIES
\
BLOCK ’ BINDING
(FINGER) RAND
GTlW!SA
6
Fan
Fan
Ring
GTlWX
/:YIR 1 1
OUTLE
1 AIR
FILTER
s,,k%ls~
‘Is =--=
1 $r II -f-- JI -J-
I
I INLET
* SILENCEAS
I j 1
GENERmJR
4 I / A,R
INLET
tie --....’
‘i -- -- ..--
I i '/%ki I 'I Lg.& t BEARING
t .-- 7;: - -.
I- DRIVE ’ -_, ‘;;ib- l-y;dA -* _- 1 IA
GEAR i,r: i+.
“: i I;
.I 1,
1. -- ;;;T-g*1, p!JJ--~7+sJ,,~ H I-- ‘:Ag
t I rlj’ .-, _IJ’
. imm,
‘-‘I ,: 1 K.‘&-;/y
’ ; +,I,-’
&mms SW& !
TR;:;aEFls
^:;g$g=
^.._^r..l
GT18561
core. The rotor winding, which is a directlycooled required on longer rotors, several wedges are used
radial flow design, is self-pumping and does not in each slot. The rotor slot insulation, turn insula-
rely on the fan for air flow. The overall ventilation tion and other materials in contact with the wind-
pattern is shown in Figure 9. ing are full Class F materials and have proven reli-
The rotor winding fits in a rectangular slot ability through use on other generator designs.
(Figure 10) and is retained by a full-length wedge
on the shorter machines. Where cross slots are
7
GER-3688B
COll Wedge
Measured Vibration
creepage BlWk Journal Probe Mils Peak-to-Peak (MM)
Location
and Orientation Broadband Filtered - l/Rev
Field COll
Turn l”S”latlOn
Turbine End Horizontal 0.90 (.023) 0.37 (.009)
GI1lU!M
Figure 10. Section through coil slot Figure 12.6A3 journal vibration maximum val-
ues observed for all speed and operat-
PACKAGING DESIGN ing conditions
The objective in the packaging design has been all the expected performance requirements
to reduce the number of sections (Figure 5) to throughout the load range. Some of the key test
simplify the structure and to improve the piping objectives are listed in Figure 11.
and wiring design for fewest parts and ease of Loss measurements confirmed the prediction
assembly. The lesser number of package sections of generator efficiency at the generator rated out-
leads to a stronger structure, but, more important- put, and heat runs both in the factory and under
ly, results in fewer feet of joint through which load confirmed that the generator would meet
unfiltered air can leak, thus aiding cleanliness in both NASI and IEC standards for Class B tempera-
the generator. Depending on the design, a num- ture rise.
ber of components have been relocated from the At the design stage, a great deal of attention
auxiliary cubicle into the base, simplifjring the was focused on achieving a smooth running rotor.
design of the auxiliary cubicle. Components in the Figure 12 shows the levels measured on a 6A3 at
base are low-maintenance items, and are accessible the site. These levels are significantly lower than
through covers in the collector compartment. those required by API, and also are much lower
A great deal of attention has been paid to cus- than those in a recently issued draft international
tomer requirements in this area, as the prefer- standard (7919/3). The API requirements for sep
ences of individual users frequently require pack- aration margins of rotor lateral critical speeds
aging changes. Ease of addition or removal of from operating speeds were also fully met.
features and hardware is critical to meeting these A noise survey was conducted during startup of
needs within the normal cycle times. the first 6A3, using the sound intensity method
which compensates for ambient noise effects. The
average generator near-field sound pressure was
TESTING determined from the measurements to be 85.7
Extensive prototype testing of each of the new dBA, which is very satisfactory, and compares
designs, both in the factory and under load at a favorably with the design target of 85 dBA.
customer’s site, has proven that the designs meet
CURRENT STATUS
Electrical Testing
Three new machines have been designed to
l Excitation Requirements
l Short Circuit Ratio
match the GE Frame 5,6 and ‘7 gas turbines. More
l Temperatures
than 130 generators of these new designs have
been shipped through the end of 1992, with
Mechanical Testing approximately one-half in service.
l Rotor Vibration
The air-cooled generator product line is contin-
l Stator Frame Vibration
uing to evolve. The generator that is being
l Noise
applied with the LM6000 aeroderivative gas tur-
l Stator Winding Vibration
l Ventilation
bine (Figure 13) was tested and shipped in 1992.
Its basic configuration is open ventilated (with a
TEWAC option), brushless exciter, pedestal-
GT22940
mounted bearings, on a “single-lift” base, rated 60
Figure 11. Factory and load test objectives
GER-3688B
RDC26475-2 GO2A-00.044
Approx.
Relative Relative Rel Heat
Spectfic Relative Practical Removal
FluId HEat Denstty Vol Flow Abihty
GT21022A
RDC26126.21-3
Figure 14. Air, hydrogen, water heat removal
comparison Figure 16.7F generator
MVA at 0.8 pf. In 1993, a 160 MVA, 50-Hz air- below, while direct water cooling of armature
cooled generator, to be used primarily with the windings is applied to units above 250 MVA. This
frame 9E gas turbine, will be tested as well. division results from design optimization. While it
is possible to apply water cooling on machines
rated below 250 MVA, the cost/performance ben-
HYDROGEN-COOLED efit suffers. Water cooling adds manufacturing
GENERATORS complexity, as well as requires the need for an
auxiliary water cooling and deionizing skid, plus
As the rating of steam turbines rose in the associated piping, control and protection features.
1930-1950 time frame, it became clear that in At higher ratings, the cost of this complexity is off-
order to keep the size, weight, ability to ship and set by the advantage of producing a generator of
cost of a generator within reason, a more optimal significantly smaller size than a comparable con-
cooling medium needed to be used. Hence the ventionallycooled generator.
introduction of hydrogen. Hydrogen-cooled generator construction
How well the armature winding of a generator (Figure 15)) except for the frame, is very similar
is cooled has a significant influence on the overall to that of air-cooled generators. The stator slot
size of a synchronous generator. The cooling of and end winding support designs are essentially
the armature winding is dependent on a number like those shown in Figures 6 and ‘7. Most designs
of factors: cooling medium (air, hydrogen, water) ; use direct radial flow cooling similar to that
insulation thickness; and overall electrical losses shown in Figure 10. The stator frame, on the
(12R + load loss). As Figure 14 shows, relative heat other hand, because of the need to contain 30
removal capability improves from air to hydrogen, psig (2.07 bar) to 45 psig (3.10 bar) hydrogen,
with increased hydrogen pressure, and even more uses thick plate cylindrical construction. End
significant with the use of water cooling. shields are appropriately more rugged, and con-
Conventional hydrogen cooling can be utilized on tain a hydrogen seal system to minimize leakage.
generators rated approximately 300 MVA and Conventional hydrogen cooling, while available
9
GER-3688B
- /
G02A-00-043 POP35782
?OO systarri
Faults
Xela~rvai
FGiZO ioao Cycrlng
Normar
f-1hom?ai Expanslan)
Fiunnmg
FBC%S
1 -
i
L-. ---L ..-.--.-L-.-L-
7 102 d 4 1010 30’2
Total ~*~~~ of Cycles
w a .3t?-bar 4ime Span
GO4A-00-019 GT21019
Figure 18. Hollow copper strand construction Figure 20. Cyclic duty on stator winding in
30 years
for generators rated below 100 MVA, is most rated units. These present unique design require-
often applied to steam-turbinedriven units above ments must be addressed if high reliability and
100 MVA, as well as with the frame 9 and 7F long life of the equipment is to be maintained.
(Figure 16) and frame 7FA and 9F gas turbines.
Insulation
HYDROGEN/WATER-COOLED The stator insulation material used in modern
GENERATORS GE water-cooled generators consists of an epoxy-
Even more compact generator designs are mica-based system called Micapal. Micapal I was
achievable through the use of direct water cooling introduced in 1954, partially as a solution to tape
of the generator armature winding (Figure 17). migration and girth cracking problems associated
These designs employ hollow copper strands with the then almost universally applied asphalt-
(Figure 18) through which deionized water flows. insulation-based system.
The cooling water is supplied via a closed-loop In 1975, an improved epoxy-mica system was
auxiliary-base-mounted skid. The cool water introduced (Micapal II). This all-mica paper insu-
enters the winding through a distribution header lation has improved mechanical toughness (15%)
on the connection end of the generator and the and voltage endurance (12%). While these prop
warm water is discharged in a similar manrrer on erties were developed to meet the requirements
the turbine end of the generator (Figure 19). of very large ratings, the application of Micapal II
The armature voltage and current of hydro- on small and midsize units permits further opti-
gen/watercooled generators are significantly high- mization opportunities. Micapal II has excellent
er than those of air- or hydrogencooled units. As a thermal cycling capability, and is particularly suit-
result, the insulation voltage stress and forces on ed for the daily start/stop duty required of many
the armature windings can be several orders of units today.
magnitude larger than those experienced on lower-
10
GER-3688B
11
GER-3688B
INSULATING
CREEPAGE BLOCK INLET WEDGE
I WARM GAS
OUT
r OUTLET
8,
WEDGE
COOL GAS IN \
D COPPER CHANNEL
SUB-DIVIDED
FIELD CONDUCTOR
\- SLOT INSULATION
\
‘. TURN INSULATION
GT17110A
12
GEK3688B
‘)“A
CI I”
c-,.“.(.*rln~
““I l”“C,“l
Copper Temperature
Temperature Rise From Bottom A
OF OC
/ A
140 60
II \I
/’ -’
122 50
-
104 40
t I T
Rotor
Baftle
I
GTZlOZOA
Figure 25. Diagonal-flow cooling field winding temperature profile
Rotor Balance
One of the most critical rotor manufacturing
requirements, after all the parts are accurately
machined and carefully assembled, is the final bal-
ance operation. This ensures that the rotor vibra-
tion will be within acceptable limits and that the
rotor remains straight within very close tolerances
at all running speeds up to and including the
maximum specified overspeed.
The design work initially includes the accurate
calculation of all shaft stiffness and critical speeds. To
correct for the double frequency vibrations which
would otherwise occur, cross slots of appropriate
Figm-e 26. Arrangement of locking key and depth and number are specified in the pole centers
shrink fit of most twopole rotors to equalize the bending stiff-
ness between the direct and quadrature axes.
the ring material must be nonmagnetic to mini- Provisions are incorporated for making balance
mize the end leakage flux and reduce heating of weight corrections. Each GE hydrogencooled gen-
the core end structure. erator field is supported in its own pair of bearings.
For many years, nonmagnetic retaining rings Balancing and overspeed testing are per-
have been made from an 18Mn-5Cr steel alloy. formed in GE’s factory balance facility. A high-
However, it was not until the mid-1970s that the speed multiplane modal balancing procedure is
susceptibility of 185 retaining rings to stress-corro used. This procedure is done to ensure minimum
sion cracking became known. As a result of coop- vibration levels at every speed up to the maxi-
erative programs with retaining ring suppliers, a mum specified overspeed.
different alloy, 18Mn-18Cr (originally proposed by
GE), was selected as a better retaining ring materi-
al. This material has the required properties, CONCLUSION
including high resistance to stress-corrosion crack-
ing in the types of environments of which rings While this paper has focused mainly on the
may be exposed during the service life of the gen- “flange-to-flange” generator, the successful opera-
erator. GE now supplies 18-l 8 retaining rings on tion of a steam or gas turbine generator involves
its generators. other systems as well. Discussion of excitation,
lube oil, hydrogen and stator cooling water sys-
tems, as well as generator protection and opera-
tion, can be found in other GE publications.
13
GER-3688B
REFERENCE
0 1994 GE Company
14
GEK 95159c
g
Revised, May 2007
GE Energy
Description
Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator
Electrical and Mechanical Features
(Brushless Excitation)
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further
information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's
purposes the matter should be referred to the GE Company.
2
Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator GEK 95159c
The ventilation path is integral with the stator frame structure and is a completely closed structure
with the exception of a small amount of make up air that is designed to leak at the interface between
the rotor and the outer air shield at each end of the machine.
B. Stator Core
The stator core is made up of segmented, annealed, insulated punchings (see Figure 2) of high-
quality, silicon steel. These punchings are assembled in an interleaved manner on keys machined on
the key bars, and are separated into packets by space blocks to provide ventilation ducts. The
punchings are stamped from thin steel sheets and contain open-end slots for the armature bars with
dovetail slots for the wedges which hold the armature bars in place. Other dovetail slots at the back of
the punching are for assembly and locking of the segments on the key bars. The assembled punchings
are clamped into a stiff cylindrical core by pressure applied through end flanges by means of the
stator key bars. Pressure is applied to the teeth by non-magnetic steel fingers located under the end
flanges (see Figure 4). In order to reduce end heating caused by the end leakage flux and its
associated electrical losses, the end packets of punchings are stepped back at the ends of the stator
core to increase the gap between the punchings and the rotor. The punching insulation is a thermo-
setting varnish designed to maintain its insulating value at temperatures above the normal operating
range.
C. Stator Winding
The stator winding is composed of insulated bars assembled in the stator slots, joined at the ends to
form coils, and connected in the proper phase belts by bus rings. Each phase is split into groups of
coils 180° apart. The stator bars are composed of insulated copper conductors (strands) transposed by
the “Roebel” method so that each strand occupies every radial position in the bar for an equal length
along the bar. This arrangement minimizes the circulating current loss which would otherwise be
present under load conditions due to the distribution of magnetic flux in the coil slot. (See Figure 3
for details of the transposed bar.)
The main “ground wall” insulation is a mica paper-based type structure, utilizing a Class F thermo-
setting binder. The ground insulation is cured during vacuum, pressure and then heating cycles to
compact
3
GEK 95159c Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator
the system and eliminate voids. The result is a high-density, high dielectric strength system which
maintains high mechanical strength throughout the operating temperature range.
An outer covering of protective tape is applied to the core portion of the bar to protect the bar from
abrasion in the slot. This protective tape is impregnated with a controlled-resistivity material to
prevent slot discharge sparking and vibration sparking. The end arms of the bars are graded with a
nonlinear voltage grading material.
The stator coil ends are covered with an outer layer of tape to bind and protect the mica insulation,
after which they are sprayed with epoxy paint. These end turns are securely laced with treated glass
cord to the binding bands, which are molded fiberglass rings supported from the stator core flanges
(see Figure 4). The armature bars are held in the coil slots by wedges driven into the dovetail slots.
Two temperature detectors are provided to measure the inlet air temperature and one for outlet
temperature. The leads from the detectors are brought out through the generator frame and connected
to terminal boards for connection to temperature meters or relays. The locations of the resistance
temperature detectors, and the arrangement of connections at the terminal board, are shown on the
Connection Outline drawing. A description of the detectors and circuit is given in the instructions for
RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS.
E. Generator Leads
The main armature leads are brought out of either side of the stator frame at the exciter end,
depending on the product line, and are available for outgoing and neutral bus connections.
The leads exit through insulated bushings, bolted to the side of the frame, which clamp and support
the leads. The leads are suitable for connection to bus bars. Both ends of each phase are brought out
to accommodate differential protection equipment.
F. Air Coolers
Generator air coolers are mounted horizontally in the plenum chamber on top of the frame. Water
inlet, outlet and vent pipe connections are made externally on either side of the unit to suit station
arrangement. Seals are made by gaskets between the frame and the cooler water box. The method of
sealing is such that the water boxes and covers can be removed to clean a cooler without opening the
generator air ventilation circuit. See instructions in MAINTENANCE.
G. Stator Ventilation
The rotor fans provide the ventilation of the generator. They are the radial flow type assembled near
the ends of the rotor. The entrance conditions of the air to the fans is controlled by an inlet nozzle.
Cooling air is forced by the fans into the air gap, and also around and behind the stator core. The
stator is divided axially into sections by the web plates so that in some sections cold air is forced
from the outside of the core toward the air gap through the radial air ducts, while in other sections it
passes from the air gap toward the outside of the core through the radial ducts. The cooling air is
conducted through tubes
4
Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator GEK 95159c
5
GEK 95159c Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator
or ducts to the proper section, and hot air is directed back to the coolers. After the heat is removed by
the coolers, cold air is returned to the rotor fans and recirculated.
The arrangement of alternate inward and outward air flow in the stator core results in a substantially
uniform cooling of the core and windings, thus avoiding excessive local heating and reducing stresses
caused by temperature differentials.
Longitudinal slots, machined radially in the body, contain the field coils. The field coils are held in
the slots against centrifugal force by steel wedges. These wedges are fitted into dovetail openings
machined in the rotor slots.I.
The rotor fans, provided for the ventilation of the generator, are assembled near the ends of the rotor.
The rotor is cooled externally by the air flowing along the gap over the rotor surface, and internally
by air which passes under the rotor end windings, and axially under the rotor winding, through the
subslot channels, and radially outward through holes in the coils and wedges.
The field winding consists of rectangular copper bars, fabricated into coils. Several turns in one pair
of slots around one pole form a coil. Several coils are assembled around each pole to form the
winding. The individual turns are insulated from each other. The coils are insulated from the slot wall
in the body portion by molded slot liners. To provide maximum ventilation and cooling, the end
portions of the field coils are left bare except for turn insulation. Molded ring insulation is provided
between the coils and the retaining rings, and epoxy-glass blocking is provided in the end windings to
separate and support the coils and restrict their movements under stresses from thermal and rotational
forces.
The end turns are held in place against centrifugal force by heavy retaining rings machined from high
strength, corrosion-resistant alloy-steel forgings which are shrunk and key-locked onto the rotor
body.
The axial movement of the field winding is restricted by the centering ring, which is held in place by
a shrink fit onto the retaining ring.
J. Brushless Excitation
A description of the brushless exciter may be found in the Exciter Section of the Instruction Book.
K. Pedestals and Bearings
The generator rotor bearings and oil supply piping are contained in pedestals. For aeroderivative
turbines only, the drive end pedestal also contains provisions for accommodating turbine thrust
requirements. The pedestals and the bearings are split on the horizontal centerline of the bearing to
facilitate their removal.
The bearing at the exciter end of the generator is insulated from the generator frame to prevent the
flow of shaft currents.
6
Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator GEK 95159c
The lubricating oil is retained within the pedestal by seal rings on the bearing assembly and by oil
deflectors on either side of the pedestal.
A detailed description of the bearings and pedestal is provided in a separate instruction, PEDESTALS
AND BEARING, listed in the table of contents.
L. Air Shields
The outer air shields are bolted and sealed such that the surface of the bearing pedestals is entirely
outside the internal generator ventilation circuit.
The inner air shields are located between the ends of the armature windings and the outer air shields
to separate the fan discharge air from the air entering the fans. Air seal fan nozzle rings are attached
to the inner air shields to prevent the fan discharge air from leaking into the fan inlet.
7
GEK 95159c Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled Generator
g GE Energy
General Electric Company
www.gepower.com
8
g
GEK 106931d
Revised, July 2007
GE Energy
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further
information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's
purposes the matter should be referred to the GE Company.
This compact generator has been designed for ease of installation and reduced on-site installation cycle
time. The generator is a fully assembled package with the rotor already installed.
The totally enclosed, water-to-air-cooled (TEWAC) generator is designed for operation with air as the
cooling medium. The ventilating air is circulated by fans located at the end of the generator rotor. The
separately excited rotating field is supported by end shield mounted bearings located at each end of the
generator frame.
The stator frame containing the stator core and armature winding along with the shields, bearings and
rotor are assembled for mounting on the concrete foundation. Figure 1 shows the configuration for a flat
slab foundation. Figure 2 shows the configuration for a pedestal foundation. The water to air heat
exchangers (coolers) are mounted above the generator. Flange connections are provided for the customers
cooling water lines. Mechanical power is derived from the turbine.
2
Description Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled 9A4 and 9A5 Generator with Brushless GEK 106931d
Excitation
The generator is designed for continuous operation. Temperature detectors installed in the generator
permit the measurement of the stator winding and air temperatures. The generator is constructed to
withstand, without harm, all normal conditions of operation, as well as transient conditions such as
system faults, load rejection and mal-synchronization.
The stator frame consists of a casing of welded plate construction, reinforced internally by web plates in
the radial direction, and by braces and springbars in the axial direction.
A series of floating web plates are welded to key bars which support the stator core. The floating web
plates are suspended on springbars welded to fixed web plates. This isolates both radial and tangential
magnetic vibration. Core motion is limited to safe levels by stop collars on several springbars.
The stator core is made up of segmented, annealed, insulated punchings (see Figure 2) of high-quality,
silicon steel. These punchings are assembled in an interleaved manner on the key bars, and are separated
into packets by space blocks to provide ventilation ducts. The punchings are stamped from thin steel
sheets and contain open-end slots for the armature bars with dovetail slots for the wedges which hold the
armature bars in place. Other dovetail slots at the back of the punching are for assembly and locking of
the segments on the key bars. The assembled punchings are clamped into a stiff cylindrical core by
pressure applied through end flanges by torquing the nuts which are assembled onto the threaded key bar
ends. Pressure is applied to the teeth by non-magnetic steel outside space blocks (fingers) located under
the end flanges (see Figure 3). In order to reduce end heating caused by the end leakage flux and its
associated electrical losses, the end packets of punchings are radially stepped back at the ends of the
stator core to increase the gap between the punchings and the rotor. The punching insulation is a thermo-
setting varnish designed to maintain its insulating value at temperatures above the normal operating
range.
3
GEK 106931d Description Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled 9A4 and 9A5 Generator with Brushless
Excitation
The stator winding is composed of insulated bars assembled in the stator slots, joined at the ends to form
coils, and connected in the proper phase belts by connection rings. The bars are secured in the slot by top
and side ripple springs, which ensure tight seating of the bars during operation. Each phase is split into
groups of coils 180 apart. The stator bars are composed of insulated copper conductors (strands)
transposed by the “Roebel” method so that each strand occupies every radial position in the bar for an
equal length along the bar. This arrangement minimizes the circulating current loss which would
otherwise be present under load conditions due to the distribution of magnetic flux in the coil slot (see
Figure 4 for details of the transposed bar).
The micaceous insulation system with epoxy binder is applied to form the main “ground wall” of
insulation over the stator bar. This insulation system consists of several layers of mica tape half-lapped
over the bars, which is processed to form a high density, high dielectric strength system with high tensile
strength throughout the operating temperature range.
An outer covering of protective tape is applied to the core portion of the bar to protect the bar from
abrasion in the slot. This tape is impregnated with a controlled-resistivity material to prevent slot
discharge and vibration sparking. The end arms of the bars are graded with a non-linear voltage grading
material.
The stator coil ends are covered with an outer layer of tape to bind and protect the mica insulation, and
then sprayed with epoxy paint. These end turns are securely laced with treated glass cord to molded
fiberglass support rings positioned from the stator core flanges (see Figure 3). The armature bars are held
in the coil slots by wedges driven into the dovetail slots.
Six resistance-type temperature detectors, two in each phase, are located between coils of the armature
windings to measure the temperature of the windings at the points of expected highest temperature.
4
Description Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled 9A4 and 9A5 Generator with Brushless GEK 106931d
Excitation
Inlet and outlet air temperatures are each measured by two temperature detectors. The leads from the
detectors are brought out through the generator frame and connected to terminal boards for connection to
temperature meters or relays. The locations of the resistance temperature detectors, and the arrangement
of connections at the terminal board, are shown on the Connection Outline drawing. A description of the
detectors is given in the instructions for RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DETECTORS, listed in the
table of contents.
In the standard configuration, the main armature leads are brought out of the upper side portion of the
stator. The leads exit the frame through insulated terminal plates which clamp and support the leads. The
neutral leads exit the side opposite the line leads.
Generator air coolers are mounted horizontally above the machine (see Figure 5). Water inlet, outlet and
vent pipe connections are made externally on either side of the unit to suit station arrangement. The
method of sealing is such that the water boxes and covers can be removed to clean a cooler without
opening the generator air ventilation circuit. See instructions in MAINTENANCE.
The generator is cooled by an internally re-circulating air stream that dissipates the generator heat
through air-to-water heat exchangers. For maximum cooling effectiveness, a reverse flow ventilation
system is used (see Figure 5). The reverse flow system supplies the coldest cooling air to both stator and
rotor simultaneously. Cold air from the heat exchangers is drawn directly through the stator core from
chambers between section plates at the outside diameter of the core. Structural plates positioned
circumferentially around the
5
GEK 106931d Description Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled 9A4 and 9A5 Generator with Brushless
Excitation
stator core form flow chambers that are used to control the inlet pressure and regulate the air flow.
Ventilation of the armature core is accomplished by forcing air radially inward through cooling ducts
formed by space blocks between lamination packets. As the air flows radially inward it accelerates and
reaches maximum cooling velocity at the armature bars and core teeth — the region of greatest heat
generation. The cooling flow is drawn from the stator, through the air gap by rotor mounted fans and
directed to the cooler inlet.
The construction of the generator rotor is illustrated in Figure 6 and Figure 7. The rotor is machined from
a single alloy-steel forging which has passed extensive tests to assure that the forging meets the required
physical and metallurgical properties.
6
Description Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled 9A4 and 9A5 Generator with Brushless GEK 106931d
Excitation
Longitudinal slots, machined radially in the body, contain the field coils. The field coils are held in the
slots against centrifugal force by steel wedges. These wedges are fitted into dovetail openings machined
in the rotor slots (see Figure 8).
7
GEK 106931d Description Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air-Cooled 9A4 and 9A5 Generator with Brushless
Excitation
B. Brushless Excitation
A description of the Brushless Exciter may be found in the “Exciter Section” of the instruction book
(see table of contents).
C. Bearings
The generator rotor bearings and oil supply piping are contained in end shields. The end shields and
the bearings are split on the horizontal centerline of the bearing to facilitate their removal.
Tilting-pad, pedestal bearings are used to minimize vibration during operation. The bearings
incorporate a special seal design to prevent oil leakage. Optional hydrostatic oil lift is available to
dramatically reduce starting torque requirements and thus prolong bearing life.
The lubricating oil is retained within the end shield by seal rings on the bearing assembly by
pressurized oil deflectors on either side of the end shield. Both the generator and the turbine are
served by a common lube oil system.
The bearing at the exciter end of the generator is electrically insulated from the generator frame to
prevent the flow of shaft currents.
D. End Shields
The end shields are bolted and sealed to the frame to limit the amount of air leakage (see Figure 5).
The inner air shields are located between the ends of the armature windings and the outer air shields,
to separate the fan discharge from the air entering the fans. Close radial clearance is maintained
between the fans and the inner air shields to prevent the fan discharge air from leaking into the fan
inlet (see Figure 3 and Figure 5).
g GE Energy
General Electric Company
www.gepower.com
8
GE Power Systems
GENERATOR FUNDAMENTALS
that the induced voltage in each add to result in much These two relationships lead mathematically to oth-
higher and stronger voltages. er equally valid relationships. One of the most im-
portant is shown following:
The principle of induced voltages due to relative
motion between electrical conductors and magnetic W = I2 R
fields govern the design and manufacture of alter- Where: V = volts R= ohms of resistance , and I =
nating current generators. The study of alternating amperes
current generators is, therefore, a study of the inter-
action between electrical and magnetic circuits, and
the resulting magnetic forces and electrical energy. This relationship indicates that the power absorbed
Note Figure 2 illustrating the basic factors necessary or developed in any portion of an electrical circuit
to induce voltage in an electrical conductor. will be in proportion to the resistance of the circuit
and to the square of the current flowing. This power
appears as heat. Thus, four times the amount of pow-
AMMETER er will be dissipated and four times the amount of
DIRECTION
OF heat will be developed if the current flow is doubled.
MOTION
– +
In the design of high voltage generators it is, of
N S
course, necessary to insulate the voltage carrying
FIXED conductors to keep current flow in the desired path
CONDUCTOR
where it may be controlled and distributed as de-
sired. Very effective insulation is required at all
A VOLTAGE IS INDUCED IN THE STATIONARY CONDUCTOR
WHEN THE MAGNETIC FIELD MOVES ACROSS IT. REVERSING points to safeguard personnel and machinery or oth-
THE DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT OF THE MAGNETIC FIELD er equipment from contact with high voltage and
WILL CAUSE THE DIRECTION OF THE INDUCED VOLTAGE AND
RESULTING CURRENT FLOW TO REVERSE.
from possibilities of destructive short circuit cur-
rents. The insulation necessary to electrically safe-
Figure 2 Electromagnetic Induction guard generator windings is a major obstruction to
removing the I2 losses appearing as heat and which
must be removed to keep temperatures of generators
RELATIONSHIPS OF ELECTRICAL and windings to satisfactory levels.
VOLTAGE, CURRENT AND POWER Earlier, it was explained that relative motion be-
tween a conductor and magnetic field was necessary
A direct current is a current produced by a steady to induce electrical voltages in the conductor. Since
non–oscillating, or uni–directional voltage. In such direct current energy is at essentially steady condi-
an electric circuit, the power developed in watts will tions at any given instant, it is not suited for direct
be equal to the product of the current and the voltage generation by electromagnetic methods.
measured in amps and volts respectively, or:
Consequently, all rotating generators are essentially
W = VI alternating current generators with their voltage pro-
duced by the effects of alternating magnetic fields
Where: W = watts, V = volts, and I = amperes and the laws of magnetic induction. The so–called
Also, in such DC circuits the voltage across any se- DC generators are, therefore, really AC generators
lected portion of the circuit will be equal to the prod- with provisions for rectifying or converting the AC
uct of the current flowing and the resistance of that voltage to DC in removing them from the generator.
portion of the circuit, or: This function is performed by the commutator and
its associated voltage gathering circuits in DC gen-
V = RI erators.
M–29 (B00082) 3 GENERATOR FUNDAMENTALS
GE Power Systems
Again, due to the lack of continuously varying mag- comparison, the “average” value of the AC wave
netic fields, DC current and voltage does not lend it- form will be 0.636 times the maximum valve.
self to many functions desirable in transmitting large
blocks of electrical power. For instance, transform- In power generation and distribution, the mean ef-
ers may be used to convert the AC power output of fective valve is the only one of interest as this is the
large generators to extremely high voltages with valve measured by instruments, used in calcula-
corresponding reductions in current with relatively tions, etc. All references to AC amps or volts auto-
small losses. Power in this form may then be trans- matically refer to this mean heating value. Note, the
mitted for long distances with only a fraction of the AC wave form shown on Figure 3.
losses at normal voltage and current since the actual
current flow is very small. You will recall that power
or heating loss will be proportional to the square of CURRENT & VOLTAGE IN PHASE
the current flowing.
ONE CYCLE =
360°
0
Thus, alternating current or voltage continuously
varies and undergoes repetitive reversals in positive
and negative cycles. The usual frequency at which
AC power is generated and distributed in the U.S. is TIME
60 cycles per second. As has previously been stated,
most modern generators are two–pole generators CURRENT LAGGING VOLTAGE BY θ DEGREES
driven at a constant 3600 RPM to produce 60–cycle
V
power, although some four–pole, 1800 RPM mod-
ern units will be found, mainly on cross compound l
units where the low pressure turbine and generator
runs on steam exhausting from the high pressure tur- 0
bine. The size of the turbine steam path parts are apt θ°
The effects of electromagnetic induction lead to relationships in AC current and voltage, and note
many adaptions or uses to facilitate the handling and that when phase relationship between current and
use of AC power. Its effects also introduce some voltage is different by 90° the current wave is at zero
slight complications in power measurement and cal- whenever the voltage wave is at its maximum and
culation which, for many years, was a major mystery vice versa.
and impediment to the advancement of the electrical
These considerations lead to the following relation-
industry.
ship for computing power in AC circuits due to the
An amp of AC power is equivalent in most all re- possible effects of voltage and current not “working
spects to an amp of DC power and the same may be together” or being out of phase.
said of an AC volt relative to a DC volt. However,
W = VI X PF
the cycle of AC voltage which produces a given
cycle of current may or may not reach its maximum Where: W = watts, V = volts, I = amperes and PF
and minimum values at the same instant as the cur- = power factor.
rent cycle. If the two waves, current and voltage, did
and power factor is the cosine of the angle of lag or
reach their positive and negative peaks at exactly the
lead (phase angle) between the voltage and current.
same instant, or were exactly “in phase”, the power
produced would be equal to the volts indicated by a
NOTE
voltmeter multiplied by the amps indicated by an
ammeter, just as in a DC circuit. See Figure 4 for a visual analogy of phase and
power factor in relation to the power produced.
In AC circuits the use of coils, condensers, and other
types of devices in the continuously variable mag-
netic fields will have the effect of causing slight lags It should be noted, however, that the expression for-
in the buildup of current compared to the applied power dissipated in heat for DC circuits will still be
voltage in a given cycle due to the effect of induced valid in AC circuits since one ampere of AC by defi-
voltages, sometimes referred to as “counter volt- nition will produce the same amount of heating as an
ages” since they will be in a direction to oppose the ampere of DC. This is repeated from page 3 as fol-
current flow causing them. lows:
Similarly, some devices such as capacitors or con- W = I2R
densors will have the effect of causing the voltage to
Where: W = watts, I = amperes, and R = ohms of
slightly lag the current in an AC circuit due to the
resistance.
tendency of such devices to store or “hold” a charge
of voltage, yet offer no resistance to current flow. In Consequently, operators of alternating current tur-
any case, the current would be said to be out of phase bine–generators carefully monitor the power factor
with the voltage and would, therefore, lag or lead the at which AC power is supplied. They are paid by the
voltage slightly in a given time cycle. In the case of kw–hour and many of their circuit losses will be in
voltage and current not in phase, the product of the proportion the the current flow squared. Since pow-
voltage and current no longer gives the true power or er output is low for a given current flow, and losses
wattage since the effective value and current and high at low power factors, this type of operation is
voltage do not occur at the same time. avoided and may be adjusted to some extent by con-
trolling the excitation circuits of the generator.
In the AC circuits, it is entirely possible to encounter
or design a circuit which will cause current and volt- Also of importance is the fact that low power factor
age to be as much as 90° out of phase in which case operation tends to produce severely distorted mag-
no power could be transmitted although the current netic fields in the generator. This is particularly true
might be very high. Refer to Figure 4 showing phase in the case of leading power factors which tend to
M–29 (B00082) 5 GENERATOR FUNDAMENTALS
GE Power Systems
TIME
V = VOLTS
90° L = AMPERES
θ = PHASE ANGLE
W = WATTS (POWER)
VARS = REACTIVE VOLTS-AMPS
(PRODUCES NO POWER
BUT MAINTAINS VOLTAGE)
l
lX
θ V TIME
180° 0°
lR
270°
3. The generator fan, mounted on the rotating field 10. The high voltage terminal leads serve to conduct
causes continuous circulation of cooling air or the three phase voltage and current flow from the
gas. generator stator to the external system.
4. The rotating field forms a strong polarized, ro- 11. Collector rings are used to provide a connection
tating magnetic field when energized by an ex- and path for DC power into the rotating field
ternal source of DC power. windings.
5. The stator core carries the stationary high volt- 12. The outboard end stub shaft is sometimes used
age windings and forms a magnetic patch for to drive a small DC generator used to supply DC
magnetic fields. power to the rotating field.
6. The air gap is the radial clearance between the 13. Field conductor end turns are securely blocked
rotating field and the stator core. and serve as connection points for the DC power
applied to the field windings.
7. Stator core springbars act as somewhat flexible
support for the stator core assembly. 14. The main coupling is bolted to the driving tur-
bine shaft.
8. Stator coil end turns are formed when coils leave
one slot in the stator core and are returned to a 15. Generator coolers serve to remove heat from the
different slot. generator cooling air or gas after it has passed
over a through the stator and rotating field.
9. The end turn support structure provides for brac-
ing and ties to secure the stator coil end turns 16. Cooling water connections are supplied to the
against magnetic forces. generator air coolers.
M–29 (B00082) 7 GENERATOR FUNDAMENTALS
GE Power Systems
EXCITER
FIELD
GENERATOR OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
FIELD BREAKER
RHEOSTAT AND LIMITATIONS OF
COLLECTOR
RING GENERATORS
EXCITER GENERATOR
FIELD BREAKER
DC
AC
Alternating current generators incorporate a cooling
EXCITER
ARM GEN. system utilizing fans, coolers and suitable structural
passages to remove heat caused by stator core mag-
netic losses, due to windage of rotating parts, and
COLLECTOR RING due to copper heating losses caused by current flow
POTENTIAL
TRANSFORMER (I2R losses) in the stator windings as well as the ro-
tating field windings.
VOLTAGE Adequate cooling of generators tends to become a
REGULATOR
limiting factor in their maximum rating and has a
governing effect upon the physical size of generator
Figure 9 Basic Excitation System parts. Generator cooling systems are significantly
M–29 (B00082) 11 GENERATOR FUNDAMENTALS
GE Power Systems
Since the increase in resistance of the field winding sult in safe operation and perform its electrical func-
is normally an accurate measure of the temperature tion reliably for the life of the turbine–generator. If a
rise in the winding, the instrument may be calibrated generator field coil is allowed to shift or move at all,
to read in degrees F or degrees C. This is based upon the effect upon the field balance will be immediate
accurate knowledge of the field winding resistance and high vibrations may result.
at some known temperature, usually ambient tem-
Similarly, the effect of differential temperatures
perature or 20°C.
from one side of the field to the opposite side, even
Due to the temperature rise in the copper windings as small as one or two degrees centigrade, may cause
and to differential expansion between the field forg- a bow in the generator field sufficient to unbalance
ing and the copper windings, the windings will be the field when loaded. Since varnish or lacquer is
subject to growth as the generator is placed in ser- often sprayed on the field body to prevent rusting,
vice and loaded. For this reason, it is wise to cut off only a thin coat should be applied to avoid limiting
cooling water to generator coolers when rolling and the heat transfer from the field. Also, care should be
starting turbine–generators to allow as much warm- taken to apply a uniform coating so that heat transfer
ing as possible of the generator due to windage properties will not be significantly different over the
losses before going beyond one–half rated speed. rotor surface.
Thus, growth of windings due to increased tempera- Generator field coils are installed into slots milled
ture may occur before high centrifugal forces tend to the length of generator forgings. In addition to elec-
lock the windings forcibly in their slots. This is more trical insulation, slot armor is used to secure the coil
important when starting during cold ambient condi- in the slot as well as slot wedges to retain the coil and
tions, particularly in outdoor stations and becomes transfer the mechanical force to the high strength
more important with larger and longer fields. When field forgings.
excessive growth of windings occurs after the gener-
ator reaches rated speed, scuffing of field coil insula- At the ends of generator fields, coil end turns are ar-
tion could occur, or mechanical stresses could be ranged with sufficient flexibility to accept expan-
developed in windings restricted from free expan- sion growth of the coils without excessive
sion. mechanical stresses being developed. End turns are
separated and held in place with blocking in con-
Similarly, generator forging temperatures will be al- junction with radiating plates to facilitate heat re-
lowed to increase substantially before high centrifu- moval. In addition, ventilation passages for the
gal forces at normal operating speeds or during cooling air or gas are provided at the end turn area.
overspeed trials are experienced. Generator field The whole end turn and blocking assembly is held
forgings will exhibit better properties with respect to firmly in position by retaining rings. Theses are es-
ductility at temperatures higher than ambient, par- sentially cylindrical sleeves installed with very high
ticularly in the case of lower than normal ambient shrink fits to centering rings on the generator shaft
temperatures. which serve to secure end turns and blocking while
positioning this assembly in a permanent, symmetri-
The generator field, functionally an electrical de-
cal, balanced assembly.
vice, is nevertheless a marvelous combination of
electrical and mechanical design to achieve suitabil- Generator field retaining rings, similar to field forg-
ity for high rotating speeds. For instance, a single ings, are given the utmost in care and testing
field coil for a 10,000 KW generator weighs 300 throughout their manufacture. Retaining rings are
pounds at rest, but exerts a force of over 1,000,000 perhaps the key structural part of generator fields
pounds when operating at 3600 RPM. The mechani- and are the most highly stressed in operation. Simi-
cal restraint necessary and the qualities of the field lar to large turbine wheels, a scratch on a retaining
forging must be of the highest order possible to re- ring surface would be a matter of concern. The ut-
M–29 (B00082) 13 GENERATOR FUNDAMENTALS
GE Power Systems
most in mechanical strength is designed for and no tween the copper and the stator core. Coil insulation
sharp breaks in contour or surface condition are al- is of the highest order to isolate the high alternating
lowed due to possibilities of introducing stress con- current voltages in their desired paths. Stator wind-
centrations. ings are not subject to centrifugal stresses as are field
coils, therefore, slot wedges and filler material will
Terminal connections of generator field windings not be as substantial as for field coils.
are brought through the shaft bore to connect electri-
cally to collector rings. Terminal leads are carefully Stator windings are subject, however, to magnetic
insulated from the shaft or forging as are the collec- forces which will be somewhat dependent upon the
tor rings. The collector rings thus serve as input ter- current density in the windings. This could cause
minals for the DC power providing excitation for the stator bar vibration and damage to insulation if stator
generator field. bar wedges became excessively loose.
Excitation is introduced into the collector rings, Generator stator windings cannot generally be mon-
which are essentially accurately machined and high- itored or their condition judged during normal op-
ly polished sleeves, by means of carbon brushes eration. Their good condition can best be assured by
which are fitted to ride the surface of the rings accu- careful observance of good operating habits with re-
rately. spect to the generator. Normal temperatures can be
maintained by proper operation of the generator
Generator fan rings are installed on the generator cooling system and by reference to temperature in-
shaft to provide a means of circulating cooling air or dications at the stator windings and in the cooling air
gas. The power absorbed by the fans, along with oth- path.
er rotating windage losses, represent the largest
single type of loss connected with operation of the Also, operation of generators outside recommended
generator. limits furnished by the manufacturer involves cer-
tain risks and the possibility of decreasing life of
Generator collector rings may be subjected to exces- generator windings. Manufacturers normally fur-
sive vibration or overheating if brushes are not cor- nish generator capability curves which define rec-
rectly fitted and installed. These are normally cooled ommended operating ranges with respect to load,
by a portion of the generator or exciter cooling air field current, and power factor which are the usual
flow. Operation of generator collector brushes and operating variables.
rings should be checked frequently for excessive
wear, vibration, or contamination which may cause Conditions of stator windings can only be evaluated
serious trouble such as heavy sparking, flashover, or after electrical tests and close visual inspection dur-
loss of generator field excitation. ing shutdown intervals. Of course, periodic inspec-
tions by operating personnel should include checks
Stator windings, similar to field coils, are subject to of collector operation, vibrations, noise level, and
appreciable growth due to differential expansion be- cleanliness of accessible generator parts.
GE Energy
Operation
Totally Enclosed, Water-to-Air Cooled Generator with Brushless Excitation Gas
Turbine Drive
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for
the purchaser's purposes the matter should be referred to the GE Company.
© 1995 General Electric Company
GEK 95143b Operation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
II. FINAL INSPECTION BEFORE STARTING THE GENERATOR FOR THE FIRST TIME . . 3
A. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
B. Generator Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
C. Resistance Temperature Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
D. Insulation Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
E. Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
F. Rubbing and Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
G. Bearing Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
H. Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
I. Air Coolers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2
Operation GEK 95143b
I. INTRODUCTION
A high-speed generator is a complex, precision built piece of equipment designed to operate in conjunction
with a turbine in a modern plant with a minimum of manual control. These machines are constructed to
operate continuously for long periods of time without shutdown. Proper operation of a high speed generator
requires close adherence to operating guides and procedures for the particular unit. Although operating
practices differ to some extent between various operators, there are many general operating rules that can
be applied universally. This instruction is included as a guide for operating a turbine-generator and does
not purport to cover all details or variations in operating procedures.
II. FINAL INSPECTION BEFORE STARTING THE GENERATOR FOR THE FIRST TIME
One of the most important periods in the life cycle of a turbine-generator is the initial start-up. During this
period each component part of the unit is checked and tested for proper installation and operation.
Before shipment, standard factory tests are performed on the generator, including the following:
• Mechanical inspection
• Mechanical balance
• Overspeed run
• Dielectric tests
To supplement the tests made in the factory, it is considered essential to repeat many checks just prior to
operating the unit in the power plant. The following inspections and preliminary checks should be made
just before the generator is started up for the first time.
A. Connections
B. Generator Voltage
See that the voltage on the generator nameplate corresponds with the line voltage.
The resistance temperature detectors should be checked to determine that they are indicating properly.
D. Insulation Resistance
The insulation resistance should be measured in accordance with instructions on INSULATION TEST-
ING.
3
GEK 95143b Operation
E. Clearances
As specified in the instructions for bringing the turbine up to speed, checks should be made to ensure
that there is no rubbing between the rotating and stationary parts of the generator, and that the operation
of the combined turbine and generator rotors is free from excessive vibration.
G. Bearing Insulation
The exciter-end bearing insulation should be checked with an insulation resistance meter in accordance
with instructions on BEARING INSULATION.
H. Exciter
I. Air Coolers
The air coolers should be checked as follows: the water supply to all cooler sections should be turned
on full. The cooler vents should be open to bleed all entrapped air. The cooler discharge lines should
be checked to ascertain that nearly an equal flow of water is discharging from each cooler section.
With the vents cracked open to provide for continuous venting, the water discharge may be throttled
to obtain the desired rate of flow. Excessive flow results in accelerated tube erosion and unbalanced
flow results in ineffective generator cooling. The coolant flow may be balanced by measuring the
differential pressure across the inlet and outlet nozzles at the connection end of each cooler section.
The discharge flow rate from the cooler vents and cold gas RTD temperatures are also good indicators
of balanced coolant flow.
Cooler water should be throttled on the discharge of the coolers to avoid air pockets and unstable oper-
ation with low flows. Where valves are located both before and after the coolers, care should be taken
to maintain a positive pressure on the coolers. If condensate is used for cooling, it may be necessary
to connect the discharge from the vent lines to the condenser in order to maintain an effective pressure
for venting.
The cooling water supply pressure should be checked to determine that this pressure is within the de-
signed operating pressure for the coolers.
Excessive flow results in accelerated tube erosion and unbalanced flow results in ineffective generator
cooling. The coolant flow may be balanced by measuring the differential pressure across the inlet and
outlet nozzles at the connection end of each cooler section. The discharge flow rate from the cooler
vents and cold gas RTD temperatures are also good indicators of balanced coolant flow.
When starting a turbine-generator, it is recommended that a start-up checklist be used to ascertain that no
items have been overlooked. The following items should be included on a checklist for starting a generator.
4
Operation GEK 95143b
This is a recommended list and does not purport to cover all items to be checked on a specific installation.
Refer to separate instruction for detailed operation of the exciter system.
Operator actions employing the regulator described below use datalink (digital regulators only) or remote
control switches/hardware.
The voltage regulator and exciter protective circuits must be set up according to detailed instructions con-
tained in a separate regulator instruction book prior to initial operation.
Two major starting methods are employed. The first is for turbine-generators which are started and brought
to operating speed using conventional starting motors. The second category has been included to cover the
unique generator requirements associated with LCI (Load Commutated Inverter) turbine-generator starting
systems. Refer to Turbine startup procedures for operational details related specifically to the LCI. Also
refer to separate instructions for detailed operation of the excitation system.
3. As the generator is brought up to speed, check the mechanical balance by taking shaft vibration
readings.
4. Regulate the cold liquid flow valves to obtain the rated flow condition. The cold gas temperature
inside the generator will then be a function of cold liquid temperature and the losses during the
start sequence.
***WARNING***
5
GEK 95143b Operation
For generators with brushless excitation, field power during LCI operation is applied though an auxil-
iary set of slip rings located aft of the brushless exciter. This auxiliary slip ring assembly is employed
only during starting. On all other occasions, the auxiliary brushes are lifted from the rings by mechan-
ical actuators.
The static start collector assembly is designed to operate during starting of the generator from turning
gear to rated speed. Before the generator is started, the brushholder must be fully engaged with all the
brushes making complete contact will the collector rings. When activated, the brush holder will engage
and actuator will stop automatically by limit switches. Once the brushes are engaged, power can be
applied to the collector rings. The automatic start sequence will then proceed.
Once the generator is at rated speed, the power to the collector rings (generator field winding) must be
turned off before the brushholder is retracted or damage to the collector or brushless exciter may result.
The brushholder will continue to retract until actuator is shut off by the limit switches.
Collector ring operation should be checked weekly or every 10 starts using observation windows and
any sparking during starting should be remedied immediately. Also, check brushes for wear. Replace
brushes when wear gage reaches limit mark.
NOTE
6
Operation GEK 95143b
2. When the unit is turning slowly by means of the turning gear motor, check for rubbing.
3. Check position of auxiliary collector ring brushes on collector rings to see that they ride properly
on the rings.
4. Regulate the cold liquid flow valves to obtain the rated flow condition. The cold gas temperature
inside the generator will then be a function of cold liquid temperature and the losses during the
start sequence.
5. As the generator is brought up to speed, check the mechanical balance by taking shaft vibration
readings.
6. The resistance temperature detectors and field temperature should be checked frequently during
startup to ascertain that the winding temperatures are not excessive
7. At 90% speed verify that the LCI is de-energized and that the disconnect switch between it and
the generator has opened.
8. Verify that the LCI exciter circuit breaker has been opened.
9. Verify that the disconnect switch between the generator neutral and the grounding transformer is
closed.
1. See that all circuits connecting the generator armature to any load are open. Be sure exciter control
switch is “OFF” so the exciter field is off.
2. Close all AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator) maintenance disconnects, if applicable. Switch on the
ac and dc power to the regulator, if not already engerized
4. Confirm factory preset of the minimum excitation regulator setpoint, per voltage regulator instruc-
tions. For analog voltage regulators, it may take up to 60 seconds for the motor operated voltage
adjuster to travel to its minimum excitation position. In all cases, the setpoint should yield between
80-100% voltage under open circuit.
5. After the unit is at 98 to 100% of rated speed, and the start sequence in section III has been fulfilled,
switch on excitation. If the manual regulator is used for start-up, the generator terminal voltage should
build up to the setpoint within about 10 to 30 seconds. If the automatic regulator is used for start-up,
the generator terminal voltage will build up very rapidly, in 3 to 4 seconds. Analog regulators may
have some voltage overshoot.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to operate lower than 95% of rated speed since the generator, the
exciter, and the voltage regulator could be damaged, unless under frequency pro-
tection is provided.
7
GEK 95143b Operation
7. If the manual voltage regulator is used for start-up, adjust the generator voltage to rated voltage using
the applicable voltage adjuster. For generator with analog auto/man. regulators, balance the transfer
meter using the voltage adjuster of the automatic regulator, then, transfer to automatic voltage regu-
lator.
NOTE
CAUTION
At the time of synchronization, the generator voltage must be matched to the sys-
tem voltage to within ±5% and the breaker closing angle must not exceed 10 elec-
trical degrees.
CAUTION
The following checks are essential as the damage resulting from improper syn-
chronizing can be extremely great.
Before any attempt is made to close the generator breaker, the phase sequence of the generator and the
system should be checked to make absolutely certain that the phase rotation of the generator and the line
are the same. At this time check the synchronizing equipment connections.
After the above checks have been made, the generator can be synchronized and connected to the line.
Load the generator according to applicable instructions. Refer also to the GENERATOR REACTIVE CA-
PABILITY CURVE for generator load capability.
The resistance temperature detectors should be checked frequently to ascertain that the winding tempera-
tures are not excessive. The output capability of the generator depends upon the cold gas temperature at
the cooler outlets inside the generator. Refer to the GENERATOR CAPABILITY CURVES to determine
the output capability of the generator for a particular cold gas temperature.
1. Reduce the load on the unit to zero by adjusting the turbine and the excitation control systems (or by
switching off loads on an individual machine). It will usually be necessary to adjust the voltage reg-
ulator in order to reduce the generator line current to zero when the generator is operating in parallel
with a power system.
8
Operation GEK 95143b
2. When the load current has been reduced to zero, open the generator line breaker and switch off exci-
tation. This should be done before the generator falls below 95% of rated speed.
3. Shut off the water to the air coolers when the speed has been reduced to 50% of rated.
When shutting down a generator do not attempt to reduce the speed rapidly by means of core loss,
as magnetic flux saturation can be reached in the armature core, and the flux leakage into the stator
frame may result in eddy currents causing heating in the stator frame structure.
When operating the generator singly, the power factor is determined by the power factor that the load de-
mands. However, when the generator is operating on a system or in parallel with other machines, its power
factor is determined by the generator field current. The power factor for the generator may be adjusted by
adjusting the field current; for overexcited (or lagging power factor) operation increasing the field current
will lower the power factor, and decreasing the field current will raise the power factor.
All turbine-generator units are designed to meet a particular rating. This rating includes the power factor,
in addition to kVA, voltage, and speed. However, because of system conditions, turbine-generator units
are usually operated at other than rated power factor, and it is important for the operators to know the
capabilities and limitations of this type of operation. These are shown by a reactive capability curve which
is included in the data section of the instruction book. A typical reactive capability curve showing the
output capability of the generator for one particular value of generator cold gas temperature is shown in
Figure 1. This curve is plotted in per unit for illustrative reasons.
To illustrate the relationship of kW, kVAR, and kVA, a vector diagram has been added to the lower left
hand corner of the curve. This diagram shows that at any operating point on the reactive capability curve,
the values of kW and kVAR may be vectorially added to determine the kVA.
The majority of switchboards in power stations are provided with kW and kVAR meters, so that the reactive
capability curves may be used directly. Therefore, it is not usually necessary when operating a generator
to know the kVA.
An inspection of Figure 1shows that the portion of the curves extending between the rated power factor
lagging line and the 1.0 power factor line is an arc of a circle whose radius of 1.0 per unit kVA corresponds
to the rating. In this region the kVA is limited by armature winding temperature limitations.
In the region of operation between the rated power factor line and zero power factor lagging (over-excited),
the kVA is limited by the temperature rise of the field winding. In the leading power factor region of
operation (under-excited), the kVA must be reduced to maintain safe stator core end-iron temperatures.
NOTE
The Vee curves included in the Operator‘s Manual are provided to show excitation
requirements only. Refer to the actual reactive capability curve for operation and
loading of this particular generator.
9
GEK 95143b Operation
Lagging
+0.9
+0.3
kVAR
+0.1
0
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0 1.1
–0.1
KW–Per Unit
–0.2
–0.3
Armature Core End–Iron
–0.4 Heating Limitation
Leading
–0.5
θ
–0.6
Cos θ = Power Factor
Figure 1. Typical Reactive Capability for a Given Value of Cold Gas Temperature
Another consideration for low leading power–factor operation is steady–state stability. Testing has shown that
a typical turbine–generator unit, using a modern voltage regulator, will have a steady–state pullout consider-
ably below the operating range permitted by the heating limitations shown on the curve, but the limit is also
dependent on the system characteristics.
Turbine–generators are rated on the basis of balanced load conditions. With a balanced three–phase load, the
generator phase currents are equal in magnitude and are in symmetrical phase sequence. With unbalanced load
conditions, the phase currents and terminal voltages deviate from this ideal relationship and a negative phase
sequence armature current is imposed on the generator. Excessive unbalanced loading results in extra losses
and temperature rises which erode the generator design margins. The extra losses appear primarily at the sur-
face of the rotor, and generator capability decreases with an increase in the amount of unbalance.
Permissible balanced load operation is defined by the generator reactive capability curves in terms of generator
kW and kVAR. The generator is designed to operate at rated kVA within the range of 95 and 105% of rated
terminal voltage under balanced conditions.
10
Operation GEK 95143b
Permissible unbalanced load operation is defined by the generator reactive capability curves, the maximum
phase current capability, and the permissible negative sequence current. Under unbalanced conditions, the
generator may also be operated at rated kVA capability, calculated using the average of the line–to–line volt-
ages and the average of the phase currents, provided the maximum phase current does not exceed the following
values:
• For cold gas temperatures less than or equal to rated cold gas temperatures, base current is the armature
current level at the rated cold gas base load output capability of the generator.
• For cold gas temperatures greater than rated cold gas temperature, base current is variable and corresponds
to the armature current level at the base load output capability of the generator at the particular cold gas
temperature.
Cold gas temperature, as referred to above, is the temperature of the cooling gas at the cooler outlets inside
the generator.
The normal short–time capability is given as the integrated product of (I2)2t, where I2 = per unit negative phase
sequence current and t = time in seconds. The allowable value is shown in the Generator Data sheet and applies
for times up to 120 seconds.
The actual negative sequence armature current may be calculated using Figure 2, provided there are no zero
phase sequence currents. For example, let Ia = 0.880, Ib = 0.704, and Ic = 0.757, in per unit of rated armature
current. Then Ib/Ia is 0.8 and Ic/Ia is 0.86. From Figure 2, I2/Ia is 0.125 and I2 = 0.125 x 0.880 = 0.11, in per
unit of rated armature current.
11
GEK 95143b Operation
A helpful rule, applying with less than 0.05 per unit negative phase sequence current, is that the positive phase
sequence component is approximately the average of the three phase currents, and the negative phase sequence
component is approximately the maximum deviation of any of the phase currents from the average.
Operation according to these unbalanced load recommendations is not intended to be within limits of guaran-
teed temperatures or limits of temperatures established by standards for operations at the machine rating. The
departures from temperature limits established by standards will be small, however, and temperatures general-
ly will be within a safe temperature range that would be expected if the machine were operated within the range
of 95 to 105% terminal voltage at rated balanced kVA.
The magnitude of the extra losses and heating resulting from zero phase sequence armature current will depend
on the individual generator design (in particular, the armature winding pattern) as well as the value of the zero
phase sequence armature current. Zero phase sequence loading of a particular generator should be referred to
the manufacturer for a recommendation.
In the absence of data from the manufacturer, a basis for evaluating zero phase sequence loading, or combined
negative phase sequence and zero phase sequence loading, is the following. Combine the per unit zero phase
sequence, Io, and negative phase sequence, I2, current components according to the following equation, and
observe the same limitations for the resulting equivalent current, I1, as shown for I2. This rule is conservative,
but generally should be adequate for the rather rare situations where it is necessary to impose zero phase se-
quence loads on turbine–generators.
0.20 0.70
0.70
0.75
0.75
0.15
0.80
0.80
I2 0.85
0.10 0.85 Ib
Ia Ib Ia
Ia
0.90
0.90
0.05
0.95 0.95
0 1.0
0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Ic
Ia
Figure 2. Negative Phase Sequence Current from the Magnitudes of the Three
Phase Currents (For Case of No Zero Phase Current)
I 1 + Ǹ(I 2) 2 ) 2(I 0) 2
12
Operation GEK 95143b
The ventilating air is circulated through the generator by the rotor fans in a closed system and the heat
absorbed by the air is removed in the cooler sections by the cooling water. The generator data sheet indi-
cates the water flow and the maximum water temperature required for satisfactory operation at rated load.
Recommended coolant flows should not be exceeded without generator approval or damage to the coolers
may result.
If it is necessary to clean the cooler sections while operating, the sections may be taken out of service one at
a time without shutting down the unit. Cooler tube cleaning is done in place by closing the coolant isolation
valves, draining the cooler section, and removing the water boxes on both ends of the cooler section to be
cleaned. The maximum load which may be carried with one cooler section out of service must be limited
to the values given on the data sheet.
Turbine-generators are rated on the basis of armature current with negligible deviation from a pure sine
wave. If part of the generator ac output is converted to dc, harmonic currents generated by the rectifying
process will flow in the generator armature windings. These harmonic currents result in extra losses, pri-
marily at the surface of the rotor, which are not normally provided for in the generator design.
The decrease in generator capability is a function of the magnitude of each of the harmonic currents and
of the electrical design of the specific generator. Before any rectifier load is connected to the generator,
it is recommended that the schedule of harmonic currents be submitted to GE for use in determining the
corresponding reduction in generator capability.
Operation of the turbine-generator connected to a system without field current will quickly lead to exces-
sive field heating. The degree of heating depends on several conditions, including the initial load on the
machine, the manner in which field current is lost, the manner in which the generator is connected to the
system and the period of time the generator remains connected to the system. When excitation is lost, the
generator tends to overspeed and operates as an induction generator. This overspeed normally results in
a reduction in load due to the characteristics of the turbine governor, an increase in armature current, and
possible low voltage at the generator terminals, and is accompanied by high rotor currents. These rotor
currents will flow through both the field winding (provided the field winding is connected to the exciter)
and the rotor body. The rotor body currents will cause high and possibly dangerous temperatures in a very
short time. The time required for the heating to become dangerous depends on the conditions of loss of
excitation. In general this time is short, being only a matter of seconds rather than minutes, for a machine
with a completely open field winding. In addition, opening of the field circuit with the machine carrying
a load may subject the winding and exciter to high and possibly dangerous voltages from the inductive
effects of the winding.
If excitation is lost by accidental tripping or switching off of excitation, excitation should be immediately
re-applied without shutting down the machine.
If the machine is discovered to be operating without field for an unknown interval of time, it should be
immediately tripped off the line and shut down for an inspection to determine the degree of rotor damage
from heating.
13
GEK 95143b Operation
Relays are now available which determine when a machine has started slipping due to loss of excitation.
Since heating occurs in a relatively few seconds after loss of field, use of such relays to trip the machine
from the line will prevent damage from overheating and the machine may be put back in service as soon
as excitation has been re-established.
If the machine is tripped off the line by any of its protective devices, no attempt should be made to resyn-
chronize the machine before the cause of the tripout is determined. The exciter diode wheel fuses should
be inspected.
Following a tripout due to the differential phase relays, both the armature and field windings should be
tested and otherwise inspected before attempting to resynchronize.
If an exciter protective trip or transfer to backup voltage regulator occurs, the cause of the protective action
must be determined and corrected. The exciter protective relays must be per regulator instructions.
It is general practice to operate a turbine-generator with the excitation system ungrounded. If an accidental
single ground occurs on the generator field operating on an ungrounded system, no change in the excitation
system occurs at the time of the ground, and the machine may be removed from the system without risk of
system interruption or costly damage to the generator field. As soon as possible after a ground is indicated,
the generator should be removed from the line and the difficulty repaired.
CAUTION
In no case should a generator be allowed to remain on the system for any appre-
ciable time after a ground occurs. If a second ground were to occur, the field could
experience damage due to the large current flow through the closed circuit.
The generator should not be operated at any loads above the output allowed on the capability curves even
though its operating temperature rise may be well below the guaranteed temperature rises specified and the
cooling water temperature may be lower than specified on the data sheet. The generator is designed to give
long trouble-free life for continuous and intermittent operation at allowable outputs, and loading beyond
the capability curves encroaches on the design margins built into the machine.
Similarly, the generator should not be operated when temperature indicating devices (such as stator slot
RTD’s) read above the Alarm Levels specified in the Generator Device Data drawing. The generator shall
not be operated when any such devices read above the Shutdown Levels specified in the Generator Device
Data drawing. In applications where an operator may not continuously monitor these devices and alarms,
consideration should be given to implementing an automatic shutdown or trip to provide this protection.
14
Operation GEK 95143b
15
GEK 95143b Operation
GE Energy
General Electric Company
www.gepower.com
16
351-02020-01A
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Made By:
Rockwell Automation - P.O. Box 8446
Kato Engineering Mankato, MN 56002-8447
(507) 625-4011
Fax. (507) 345-2798
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
WARNING
1.1. Introduction
1.2. General Description
1.3. Construction and Mounting
1.3.1. Diode Fault Detector (DFD) Versions and Application
1.3.2. Input Connections
1.3.3. Output Connections
1.3.4. Installation Instructions
1.3.4.1 508-00118-31, -32 Detectors
1.3.4.2 508-00118-33 Detectors
1.4 Description of Operation
1.4.1. DFD Circuit Overview
1.4.2. DFD Output Signals
SECTION 3: Maintenance
SECTION 4: Troubleshooting
Figure 3: Complete Diode Wheel Assembly (6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
Figure 4: Diode Wheel Assembly – Inboard Side (6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
Figure 5: Diode Wheel Assembly – Outboard Side (6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
Figure 8: Diode Fault Detector Top View and Output Connections to Ground Detector System
(Photo)
Figure 9: Diode Fault Detector Connection Example to DC Buss (Photo of 6A6 and 7A6 type
exciter designs)
Figure 10: Diode Fault Detector AC Connection Example and Wire Harness Securing in Diode
Wheel Groove (Photo of 6A6 and 7A6 type exciter designs)
Figure 11: Complete Diode Wheel Assembly (7A7 and 9A4 type exciter designs)
Figure 12: Diode Wheel Assembly – Inboard Side (7A7 and 9A4 type exciter designs)
Figure 13: Diode Wheel Assembly – Outboard Side (7A7 and 9A4 type exciter designs)
Figure 14: Block Diagram of Diode Fault Detector / Field Ground Detector
1.1 Introduction
This manual describes the Diode Fault Detector used on brushless exciters with series redundant diodes on the diode
wheel used mainly on 2 pole synchronous generators. The instruction book covers the general description,
construction, installation, operation, initial inspection, maintenance, troubleshooting and renewal parts.
The Diode Fault Detector is used in conjunction with a field ground detector system (see separate instruction book)
to detect faulty diodes in a series redundant brushless exciter system. The brushless excitation system consists of a
high frequency AC generator complete with a rotating, series redundant diode assembly and a lead assembly that
connects the DC diode bridge output to the field windings of the main generator. The Diode Fault Detector is a
electronic module mounted underneath the rim of the diode assembly hub or wheel between the wheel and the
armature of the exciter as shown in Figure 1.
The module connects to the AC and DC connections of the rectifier bridge and monitors the forward voltage drop of
the series redundant diodes within the rectifier bridge. It is also powered from the DC connections. If a diode fails
open or shorted , the forward voltage drop of the cells in that leg changes with respect to the other legs of the bridge.
This creates a ripple in the forward voltage balance which is detected in the module. When the ripple exceeds a
preset threshold, the module sends a fault signal to the field ground detector transmitter (see separate instruction
book) located diametrically opposite the Diode Fault Detector. The transmitter in turn sends the alarm signal to a
stationary receiver unit. The receiver sends this alarm signal to a remote device such as the brushless exciter voltage
regulator which provides a fault signal to the user.
A block diagram of how the Diode Fault Detector connects to the exciter and ground detector system is shown
in Figure 14 (found in section 1.4.).
RED DIODE FAULT DETECTOR
AC CONNECTION LINKS
DIODE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
AC CONNECTION RING
AC CONNECTION LINKS
SPACER
The Diode Fault Detector (DFD) is consists electronic components mounted to printed circuit boards and a heat sink
which are encapsulated in a high strength molded potting compound. The Detector has 2 holes for mounting to the
face of the diode assembly as shown in Figures 3 to 6.
As of the date of this publication there are 4 models of Diode Fault Detectors. These models are used for
various DC buss operating voltages and different diode wheel mechanical arrangements. The following list
gives the Kato Engineering part number and associated application information.
508-00118-32, 508-00118-34:
These 2 models are used on exciters with an output operating voltage range of 20 to 278 VDC. They
mount on 6A6 style exciters (with the smaller diode wheel). The –34 Detector incorporates a special
harness for mounting to diode wheels which do not have the harness groove (also the smaller 6A6 style
diode wheels).
508-00118-31:
This model is used on exciters with an output operating voltage range of 32 to 390 VDC. They mount
on 7A6 style exciters utilizing the smaller diameter diode wheel.
508-00118-33:
This model is used on exciters with an output operating voltage range of 60 to 525 VDC. They mount
on 7A7 and 9A4 style exciters utilizing the larger diameter diode wheel.
The Detector receives input signals from the AC and DC terminals of the diode bridge via the wire
harnesses (one on each side of the Detector). Each wire harness contains 3 pairs of leads for connection to
each pair of diodes. One lead of the pair connects to AC heatsink and other lead (DC lead) is routed
through the diode wheel opening for that heatsink and connects to the DC buss. The A and C leads are
encased in a harness and are routed in a groove in the diode wheel rim on the inboard side of the diode
wheel (figures 3, 4, and 6). The length of the leads in the harness are sized to assure connection lead
lengths match the mechanical arrangement of the correct AC phase. The leads must be connected to the
proper phase to avoid noise pickup from magnetic fields from the diode currents. The wires of the
harnesses are routed through the diode wheel openings as shown in Figure 2.
The DC leads are connected to the DC buss ring as shown in Figure 3 and 5.
The AC leads of the Detector are connected to the AC heatsink assembly under one of the bolts securing the
“U” shaped AC connection leads to the heatsinks. AC lead connection locations are shown in figures 3, 4,
11 and 12. For lead assembly and torque of the bolts for U connectors refer to the brushless exciter
instruction book.
DIODE FAULT MONITOR
ARMATURE PHASE CONNECTIONS, C+, A+, B+ ARMATURE PHASE CONNECTIONS, B-, C-, A-
C DC
C AC
C+ A+ B DC
B- AC HEAT C- A-
B+ B AC SINK
BL O G A DC G BL O
A AC
Two leads from the Ground Detector Transmitter (red and green) are routed to the Diode Fault Detector
along the outboard face of exciter AC connection ring (see Figure 1) or in a groove at the ID of the diode
wheel rim. These leads are connected to the DFD output terminals as shown in detail B of Figures 3, 4,
11 and 12. After the leads are connected to the Detector, they are secured to the “U” connector near the
Detector with glass cord and air dry varnish (Figure 1). The leads are then routed along the connection
ring face (in nearly all cases these leads will be pre-routed).
1.3.4. Installation Instructions
Installation of these models is basically the same in that they all mount under the rim of the diode wheel
(see Figure 1). They are also similar in that they contain a harness that distributes around the wheel and
connects across the series redundant diode assemblies located between the spokes of the wheel.
At the time of this publication there were 4 models of Diode Fault Detectors as listed in section 1.3.1.
Normally these Detectors will be mounted on the diode wheels at the factory. However, if field
installation is required the following sections will provide the instructions necessary for successful
installation or replacement of the Detector. Removal of the Detector which exists on the diode wheel is
as simple as disconnecting all of the leads connected to the potted Diode Fault Detector module and
removing the module along with the wire harness (which is potted right into the module).
NOTE: Care should be taken when removing the RED and GREEN wires from the DFD. These
wires will remain and be re-used and must not be damaged (these wires connect the DFD
to the Ground Detector System and are difficult to replace if damaged).
Refer to section 1.3.4.1. for installation instructions on the 508-00118-31 and –32 Detectors. Refer to
section 1.3.4.2. for installation instructions on the 508-00118-33 Detectors.
Tools Required:
v 3/8” torque wrench (small head is best) and 7/16” short socket
v 1/4” small open end or combination wrench
v screwdriver (medium flat tip for #8 screw)
v wire harness installation tool (provided along with the DFD)
v Loctite 242 or equivalent threadlocker
v Wire cutter, stripper, and crimping tools for 22AWG wire lugs
v Wire lugs (provided with the DFD)
v allen wrench to fit 1/4” x 20 socket head bolts
v nylon installation tools (provided with DFD for harness installation of –31 and –32 Detectors)
Kato Engineering part numbers: 172-60000-17
172-60000-18
GROOVE IN DIODE WHEEL RIM ID
Installation of these Detectors requires: installation of the wire harness, connection of the leads from
the Ground Detection System (GDS) to the DFD output terminals, mounting of the DFD module, and
termination of the sensing leads encased in the wire harness.
Termination of the sensing leads is best performed by starting at the DFD module (terminate the
sensing leads closest to the module first then continue around the rim until all leads have been
properly terminated).
The diode wheel rim is the securing surface for all of these sensing leads. When terminating
these leads be sure that when the lead is finally landed in the correct location there is no
possibility for the lead to creep out or extend out in any way beyond the edge of the diode
wheel rim. The diode wheel rim protects the sensing leads from the centrifugal forces
present when the exciter is rotating.
Begin by extending the green wire down below the insulating paper and over the closest AC link
mounting bolt. There is a green sensing wire that extends out from either side of the DFD
module. Refer to Figure 4 to see how these leads are to be connected (the sensing lead wire color
is shown on this figure). Figure 4 does not show the AC connection links. However, the sensing
leads are to be connected under the bolt head and on top of the connection link.
Trim the lead wire so that after the lug is applied, and fastened to the proper connection link, the
lead wire length is not so long that it may creep out from under the diode wheel rim when the unit
is running. It is absolutely necessary that the sensing lead wire does not extend, or have the
potential to extend, out beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim once it is finally terminated
on the AC link. Figure 10 is a photo showing how these wires should look once terminated (this
photo was taken without the AC link in place and was intended to show proper lead length and
how the sensing leads break out of the wire harness only).
The next step is to feed the red and black sensing leads through the diode wheel spoke openings
(windows). They should be fed through the windows in the locations shown on Figure 4. The
sensing leads are shown on this figure and are the red, black, white and yellow leads. After
feeding the leads through the windows, measure and trim the leads. Then feed them back though
the window and strip and lug the lead wire. Feed the lugged wire through the window again as
before and terminate the lead on the DC buss in the proper location (use loctite 242 or equivalent
for securing the #8 screws used to terminate the leads which connect to the DC buss bars). Figure
5 shows how they are to be terminated on the DC buss bars located on the diode wheel rim
outboard side (included in this figure is the color of the sensing lead as well as the proper location
for termination to the DC buss). As before, these leads must be terminated short enough so that
the potential for these leads to extend out beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim is non-existent.
Make sure that the barrels of the lugs lay against the diode wheel rim. This will reduce the
chance of the lug turning under normal centrifugal loads.
Figure 9 is a photo showing termination of a sensing lead to the DC buss bar. In this photo one of
the yellow leads of the DFD is shown terminated along with the black lead from the GDS
transmitter.
** Final Preparation:
Once all of the sensing leads have been properly terminated, the next step is to spray all of
the connection points with an air dry varnish.
At this point the installation of the 508-00118-31 and 508-00118-32 Diode Fault Detectors is
complete.
Installation of this Detector requires: installation of the wire harness, connection of the leads from the
Ground Detection System (GDS) to the DFD output terminals, mounting of the DFD module, and
termination of the sensing leads encased in the wire harness. If this is a replacement of an existing
DFD module then carefully examine and document the installation as it exists. Also, the groove
should be cleaned out thoroughly with a solvent. Cleaning of the groove is required so that the silicon
sealant used to retain the harness will adhere properly to the coating in the groove.
Termination of the sensing leads is best performed by starting at the DFD module (terminate the
sensing leads closest to the module first then continue around the rim until all leads have been
properly terminated).
The diode wheel rim is the securing surface for all of these sensing leads. When terminating
these leads be sure that when the lead is finally landed in the correct location there is no
possibility for the lead to creep out or extend out in any way beyond the edge of the diode
wheel rim. The diode wheel rim protects the sensing leads from the centrifugal forces
present when the exciter is rotating.
Begin by extending the green wire from the wire harness and out to the first heatsink. There is a
green sensing wire that extends out from either side of the DFD module. Refer to Figure 12 to see
how these leads are to be connected (the sensing lead wire color is shown on this figure). Trim
and lug the wire such that when landed the wire will lay on the rim of the diode wheel and not be
too loose to hang out beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim.
It is absolutely necessary that the sensing lead wire does not extend, or have the potential to
extend, out beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim once it is finally terminated on the AC
link.
Next apply loctite 242 or equivalent threadlocker to the #8 screw which will be used to secure the
sensing lead to the heatsink and terminate the lead to the heatsink.
The next step is to feed the red and black sensing leads through the diode wheel spoke openings
(windows). They should be fed through the windows in the locations shown on Figure 12 (these
are the red, black, yellow and white wires). After feeding the leads through the windows, measure
and trim the leads. Then feed them back though the window and strip and lug the lead wire. Feed
the lugged wire through the window again as before and terminate the lead on the DC buss spiders
in the proper location as shown on Figure 13 (again use the loctite 242 or equivalent). As before,
these leads must be terminated short enough so that the potential for these leads to extend out
beyond the edge of the diode wheel rim is non-existent. Make sure that the barrels of the lugs
hang radially outward from the heatsinks. This will reduce the chance of the lug turning
under normal centrifugal loads.
Continue around the rim terminating each sensing wire as shown on figures 12 and 13 using the
same procedure as outlined above.
** Final Preparation:
Once all of the sensing leads have been properly terminated, the next step is to spray all of
the connection points with an air dry varnish.
At this point the installation of the 508-00118-33 Diode Fault Detector is complete.
FIGURE 11: COMPLETE DIODE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
(7A7 AND 9A4 TYPE EXCITER DESIGNS)
FIGURE 12: DIODE WHEEL-INBOARD SIDE
(7A7 AND 9A4 TYPE EXCITER DESIGNS)
FIGURE 13: DIODE WHEEL-OUTBOARD SIDE
(7A7 AND 9A4 TYPE EXCITER DESIGNS)
1.4 Description of Operation
The Diode Fault Detector senses the forward voltage drop of the series redundant diodes within the rectifier
bridge. Normally the forward voltage drop of each diode is about .7 and 1.2 volts DC or 1.4 to 2.4 volts for both
diodes. When one of the diodes fail either shorted (predominant mode) or open, the forward drop changes
significantly with respect to the other legs. The Detector senses this change by monitoring the filtered AC
component of the composite forward voltage drop signal of all the legs of a given polarity. Referring to block
diagram of the Detector (Figure 14), the following describes the basic circuit elements of the Diode Fault
Detector:
1. The Detector senses the forward voltage drop of the diodes in positive and negative buss separately. For
each polarity, the Detector receives the signals from the 3 AC phase connections and the DC output buss
(positive or negative). These signals are fed into a high or low value gate (A0) to detect the largest absolute
value of the potential difference as referenced to the DC buss. This is the unfiltered composite forward
voltage drop.
2. The output of A0 is then limited by the clamping circuit A1, filtered by circuit A2 (band limiting ) , and low
pass filtered by A3 to attenuate high frequency noise and bridge harmonics.
3. The filtered signal is fed into a high pass filter A4 to obtain the AC coupled ripple voltage or AC component
of the filtered forward voltage drop signal produced by the bridge.
4. The AC component of the filtered forward voltage drop signal from item 3 is converted to a DC signal by
precision rectifier A5. Circuit A6 is a pure integrating amplifier which provides added noise immunity and
fault detection delay timing to the AC ripple signal.
5. The resulting AC ripple signal is compared to a preset thresh-hold voltage for alarm, Vref1 or Vref2. When
signal exceeds the thresh-hold, output of the comparator A7 goes low signaling a diode fault condition.
6. The diode fault signals from the high and low side Detector circuits are passed to a low value gate (LVG), A9
along with a square wave pulse of about 1 to 2 Hz. With a normal condition, the diode fault signals are high
and the LVG , A9 provides a square wave output signaling a normal condition. If either of the diode fault
signals go low, the square wave signal is inhibited and the LVG output stays low indicating a diode fault has
occurred.
7. Circuit A10 monitors the input DC voltage and provides an inhibit signal when the input voltage is below the
preset threshold (about 32 Vdc for a –31 Detector). When the input DC voltage rises above the threshold ,
A10 goes from high to low (no inhibit). This signal is fed into the high value gate (HVG) A11 along with the
diode fault signal from A9 and it serves as to inhibit the diode fault signal from A9 when high. This prevents
spurious or unpredictable Detector operation when the exciter is operating at low voltage.
This is the level of main field excitation at which the Diode Fault Detector will begin to monitor the status of
the diode wheel and series redundant diodes. It is at this point that the Detector will begin to output a signal
(pulse or continuous output).
8. HVG, A11 provides the diode fault alarm signal to an external device such is the optical isolator of the
ground detector transmitter. The opto-isolator is connected between Detector DC+ and the output of A11,
thus when A11 is low, the current flows (1 to 2 ma) through the isolator driving it to a high state (diode
fault). The transmitter sends this signal to the receiver which causes the diode fault alarm to go high, 24 Vdc.
When the output current of A11 is 1 to 2 Hz square wave, this indicates a normal condition. The resulting
signal out of the ground detector receiver is a 1 to 2 Hz square wave , 0 to 24 Vdc.
When the diode fault signal at A11 is high, current output to the transmitter is zero. This indicates an
undervoltage condition (from A10) or malfunction condition (under most conditions the current output will
go to zero when a malfunction has occurred). The diode fault signal output from the receiver will be
constant at about 0 Vdc.
9. Thus, the Diode Fault Detector alarm signal has three states which allows the indication of normal, alarm, or
malfunction / undervoltage condition. These states are summarized in Figure 15. The receiver sends the
diode fault alarm signal along with the generator ground fault alarm signals (see separate instruction book) to
a remote device for indication to user.
OPT. ISO.
RED
DIODE FAULT SIG.
TELEMETRY CIR. GREEN
The Diode Fault Detector is used in conjunction with brushless exciters with series redundant diode bridge
arrangement and the field ground detector (see separate instruction books). The Diode Fault Detector output
signals as transmitted via the Ground Detector System are shown below.
24 V
Normal Signal
No Alarm
0V
1 to 2 Hz Frequency
24 V
Diode Fault
Alarm Signal
0V
24 V
Diode Detector
Undervoltage/
Malfunction 0V
Alarm
The Diode Fault Detector comes mounted and pre-wired to the diode wheel of the brushless exciter which is
carefully crated for shipment and can withstand most shocks incurred during transit. Before accepting shipment
from the transportation company, examine the crating carefully per exciter instruction book. If the Diode Fault
Detector is shipped as a separate or replacement part unpack and check for damage to the module or wires.
Notify the transportation company claims office and Kato Engineering if damage is found. Be sure to give
complete and accurate details when reporting damage.
The Diode Fault Detector does not require adjustment or alignment. Some brushless exciter disassembly is
required to access the Diode Fault Detector and ground detector. Remove the exciter end cover, ground
detector mounting cover , exciter fan, and fan baffle per the exciter instruction book. The Diode Fault Detector
will be accessible through the ground detector cover opening and from the back of the exciter (monitor leads).
Mount the Diode Fault Detector to diode wheel per paragraph 1.3. Be sure to use a thread lock adhesive on all
the threaded fasteners of the Detector. Lock exciter fasteners per the exciter instruction book.
3. MAINTENANCE
The Diode Fault Detector requires no maintenance beyond that required for the exciter to which it is mounted.
Check connections for damage or upset during exciter maintenance. Any connections removed and replaced
should be sprayed with a good quality, air drying insulating varnish.
3.2. REPLACEMENT
If replacement Diode Fault Detector is required refer to section 1.3 for assembly/disassembly.
Periodic measurement of the insulation resistance may prevent a serious problem caused by a double ground.
Readings with a 500 volt megger of the combined exciter rotor, diode wheel, Diode Fault Detector, and generator
field may be made. Refer to the exciter instruction book for further information.
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
If a diode fault alarm occurs, the redundant diode will, under normal circumstances, continue to provide
rectification for the leg. The diode may be visually inspected during operation using a strobe light through an
access plate on the end of the exciter to see if there is mechanical damage.
If the exciter continues to function normally, the rectifier assembly may be checked at the next planned outage.
The diodes can then be checked per the exciter instruction book.
If no diodes are found to be faulty. Disconnect the Diode Fault Detector wires and check per paragraph the
following few paragraphs (sections 4.2., 4.3., 4.4., and 4.5.).
Note: If both diodes fail in the same leg then excitation will be lost.
A digital voltmeter with diode check scale, 0 to 50 VDC power supply, and a function generator are useful in
locating problems with the Diode Fault Detector.
Disconnect the AC and DC input leads of the Detector and the ground detector output leads. With a digital
multimeter (similar to an 8060 Fluke digital meter) with diode check feature, check the continuity between the AC
and DC leads to determine if there are any wire breaks. The readings will range from 10K ohms to 5 Megohm
and some leads will be polarity sensitive. The magnitude of the reading not important, just determine if any wire
has broken. Check the continuity of the red and green diode wires from the ground detector.
Align the ground detector pickup coils. Then apply about 2 mA across the red (plus) and green (minus) lead. It is
recommended that a limiting resister be placed in the circuit to protect from over current. The current must not
exceed 25 mA. With 1 to 2 mA current, the diode fault signal out of the receiver assembly should go high (about
24 VDC). The output signal should go to zero with no current. If it does not respond as described, the ground
detector transmitter circuit is faulty and the transmitter should be replaced.
Reconnect the ground detector red and green wires to the Detector. Alternately, the Diode Fault Detector output
terminals may be connected to an ammeter (0 to 10 mA scale). The Diode Fault Detector can be functionally
checked using a variable power supply 0 to 50 VDC (floating / ungrounded). Connect power supply to the DC
buss leads, leave the AC leads connected. A 1 to 2 Hz square wave output current should appear at DFD output
terminals at about 32 VDC on –31 DFD’s (20VDC on –32 and –34 DFD’s, and approx. 65VDC on –33 DFD’s).
Then connect a function generator set for 250 to 400 Hz square or sine wave, 0 to 5V to between one of the AC
leads and the corresponding DC signal lead (this AC lead will have to be disconnected from the exciter AC links
and heatsinks). The function generator is being used here to simulate an AC ripple on the forward voltage drop
thus simulating a failed diode. Measure the function generator output with a digital voltmeter on RMS scale.
Gradually increase the function generator voltage. At about .5 to 1 Vrms, the Diode Fault Detector output or
alarm signal current should change from a square wave signal to a steady 1 to 2 ma signal. Check the other AC
leads in the same manner. If the Detector checks good , contact GE representative for assistance. If the Detector
checks bad, replace with a new one. There are no serviceable parts.
Instruction Manual
1
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
DANGER
DANGER
THE USER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONFORMING TO THE NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE AND ALL
OTHER APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES. WIRING, GROUNDING, DISCONNECTS, AND OVERCUR-
RENT PROTECTION IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAU-
TION COULD RESULT IN SEVERE BODILY INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE.
DANGER
WARNING
WHEN LIFTING THIS UNIT, DO NOT PULL AT AN ANGLE ON LIFTING EYES. THE LIFTING EYES
ARE FOR THE UNIT ONLY AND NOT FOR THE COMPLETE SET. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE
PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN BODILY INJURY.
WARNING
2
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
PART NUMBERS
STATOR ROTOR
GE 364A2978P1003 364A2978P0002
KATO 230-54009-11 093-54013-11
RATINGS
MIN. EXCITER RATING @: 3600 RPM 3000 RPM
Continuous power rating, KW 505 504
Continuous output current, Adc 1160 1195
Continuous voltage rating, VDC 435 422
Ceiling voltage for 10 sec., Vdc 844 795
Ceiling current for 10 Sec., Adc 2250 2250
Min. response ratio, PU V/sec 1.0 1.0
Rated inlet air temp, oC 40 40
Min. output voltage @gen no load 76 76
3
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES
DRAWING SECTION
4
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
SECTION I
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This manual on the brushless exciter for 2 pole generators covers the general description, construc-
tion, operation, initial inspection, alignment, maintenance, troubleshooting and renewal parts.
The brushless excitation system consists of a high frequency AC generator complete with rotating,
series redundant diode assembly and a lead assembly that connects the DC diode output to the field
windings of the main generator. The brushless design eliminates collector rings, commutators, and
brushes.
These features contribute to a brushless excitation system with high reliability components and trouble
free low maintenance operation. It is also a relatively uncomplicated system, easy to operate and
inspect without extensive personnel training. Other advantages include:
a. The overhung design, shrink fit on the generator rotor shaft, requires no exciter bearings.
b. There are no carbon dust or contamination problems in the brushless exciter system if it
operates in a clean, controlled environment.
c. The brushless excitation system does not have the large field circuit breakers, heavy field
current control or bus interconnections components such static systems require.
5
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
1.3 CONSTRUCTION
The brushless exciter (Figure 1) consists of a rotating armature assembly and a stationary field
assembly. An electrical block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 2.
The stator assembly consists of 12 stationary field poles mounted in a steel housing. The steel hous-
ing is flange mounted to the generator bearing bracket. Field poles are made of high quality steel
laminations and the coil insulation is a Class F VPI insulation system.
The rotor is shrink mounted, overhung on an extension of the main generator rotor shaft. Diodes
are mounted on a rotating wheel, outboard of the exciter armature. The armature consists of a lami-
nated core of high quality electrical steel, a delta connected 3 phase winding, and a connection ring
assembly. The armature coils are random wound and have Class F resin impregnated insulation (VPI
system). All armature connections or coil extensions are made via a shaft mounted connection ring
assembly. These connections are securely supported by the potted connection ring assembly and
steel retaining ring. The rotor has a 3 phase delta winding with a high frequency output (60 Hz at
3600 RPM). This is in conjunction with the ceiling voltage capability, which provides the high speed of
response and consequently less voltage disturbance with load changes.
A full wave, 3 phase bridge diode assembly (see Figure 2) is used to rectify the exciter armature
output. Series diodes in each leg, each sized to allow full generator output, are mounted on a wheel
located adjacent to the exciter armature winding. Diodes are of the highest quality and are conserva-
tively rated. The diode failure mode is shorted. When a diodes fails shorted, the second diode in the
leg provides the required rectification with full exciter capability. The diodes are mounted in a spring
loaded clamp assembly and loaded in a radial direction so that the centrifugal forces aid in providing
the proper clamping force at operating speed.
Direct current for the exciter field is supplied by the voltage regulator. Alternating current is produced
by the exciter armature and is rectified by the diode assembly. The output of the diode assembly is
fed directly to the main generator field through internal lead bars in the generator shaft.
The exciter is self ventilated by a radial fan. Air is drawn in through the top of the exciter and passes
over the armature winding, the field winding, the diodes, and exhausts through the discharge duct.
A field ground detector is mounted on the exciter rotor and stator and its operation is described in
a separate instruction.
6
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
7
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
SECTION 2
2.1.2 If the exciter is to be placed in storage, repackage and crate the exciter. Recommended proce-
dures for storage are contained in paragraph 2.2.3.
2.2.2 Unpack the exciter with care to avoid damage to the unit. Move the exciter to the mounting
location by attaching an overhead hoist to the lifting eyes installed in the exciter frame.
2.2.3 If the exciter is not installed on the generator as soon as received, it should be stored in a
clean, dry area, not subject to sudden temperature or humidity changes. If possible, storage should
be in an ambient temperature of approximately normal room, temperature. Units which cannot be
stored in a temperature and humidity controlled area and which are to be in storage for a period of
longer than six months should be prepared for storage as follows:
b. Vacuum seal the unit in a covering of plastic or other material designed for that purpose.
c. Adequately tag the exciter to ensure that preservative greases and desiccant bags are
removed prior to start up.
8
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
2.3 LIFTING
LIFTING EYES
For center of gravity for Rotor and Stator See 102-90716-00 in the drawing sec-
tion at the back of this manual.
WARNING
WHEN LIFTING THIS UNIT, DO NOT PULL AT AN ANGLE ON LIFTING EYES. THE LIFTING EYES
ARE FOR THE UNIT ONLY AND NOT FOR THE COMPLETE SET. FAILURE TO OBSERVE THESE
PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN BODILY INJURY.
9
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
10
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
2.4 ALIGNMENT, INSPECTION AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Prior to installation, heat the exciter rotor assembly at 200o F for four hours.
To mount the exciter rotor, refer to Figure 5 and perform the following steps.
1. Check exciter and shaft lengths to ensure that when the exciter is seated against the shaft
inboard stop shoulder, the outboard end of the exciter and the shaft will be flush within +/-.010 inches.
2. Apply a thin coat of lubricant at two fit areas indicated on Figure 5 (if specified on assembly
drawings). Install Key. Then slide the exciter over the shaft and engage with key.
3. Using jacking plate, push on the exciter while checking the clearance between exciter and
shoulder.
4. Remove jacking plate and check that exciter is flush (see step 1).
5. Bolt electrical connections to diode wheel and lead bars. Check to see that insulators are in
place. Spray with air drying insulating varnish (if specified on assembly drawings).
8. To remove rotor, remove end cap and electrical connection leads then remove exciter using a
jacking plate, M24-3.0 grade 8 studs and nuts, and spacer tube (see Figure 4).
2. Check alignment.
7. Mount covers.
8. Connect field leads and ground detection system. Refer to the Ground Detection System
manual.
11
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
THREADED JACKING
STUDS (8)
JACKING PLATE
FIT AREA
12
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
SECTION 3
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Adequate diode wheel cleaning requires solvent use. Provide adequate ventilation and respiratory
protection and avoid contact with skin or eyes. Use extreme caution with petroleum solvents, as their
flames are highly flammable.
For best results, apply solvents under pressure using an aspirator or similar device with a clean, dry
compressed air supply. Less efficient, but acceptable means of applying solvent include self con-
tained (garden type) sprayers, vacuum cleaner with spray attachment, portable sprayers and so forth.
Initial cleaning should be done with a slow drying solvent having good oil and dirt cutting properties.
This should wash out most of the dirt, oil and soot. Use “Stoddard” solvent, mineral spirits or alcohol.
This should be followed by a quick drying solvent, which finish cleans and leaves the wheel dry.
3. Inspect after the generator experiences an unusual operation condition such as:
13
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
3.3 REPLACEMENT OF DIODES
Before replacing any diode, review the assembly and parts break down shown in drawing 040-
70003-62 in the drawing appendix at the end of this manual. The following text refers to the item
numbers found on this drawing.
Note: Strict adherence to the procedure is required for proper rectifier performance and life.
Needed or Recommended Tools for replacement (see above drawing):
TOOL # DESCRIPTION
1 Wrench, Kato Part # 172-20566-08
2 Wood or Fiber Wedge, about 25 MM Wide x 200 MM Long x 20 MM High
3 10 x 3.81 x 152 MM Long Steel Bar
4 Nylon Tie Wraps - 305 MM long
5 Silicon Oil, Kato Part # 991-03742-01
1. To gain access to the rectifier assembly: remove ground detector receiver and cover, exciter
end cover, fan, fan housing and fan baffle. Torque fan mounting bolt to 32 ft-lbs or 43 n-m when re-
assembling.
2. It is advisable to tie the inner heat sink assembly to the clamping bar prior to removal to
contain the washers and pins from falling to the bottom of the exciter during removal and re-assembly.
Use a 9/16” socket to remove the diode clamping bolt, (item #12). Carefully lift the radial inner heat
sink and clamping bar assembly away from the outer heat sink until the diode can be pulled off. It is
easier to remove and reassemble the diode assemblies if they are at the top or bottom. However, if
the diodes are on the sides, take care that the diodes do not fall out of the slot.
3. Clean the diode heat sink surface thoroughly.
4. Inner heat sink assembly with the bolt insulator, (item #13) can be removed after removing
inboard heat sink, (item #5). To re-assemble insert the inner heat sink assembly with bolt insulator,
(item #13) into the slot. Insert inboard heat sink, (item #5) and align with dc bus, (item #4) by placing
two temporary steel bars, (tool #3) in key slots in the heat sinks.
5. Insert the spherical washer (item #15), clamping bolt, (item #12), and o-ring, (item #14).
6. Important Step. When assembling diodes, assure/confirm proper polarity. Coat the new
diode or diodes with silicone oil. Carefully lift the inner heat sink and clamping plate assembly away
from the outer heat sink until the diode can be inserted. Carefully align the pins in the heat sinks
with the hole in the diodes or the protrusion on the diodes with the hole in the heat sinks. As an aid
in handling the inner heat sink assembly and clamping plate, the heat sinks and clamping plate can
be held in position with tie wraps or rubber bands. These must be later cut and removed after the
clamping bolt has secured the assembly.
7. Use Kato wrench, (tool #1) and wood or fiber wedge, (tool #2) to temporarily secure the inner
heat sink assembly in the slot. Push the wedge in by hand space between tool #1 and the diode
wheel hub.
8. Important Step. Torque the clamping bolt 30 ft-lbs or 41 n-m and then release and re-tighten
to 5 ft-lbs or 7 n-m. Match mark the bolt head and diode wheel rim with a fine felt tip pen. Tighten the
bolt exactly 1 full turn. This will give the diodes the required clamping force.
9. Re-assemble exciter rotor and stator components.
14
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
3.4 INSULATION RESISTANCE
Periodic measurement of the insulation resistance may prevent a serious problem caused by a
double ground. 500 volt insulation resistance readings of the combined exciter rotor, diode wheel, and
generator field may be made.
It is difficult to set a minimum value of insulation resistance. This depends upon such things as age,
temperature, humidity, and operating conditions. In general, the exciter by itself should be over 50
megohms while the combined exciter rotor, diode wheel, and generator field should be over 10 meg-
ohms. The exciter stator should be over 50 megohms.
A low resistance reading can be caused by dirt, moisture, or insulation damage (usually at some
terminal). Cleaning and drying is recommended. If reading does not improve, separate exciter rotor
winding and generator field winding to locate the problem.
.
3.6 RECOMMENDED TOOLS & EQUIPMENT
Test Equipment
Ammeter Clamp-on, 0 to 500 amp range for measuring of electrical current.
Multi-meter Digital, for measuring voltage, current and resistance.
Thermometer For measuring Temperature in Celsius
Megger To measure insulation resistance.
Resistive Bridge To measure resistance of windings.
Special Tools
Standard Tools
15
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
Materials
16
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
SECTION 4
TROUBLE SHOOTING
If trouble occurs, thoroughly examine the main generator and controls and contact the nearest GE
Service Office for assistance.
4. Open Diodes
The exciter field ammeter, digital voltmeter, and megger are the most useful items for locating prob-
lems in the excitation system. Refer to the generator data to determine expected normal no load and
full load excitation field current values.
Tests to check the diode can be done by breaking one of the connections to the generator field.
The diodes can then be checked in groups by connection between the inner heat sinks and any “u”
shaped connector and between the inner sinks and the dc bus rings.
The precise evaluation of a rectifier requires laboratory equipment which is seldom available for field
testing. For service use, however, a reliable test can be made requiring minimal equipment (500 Vdc
electronic megger Biddle 1500 Vdc or similar. and digital voltmeter (DVM) with a diode check, Fluke
8060 meters work well). With exciter at room temperature, connect the DVM on diode check scale
between the ac connector and each inner heat sink (both meter polarities), be sure to remove lacquer
at connection point. The reading should be .3 to .5 Vdc in the forward direction and open reverse
biased. Repeat with the DVM between the inner heat sink and DC bus rings.
Repeat the test using a 500 Vdc megger instead of the DVM. In this case the readings are usually in
the megohm range reverse biased and shorted when forward biased. Check the insulation resistance
to ground per paragraph 3.4
17
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
4.4 ARMATURE TEST
An open or shorted rotor may be detected by measuring the phase-to-phase resistance at the rotor
terminals. Each phase should be within plus or minus 5 %. The resistances are extremely low, less
than .005 ohms, thus a bridge type instrument suitable for these low resistances should be used.
Check also the insulation resistance of the windings to the core, see paragraph 3.4.
18
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
19
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
20
352-56001-06
FEB. 2003
21